HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 2007-R0319 - Contract-Denton Renfroe Inc.-Little League Baseball Field-07/26/07 - 07/26/2007Resolution No. 2007-RO319
July 26, 2007
Item No. 5.25
RESOLUTION
IBE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock is hereby authorized and directed to
execute a Public Works Contract and any associated documents with Denton-Renfroe,
Inc., of Lubbock, Texas, for the first phase, four-plex Little League Baseball Field per
RFP 07-725-13M, which Public Works Contract and any associated documents are
attached hereto as Exhibit A and made a part hereof for all intents and purposes.
Passed by the City Council this 26th day of July , 2007.
DAVID A. MILLER, MAYOR
ATTEST:
Rebecca Garza, City Secretary
APPROVED AS TO CON ENT:
Scott Snider
Assistant City Manager/Community Services
APPROVED AS Tq FORM:
& �andiver,, Attorney of Counsel
DDres Denton-RenfroPWeon07Res
.hIly 18, 2007
No Text
CITY OF LUBBOCK
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX
RFP #07-725-13M
Plans & Specifications may be obtained from
THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY
http://Pr.there2roductionco=any.com/
Phone: (806) 763-7770
"A City of Planned Progress"'
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Lubbock, Texas
CITY OF LUBBOCK
REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS
FOR
TITLE: NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX
ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS
RFP NUMBER: 07-725-BM
PROJECT NUMBER: 91207
CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTING OFFICE
City of Lubbock
PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTING OFFICE
ROOM 204, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1625 13 n' STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PH: (806)775-2163 FAX: (806)767-2275
http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us
RFP# 07-725-BM, Addendum # 1
ADDENDUM # I
RFP # 07-725-BM
Northwest Little League
Baseball Complex
DATE ISSUED: July 3, 2007
CLOSE DATE: July 10, 2007 @ 2:00 P.M. CST
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Request for
Proposals (RFP). Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the
original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Offeror's attention is directed to the attached documents provided by the Architects and
71 Engineers which address questions, concerns and issues raised at the pre -proposal meeting.
The documents are as follows: two pages provided by Chapman Harvey entitled Addendum
' One, one page from PSC entitled Addendum No. 1, and nine drawings.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed
to:
Bruce MacNair, Public Works Contracting Officer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock,
Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to (806)767-2275 or Email to bmacnair@mylubbock.us.
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
a" W"ZR*
Bruce MacNair
Public Works Contracting Officer
It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the offeror's
7 responsibility_to advise the City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Officer if any language, requirements, etc.,
or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source.
e a Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Interim Public Works Contracting
Officer no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid close date. A review of such notifications will be made.
RFP# 07-725-BM-Adl
July 2, 2007
Northwest Little League
New Baseball Complex
CHA Project #0526-11
COL RFP #07-725-BM
Proposal Opening: July 10, 2007
2:00 pm
Bid Documents dated: May 14, 2007
Addendum One
Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc.
t
ChapmanHarvny
ARCHITECTS, INC.
1. Specification 02905 — 3.1 (A) change to February 1, 2008.
3.1 (B) change to March 1, 2008.
2. Sheet C1, bleachers — bleachers shown are described in specification Section 13125.
Bleachers are 9 feet by 38 feet and have five seats.
Ball fields #3 and #4 are to be proposed as alternates.
3. Sheet C2, detail 7 — backstop posts are not to be welded assemblies.
4. Sheet C5 — Contractor shall note the neighboring Westerner Baseball Field to the east of the NWLL proposed
complex. Access to the NWLL site is not through the Lubbock ISD property. Access shall
only be from the north via the established City of Lubbock streets.
5. Sheet CI I — detail C2: west loading zone is to be a 9'-0" wide van accessible zone.
detail A2: bottom of van accessible sign is to be 80" above finished grade.
6. Sheet S2, detail 2 — omit one TS 8x3x1 /4 cross brace at coiling overhead door.
7. Sheet S3, Plan — increase distance between concession wall and transformer pad to 8'-0".
8. Sheet S4, detail 5 — raise pavilion roof to 115'-0" above finish floor.
9. Sheet S4, note 14 — use 16 gauge edge frame.
Add to note: Cover with pre -finished metal matching the roof panels.
10. Sheet Al, Plan — coordinate the coiling overhead door with wall panel installation, allow for removable wall
panels to provide future access to door components.
Note 9; coiling overhead doors to have electric operators.
11. Sheet A4, Plan —a) increase distance between concession wall and transformer to 8'-0".
b) increase dimension for exhaust hood to 9'-6", reduce adjacent Storage dimension to
4'-4", use 6" CMU between the hood and Storage.
c) revise Note 24 to read: Coordinate location of grease trap and air vents so trap and vents
are placed under the concrete walk and the air vents are extended to within the
Mechanical room and then extended vertically through the roof.
12. Sheet A5, Signs — toilet room signs are to be cast metal anchored to smooth face CMU.
Sign text to match that shown on the drawing, size to match CMU.
13. Sheet A6, RCP — provide space for exhaust hood that is 111 "Lx54"+12"(air intake)Wx24"H.
Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc.
1. See attached PSC-Landscape addendum one text pages and drawings.
Text page —Addendum No. 1, dated 7-1-07
Drawings — Sheets L1.1, L1.2, L1.3, L1.4, L3.1, L3.2, and L4.1, dated 7-2-07
2. See attached PSC-Civil addendum one drawings.
Drawings — Sheets C9, dated 7-2-07 and C6, dated 7-2-07.
Celebrating 17 years of service.
NWLL Baseball Complex
Addendum One, page 2 of 2
I. CHANGES TO CONSTRUCTION PLANS:
A. Sheet C9 of the Civil Plans (See attached Exhibit 1)
a. Grease Interceptor: Add 1,000 gallon grease interceptor as shown in revision cloud,
b. General Notes: Add notes as shown circled in revision cloud on the Exhibit.
B. Add the attached sheet C9.1 "Parking Lot Plan" to the Civil Plans
a. Parking Lot: Additional 15,000 (+/-) square feet of asphalt parking.
II. CHANGES TO THE SPECIFICATIONS:
A. Section 02300 "EXCAVATION, SUBGRADE PREPARATION, GRADING, EMBANKMENT,
AND TOPSOILING".
I. Add the following:
1.1 GENERAL
D. Borrow material shall have a plasticity index of 15 or less and a liquid limit of
35 or less to be acceptable.
III. ATTENTION:
Contractor shall give special attention to Section 2.3 "Accessories" of Specification 02317 "EXCAVATION
AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES" Regarding the placement of "Warning Tape". The placement of warning tape
for all utilities as specified will be strictly enforced.
BSA Consulting Engineers, PLLC
On the Drawings, Sheet Ml:
1. Add to Note 7; provide and extend air vents to within the Mechanical room, anchor vents to unistrut frame
anchored to wall, extend pipe to above roof.
On the Drawings Sheet ES1:
1. Change the Drawing Scale from 1" = 30'-0" to 1" = 50'-0".
On the Drawings Sheet El:
1. Relocate the hood control panel from the face of the hood to the adjacent wall. Mount on a 4" square box
at 48" a.f.f.
On the Drawings Sheet E4:
1. Change the press box panelboards (131, B2, B3, B4) to load centers. The maximum height of the
loadcenters shall not exceed 24".
2. On the "Lighting Fixture Schedule": Delete the Type'Y pole mounted fixture from the schedule.
On the Drawings Sheet E5:
1. Delete the "Parking/Flood Lighting Control One -Line". Clarification: There is no parking lot lighting on this
project. Musco Lighting will provide all the branch circuits and controls for the Type 'P' flood lighting
mounted on the sports lighting poles.
2. On the "480V Electrical Riser Diagram": Change note 7 to read: "All Contactors and Controls shall be
provided and installed by Musco Lighting".
3. Delete the "Conduit Burial Detail". Per the request of the City of Lubbock, all underground electrical
conduits shall have a minimum cover of 42".
End of Addendum One
a�
Celebrating 17 years of service.
ADDENDUM NO.1
TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan Holders
PROJECT: NWLL BASEBALL COMPLEX
DATE: 07/01/07
PSC Job No:
Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Plans
and Specifications. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached to the Contract Documents, and modifies
the original Bidding Documents dated 5/14/07 as noted below:
This Addendum consists of 1 page(s), plus 7 drawings.
1. Omit zones 49 and 51 from the original plans as shown on L4. All heads will be shown on zones
3 and 5 are to be included in base bid as shown on the attached drawing L1.1.
2. Omit zones 21 and 22 from the original plans shown on LL All heads will be shown on zones 25
and 26 are to be included in base bid as shown on the attached drawing L1.4.
3. Omit zones 38 and 39 from the original plans as shown on L4. All heads will be shown on zones
36 and 37 are to be included in alternate bid 1 as shown on the attached drawing L3.1.
4. Other clouded pipe sizes represent a change in pipe size from original drawings or a clarification
of pipe sizes. Refer to attached sheets L 1.1, L1.4, and L3.1
5. On sheet L4 of the original drawings there is a zone of I 20's with no valve shown. This are
should be connected to zone valve 27 and should be included only in alternate 2 and only if
alternate 2 is taken without alternate 1. Refer to attached sheet L4.1
6. The 4" main line shown on the plans is to be a looped main line and the entire loop is to be
included with the base bid.
7. Zone 10, Zone 15, and Zone 28 should be upsized from a 2" valve to a 3" valve. Refer to
attached sheets L1.2, L1.3, and L3.2.
END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers • Architects • Planners f
900 S. Lincoln St., Amarillo, Texas 79101 L
Phone (806) 376-8600 Fax (806) 376-8700
Lubbock ElPaso Midland Amarillo Odessa
Respectfully submitted,
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
By:
Receipt of this addendum shall be acknowledged by the Bidder, below and on the bid Proposal This
entire addendum, or a copy thereof, shall be attached to the bid Proposal submitted
ACKNOWLEDGED:
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers • Architects • Planners
900 S. Lincoln St., Amarillo, Texas 79101
Phone (806) 376-8600 Fax (806) 376-8700
Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo Odessa
PI
SI
Fc
C
P
IRRIGATION BASE BID UPDATES
NORTH
PROJECT NAME: .NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX SHEET: 11.1
PROJECT ADDRESS-MARSHALL AND NORTH UNNERSITY ISSUE DATE: .07-02-07
LUBBOCK. TEXAS REVISIONS .ADDENDU►1 i1
PSC PROJECT
D
:D
l
NORTH_
PROJECT NAVE: NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX SHEET: 11.2
PROJECT ADDRESS . MARSHALL AND NORTH UNIVERSITY ISSUE DATE: .07-02-07
.LUBBOCK, TEXAS REVISIONS .ADDENDUM /1
PSC PROJECT e:.
CHANGES MADE ON
THIS PAGE REFERS
TO SHEET L1
C1 I move Lor%./ V V l Lwt l I_J rcan
NORTH
PROJECT NAME: NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX SHEET: 11.3
PROJECT ADDRESS .MARSHALL AND NORTH UNIVERSITY ISSUE DATE: .07-02-07
.LUBBOCK. TEXAS REVISIONS: .ADDENDUM #1
PSC PROJECT f:.
CHANGES MAD
THIS PAGE RE
TO SHEET L1
ZONES 21 AND 2;
SHOULD BE OMITT
FROM ORIGINAL
PLANS. ALL HEA[
WILL BE SHOWN C
ZONES 25 AND 21
AND SHOULD BE
INCLUDED IN THE
BASE BID.
("14-N IRRIGATION BASE BID UPDATES �'
NORTH
PROJECT NAME: NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX SHEET: 11.4
PROJECT ADDRESS .MARSHALL AND NORTH UNIVERSITY ISSUE DATE: .07-02-07
.LUBBOCK. TEXAS REVISIONS: .ADDENDUM #1
PSC PROJECT V
ZONES 38 AND 39
SHOULD BE OMITTED
FROM ORIGINAL
PLANS. ALL HEADS
WILL BE SHOWN ON
ZONES 36 AND 37
AND SHOULD BE
INCLUDED IN THE
ALTERNATE BID 1.
IRRIGOON UPDATES - ALTERNATE- - '
CHANGES MADE ON
THIS PAGE REFERS
TO SHEET L3
PROJECT NAVE: NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX SHEET: 13.1
PROJECT ADDRESS .MARSHALL AND NORTH UNIVERSITY ISSUE DATE .07-02-07
.LUBBOCK. TEXAS REVISIONS: .ADDENDUM #1
PSC PROJECT 1:.
CHANGE TO
A 3" VALVE
K�
J
CHANGE TO
I ninr rll-7r
CHANGE TO
PIPE SIZE
BAL
Nc
(ALTERNA
CHANGES MADE ON
THIS PAGE REFERS
TO SHEET L3
IRRIGATION UPDATES ALTERNATE 1 T Q.,
1'-30'-0•
NORTH
PROJECT NAME: NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX SHEET: .1-3.2
PROJECT ADDRESS . MARSHALL AND NORTH UNIVERSITY ISSUE DATE: .07-02-07
.LUBBOCK, TEXAS REVISIONS: .ADDENDUM #1
PSC PROJECT 1:.
I •------- — =_r�1 ice_
r
I .AL
9 7
iI o pl
r
• of ` \ `� BALLFIELD I `„ d w NA
7/2/07 \ \l No.3 ,K r
CHANGES MADE ON \ `\(ALTERNATE BID #1)
THIS PAGE REFERSTO SHEET L4
UPDATES ALTERNATE 2
(�'p'�41RR�IMMN _o.
NORTH
PROJECT NAVE: NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX SHEET: 14.1
PROJECT ADDRESS .MARSHALL AND NORTH UNIVERSITY ISSUE DATE: .07-02-07
.LUBBOCK, TEXAS REVISM- ADDENDUM #1
PSC PROJECT J: .
N
g
^' N INSTALL:
N ��o SS CLEANOUT
N TALLK TOP ELEV.= 3�19.90'
SEW R E ��j FL ELEV.= 321.55'
a C NNECTI N 9 N= 734444.87
a d E = 668890.87
°
s s
4 1
d
d /
80 LF 4" PVC ° 4 ~ R-35)
d EW
($DR° 3a5) ®�.0
° d INSTALL:
d nl 1000 GALLON GREAS
a a (A 3 CEPTOR
F = SS EANO
o�
ROOM CON E SION _Ir
.61 l
— 8882.65
M -- 5 LF 2 112 '� PVC M—
1,000 GALLON GREASE
INTERCEPTOR
N
2 SEE WATER AND SEWER DETAILS ON SHEETS C12 & C13
3 ALL WATER AND SANITARY SEWER LINES SHALL BE INSTALLED
TO A POINT 5' OUTSIDE THE BUILDING. SEE PLUMBING
PLANS FOR CONTINUATION. SCALE: 1 "=40'
4 ALL WATER AND SANITARY SEWER IMPROVEMENTS SHALL : �Pj� of TF���
CONFORM TO CITY OF LUBBOCK STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR WATER AND SEWER CONSTRUCTION. �* ; *��
5 ALL WATER LINES SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM COVER ALAN L. HOLLY �
�............
OF 36„ EITHER FROM TOP OF PIPE TO THE EXIST. GROUND 94792
OR THE PROPOSED FINISHED GRADE, WHICHEVER IS GREATER
ADDITIONAL NOTES is ���_
PROJECT NAME: NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE SHEET: C9
UTILITY LAYOUT ISSUE DATE: 7-2-07
REVISIONS: ADD 1.000 GREASE PSC PROJECT #: 2750-06
INTERCEPTOR AND ADDITIONAL
NOTES EXHIBIT 1
.• y - � � •. _ � ' _'rare_ � ,.. — -
.. � ,�-_ _ems, `\ � - ' /• ��'°" —�t.y, --- �—��'-___. \� _, °��
,
r 1A *w
• "he
t1NiiR.r�GINR
FJ.ST
BALLFIELD
No. i
JBASE BID)
•,- _.� .� a
.�.,_,�,_p.. � --.-ti
i
p
6La. 1SX(i)
BALLFIELD
No. Z
BID)
A.1T as �
--6• fWYMO m4T [OQ6 GY[IO.
� lWf rl �Wl�), tL4 61mD Gtd
..,— 6IVSSO sa[ art Q uemr MT. +w owJ
C AOCMCr �4+L a9n we)
--- - ---_-
LEGEND (_
A— 0824.06
—3215— vaaasm cams pa. 0526
- raarosm 7.w[ gan.a ,..,s.,
Gac.osm vnr cwa
P
nw mt
C 1Wa3�
o° wru a s N
TOG a GRw �•...... ,
;i wor O1
iW MM SOE—
Al c�a Ca
ETE V40 GUTTER T1PICsLL ASPHALT SECTION (MEW T"a W
PARKING LOT PLAN A ""------'=U4
City of Lubbock
PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTING OFFICE
Roam 204, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1625 13 m STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PH:(806)775-2163 FAX:(806)775-2164
http://purcha sing.ci.lubbock.tx.tis
RFP# 07-725-BM, Addendum # 2
ADDENDUM # 2
RFP # 07-725-BM
Northwest Little League
Baseball Complex
DATE ISSUED: July 5, 2007
CLOSE DATE: July 10, 2007 @ 2:00 P.M. CST
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Request for
Proposals (RFP). Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the
original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Offeror's attention is directed to the REVISED Proposal Submittal Form, attached. The
REVISED Proposal Submittal Form must be submitted for consideration.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed
to:
Bruce MacNair, Public Works Contracting Officer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock,
Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to (806)775-2164 or Email to bmacnaire.mylubbock.us
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
a" aw*%&
Bruce MacNair
Public Works Contracting Officer
It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the offeror's
responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Officer if any language, requirements, etc.,
or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source.
Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Interim Public Works Contracting
Officer no later than five (5) business days prior to the proposal due date. A review of such notifications will be
made.
RFP9 07-725-BM-Ad2
City of Lubbock
PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTING OFFICE
Room 204, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1625 1 3 m STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PH:(806)775-2163 FAX:(806)775-2164
littp://ptirchasing.ei.Itibbock.tx.us
RFP# 07-725-13M, Addendum # 3
ADDENDUM #3
RFP # 07-725-BM
Northwest Little League
Baseball Complex
DATE ISSUED: July 6, 2007
CLOSE DATE: July 10, 2007 @ 2:00 P.M. CST
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Request for
Proposals (RFP). Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the
original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. In ADDITIVE OPTION TWO, on the Proposal Submittal Form published with Addendum
#2, CHANGE Field #3 to read Field #4.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed
to:
Bruce MacNair, Public Works Contracting Officer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock,
Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to (806)775-2164 or Email to bmacnair@mylubbock.us
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
a" MAO
Bruce MacNair
Public Works Contracting Officer
It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the offeror's
responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Officer if any language, requirements, etc.,
or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source.
Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Interim Public Works Contracting
Officer no later than five (5) business days prior to the proposal due date. A review of such notifications will be
made.
RFP# 07-725-BM-Ad3
City of Lubbock
PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTING OFFICE
Room 204, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1625 13TH STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PH: (806)775-2163 FAX: (806)775-2164
http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us
RFP# 07-725-BM, Addendum # 4
ADDEND UM # 4
RFP # 07-725-BM
Northwest Little League
Baseball Complex
DATE ISSUED: July 10, 2007
CLOSE DATE: July 12, 2007 @ 2:00 P.M. CST
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Request for
Proposals (RFP). Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the
original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Proposal due date and time are CHANGED from July 10, 2007 @ 2:00 PM to July 12, 2007
@ 2:00 P.M.
2. The Public Works Contracting Office has moved to Room 204 of the Municipal Building at
1625 1 P Street, Lubbock, Texas 79401.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed
to:
Bruce MacNair, Public Works Contracting Officer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock,
Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to (806)775-2164 or Email to bmacnair@mylubbock.LIS
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
A" MOM&
Bruce MacNair
Public Works Contracting Officer
It is the intent and purpose of the Cityof Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the offeror's
responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Officer if any language, requirements, etc.,
or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source.
Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Interim Public Works Contracting
Officer no later than five (5) business days prior to the proposal due date. A review of such notifications will be
made.
RFP# 07-725-BM-Ad4
INDEX
1. NOTICE TO OFFERORS
2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS
3. TEXAS LOCAL GOVERNMENT CODE § 271.116
4. PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL - PROPOSAL FOR UNIT PRICE CONTRACTS
4.1 Contractor Checklist
4.2 Proposal Submittal Form
4.3 City of Lubbock Insurance Requirement Affidavit
4.4 Safety Record Questionnaire
4.5 Suspension and Debarment Certification
4.6 City of Lubbock Statement of Qualifications
5. PAYMENT BOND
6. PERFORMANCE BOND
7. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
8. CONTRACT
9. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
10. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
11. SPECIFICATIONS
NOTICE TO OFFERORS
NOTICE TO OFFERORS
RFP #07-725-BM
Sealed proposals addressed to Bruce MacNair, Public Works Contracting Officer, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be
received in the office of the Public Works Contracting Officer, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Suite 102, Lubbock,
Texas, 79401, until 2:00 P.M. on July 10, 2007, or as.changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to
furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project:
"NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX"
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened in the office of
the Public Works Contracting Officer and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the proposer to ensure that
his proposal is actually in the office of the Public Works Contracting Officer for the City of Lubbock, before the
expiration of the date above first written.
Proposals are due at 2:00 P.M. on July 10, 2007, and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the
proposals on July 26, 2007 at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be
reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all proposals and waive any formalities. The successful
proposer will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the
amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful
proposer will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount
of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be
issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior.
Offerors are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified
check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable
without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the proposal
submitted as a guarantee that proposer will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten
(10) business days after notice of award of the contract to him. FAILURE OF THE PROPOSER TO INCLUDE
PROPOSAL SECURITY WITH THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL SHALL CONSTITUTE A NONRESPONSIVE
PROPOSAL AND RESULT IN DISQUALIFICATION OF THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL.
It shall be each proposer's sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all
local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been
thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the proposal submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre -
proposal conference on June 28, 2007 at 9:00 A.M., in the Parks and Recreation Conference Room, 1010 9`h Street,
Lubbock, Texas.
Offerors may view the plans and specifications without charge at The Reproduction Company, 2102 Avenue Q,
Lubbock, Texas 79405 or at http:Hpr.thereproductioncompany.conV . ONE SET OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MAY BE OBTAINED, AT THE CITY'S EXPENSE, FROM THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY WITH A $100
REFUNDABLE DEPOSIT, Phone: (806) 763-7770. Deposit Checks shall be made payable to The City of Lubbock, and
will be refunded if documents are returned in good condition within Sixty (60) days of the opening of Proposals.
Additional sets of plans and specifications may be obtained at the proposer's expense.
Attention of each proposer is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages
included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Public Works Contracting Officer of the City of Lubbock,
which document is specifically referred to in this notice to offerors. Each offerors attention is further directed to provision
of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and
payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale.
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all offerors that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this
advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit proposals in
response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national
origin in consideration for an award.
The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -proposal
meetings and proposal openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you require special assistance,
please contact the Public Works Contracting Office at (806) 775-2163 or write to Post Office Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas
79457 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting.
CITY OF LUBBOCK
��
BRUCE MACNAIR,
PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTING OFFICER
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS
PROPOSAL DELIVERY TIME & DATE
The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive proposals to furnish NORTHWEST
LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX per the attached specifications and contract documents.
Sealed proposals will be received no later than 2:00 P.M. CST, July 10, 2007 at the office listed below.
Any proposal received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the
proposer. Each proposal and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container
plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner: "RFP # 07-725-BM, NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE
BASEBALL COMPLEX" and the proposal opening date and time. Offerors must also include their
company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Proposals must be addressed to:
Bruce MacNair, Public Works Contracting Officer
City of Lubbock
1625 13th Street, Room 204
Lubbock, Texas 79401
1.1 Offerors are responsible for making certain proposals are delivered to the Public Works
Contracting Office. Mailing of a proposal does not ensure that it will be delivered on time or
delivered at all. If proposer does not hand deliver proposal, we suggest that he/she use some sort
of delivery service that provides a receipt.
1.2 Proposals will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by
private courier service. No proposals will be accepted by oral communication, telephone,
electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT
ACCEPT FAX PROPOSALS.
1.3 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening proposals
through an addendum.
2 PRE -PROPOSAL MEETING
2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing offerors with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing
addenda as needed for the clarification of the Request for Proposals (RFP) documents, a non -
Recreation Conference Room, 1010 9" Street, Lubbock, Texas. All persons attending the
meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective proposer they represent.
2.2 It is the proposer's responsibility to attend the pre -proposal meeting though the meeting is not
mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre -
proposal meeting to offerors who do not attend the pre -proposal meeting.
ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS
3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the RFP are made by ADDENDA information
available over the Internet at http://www.RFPdgpot.com. We strongly suggest that you check
for any addenda a minimum of forty-eight hours in advance of the response deadline.
BUSINESSES WITHOUT INTERNET ACCESS may use computers available at most up blic
libraries.
3.2 Any proposer in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents
may request an interpretation thereof from the Public Works Contracting Office. At the request
of the proposer, or in the event the Public Works Contracting Office deems the interpretation to
be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Public Works
- Contracting Office. Such addenda issued by the Public Works Contracting Office will be
available over the Internet at http://www.RFPdepot.com and will become part of the proposal
package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original RFP. NO VERBAL
EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request
for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by
the City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Office no later than five (5) days before the
proposal closing date.
3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of
Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing.
Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Office in writing or
in this RFP should be used in preparing proposal responses. All contacts that a proposer may
have had before or after receipt of this RFP with any individuals, employees, or representatives
of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in
any communication facility regarding this proposal should be disregarded in preparing responses.
3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to offerors.
4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS
4.1 Each proposer shall carefully examine all RFP documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with
all requirements before submitting a proposal to ensure that their proposal meets the intent of
these specifications.
4.2 Before submitting a proposal, each proposer shall be responsible for making all investigations
and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the
requirements of this Request for Proposals. Failure to make such investigations and
examinations shall not relieve the proposer from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all
provisions and requirements of the Request for Proposals.
4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract
documents, shall be given to the Public Works Contracting Officer and a clarification
obtained before the proposals are received, and if no such notice is received by the Public
Works Contracting Officer prior to the opening of proposals, then it shall be deemed that
the proposer fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in
its proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If
proposer does not notify the Public Works Contracting Officer before offering of any
discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and
specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed
that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days
prior to the opening of proposals.
5 PROPOSAL PREPARATION COSTS
5.1 Issuance of this RFP does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred {
in the preparation and submission of a proposal.
5.2 The issuance of this RFP does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any
services or equipment.
5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a proposal shall be paid by the proposer.
6 TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC
INFORMATION ACT
6.1 If you consider any portion of your proposal to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial
decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those
portions.
6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and
decline to release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of
whether a particular portion of your proposal is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial
information that may be withheld from public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney
General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the event a public information request is
received for a portion of your proposal that you have marked as being confidential information,
you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal position in
writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In
the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of
competent jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under
Section 552.110 of the Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code,
then such information will be made available to the requester.
6.3 Marking your entire proposal CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the
Texas Open Records Act.
7 LICENSES PERMITS TAXES
The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the
proposer is or may be required to pay. .
8 UTILIZATION OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES
Prospective offerors are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of
local resources, and to outline in their proposal submittal how they would utilize local resources.
9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST
9.1 The proposer shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business
arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock.
9.2 By signing and executing this proposal, the proposer certifies and represents to the City the offeror
has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the
receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation,
vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this proposal.
10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
10.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described
in the General Conditions.
10.2 All offerors shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract
documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory
completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents.
11 PLANS FOR USE BY OFFERORS
4 It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a proposal on the
project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents
and prepare a proposal without charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents may be
-` examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Offerors.
12 PROPOSER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS
12.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive
proposals. It shall be the offerors responsibility to advise the Public Works Contracting Officer
if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits
the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in
writing and must be received by the City of Public Works Contracting Office no later than five
(5) calendar days before the proposal closing date. A review of such notifications will be made.
12.2 NO PROPOSER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL
REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION
CONCERNING THIS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN
WRITING NO LATER THAN FIVE (5) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE
PROPOSAL CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO
BRUCE MACNAIR, PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTING OFFICER
City of Lubbock
Public Works Contracting Office
1625 131h Street, Room 204
Lubbock, Texas 79401
Fax: 806-775-2164 or 806-767-2275
Email: bmacnair(a)mylubbock.us
RFPDepot: http:///www.RFPdenot.com
13 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION
13.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be substantially completed within
TWO HUNDRED SEVENTY ( 270 ) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date
specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful proposer.
13.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing,
provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress
schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a
progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work
is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor
to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the
time specified.
14 PAYMENT
All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General a .
Conditions of the contract documents.
15 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID
The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor
to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the
improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no
claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified.
16 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and
grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some
detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for
protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a
representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying
with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents
provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory
project.
17 GUARANTEES
17.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed
against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall
furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall
remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever
resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final
acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner
(City of Lubbock).
17.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor
represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and
date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all
hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract,
individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also,
the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any
way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option,
may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in
order to comply with all the obligations contained herein.
17.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its
sub -contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and
services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any
of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its
rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to
termination or default.
17.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in
this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or
_ limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its
schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference.
18 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR
The contractor will, upon written request, be furnished up to ten sets of plans and specifications and related
contract documents for use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will
only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and
specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work
contemplated by the Contractor.
19 PROTECTION OF THE WORK
E The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all
materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of
construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or
not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City
reserves the right, after the proposals have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to
require of a proposer the following information:
(a) The experience record of the proposer showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one
covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage
completed.
(b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the proposer.
(c) Equipment schedule.
20 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX
20.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to
provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act.
20.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to
buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase.
21 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents
in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility
lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during
the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees
that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has
knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned.
All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the
work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the
City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense.
22 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES
The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger
signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the
work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to
failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion
shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's
responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to
Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project.
23 EXPLOSIVES
23.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the
Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of
explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a
direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized
to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the
Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or
corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity.
23.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor.
23.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated
by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having
structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's
intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the
companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury.
Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting
from his blasting operations.
24 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
The successful proposer shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times
while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful proposer shall be required to furnish
the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time
that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress.
25 INSURANCE
25.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance
as required in'the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized
to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be
furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided
ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on
the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at
his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter
specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance
shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas
and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the
Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of
each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be
submitted before contract execution.
25.2 PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN
THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE
CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A
PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION
IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE
ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE
CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR
PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S
RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE
INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE
FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR.
26 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS
26.1 Attention of each proposer is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per
diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this
project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem
wages as above mentioned. The proposer' attention is further directed to the requirements of
Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage
schedules above mentioned and the proposer's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the
schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not
release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction
work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays
` unless the following conditions exist:
26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the
necessary service to its citizens.
26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The
Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show
he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time.
26.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the
Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to
the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's
Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work
requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative.
26.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being
done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall
immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or
alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life.
27 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS
The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the
project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable
without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors
engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file
with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall
contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of
pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no
rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages
paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications
set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the
contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf
this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar
day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his
particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included
in these contract documents.
28 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES
Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated proposal price
due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be
rejected and returned to the proposer without being considered.
29 PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL
29.1 The proposer shall submit his proposal on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the
form shall be correctly filled in and the proposer shall state the price both in words and numerals,
for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices
shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the
price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern.
29.2 If the proposal is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly
authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and
address of each member must be given and the proposal signed by a member of the firm,
association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a company
or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the
30
31
Hl
proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or
others to sign proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the
proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink.
29.3 Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to
Offerors, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner:
28.3.1 Proposer's name
28.3.2 Proposal for (description of the project).
29.4 Proposal submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for
opening of the proposals, but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter.
29.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a competitive sealed proposal that
has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal
price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE
MADE ON THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING.
BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Proposer understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by proposer shall be bound and include
the following:
(a) Notice to Offerors.
(b) General Instructions to Offerors.
(c)
Proposer's Submittal.
(d)
Statutory Bond (if required).
(e)
Contract Agreement.
(f)
General Conditions.
(g)
Special Conditions (if any).
(h)
Specifications.
(i) Insurance Certificates for Contractor and all Sub -Contractors.
(j) All other documents made available to proposer for his inspection in accordance with the Notice
to Offerors.
If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be
considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents.
QUALIFICATIONS OF OFFERORS
The proposer may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of
the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the
service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The proposer may also be required to give a past
history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the proposer's qualifications. The
City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the
ability of the proposer to perform the work, and the proposer shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all
information for this purpose that may be requested. The proposer's proposal may be deemed not to meet
specifications or the proposal may be rejected if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the
proposer fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the proposer is properly qualified to carry out the
1
obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the proposer's
qualifications shall include but not be limited to:
(a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service
required.
(b) The ability of the proposer to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time
specified, without delay or interference.
(c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the proposer.
(d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services.
(e) The safety record of the Contractor and proposed Sub -Contractors
Before contract award, the recommended contractor for this project may be required to show that he has
experience with similar projects that require the Contractor to plan his work efforts and equipment needs
with City of Lubbock specifications in mind. Demonstration of experience shall include a complete list
of ALL similar municipal and similar non -municipal current and completed projects for the past three
(3) years for review. This list shall include the names of supervisors and type of equipment used to
perform work on these projects. In addition, the Contractor may be required to provide the name(s) of
supervisor(s) that will be used to perform work on this project in compliance with City of Lubbock
specifications herein.
32 BASIS OF PROPOSALS AND SELECTION CRITERIA
The City of Lubbock will use the Competitive Sealed Proposals procurement method as authorized by
the Texas Legislature and further defined by Texas Local Government Code Section 271.116. The
selection criteria used to evaluate each proposal will include the following: -
32.1 30% Price.
32.2 40% Contractor qualifications. Resume and references of proposed job superintendent. City shall
have an opportunity to interview the job superintendent at a time to be named after receipt of
proposals. Complete and submit the "Statement of Qualifications" with your proposal.
32.3 10% Safety Record Questionnaire.
32.4 20% Construction time.
The estimated budget for the construction phase of this project is $1,976,141
Proposals shall be made using the enclosed proposal submittal form.
33 SELECTION
33.1 Selection shall be based on the responsible offeror whose proposal is determined to be the most
advantageous to the City of Lubbock considering the relative importance of evaluation factors included in
this RFP.
33.2 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY
AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR
PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY
E
THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL.
33.3 The City shall select the offeror that offers the best value for the City based on the published selection
criteria and on its ranking evaluation. The City shall first attempt to negotiate a contract with the selected
offeror. The City and its engineer or architect may discuss with the selected offeror options for a scope or
time modification and any price change associated with the modification. If the City is unable to negotiate
a contract with the selected offeror, the City shall, formally and in writing, end negotiations with that
offeror and proceed to the next offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or
all proposals are rejected.
33.4 In determining best value for the City, the City is not restricted to considering price alone, but may
consider any other factor stated in the selection criteria.
33.5 A proposal will be subject to being considered irregular and may be rejected if it shows
omissions, alterations of form, conditional alternate proposals, additions or alternates in lieu
of the items specified, if the unitprices are obviously unbalanced (either in excess of or below
reasonably expected values), or irregularities of any kind "
TEXAS LOCAL GOVERNMENT CODE & 271.116
SELECTING CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
THROUGH COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSALS
§ 271.116.
SELECTING CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
THROUGH COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSALS.
(a) In selecting a contractor through competitive sealed proposals for construction,
rehabilitation, alteration, or repair services for a facility or for construction of a project to which
Section 252.043(d-1) applies, a governmental entity shall follow the procedures prescribed by
this section.
(b) The governmental entity shall select or designate an engineer or architect to prepare
construction documents for the project. The selected or designated engineer or architect has full
responsibility for complying with Chapter 1001 or 1051, Occupations Code, as applicable. If the
engineer or architect is not a full-time employee of the governmental entity, the governmental
entity shall select the engineer or architect on the basis of demonstrated competence and
qualifications as provided by Section 2254.004, Government Code.
(c) The governmental entity shall provide or contract for, independently of the contractor,
the inspection services, the testing of construction materials engineering, and the verification
testing services necessary for acceptance of the facility or project by the governmental entity.
The governmental entity shall select those services for which it contracts in accordance with
Section 2254.004, Government Code, and shall identify them in the request for proposals.
(d) The governmental entity shall prepare a request for competitive sealed proposals that
includes construction documents, selection criteria, estimated budget, project scope, schedule,
and other information that contractors may require to respond to the request. The governmental
entity shall state in the request for proposals the selection criteria that will be used in selecting
the successful offeror.
(e) The governmental entity shall receive, publicly open, and read aloud the names of the
offerors and, if any are required to be stated, all prices stated in each,proposal. Not later than the
45th day after the date of opening the proposals, the governmental entity shall evaluate and rank
each proposal submitted in relation to the published selection criteria.
(f) The governmental entity shall select the offeror that offers the best value for the
governmental entity based on the published selection criteria and on its ranking evaluation. The
governmental entity shall first attempt to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror. The
governmental entity and its engineer or architect may discuss with the selected offeror options
for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with the modification. If the
governmental entity is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror, the governmental
entity shall, formally and in writing, end negotiations with that offeror and proceed to the next
offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are
rejected.
(g) In determining best value for the governmental entity, the governmental entity is not
restricted to considering price alone, but may consider any other factor stated in the selection
criteria.
PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL
ALL PAGES CONTAINED WITHIN THIS SECTION
MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
DENTON - RENIFROE INC.
Genera! Contractors ■
■
July 17, 2007
Mr. Craig Wuensche
City Of Lubbock
1010 9 h Street
Lubbock, Texas 79401
RE: NW Little League Baseball Complex
RFP#07-725-BM
Mr. Wuensche, I appreciate the opportunity to meet with you to discuss the Little League
Complex project today. After reviewing the project in detail and in taking in consideration the
comments derived from the meeting, I would like to submit the following revised bid price. This
price takes into consideration the completion date revision required to allow the use of the fields
in time for the next season. Total days for construction will be reduced from 340 days to 212
days, a reduction of 128 days. This time frame will be used for the construction of the base bid
portion of the project plans and specifications.
Total Revised Bid Price $1,838,415.00
If Alt.# 1 is accepted, the price of $374,086.00 would remain the same. Contract completion time
would be extended by 45 days for finish out of Alt#1, base bid would be completed in the time
listed above.
We are looking forward to working with you on this project and will make every effort to give
you a project to be proud of next season.
l
Renfroe I
inger
4311 Ironton Ave., Lubbock, Texas 79407 (806) 281-1999 Fax: (806) 281-9993
*** REVISED *** PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL
UNIT PRICE PROPOSAL CONTRACT
DATE: 7 - 11 - 7
PROTECT NUMBER: # 07-725-BM - NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX
Proposal of 0ek%+iD -r =c- (hereinafter called Offeror)
To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Ladies and Gentlemen:
The Offeror, in compliance with your Request for Proposals for the construction of a NORTHWEST LITTLE
LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to offerors, notice
to offerors and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the
conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby
-' intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans,
w specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover
all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents.
Estimated
Item Quantity
No. & Unit Description of Item Total Amount
BASE PROPOSAL
1 LS DEMOLITION ENTIRE SITE Removal and legal disposal of existing trees, fencing,
all obstructions and miscellaneous other items, as shown on the plans or where directed
by the owner. Shall include all preparation, material, equipment, labor, tools, supervision,
incidentals and barricades.
TOTAL ITEM #1: Se.t,.+. &. -7t.�o �L,, rej $(��.Z `��!•°gLS(/7,.Z4�5�. d 0 )
(Unit Price Amou a s I be sh in both words d numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern)
,vn
1 LS EARTHWORK AND GRADING Approved earthwork and grading. Shall include all
cut and fill material, fill, preparation, material, equipment, labor, tools and supervision
and all incidentals complete in place as shown on the plans or where directed by owner.
TOTAL ITEM t%oao;-J = our 74ydfy. P/LSf 74Qy 7- � )
(Unit Price Amounts shaff be sh wn in both words and nume stal In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
3. 1 LS SITEWORK Install water line, sewer line, trenching, backfill all incidentals, complete in
place as shown on the plans and specifications, or where directed by owner. Shall include
all materials, preparation, equipment, labor, tools, supervision, incidentals, and barricades
complete in place.
TOTAL ITEM #3:-` .,y4,---CAL,r ltae. ea..d cum.. ha�.o%.� $JV 'O/LS(J,+1771- )
(Unit Price Amounts shah be shown in both words 8/id nl/�merals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern)
5�u�rNtiFy^O 'L X, �(a rS.
Offeror's Initials
Estimated
Item Quantity
No. & Unit Description of Item Total Amount
4. 1 LS BUILDINGS Concession stand, restrooms, pavilion, bleacher, shade structures and press
boxes including all work associated with electrical, mechanical, plumbing, masonry, metals,
doors, windows, wood, furnishings, equipment, finishes, preparation, equipment, labor, tools,
supervision and incidentals, complete in place as shown on the plans and specifications, or where
directed by owner.
TOTAL ITEM #4:,E0 I,+ L .�
u.n�e;rJL.-7Fu,o $8A,.Z.>tos1LS( A2, 8611. °D
(Unit Price Amounts shall bbe shown inb,pth ords and yet, . In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
e�9is-f- �+r�+dre2 -A-i'vfe.. do
1 LS CONCRETE WORK Furnish and install all concrete other than building foundations as
shown on the plans and specifications, or where directed by owner. Shall include all
preparation, materials, equipment, labor, tools, supervision and incidentals complete in place.
TOTAL ITEM #5:Di,e 'k"Ift, r'd .14 A-F f/:ousa i,al a `�c%� $/80,, 879-"/LS( /6,,9 9-79, do
(Unit Price Amounts sh l be st/,own m both words and nume s, In cif oPy, iscrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
!rAzle-d Swooft-�Y-- A.1',2hT' 00J[sv-i.
1 LS FENCING Furnish and install all chain link fencing backstops, and dugouts as shown on
the plans and specifications, or where directed by owner. Shall include all preparation,
material, equipment, labor, tools, supervision, and incidentals.
TOTAL ITEM #6:0na $/010'"?*1.4bLS( /0�, 761. °D }
(Unit Price Amounts shall be shywn in th words and numc:M . in case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
�iw n d reA 5i Ki - G S Qx0 //A.r6.
1 LS PARKING LOT Approved sub grade preparation, asphalt, sidewalk, striping, signage,
curb stops, curb and gutter. Shall include all cut and fill material,'frll, preparation, material,
equipment, labor, tools and supervision and all incidentals, complete in place as shown on the
plans or where directed by owner.
TOTAL ITEM #7:Tw,.,mA,— -uie ly ,sl2q, Pit 7LS( „z e%
(Unit Price Amounts shall K shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
1 LS IRRIGATION Furnish and install all irrigation conduits, heads, controllers, valves, wiring,
trenching, backfill, incidentals, and all associated work as shown on the plans and specifications,
or where directed by owner. Shall include all preparation, material, equipment, labor, tools,
supervision, and incidentals, complete in place.
TOTAL ITEM #812u._ L .e dre 1 ,sevc n lit, $ / r7, Z 93 `fLS( /.ice.?
(Unit Price Amounts shall be shown j'n both words andx nerals. {� case of dis the amount shown in words shell govern.)
'fGve ,r " f'4 re e- c�I ,
1 LS ELECTRICAL Furnish and install all disconnects, raceways, fixtures, wiring, trenching,
backfill, incidentals, and all associated work as shown on the plans and specifications, or where
directed by owner. Shall include all preparation, material, equipment, labor, tools, supervision,
and incidentals, complete in place.
TOTAL ITEM #9: ruse s.'ie
(Unit Price Amounts shall qqee shown in both words and Lmerale In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govem.)
,Srr hun�r.� o rr — /C 4-jo. "t,
— Offeror's Initials
Estimated
Item Quantity
No. & Unit Descriotion of Item Total Amount
TOTAL PROPOSAL, ITEMS #1 - #9: Furnish and install demolition, earthwork, and grading, site work,
buildings, concrete work, fencing, turf -grass, parking lot, irrigation
and electrical (per the plans and specifications).
MATERIALS:S'sr -fl,cme- firs..&Irsal $ 1e7 �1,k OD
LABOR: 1.7a 41." rLed &�ghTir � ii'wa ,nu {t�H,i ,�a� ,-,+rt� a.o,$ 9 R,3, e7 1 9, 00
TOTAL PROPOSAL
ITEMS #1 - #9: 22n a s•..J%'Dn sir ��� „acre-.1 e� n $ `.��, y�`r °=
(Unit Prig: Amounts shall be s owrLin Wth words and nuyne�4s. In case�...Zpanq� the amount shown in Words shall govern.)
W. , tcH p r.r S.
ADDITIVE OPTION ONE: Furnish and install demolition, earthwork, and grading, site work, buildings,
concrete work, fencing, turf -grass, irrigation and electrical associated with one
two hundred foot (200-foot) Field #3 (per the plans and specifications).
MATERIALS: %iu�c�rae� �e,��,.—y.;�eiak.�...,� ���c �u��N�.� $ /AI9�
c/o 1 a-, -r . Q¢
LABOR:�tf%
TOTALoh�
_
OPTION ONE:'?7,.� ee ��� �,.� d rey�,�7`- ivu ✓ e t�sa ti•al eoi�r, fu $ 37i O e`, '� b
(Unit Price am�ounts ph ti be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
Slfs do/%r-s
ADDITIVE OPTION TWO: Furnish and install demolition, earthwork, and grading, site work, buildings,
concrete work, fencing, turf -grass, irrigation and electrical associated with one
three'hundred foot (300-foot) Field #*(per the plans and specifications).
MATERIALS: a.r 4,�,, Jecalsi , 4, — w:,tr h4a s^".l 41y .A A.L a dLe.a $
Se G►w Er ��� ei do 1 Or-0 r, .
LABOR:-7:5'p AW-dg-9PJ-r,-A--4iAk4
TOTAL ADDIT E
OPTION TWO:c4:u:v 4, �y..a) " >yiYP! f hsusa.. _t,X $ 'y73,, 6 Sir• 00
(Unit Price Amounts shall be shown in both wordsurn s. pjxwe of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
%/trrr�v�ei e/s4�y- 4r o/avt,
Offeror hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on a date to be specified, in a written "Notice to
Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the project within ( 3 YZ7 ) # Days Completed by Contractor
4rtir✓ tor?'`v ) Written Days Completed by Contractor CONSECUTIVE
CALENDAR DAYS thereafter as/stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Offeror hereby further
agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $500 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive
calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the
general conditions of the contract documents.
_ Offeror understands and agrees that this proposal submittal shall be completed and submitted in
accordance with instruction number 29 of the General Instructions to Offerors.
Offeror understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and to waive any formality in
_. the proposing.
Offeror's Initials
The Offeror agrees that this proposal shall be good for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the scheduled
closing time for receiving proposals.
The undersigned Offeror hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the
plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this proposal, and he further agrees to
commence work on the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he
has proposed; as provided in the contract documents.
Offerors are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or
certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company,
payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total
amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that offeror will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance
policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) days after notice of award of the contract to him.
Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for
Dollars ($) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of
�' 4 Dollars ($ .5 p7o 1, which it is agreed shall be collected and retained
by the Owner a liquidated d ' �iM tKee event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails
to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner
within ten (10) business days after .the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal;
otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand.
Offeror understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Offeror shall be bound and include all contract
documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors.
Pursunut to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a
competitive sealed proposal that has been opened may not be
changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal
prica. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE
PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE PROPOSAL
SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING.
(Seal if Offeror is a Corporation)
ATTE :
Secretary
Offeror acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
Addenda No. Date 7 --7-7
Addenda No. -7- Date 7 -S-y 7
Addenda No. �_ Date 7- 5 - 0 7
Addenda No. Date 7-iI - c,7
Date:
Authorized Signature
(Printed or Typed Name)
_ , &W - )6P11 file ,
CompanyIV5// ✓e -
Addresszah&-e4 /&h/„
CityCounty
19
, `%
State �iZip Code
Telephone: �� - 04 o LL�� 9g
�i Fax: __ - �,? /- .J
FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No.
IT-,2 7a
M/WBE Finn: I I Woman I I Black American I Native American
Hispanic American Asian Pacific American Other S eci
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT
To Be Completed by Offeror and Agent
And Attached to Proposal Submittal
I, the undersigned Offeror, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this proposal document have been
reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock,
I will be able to, within (10) business days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, furnish a
valid insuppce certif to J6 the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this proposal.
-Y DENNIS ROCHA
(Signature) Contractor (Print)
CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: DENTON—RENFROE, INC.
(Print or Type)
CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS:4 311 I RONTON AVE.
LUBBOCK; TEXAS 79407
Name oj.t/Broker;`� DAV D I�tENHOLTZ
'Agent / Broker (Signature)
Address of AgentBroker:
5219 CITY
BANK
PKWY, SUITE 200
City/State/Zip:
LUBBOCK,
TEXAS
79407
Agent/Broker Telephone Number: ( 8 0 6 ) 7 71— 4 3 6 8
"Date:_ JULY 10, 2007
NOTE TO CONTRACTOR
(ff the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this proposal and award the
contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Public
Works Contracting Officer for the Citv of Lubbock at (806) 775-2163.
'ROPOSAL #07-725-BM — NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX
SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE
(Must Be Submitted With Proposal Submittal)
The City of Lubbock City Council desires to avail itself of the benefits of Section 252.0435 of the Local Government
Code, and consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding proposals on City contracts. Pursuant to
Section 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, City of Lubbock has adopted the following written definition and
criteria for accurately determining the safety record of a proposer prior to awarding proposals on City contracts.
The definition and criteria for determining the safety record of a proposer for this consideration shall be:
The City of Lubbock shall consider the safety record of the offerors in determining the responsibility thereof. The City may
consider any incidence involving worker safety or safety of the citizens of the City of Lubbock, be it related or caused by
environmental, mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor. Specifically, the City may consider, among
other things:
a. Complaints to, or final orders entered by, the Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission (OSHRC),
against the proposer for violations of OSHA regulations within the past three (3) years.
b. Citations (as defined below) from an Environmental Protection Agency (as defined below) for violations within
the past five (5) years. Environmental Protection Agencies include, but are not necessarily limited to, the U.S.
Army Corps of Engineers (USACOE), the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (USFWS), the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA), the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), the Texas Natural Resource
Conservation Commission (TNRCC) (predecessor to the TCEQ), the Texas Department of State Health Services
(DSHS), the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department (TPWD), the Structural Pest Control Board (SPCB), agencies
of local governments responsible for enforcing environmental protection or worker safety related laws or
regulations, and similar regulatory agencies of other states of the United States. Citations include notices of
violation, notices of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses or registrations, fines
assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final
orders, and judicial final judgments.
C. Convictions of a criminal offense within the past ten (10) years, which resulted in bodily harm or death.
d. Any other safety related matter deemed by the City Council to be material in determining the responsibility of the
offeror and his or her ability to perform the services or goods required by the proposal documents in a safe
environment, both for the workers and other employees of offeror and the citizens of the City of Lubbock.
In order to obtain proper information from offerors so that City of Lubbock may consider the safety records of potential
contractors prior to awarding proposals on City contracts, City of Lubbock requires that offerors answer the following
three (3) questions and submit them with their proposals:
QUESTION ONE
Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the offeror, or anyone acting for such
firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of OSHA within the past three (3) years?
YES NO '/_
If the offeror has indicated YES for question number one above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its
proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such citation:
Date of offense, location of establishment inspected, category of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty
assessed.
��—Offeror's Initials
QUESTION TWO
Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the offeror, or anyone acting for such
firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of environmental protection laws or
regulations, of any kind or type, within the past five years? Citations include notice of violation, notice of enforcement,
suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses, or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints,
indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments.
YES NO_V
If the offeror has indicated YES for question number two above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its
proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction:
Date of offense or occurrence, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and
penalty assessed.
QUESTION THREE
Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by offeror, or anyone acting for such firm,
corporation, partnership, or institution, ever been convicted, within the past ten (10) years, of a criminal offense which
resulted in serious bodily injury or death?
YES NO V
If the ,offeror has indicated YES for question number three above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its
proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction:
Date of offense, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, in any, and penalty
assessed.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
THE STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
I certify that I have made no willful misrepresentations in this Questionnaire nor have I withheld information in my
statements and answers to questions. I am aware that the information given by me in this questionnaire will be
investigated, with my full permission, and that any misrepresentati or omissions ma ause my proposal to be rejected.
Signature IV
AL.S�ltf
Title
SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION
Federal Law (A-102 Common Rule and OMB Circular A-I10) prohibits non -Federal entities from contracting with or
making sub -awards under covered transactions to parties that are suspended or debarred or whose principals are
suspended or debarred. Covered transactions include procurement contracts for goods or services equal to or in excess of
$25,000 and all non -procurement transactions (e.g., sub -awards to sub -recipients).
Contractors receiving individual awards of $25,000 or more and all sub -recipients must certify that their organization and
its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency.
Before an award of $25,000 or more can be made to your firm, you must certify that your organization and its principals
are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency.
1, the undersigned agent for the firm named below, certify that neither this firm nor its principals are suspended or
debarred by a Federal agency.
FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURIVTV No. "/J
Signature of Company Official: .0 /-��a"e-/1�/�—�--
Printed name of company official signing above: LJ . /1 n / c C rAd—
Date
*****MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH BID / PROPOSAL*****
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Statement of Qualifications
RFP # 07-725-BM
NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX
Candidates must complete each of the following items in order to be considered
I. FIRM NAME: fin �r�� -en-'rae, Inc. .
2. BUSINESS ADDRESS: �rDnT. n Ave
,Luhback. 71 7gVoq
3. TELEPHONE, WITH AREA CODE: C9,0& - o) 8I - }I0 6)—1
FAX, WITH AREA CODE: 9b(D - cg eI - Ll9043
E MAIL ADDRESS: _ r ud r;no n 4rad 1 cn . &m
INTERNET URL ADDRESS:
4. TYPE OF ORGANIZATION: (CHECK ONE)
a. SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP
( )
b. PARTNERSHIP
( )
c. CORPORATION
(�Jf
d. JOINT VENTURE
( )
5. PRINCIPALS (P) AND ASSOCIATES (A):
(WRITE "P" OR "A" FOR EACH)
DEGREE OR
NAME P/A CERTIFICATE INSTITUTION
Easlern AI&W
a. L V,0 nyn16„�n ,0„ _Trek m e�/co Unimrsttu
bIli-( OL ")0" Soufh Plains
n 1, n- a n l r ii
e.
MAIM
*****MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH BID / PROPOSAL*****
6.
7.
*****MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH BID / PROPOSAL*****
City of Lubbock
STATETMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS CONTINUED
LIST 5 MAJOR PROJECTS WITHIN THE PAST THREE YEARS THAT ILLUSTRATE
YOUR EXPERIENCE WITH PROJECTS SIMILAR TO THE CITY'S.
PROJECT
Bas e,b�a d
a. PLC 1'e-uj /SSD Field /JA17 de
C. &
di�fP
OWNER YEAR COST
P I r
REFERENCES:
(INCLUDE AT LEAST THREE REFERENCES FROM THREE PROJECTS SIMILAR TO
THE ONE FOR WHICH YOU ARE COMPETING)
NAME RELATIONSHIP PHONE NUMBER
1,
511
SUBMITTED BY:
U v .
Printed Name: 1..S
Title: T re td enl -
Firm Name b�n>!�r�_ �e11 YTDe 14C -
Tel #:,dt'D1979
Address: #311 lt-t /A�tol) A Gee •
City: / a A hock State: / /t Zip: 1 194jo !
*****MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH BID / PROPOSAL*****
*****MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH BID / PROPOSAL*****
I)
City of Lubbock, TX
Public Works Contracting Office
IIContractor
Checklist for
RFP # 07-725-BM
IIBefore
submitting your proposal, please ensure you have completed the following:
0
1. Carefully the the
read and understand plans and specifications and properly complete
PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM. Proposal submittal form MUST be completed in
y
IIa,
O
blue or black ink or by typewriter. Signatures must be original, in blue or black ink, and
a
`
by hand. Amounts shall he written in both words and numerals and in the event of a
discrepancy me amounts written in words shall govern. Include corporate seal and
Secretary's signature. Identify addenda received (if any). Include firm's FEDERAL TAX
ID number or Owner's SOCIAL SECURITY number.
t7
l A
2. Complete and sign the CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT
AFFIDAVIT. This must include the signature of the agent or broker. Contractor's
y
signature must be original.
I
�
3. Complete and sign the SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE. All "YES" responses
w
must be explained in detail and submitted with Bid / Proposal.
pq
I
O
�d
4. Complete and sign the SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION. Include
firm's FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner's SOCIAL SECURITY number.
41
5. Carefully read the BASIS OF PROPOSALS and EVALUATION CRITERIA in
paragraph 32 of the General Instructions to Offeror's. Ensure ALL criteria are addressed
W
in your submittal. Complete and submit the "Statement of Qualifications" with your
Iproposal
p"
6. Clearly mark the proposal number, title, due date and time and your company name and
Iaddress
on the outside of the envelope or container.
7. Include PROPOSAL BOND or CASHIER'S OR CERTIFIED CHECK as
your proposal
surety. Failure to provide a proposal surety WILL result in automatic rejection of your
A
w
proposal.
�
8, _Z Ensure your proposal is RECEIVED by the City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting
to
a
Office prior to the deadline. Late proposals will not be accepted.
�
b
FAILURE TO PROVIDE ANY OF THE ABOVE MAY RESULT IN YOUR PROPOSAL BEING
p
DEEMED NON -RESPONSIVE AND, THEREFORE, NOT FURTHER EVALUATED. PLEASE
INCLUDE THIS COMPLETED PAGE AS THE FIRST PAGE OF YOUR PROPOSAL
SUBMITTAL.
r
rt
z) Rei�e I k , r
(Please type or print company / firm name)
*****MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH BID / PROPOSAL*****:=1LIJ
i
City of Lubbock
Public Works Contracting Office
In an effort to better serve our suppliers, the City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Office is conducting
the following survey. We appreciate the time and effort expended to submit your offer. Please take an
additional moment to complete the information below. If you have any questions or need more information,
please call (806)775-2163.
City of Lubbock RFP # 07-725-BM
HOW DID YOU RECEIVE NOTICE OF THIS REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL?
Lubbock Avalanche Journal?
Yes No
The Daily Commercial Record?
Yes No
From Plan Room or other type of service?
Yes No
Did you access the City of Lubbock website to search for bids?
Yes No
Facsimile or email from RFP Depot.com?
Yes No
Did you download from your home computer?
Yes No
Did you download from your company computer?
Yes No
Requested a copy from Lubbock Public Works Contracting Office?
Yes No
Are you a member of RFP Depot?
Yes No
Other:
THANK YOU.
CL) UU11—a e!�ii -n r)C-, IZZL .
(Please type or print company / firm name)
PAYMENT BOND
STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) ( ?
OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE r j
(CONTRACTS MORE THAN $25,000) BOND NO. 4362980
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that DENTON—RENFROE , INC. (hereinafter called the Principal(s),
as Principal(s), and SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY
(hereinafter called the Suret a Sur tt��((sll- r hel V�n� to ubbock (hereinafter called the
Obligee),in the amount of � L IO1Cf �nlb CTI�D --�� 01 0 lawful money of the
F VE HUNDRED ONE & NO 0 Y
United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators,
executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the2 6 TH day of
JULY , 20 07 , to PROPOSAL #07-725-BM
NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX
and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond
in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent
as if copied at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay
all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said
contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect;
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the
Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said
Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this
1ST day of AUGUST 20 07 .
SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY DENTON-RENFROE INC
Surety (Company Name)
*By. "AAU.,
(Title) DEEDEE BRINKER
ATTORNEY -IN -FACT
(Title)
PRESIDENT
'- The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby
designates DEEDEE BRINKER an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered
and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship.
I
SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY
Surety
* By: -L t
(Title) DEEDEE BRINE
ATTORNEY —IN —FACT
Approved as to form:
City of ..•
* Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing
that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of
attorney for our files.
2
PERFORMANCE BOND
}
STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a)
_z OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE
(CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) BOND NO. 4362980
DENTON—RENFROE INC.
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (hereinaAer called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and
SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY
hereinafter called the Suret s(l as Suret s8(� are held and iirml�j bound unto the it of Lubbock hereinafter called the
Obligee), in the amount of pTOVEMHi1Ny�RFDTONF:H&NNO1 OWE—llla� lawful money of the
LJ United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators,
executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
� WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated thQ 6 THday of
JULY , 20 Ito PROPOSAL #07-725—BM
NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX
and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond
in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent
as if copied at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall
faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall
m be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the
Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said
article to the same extent as if it were length at copied h herein.
p �
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this1ST
day of AUGUST 2007 .
SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY
Surety
(Title) DEEDEE BRINKER
ATTORNEY —IN —FACT
1
DENTON—RENFROE, INC.
(Company Name)
PRESIDENT
(Title)
i
Th eg�Nped surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby 1
designates _BRINKER an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on
whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship.
SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY
Surety
*By:
(Title) DEEDEE BRINKER
ATTORNEY—IN=FACT
Approved as to Form
City o ubbock z
Y,Q dn'm
i Attorney
* Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing
that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of
attorney for our files.
I
SureTec Insurance Company
THIS BOND RIDER CONTAINS IMPORTANT COVERAGE INFORMATION
Statutory Complaint Notice
To obtain information or make a complaint: You may call the Surety's toll free telephone
number for information or to make a complaint at: 1-866-732-0099. You may also write to the
Surety at:
SureTec Insurance Company
9737 Great Hills Trail, Suite 320
Austin, Tx 78759
You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies,
coverage, rights or complaints at 1-800-252-3439. You may write the Texas Department of
Insurance at
PO Box 149104
Austin, TX 78714-9104
Fax#: 512-475-1771
PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or
about a claim, you should contact the Surety first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may
contact the Texas Department of Insurance.
Terrorism Risks Exclusion
The Bond to which this Rider is attached does not provide coverage for, and the surety shall
not be liable for, losses caused by acts of terrorism, riot, civil insurrection, or acts of war.
Exclusion of Liability for
Mold, Mycotoxins, Fungi & Environmental Hazards
The Bond to which this Rider is attached does not provide coverage for, and the surety
thereon shall not be liable for, molds, living or dead fungi, bacteria, allergens, histamines,
spores, hyphae, or mycotoxins, or their related products or parts, nor for any environmental
hazards, bio-hazards, hazardous materials, environmental spills, contamination, or cleanup,
nor the remediation thereof, nor the consequences to persons, property, or the performance
of the bonded obligations, of the occurrence, existence, or appearance thereof.
Texas Rider 010106
_r
POA #: 4362980
SureTec Insurance Company
LIMITED POWER OF ATTORNEY
Know All Men by These Presents, That SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY (the "Company"), a corporation duly organized and
existing under the laws of the State of Texas, and having its principal office in Houston, Harris County, Texas, does by these presents
make, constitute and appoint
Dee Dee Brinker
of Lubbock , Texas its true and lawful Attorney -in -fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name,
place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings or other instruments or contracts
of suretyship to include waivers to the conditions of contracts and consents of surety for:
Principal: Denton-Renfroe, Inc.
Obligee: City of Lubbock
Amount: $2,212,501.00
and to bind the Company thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bond were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate
seal of the Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attorney -in -Fact may do in the
premises. Said appointment is made under and by authority of the following resolutions of the Board of Directors of the SureTec
Insurance Company:
Be it Resolved, that the President, any Vice -President, any Assistant Vice -President, any Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is
hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attomey(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on
behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions:
Attorney -in -Fact may be given full power and authority for and in the name of and of behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and
deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements or indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all
notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such
Attomey-in-Fact shall be binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and effected by the Corporate Secretary.
Be it Resolved, that the signature of any authorized officer and seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or
any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid
and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached. (Adopted at a meeting held on 20 of April,
1999)
In Witness Whereof, SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its President, and its corporate seal
to be hereto affixed this 20th day of June, A.D. 2005.
`a�ty4ANC�,�
SURETEC INS COMPANY
urn! X q . By.
w I w 5 )0t B.J. King r si ent
State of Texas ss:
County of Harris
On this 20th day of June, A.D. 2005 before me personally came B.J. King, to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say, that he
resides in Houston, Texas, that he is President of SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY, the company described in and which executed the above
instrument; that he knows the seal of said Company; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the
Board of Directors of said Company; and that he signed his name thereto by like order.
Michelle Denny
ID
Notary Public
P r �yVstate of Texa1 &O'VMy Commission Expires Michelle Denny, Notary Pfiblic
August 27, 2008 My commission expires August 27, 2008
I, M. Brent Beaty, Assistant Secretary of SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy
of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Company, which is still in full force and effect; and furthermore, the resolutions of the Board of Directors, set
out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect.
Given under my hand and the seal of said Company at Houston, Texas this 1 st day of August , 20 07 , A.D.
M. Brent Be ty, Assistant Secretary
Any instrument issued in excess of the penalty stated above is totally void and without any validity.
For verification of the authority of this power you may call (713) 812-0800 any business day between 8:00 am and 5:00 pm CST.
08^Ut3—U /: Uj: 18PM:
CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY
INSURANCE
DATE
ioi2007
PRODUCER (806) 771-4368 FAX (806) 771-4382
Ashmore & Associates Insurance Agency LLC
5219 Ciit Bank Parkway Ste 200
Y
Lubbock, TX 79407
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE
NAIC #
INSURED enton-Rea roe, Inc.
4311 Ironton Avenue
Lubbock, TX 79407
*AMENDED CERTIFICATE
INBURERA: Scottsdale Insurance Company
INSURERS: United Fire
INSURERa Texas Mutual Insurance Co.
INSURER 0:
INSURER E:
COVERAGES
t
vl
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS,
TYPE OF INSURANCE
POLICY NUMBER
POU Y E FECTIVEDMQ.
POLICY EXPIRATION
UNITS
GENERAL LIABILITY
BCS001390S
09/28/200
09/28/2002
EACH OCCURRENCE
S 1,000,000
MERCiAL GENERAL LIABILITY
DAMAGE TO RENTED
i 10O 000
CLAIMS MADEa OCCUR
MED EXP (Any as pmw)
s Excluded
A
IC
PERSONAL 6 ADV INJURY
S 1 OOO 000
GENERAL AGGREGATE
S 2,000,000
GENLAGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER'
PRODUCTS -COMPIOPAGO
S 2,000,000
POLICY LOC
,
AUTOMOBILE w81LTTY
ANY AUTO
12019739
08/02/2007
08/02/2008
coMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
(Es-ddwd)
i 1,000,000
BODILY INJURY
(P°rp--)
S
B
AL(. OWNED AUTOS
SCHEDULEDAUTOS
HIRED ALITOS
NON-OWNEDAUTOS
Ix
BODILY INJURY
(PeraeddeM)PROPERTY
t
DAMAG
(perM) a-W E
S
GAR;AGEUARILIIY
AUTO ONLY -EA ACCIDENT
S
OTHER THAN EA ACC
AUTOONLY: AGO
S
ANY AUTO
S
EXCIESSIUMBRELLA LIABILITY
EACH OCCURRENCE
S
OCCUR CLAIMS MADE
AGGREGATE
S
S
S
oa=TIBLE
$
RETENTION $
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND
TSF0001096122
04/01/2007
04/01/2008
Xo
C
ENY PR ��
ANY PROPRIPRIETORlPARTNERIF.XECUTNE
OFFICEWMENBEREXCLUDED?
tf ya, d�sglhe tII1dH
SPECIAL PROVIS{ONS bakW
EL. EACH ACCIDENT
S 1,000,000
E.LDISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE
S 11000,000
E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT
S 11000,00
OTHER
DESCRI_ 010N OF OPERA NS I OCPMONS I VEHICLES I F�jCL�>�Oti� AD BY EHDQjt8EMENT!> ECJJ��PI III§IOB$
e: Northwest tt�e League $aseaba Complex Froposa Q ]Ly M
t is further agreed that the General Liabiltiy insurance shall be primary and noncontributory but only
n the event of the named Insured's sole negligence.
aiver of Subrogation in favor of the Certificate Holder on General Liability, Auto and WC
CERTIFICATE HOLDER
—d
nRLIr01 I AT,A%,
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL
10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTI E TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,
City of Lubbock
BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABIUTY
P.O. BOX 2000
OFANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES.
Lubbock, TX 79453
AUTHORLZEDREPReSENTAME
David Brenholtz LMC
ACORD 26 (2001/08) FAX: 77S-2164
CACORD CORPORATION 1988
IMPORTANT
If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement
on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may
require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate
holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
DISCLAIMER
The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between
the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it
affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon.
ACORD 25 (2001/08)
____._... _w� �,...��.
tee,
w �. �.
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
TO: CITY OF LUBBOCK DATE:
P.O. BOX 2000, Suite 102
�! LUBBOCK, TX 79457 TYPE OF PROJECT:
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT (Name and Address of Insured) is,
at the date of this certificate, insured by this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described, for
the typed of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by this company, the further
hereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policy noted hereon.
TYPE OF INSURANCE
POLICY NUMBER
EFFECTIVE
EFFECTIVE
LIMITS
DATE
DATE
GENERAL LIABILITY
11 Commercial General Liability
General Aggregate $
❑ Claims Made
Products-Comp/Op AGG $
❑ Occurrence
Personal & Adv. Injury $
❑ Owner's & Contractors Protective
Each Occurrence $
❑
Fire Damage (Anyone Fire) $
Med Exp (Any one Person)
$
AUTOMOTIVE LIABILITY
❑ Any Auto
Combined Single Limit $
❑ All Owned Autos
Bodily Injury (Per Person) $
❑ Scheduled Autos
Bodily Injury (Per Accident) $
❑ Hired Autos
Property Damage $
❑ Non -Owned Autos
1-1
GARAGE LIABILITY
❑ Any Auto
Auto Only - Each Accident $
U
Other than Auto Only:
Each Accident $
Aggregate $
l I BUILDERS RISK
I I 100% of the Total Contract Price
$
❑ INSTALLATION FLOATER
$
EXCESS LIABILITY
❑ Umbrella Form
Each Occurrence $
Aggregate $
11 Other Than Umbrella Form
$
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
The Proprietor/ 11 Included
Statutory Limits
Partners/Executive ❑ Excluded
Each Accident $
Officers are:
Disease Policy Limit $
Disease -Each Employee $
OTHER
The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorsement provide that they may not be changed or
canceled by the insurer in less than the legal time required after the insured has received written notice of such change or
cancellation, or in case there is no legal requirement, in less than five days in advance of cancellation.
FIVE COPIES OF THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
4' (Name of Insurer)
MUST BE SENT TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK
By:
Title:
The Insurance Certificates Furnished shall name the City of Lubbock as a Primary Additional Insured on General
Liability and provide a Waiver of Subrogation on all policies in favor of the City of Lubbock.
I'
I
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
CONTRACTORCHECKLIST
A CONTRACTOR SHALL:
(1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based
on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements;
(2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity
prior to beginning work on the project;
(3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity:
(A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental
entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing
services on the project; and
(B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing
extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project;
(5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter;
(6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after
the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of
coverage of any person providing services on the project;
(7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are
required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide
coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both
English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices
shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional
words or changes:
PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE
CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF
SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE
ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON
THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S
RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE
DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR.
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see
reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering
equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the
identity of their employer or status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512) 440- 3789 to receive information on the
legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to
report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and
(8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to:
(A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and
filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for
the duration of the project;
(B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the
project;
(C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this
rule;
(D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and
(ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the
coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during
the duration of the project;
(F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter; I _
(G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10
days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the
provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by
paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they
are providing services.
CONTRACT
1
CONTRACT 7829
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 261h day of July, 2007 by and between the City of Lubbock,
County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so,
hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Denton-Renfroe, Inc. of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State
of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and
performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the
CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and .complete the construction of certain improvements
described as follows:
PROPOSAL # 07-725-BM — NORTHWEST LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX - $2,212,501
and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own
proper cost and, expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance
and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents
as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. Denton-Renfroe, Ine.'s proposal dated July 11, 2007 is incorporated
into and made a part of this agreement.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have
been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance
with the proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to
make payment on account thereof as provided therein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County,
Texas in the year and day first above written.
COMPLETE ADDRESS:
Company��
Address 1 tIC .
City, State, Zip U h& k 7Y �1 %ge)I
ATTEST:
A_
A I
1 !
V ,
Corporate Secretary
CITY OF��LUUBBOC XAS (O R):
MAYOR
ATTEST:
City S eretary
APPROVED AS EO CONTENT:
ve
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
OWNER
Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City
of Lubbock, Texas.
2. CONTRACTOR
Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co-
partnership or corporation, to wit Denton-Renfroe. Inc. who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this
contract, or their legal representative.
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as
referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative CRAIG WUENSCHE, PARK OPERATIONS MANAGER,
so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers,
or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers,
supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not
directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor.
4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Offerors, General Instructions to Offerors, Proposal,
Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the
Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificates, and all other documents made available to
Offeror for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. The above described materials are sometimes
referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents".
5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES
Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed,"
or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order,
designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved,"
"Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the
Owner's Representative.
6. SUBCONTRACTOR
The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for
performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no
responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated
by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due
Subcontractor. The City reserves the right to approve or disapprove the selection of any subcontractor(s).
7. WRITTEN NOTICE
r
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of f
the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the
last business address known to the party who gives the notice.
i
S. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery,
equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other
facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless
otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality.
The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials
or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer
such recognized standards.
All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents.
9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED
The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents
has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still
may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
,; 10. LAYOUT
Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall
accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will
check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at
Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all
work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE
The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and
Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site.
12. RIGHT OF ENTRY
The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed
work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's
Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or
quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's
Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's
failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
13. LINES AND GRADES
All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems
said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents
or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall
suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension
will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor
shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed.
All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or
removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the
Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense.
2
14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY
Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's
Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the
authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the
contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds
of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said
work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the
execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be
conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15)
calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection
by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived.
15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION
It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from
time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem
proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is
furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all
reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper
inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of
any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are
consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however,
should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor
may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the
absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be
deemed waived.
16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall
keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to
Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given
to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision
by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work
and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor.
The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the -
Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any
subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work.
17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and _.
location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be
encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the
work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the
contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or
Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the
terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all
modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's
Representative and Contractor.
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work
to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the
work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense.
18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of
work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall
inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion,
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or
men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's
Representative's written consent.
19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution
and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and
it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or
protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and
accepted.
The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the
# Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such
structure shall at all times be maintained in a Manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.
20. SANITATION
Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public
observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be
approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced.
21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING
The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor
shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any
location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation
that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each
part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work
found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion
or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously
accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or
consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at
Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location
where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require
testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish
Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to
perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests
will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such
other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents.
4
If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or
consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be
uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and
approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the
requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such
tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and
shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense.
Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by
Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such
inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance
with the requirements of the contract documents.
22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES
It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in
the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in
conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written
notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy
such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial
action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense.
23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in
the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either
before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the
accompanying bond.
If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a
claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of
work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid
according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract;
otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make
such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in
said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual
expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned.
24. EXTRA WORK
The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be r
required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change,
alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered
-
by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein.
It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative
when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of
the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the
compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following
methods:
Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or
5
Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is
commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field
cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been
charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for
performance of the extra work.
In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph
shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen,
timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for
the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred,
together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age
Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other
insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by
them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be
kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's
Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the
type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the
Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined
by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted
by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of
machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the
actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general
superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the
actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained
primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the
"actual field cost."
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case
any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive
compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra
work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should
a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and
the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making
written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as
provided under Method (C) (1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement
of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived.
25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS
It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the proposal, the
-� specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that
such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these
contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in
these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a
clarification obtained before the proposals are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's
LJ Representative prior to the opening of proposals, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully
understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its proposal to complete the work
in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative
before offering of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans
and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any
request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of
proposals.
26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of
work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the
Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall
comply with such order.
If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the
Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give
reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress.
27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY
The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an
insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the
Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable
precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable
provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and
equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in
Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or
municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and
hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages,
expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or
contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection
with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in
any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the
subject matter of this contract.
The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an
Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given
by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses,
are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to
supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors.
28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the
General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of
Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of
cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change.
All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor
and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-
insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by
virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to
the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver.
The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance
protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such
insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and
shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a
subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of
insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
I_
PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF
A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ALONG WITH A COPY OF THE ADDITIONAL INSURED
ENDORSEMENT. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF
LUBBOCK AS A PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF
SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE
ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO
THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED.
IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL
PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION
COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR.
A. General Liability Insurance (Primary Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required)
The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000
Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include:
Products & Completed Operations Hazard
Contractual Liability
Personal Injury & Advertising Injury
Heavy Equipment Endorsement
B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance - NOT REQUIRED.
C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation Required)
The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than;
Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $1.000.000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and non -owned
cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles.
D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance - NOT REQUIRED.
E. Umbrella Liability Insurance - NOT REQUIRED.
F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation required)
Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.
Definitions:
_ Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of
authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-
82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for
the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project.
Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the
Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental
entity.
Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor
y Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has
undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with
the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without
q_ 8
limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -
operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to
provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or
delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a
project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage
vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.
2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and
payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements
of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services
on the project, for the duration of the project.
3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being
awarded the contract.
4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the
duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new
certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended.
5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the
governmental entity:
(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the
governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all
persons providing services on the project; and
(b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project.
The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and
for one year thereafter.
7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal
delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that
materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project.
8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by
the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all .persons providing services on the
project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and
report lack of coverage.
9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services
on the project, to:
(a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts
and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas
Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the
project, for the duration of the project;
(b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate
of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person
providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;
9
(c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current
certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project;
and
(2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of
the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for
one year thereafter;
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects
the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by
paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for
whom they are providing services.
10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the
Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who
will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the
duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes
and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance
carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance
Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to
administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions.
11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the
Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor
does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the
governmental entity.
G. Proof of Coverage
Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner
for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence
of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the
insurance company setting forth:
(1) The name and address of the insured.
(2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies.
(3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by
such certificate.
E (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne
L.._3 by such certificate.
10
1_.
(5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured
at the address shown in the proposal specifications.
(6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or
cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate.
(7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job
specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable.
(8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project.
9 A Contractor shall:
(a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the
project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling
of any coverage agreements;
(b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the
governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project;
(c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental
entity:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so
the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing
coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and
(ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for
one year thereafter;
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project;
(g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project
that they are required to be covered, and stating how a , person may verify current
coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other
posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30-point bold type
and text in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and
any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be
the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any
additional words or changes:
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to
this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This
includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing
labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee. "
11
S
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 8001372-7713 or 5121804-4000
(hnn://www twcc.state. &—us/twcccontacts.html) to receive information of the legal
requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required
coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage; " and
(h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,
to:
(i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll
amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing
services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning
work on the project;
(iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language:
"By signing this contract or providing or causing to be
provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this
contract is representing to the governmental entity that all
employees of the person signing this contract who will
provide services on the project will be covered by workers'
compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that
the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of
classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all
coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate
insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the
commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation.
Providing false or misleading information may subject the
Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties,
civil penalties, or other civil actions.";
(iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the
Contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the
project; and
(2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown
on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the
project;
(vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project
and for one year thereafter;
(vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that
materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on
the project; and
(viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as
Id required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided
to the person for whom they are providing services.
12
29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES
Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of
1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such
individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee
compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment.
30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND
FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees,
harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in
any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, material men and
furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of
this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor
shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid,
discharged or waived.
31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material
or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof.
Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and
save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except
that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular
design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or
required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material
or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers,
agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the
contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the
Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's
Representative prior to offering.
32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and
regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or
form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless
the Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such
laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor
observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in
writing prior to proposing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in
the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances
within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal,
state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or
subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice
to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising there from.
The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar
as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may
13
enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as
though embodied herein.
33. SUBCONTRACTING
The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of
this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials
required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner,
as provided by the contract documents.
34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of
beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are
essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in
this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents.
If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified,
then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner
_... may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $500 (FIVE HUNDRED
DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set
forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for
substantially completing the work.
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial
completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into
consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality.
The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages
the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount
agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is
expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach.
IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT
TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT.
35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor
shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner
as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution
shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this
contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposal; provided,
also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's
Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will
be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized.
The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative,
'W schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which
the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts.
14
36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE
The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion
of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this
locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly
agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its
work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or
other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God
or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same
setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty
(20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to
affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall
be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for
extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived.
37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS
In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein
fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such
work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in
securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for
hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except
where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in
which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage
shall be paid by Owner to Contractor.
38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS
No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length,
area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the
event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the
specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material
to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to
be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are
approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing
their proposals offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are
expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and
agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ
somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method,
payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project.
39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY
The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way
encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under
this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be
liablefor any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property.
Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees,_
against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising
from or growing out of the performance of this contract.
15
40. PRICE FOR WORK
In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work
i by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this, contract in full conformity with the
specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the
proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive
such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses
incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and
according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's
Representative.
41. PAYMENTS
No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the
contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective
work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's
Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection
with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there
are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by
Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's
agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract.
42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS
On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application
for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative. shall
determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial
payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and.. if found to be in order, shall
prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the
Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by
the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof.
The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of
the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be
retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by
Owner under the terms of the contract documents.
Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to
enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work
performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said
partial payment is attributable.
43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
71Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31)
working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been
substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time,
if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's
Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding
the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete
the work within the time provided in this contract.
16
44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT
The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of
final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final
completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's
Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion,
Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final
completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final
completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the
obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty
or warranties implied by law or otherwise.
45. CORRECTION OF WORK
Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative
on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and
Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming
to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of
other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any
such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's
Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense.
Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the
contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and
Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which
shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's
Representative.
46. PAYMENT WITHHELD
The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify
the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of.
(a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed.
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims.--
(c) Damage to another contractor.
When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the
amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.
47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE
It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor
shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's
Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception.
Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner
shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right
under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by
Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's
Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed
denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed
that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor,
17
and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and
_tta Owner's Representative, by Contractor.
48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR
In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after
written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with
the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the
Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall
be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the
Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required.
After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work
any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials
and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the
Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or
credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for
under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will
ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the
notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed
with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the
contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract,
equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following
elective manners:
(a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and
supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor,
machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall
be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time
become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than
the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the
Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum
which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor,
then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or
(b) The Owner, under sealed proposals, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a
newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the
completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this
contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would
have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety
shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less
than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his
Surety shall be credited therewith.
In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall
have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as
provided in paragraph 44 hereinaeove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract
accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to
Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be,
u shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of
completion.
18
In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have
been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or
when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner,
then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the
Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and
the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated
hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work,
notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor
and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual
written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such
property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the
Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said
notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived
from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public
or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, -
equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor 1
or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners.
The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent
permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in
this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its
exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies
available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided
in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth.
49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY
The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually
performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be
liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the
project which is the subject matter of this contract.
50. BONDS
The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in
the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the
Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the
amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall
be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do
business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so
furnished.
51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions
conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions
shall control.
52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the
work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual
19
obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the
prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority
to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work
covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's
work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and
vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or
effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's
Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation.
54. CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at
the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus
materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and
condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor.
55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS
Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response,
Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same
may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in
any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the
Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the
City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a
Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the
construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or
other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts
and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least
twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and
provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If
the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5)
days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied.
In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for
ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper
performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage,
_ disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or
asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal
protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other
petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos.
56. NONAPPROPRIATION
All funds for payment by the City under this contract are subject to the availability of an annual appropriation for
this purpose by the City. In the event of non -appropriation of funds by the City Council of the City of Lubbock
for the goods or services provided under the contract, the City will terminate the contract, without termination
charge or other liability, on the last day of the then -current fiscal year or when the appropriation made for the
then -current year for the goods or services covered by this contract is spent, whichever event occurs first. If at
any time funds are not appropriated for the continuance of this contract, cancellation shall be accepted by the
20
Seller on thirty (30) days prior written notice, but failure to give such notice shall be of no effect and the City
shall not be obligated under this contract beyond the date of termination.
57. THE CITY RIGHT TO AUDIT
At any time during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years thereafter the City or a duly
authorized audit representative of the City, or the State of Texas, at its expense and at reasonable times, reserves
the right to audit Contractor's records and books relevant to all services provided under this Contract. In the event
such an audit by the City reveals any errors/overpayments by the City, Contractor shall refund the City the full
amount of such overpayments within thirty (30) days of such audit findings, or the City, at its option, reserves the
right to deduct such amounts owing the City from any payments due Contractor.
21
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
RE: RESOLUTION NO.2002-R0483, NOVEMBER 14, 2002
Craft
Acoustical Ceiling Installer
Air Conditioner Installer
Air Conditioner Installer -Helper
Asbestos Worker
Asbestos Supervisor
Bricklayer
Bricklayer -Helper
Carpenter
Carpenter -Helper
Cement Finisher
Drywall Hanger
Electrician
Electrician -Helper
Equipment Operator -Heavy
Equipment Operator -Light
Fire Sprinkler Fitter -Journey
Fire Sprinkler Fitter -Apprentice
Floor Installer
Glazier
Insulator-Piping/Boiler
Insulator -Helper
Iron Worker
Laborer -General
Mortar Mixer
Painter
Plumber
Plumber -Helper
Roofer
Roofer -Helper
Sheet Metal Worker
Sheet Metal Worker -Helper
Welder -Certified
EXHIBIT A
City of Lubbock
Building Construction Trades
Prevailing Rates
Hourly Rate
11.50
12.00
7.50
9.00
12.50
12.50
7.00
11.00
7.00
9.00
11.00
15.00
8.00
10.00
9.00
18.00
10.00
9.50
10.50
10.50
7.00
11.00
6.00
6.00
9.50
12.50
7.00
9.00
7.00
10.00
7.00
11.00
1
EXHIBIT B
Paving and Highway Construction
Prevailing Wage Rates
Craft Hourly Rate
Asphalt Heaterman
9.00
Asphalt Shoveler
7.50
Concrete Finisher
9.00
Concrete Finisher -Helper
7.50
Electrical Repairer -Equipment
12.50
Flagger
6.50
Form Setter
8.00
Form Setter -Helper
6.50
Laborer -General
6.00
Laborer -Utility
6.75
Mechanic
9.00
Mechanic -Helper
7.00
Power Equipment Operators
Asphalt Paving Machine
9.00
Bulldozer
9.00
Concrete Paving Machine
9.00
Front End Loader
9.00
Heavy Equipment Operator
9.00
Light Equipment Operator
8.00
Motor Grader Operator
10.25
Roller
7.00
Scraper
7.50
Tractor -Trailer
8.50
Truck Driver -Heavy
8.00
Truck Driver -Light
7.00
2
EXHIBIT C
Prevailing Wage Rates
Overtime Rate
The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act.
EXHIBIT D
Prevailing Wage Rates
Legal Holiday Rate
The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act.
3
SPECIFICATIONS
K
m
.H
Project Book
Little League Baseball Complex
Northwest Little League
N. University & Clovis Highway Lubbock, Texas
CHA, Inc. Project Number 0526
May 14, 2007
-410�00-
1 / �
Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc.
612 Broadway
Lubbock, Texas 79401
806-749-1153 fax 806-749-1866
Set No.
. "Y If;. 2007
City of Lubbock
Little League Baseball Complex
Northwest Little League
N. University & Clovis Highway
Lubbock, Texas
May 14, 2007
Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc.
CHA, Inc. Project 0526
Table of Contents
Bidding Requirements and Conditions of the Contract
Provided by the City of Lubbock
Division 1 General Reauirements
01010
Summary of Work
01015
Energy Compliance Certificates
01040
Coordination and Meetings
01090
Reference Standards
01300
Submittals
01356
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures
01400
Quality Control
01500
Construction Facilities
01555
Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling
01600
Material Equipment
01700
Contract Closeout
Division 2 Site Work
02082 Pre -Cast Concrete Manholes
02084 Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers
02151 Trench Safety Systems
02210 Demolition, Removal, and Salvaging of Existing Materials
02230 Site Clearing
02300 Excavation, Subgrade Preparation, Grading, Embankment, and Topsoiling
02317 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities
02320 Utility Backfill Materials
G 2007 Chapnmu I lam y Architects, Inc.
uta nimlizea <Inphotion prohih0ed TABLE OF CONTENTS
7
TC - l
.May 16. 2007
02444
Fence, Chain Link
02533
Acceptance Testing for Sewers
02540
Sanitary Sewer
02577
Pavement Markings
02665
Water Works Piping, Valves, and Miscellaneous Items
02700
Site Utilities
02720
Aggregate Base Course
02741
Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving
02751
Reinforced Concrete for Site Work
02764
Pavement Joint Sealant
02810
Irrigation Systems
02905
Landscaping
Division 3 Concrete
03300 Concrete Work
Division 4 Masonry
04300 Unit Masonry System
04340 Reinforced Unit Masonry System
Division 5 Metals
05120 Structural Steel
05313 Metal Floor Deck
05500 Metal Fabrications
Division 6 Wood and Plastic
06100 Rough Carpentry
06125 Wood Deck
06400 Architectural Millwork
Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection
07105
Dampproofing and Waterproofing
07213
Batt and Blanket Insulation
07465
Preformed Metal Siding
07610
Sheet Metal Roofing
07900
Joint Sealers
Division 8 Doors and Windows
08115 Steel Doors and Frames
08360 Upward Acting Rolling Doors
08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
08700 Finish Hardware
08800 Glazing
O 2007 Chapman Harvey Architecls. Inc.
Unaodwrized duplication prohibited. TABLE OF CONTENTS TC - 2
May IK, 2007
__r + Division 9 Finishes
09261 Metal Studs
09511 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings
09900 Painting
Division 10 Specialties
10155
Toilet Compartment
10350
Flagpoles
10440
Signs
10522
Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets
10800
Toilet Accessories
Division I Equipment
NOT USED
Division 12 Furnishings
NOT USED
Division 13 Special Construction
13122 Shade Cloth
13125 Aluminum Bleachers
Division 14 Conveying Systems
NOT USED
Division 15 Mechanical
15010
General Mechanical Provisions
15020
Testing
15060
Piping
15250
Insulation
15400
Plumbing
15650
Air Conditioning
15804
Ventilating
15840
Ductwork
15870
Grilles, Registers and Ceiling Diffusers
Division 16 Electrical
16050
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
16051
Common Work Results for Electrical
16060
Grounding and Bonding
16073
Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
16075
Electrical Identification
16120
Conductors and Cables
16130
Raceways and Boxes
16140
Wiring Devices
a 20D7 Chnp onn limey Archhccls, Inc
unnnWorized Juplialion prohibited. TABLE OF CONTENTS TC - 3
I
.May 19. 2007
16145
Lighting Control Devices
16410
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
16442
Panelboards
16511
Interior Lighting
16521
Exterior Lighting
16526
Sports Lighting
® 2tb7 Cltaptnan Hervey Architects. Inc.
Unantlwriud dnplicalron prohibited. TABLE OF CONTENTS
I
i_
TC - 4
4
1_
May 15, 2007
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART] GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work covered by Contract Documents.
B. Owner's responsibilities.
C. Contractor's use of site and premises.
D. Owner occupancy of the facility.
E. Project completion time.
F. Project site photographs.
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Work of this project includes all items shown and/or described in the bid documents labeled
Northwest Little League baseball field complex, dated May 14, 2007.
B. All installed work shall be in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act and Texas
Accessibility Standards. The General Contractor will be required to provide a letter that states all
plumbing fixtures installations comply with the Texas Accessibility Standards, refer to Section
01700 for further information.
C. New construction includes new handicap accessible ramps, new concrete walks, site grading, new
signage and related miscellaneous work.
D. The scope of work also includes the erection of contractor provided temporary construction
facilities at the site.
E. Perform utility construction and site improvement work as designated on plans. Pay all associated
costs: including, but not limited to frontage fees, connection fees, meter fees, and dump fees. This
includes water, gas and wastewater service to local utility companies.
1.4 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Assist the contractor in maintaining job site safety by instructing employees and visitors of the
potential dangers at the site.
B. Provide access for the contractor to portions of the existing site as may be required for this project.
C. Provide parking and storage space for contractor's employees, equipment, and materials.
CinauQnoWu°"pGc lleua on pr0jubne . l'". SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1
May 15, 2007
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Limit the use of site and premises to allow:
1. Owner occupancy.
2. Work by others.
3. Use of site.
1.6 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Cooperate with owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate owner's operations.
1. Temporary interruptions must be scheduled at least 48 hours in advance with the
architect.
2. Neighboring facilities are not to have their services interrupted.
3. Maintain a clear path for emergency vehicles at all times.
B. Schedule the work to accommodate these requirements.
C. Contractor is responsible for the safety of visitors to the job site.
1.7 PROJECT COMPLETION TIME
A. The entire scope of work included in this contract and described herein shall reach substantial
completion within the number of calendar days submitted in the proposal.
B. See Article 8.1 of the General Conditions for definition of Working Days.
C. See Article 8.2 of the General Conditions for computation of Contract Time.
D. See Article 8.3 of the General Conditions for claims for extension of Contract Time.
1.8 PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographs of the project site and adjacent areas are included at the end of this section.
1.9 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE
A. Copies of the building envelope compliance certificate, mechanical compliance certificate, and the
lighting compliance certificate are included at the end of this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
6.1 0.11-ftvp=P.=. ►n`. SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2
�i
s• -. _` .' I � i� merit �.tcY.i. �n1- .� r
M—}4"W»-ter
_ �"
�`..x-�+1JIti�w+-.
•'J���., �i1�'4; �Fy'��ri`�"`� - ;yam.-}'�"'; 4 .''��'' ^' .�` � i4!
_�"" _ ,.
iY `�
�; '�'�
I '
. .��'i. .!':-��"F4v'+ry'-rh- .«wl�-'
�r _r iµ - .f' 1'ti�+k.!fFP�1r�•�
:;�.'+�
i.
'
Y
01
v
Oyu
.,..
tia a
ytw "..
4
'(
F `h� •3 f y
W-F
May 15.2007
View South
View Southwest
END OF SECTION
.7 ao9g `°` SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 5
Y
May 11, 2007
SECTION 01015
ENERGY COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATES
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. International Energy Conservation Code
1. Building Envelope Compliance Certificate.
2. Mechanical Compliance Certificate.
3. Lighting Compliance Certificate.
PART2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
1
6.2
uiho hnze(ra phcaiio pro5hbie`l: Inc.
ENERGY COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATES
01015 — 1
i
Permit #
Permit Date
COMcheck Software Version 3.2.1
Envelope Compliance Certificate
2000 IECC
Report Date: 11/27/06
Data filename: S:1CHA-CU-110526-C--1ISPECIF-11NW1NWLL.cck
Section 1: Project Information
Project Title: Northwest Little League Baseball Complex
Construction Site:
North University & Clovis Highway
Lubbock, TX
Owner/Agent:
Craig Wuensche
City of Lubbock Park Development
1010 9th Street
Lubbock, TX 79457
806-775-2665
cwuensche@mylubbock.us
Section 2: General Information
Building Location (for weather data):
Lubbock, Texas
Climate Zone:
71b
Heating Degree Days (base 65 degrees F):
3431
Cooling Degree Days (base 65 degrees F):
1689
Project Type:
New Construction
Vertical Glazing / Wall Area Pct.:
9%
Building Type
Other
Floor Area
600
Section 3: Requirements Checklist
Climate -Specific Requirements:
Component Name/Description
Roof 1: Metal Roof with Thermal Blocks
Exterior Wall 1: CMU >8" with Integral Insulation, Furring: Wood
Window 1: Metal Frame:Single Pane, Clear, SHGC 2.00, PF 75.00
Door 1: Solid
Interior Wall 1: CMU >8" with Empty Cells, Furring: None
Floor 1:.Slab-On-Grade:Unheated, Horizontal 1 ft.
Designer/Contractor:
Larry Harvey
Chapman Harvey Architects
612 Broadway
Lubbock, TX 79401
806-749-1153
larryh@chaprnanharvey.com
Gross Area Cavity Cont.
or
R-Value R-Value
Perimeter
600
0.0 19.0
820
12.0 0.0
72
- --
21
256
- 0.0
600
4.0
Proposed Budget
U-Factor U-Factor
0.051 0.063
0.089 0.130
2.000 0.701
3.000 0.202
0.316 0.202
(a) Budget U-factors are used for software baseline calculations ONLY, and are not code requirements.
t Air Leakage, Component Certification, and Vapor Retarder Requirements:
❑ 1. All joints and penetrations are caulked, gasketed or covered with a moisture vapor -permeable wrapping material installed in
t accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
❑ 2. Windows, doors, and skylights certified as meeting leakage requirements.
' ❑ 3. Component R-values & U-factors labeled as certified.
Northwest Little League Baseball Complex Page 1 of 2
❑ 4. Insulation installed according to manufacturers instructions, in substantial contact with the surface being insulated, and in a
manner that achieves the rated R-value without compressing the insulation.
Section 4: Compliance Statement
Compliance Statement: The proposed envelope design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans,
specifications and other calculations submitted with this permit application. T proposed envelope system has been designed to
meet the 2000 IECC, Chapter 8, requirements in COM eck Version 3.2.1 d to comply with the mandatory requirements in the
Requirements Checklist.
Principal nvelope Design -Name Sign ture Date
Northwest Little League Baseball Complex Page 2 of 2
L.
Mechanical Compliance Certificate
2000 IECC
COMcheck-EZ So$ware Version 3.0 Release 2a
Data filename: C.:\Program Files\Check\COMcheck-EZ\NW-LL.cck
Section 1: Project Information
Project Name: Northwest Little League Baseball Complex
Designer/Contractor: Chapman -Harvey
BSA/Wampler Consulting
Document Author: Carl W. Wampler, P.E.
Section 2: General Information
Building Location (ior weather data): Lubbock, Texas
Climate Zone: 7b
Heating Degree Days (base 65 degrees F): 3431
Cooling Degree Days (base 65 degrees F): 1689
Project Type: New Construction
Section 3: Mechanical Systems list
Permit Number
Checked By/Date
QU�utijy System Tyne & Description
1 HVAC System 1: Split System Heat Pump, Cooling Capacity <65 kBtu/h, Air -Cooled Condenser / Single
Zone
1 HVAC System 2: Heating: Unit Heater, Electric
l Water Heating 1: Service Water Heater
Section 4: Requirements Checklist
Bldg.
Dept.
Use
Requirements Specific To: HVAC System I
1. Newly purchased equipment meets the efficiency requirements
2. Heat pump thermostat required when supplemental electric resistance heat is installed
Requirements Specific To: HVAC System 2
I Requirements Specific To: Water Heating 1
[ ] j 1. Heat traps in inlet/outlet fittings
[ ] j 2. 1/2-in. insulation on 8 it orinlet/outlet piping if no integral heat traps
I
Generic Requirements: Must be met by all systems to which the requirement is applicable
[ ] 1. Load calculations per 1997 ASHRAE Fundamentals
[ ] j 2. Plant equipment and system capacity no greater than needed to meet loads
- Exception: Standby equipment automatically offwhen primary system is operating
- Exception: Multiple units controlled to sequence operation as a function of load
J 3. Minimum one temperature control device per system
] 4. Minimum one humidity control device per installed hwnidilication/dehumidification system
J 5. Automatic Controls: Setback to 55 degree F (heat) and 85 degree F (cool); 7-day clock,
2-hour occupant override, l0 hour backup
- Exception: Continuously operating zones
- Exception 2 kW demand or less, submit calculations
J 6. Automatic shut-oTdampers on exhaust systems and supply systems with airflow >3,000 ctin
] 7. Outside -air sowre fDr ventilation; system capable of reducing OSA to required minimum
] ( 8. R-5 supply and return air duct insulation in unconditioned spaces
R-8 supply and return air duct insulation outside the building
R-8 insulation between ducts and the building exterior when ducts are part of a building assembly
- Exception: Ducts located within equipment
- Exception: Ducts with interior and exterior temperature di*rence not exceeding 15 degree F.
] 9. Ducts sealed - longitudinal seams on rigid ducts; transverse seams on all ducts;
iJL 181A or 181B tapes and mastics
] ( 10. Mechanical fasteners and sealants used to connect ducts and air distribution equipment
] 11. Hot water pipe insulation: 1 in. far pipes <=1.5 in. and 2 in. for pipes > 1.5 in.
Chilled water/refrigta t/brine pipe insulation: 1 in, for pipes <=1.5 in. and 1.5 in. for pipes >1.5 in.
Steam pipe insulation: 1.5 in. for pipes <=1.5 in. and 3 in. for pipes >1.5 in.
- Exception: Piping within HVAC equipment
- Exception: Fluid temperatures between 55 and 105 degree F
- Exception: Fluid not heated or cooled
- Exception: Runouts <4 It in length
] 12. Operation and maintenance manual provided to building owner
J 13. Balancing devices provided in accordance with TMC 603.15
] ( 14. Newly purchased service water heating equipment meets the efficiency requirements
] 15. Water heater temperature controls: l 10 degree F for dwelling units or 90 degree F
fir other occupancies
Section 5: Compliance Statement
The proposed mechanical design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specifications and
other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed mechanical systems have been designed to meet
the 2000 IECC, Chapter 8, requirements in COMcheck-EZ Version 3.0 Release 2a and to comply with the mandatory
requirements in the Requirements Checklist.
Ca"l Al
Principal Mechanical Designer -Name Signature
I
:5'-/y o7
Date
Mechanical Requirements Description
2000 IECC
i COMcheckEZ Sollware Version 3.0 Release 2a
Data filename: C:\Program Files\Check\COMcheck-EZ\NW-LL.cck
The following list provides more detailed description of the requirements in Section 4 ofthe Mechanical Compliance
Certificate.
Requirements Specific To: HVAC System 1
1. The specified equipment is covered by Federal minimum efficiency requirements. New equipment of this type can be
assumed to meet or exceed ASHRAE 90.1 Code requirements tar equipment efficiency.
2. Heat pumps having supplementary electric resistance heat must have controls that, except during defrost, prevent
supplementary heat operation when the heat pump can meet the heating load.
Requirements Specific To: HVAC System 2
Requirements Specific To: Water Heating 1
1. Heat traps are required on noncirculating water heating systems on both inlet and outlet connections. Heat traps may
be purchased or field -lubricated by creating a loop or inverted U-shaped arrangement on the inlet and outlet pipes.
2. Pipe insulation far the specified noncirculating service hot water system is required & all piping in the following
categories:a) the first 8 1 of outlet piping from any constant -temperature, noncirculating storage systemb) the inlet
piping between the storage tank and a heat trap in a nonciwalating storage systemPipe insulation must be at least 1/2
in. and have a conductivity no >0.28 Btu-in/(h-$2-degree F).
Generic Requirements: Must be met by all systems to which the requirement is applicable
I 1. Design heating and cooling loads for the building must be determined using procedures equivalent to those in
Chapters 27 and 28 of the ASHRAE Handbook ofFundamentals or an approved equivalent calculation procedure.
2. All equipment and systems must be sized to be no greater than needed to meet calculated loads. A single piece of
equipment providing both heating and cooling must satisfy this provision for one firnction with the capacity for the
other function as small as possible, within available equipment options.
- Exception: The equipment and/or system capacity may be greater than calculated loads for standby purposes.
Standby equipment must be automatically controlled to be offwhen the primary equipment and/or system is operating.
a - Exception: Multiple units of the same equipment type whose combined capacities exceed the calculated load are
:1
allowed ifthey are provided with controls to sequence operation of the units as the load increases or decreases.
3. Each heating or cooling system serving a single zone must have its own temperature control device.
4. Each humidification system must have its own humidity control device.
5. The system or zone control must be a programmable thermostat or other automatic control meeting the following
critcda:a) capable of setting back temperature to 55 degree F during heating and setting up to 85 degree F during
..kl coolingb) capable of automatically setting back or shutting down systems during unoccupied hours using 7 different
day schedulesc) have an accessible 2-hour occupant overrided) have a battery back-up capable ofmaintaining
programmed settings fir at least 10 hours without power.
- Exception: A setback or shutoff control is not required on thermostats that control systems serving areas that operate
continuously.
- Exception: A setback or shutoficontrol is not required on systems with total energy demand of2 kW (6,826 Btu/h)
or less.
1 6. Outdoor -air supply systems with design airflow rates >3,000 cfrn of outdoor air and all exhaust systems must have
dampers that are automatically closed while the equipment is not operating.
` 7. The system must supply outside ventilation air as required by Chapter 4 ofthe International Mechanical Code. If the
ventilation system is designed to supply outdoor -air quantities exceeding minimum required levels, the system must
be capable of reducing outdoor4r flow to the minimum required levels.
8. Air ducts must be insulated to the following levels:a) Supply and return air ducts for conditioned air located in
4:�
unconditioned spaces (spaces neither heated not cooled) must be insulated with a minimum ofR-5. Unconditioned
spaces include attics, crawl spaces, unheated basements, and unheated garages.b) Supply and return air ducts and
plenums must be insulated to a minimum ofR-8 when located outside the building,c) When ducts are located vrithin
exterior components (e.g., toots or roofs), minimum R-8 insulation is required only between the duct and the
1 building exterior.
J - Exception: Duct insulation is not required on ducts located within equipment.
- Exception: Duct insulation is not required when the design temperature difference between the interior and exterior of
the duct or plenum does not exceed 15 degree F.
All joints, longitudinal and transverse seams, and connections in ductwork must be securely sealed using weldments;
mechanical fasteners with seals, gaskets, or mastics; mesh and mastic sealing systems; or tapes. Tapes and mastics
must be listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181A or UL 181B.
10. Mechanical fasteners and seals, mastics, or gaskets must be used when connecting ducts to fans and other air
distribution equipment, including multiple -zone terminal units.
11. All pipes serving space -conditioning systems must be insulated as follows:
Hot water piping for heating systems:
1 in. for pipes <=1 1/2-in. nominal diameter
2 in. for pipes >1 1/2-in. nominal diameter.
Chilled water, refrigerant, and brine piping systems:
1 in. insulation for pipes <=1 1/2-in. nominal diameter
1 1/2 in. insulation for pipes >1 1/2-in. nominal diameter.
Steam piping:
1 1/2 in. insulation for pipes <=1 1/2-in. nominal diameter
3 in. insulation for pipes >1 1/2-in. nominal diameter.
- Exception: Pipe insulation is not required far factory -installed piping within HVAC equipment.
Exception: Pipe insulation is not required far piping that conveys fluids having a design operating temperature range
between 55 degrees F and 105 degrees F.
I- Exception: Pipe insulation is not required for piping that conveys fluids that have not been heated or cooled through
the use ofiossil fuels or electric power.
- Exception: Pipe insulation is not required far runout piping not exceeding 4 9 in length and 1 in, in diameter
between the control valve and HVAC coil.
12. Operation and maintenance documentation must be provided to the owner that includes at least the following
information:a) equipment capacity (input and output) and required maintenance actionsb) equipment operation and
maintenance manualsc) HVAC system control maintenance and calibration information, including wiring diagrams,
schematics, and control sequence descriptions; desired or field -determined set points must be permanently recorded on
control drawings, at control devices, or, for digital control systems, in programming commentsd) complete narrative
ofhow each system is intended to operate.
13. Each supply air outlet or diffitser and each zone terminal device (such as VAV or mixing box) must have its own
balancing device. Acceptable balancing devices include adjustable dampers located within the ductwork, terminal
devices, and supply air diffusers.
14. Service water heating equipment must meet minimum Federal efficiency requirements included in the National
Appliance Energy Conservation Act and the Energy Policy Act of 1992, which meet or exceed ASHRAE 90.1 Code.
New service water heating equipment can be assumed to meet these requirements.
15. Water -heating equipment must be provided with controls that allow the user to set the water temperature to 110
degree F for dwelling units and 90 degree F fir other occupancies. Controls must limit output temperatures of
lavatories in public facility restrooms to 1 10 degree F.
I
�l
Permit #
_ Permit Date
COMcheck Software 'version 3.1 Release 1
Lighting Compliance Certificate
2000 IECC
Report Date: 05/17/07
Data filename: C:1Program Files\Check\COMcheck\NW Little League.cck
Section 1: Project information
Project Title: North West Little League Baseball Complex - Concession, Toilet, and Typical Press Box
Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor:
Lubbock, TX BSA Consulting Engineers, PLLC
Section 2: General Information
Building Use Description by: Activity Type
Project Type: Now Construction
Activity Type(s) Floor -Area
Kitchen 600
Corridor, Restroom, Support Area 600
Other 100
Section 3: Requirements Checklist
Interior Lighting:
❑ 1. Total actual watts must be less than or equal to total allowed watts.
Allowed Watts Actual Watts Complies
1900 1823 YES
Exterior Lighting:
ZI 2. Efficacy greater than 45 lumens/W.
Exceptions:
Specialized lighting highlighting features of historic buildings; signage; safety or security lighting; low -voltage landscape
lighting.
1 Controls, Switching, and Wiring:
❑ 3.
Independent controls for each space (switch/occupancy sensor).
Exceptions:
I
Areas that must be continuously illuminated.
�aJ ❑ 4.
Master switch at entry to hotel/motel guest room.
❑ 5.
Each space provided with a manual control to provide uniform light reduction capability.
Exceptions:
Only one Iuminaire in space;
An occupant -sensing device controls the area;
The area is a corridor, storeroom, restroom, public lobby or guest room;
Areas that must be continuously Illuminated.
❑ 6.
Photocell/astronomical time switch on exterior lights.
Exceptions:
h
Lighting intended for 24 hour use.
Page 1 of 3
7. Tandem wired one -lamp and three -lamp ballasted luminaires (No single -lamp ballasts).
Exceptions:
Electronic high -frequency ballasts; Luminaires not on same switch.
Section 4: Compliance Statement
Compliance Statement: The proposed lighting design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans,
specifications and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed lighting system has been designed to
meet the 2000 IECC requirements in COMcheck Version 3.1 Release 1 and t compiy ith the mandatory requirements in the
Requirements Checklist.
MO-9 14-1-0-r10J g y. l 7. o?
Principal Lighting Designer -Name ature Date
Page 2 of 3
_.l
L
_J
Permit #
Permit Date
COWicheck Software Version 3.1 Release 1
Lighting Application Worksheet
2000 IECC
Report Date:
Data filename: C:\Program FIIeslChecklCOMcheckWW Little League.cck
Section 1: Allowed Lighting Power Calculation
A
B
C
D
Area Category
Floor Area
Allowed
Allowed Watts
(M)
Watts / ft2
(B x C)
Kitchen
600
2.2
1320
Corridor, Restroom, Support Area
600
0.8
480
Other
100
1
100
Total Allowed Watts =
1900
Section 2: Actual Lighting Power Calculation
A
B
C
D
E
Fixture ID : Description / Lamp / Wattage Per Lamp / Ballast
Lamps/
# of
Fixture
(C X D)
Fixture
Fixtures
Watt.
Linear Fluorescent 1: A: STATIC TROFFER / 48" T8 32W / Electronic
4
7
121
847
Linear Fluorescent 2: C: LENSED STRIP / 48" T8 32W / Electronic
2
9
61
549
Linear Fluorescent 3: H: STRIP LIGHT / 48" T8 32W / Electronic
2
7
61
427
Total Actual Watts =
1823
Section 3: Compliance Calculation
If the Total Allowed Watts minus the Total Actual Watts is greater than or equal to zero, the building complies.
Total Allowed Watts = 1900
Total Actual Wafts = 1823
Project Compliance = 77
ti ��Page 3 of 3
May 11,2007
SECTION 01040
COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Coordination.
B. Renovation project procedures.
C. Existing conditions.
D. Pre -Construction conference.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of
specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent
construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B. A separate project schedule shall be provided by the contractor.
C. Do not commence work at the site, until all of the materials and equipment to be incorporated into
the project are on the site or within one day of delivery to the site.
D. The contractor shall schedule and coordinate the work so that once Notice to Proceed is given and
work commences, the work will progress continually without interruption until the work at the site
is substantially completed.
E. Contractor shall coordinate completion and clean up of work in preparation for substantial
completion.
F, Contractor shall coordinate all construction activities and storage of materials with the architect
and city representative so as to minimize disruption of activities at the sites. The facilities shall
continue their daily activities throughout the life of this contract.
1.4 RENOVATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
A. Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and
extending work.
B. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring
products and finishes to original condition.
6n2au4nanEc�uapGc o� P 55�6S,g... W. COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01040 - 1
May 11,2007
C. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched
work to match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. Notify architect if conditions will
not allow an acceptable transition.
D. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate
existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to the
architect.
1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Underground utilities: Failure of the drawings to show underground utility lines or other concealed
piping, wiring and the like shall not be constructed as a guarantee on the part of the architect or the
owner that such conditions do not exist, though unknown. All operations involving excavation or
removals shall be done at the risk of the contractor who shall take the necessary precautions to
protect employees and the public from injury or death and to avoid damage to existing systems.
B. Damage to existing systems: Whether exposed or concealed, any piping (such as piping for gas,
water, waste, vent, drainage, sewer, heating, or cooling systems, etc.) or wiring (such as wiring for
electric lighting, power, public address, telephone, or signalling systems, etc.) which is
encountered during the construction period and becomes damaged shall be repaired or replaced at
contractor's expense. Only life and property threatening conditions may be repaired prior to a
fully executed field order.
1.6 PRE -CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Attendance: After award of contract and prior to start of construction, contractor's direct
representative, major subcontractors, owner's employees responsible for project, architects and
engineers shall attend conference. Time and location as mutually agreed.
B. Agenda:
1. Execution of Owner -Contractor Agreement.
2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
3. Distribution of Contract Documents.
4. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress
schedule.
5. Designation of personnel representing the parties in contract.
6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for
payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.
7. Use of premises by owner and contractor.
8. Owner's requirements.
9. Security and housekeeping procedures.
10. Project Schedules.
11. Procedures for maintaining record documents.
12. Texas Accessibility Standards.
Bea �vcua`Xv"oS�C.' 1oc COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
�1
01040 - 2
May 11.2007
1.7 PRE -ROOFING CONFERENCE
A. Attendance: At appropriate phase during construction, contractor's direct representative, roofing
subcontractor's superintendent,. state employees responsible for project and architect shall attend
conference. Date, time and location as mutually agreed.
B. Purpose:
1. To familiarize owner's employees, architect and roofing subcontractor with roof system
to be installed.
2. Mutual interpretation of plans and specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
6.2%1AgffrVe.1'PArWh6.2 ` COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
01040 - 3
May 11.2007
SECTION 01090
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Quality assurance.
B. Schedule of references.
C. Adherence to accessibility standards.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions: Reference Standards.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal standards, comply with
requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by
applicable codes.
B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of contract documents.
C. Obtain copies of standards when required by contract documents.
D. Should specified reference standards conflict with contract documents, request clarification from
architect before proceeding.
E. The contractual relationship of the parties to the contract shall not be altered from the contract
documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
1.5 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES
AA
Aluminum Association
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ACI
American Concrete Institute
ADA
Americans with Disabilities Act
ADC
Air Diffusion Council
AGA
American Gas Association
U auth Chapman icHarvey prohibited. Inc. REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 1
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
AGC
Associated General Contractors of America
AIA
American Institute of Architects
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
APA
American Plywood Association
ARI
Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA
American Wood -Preservers' Association
AWS
American Welding Society
AWWA
American Water Works Association
BHMA
Builder's Hardware Manufacturer Association
BIA
Brick Institute of America
CDA
Copper Development Association
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
CPSC
Consumer Product Safety Commission
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
EJMA
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association
FGMA
Flat Glass Marketing Association
FM
Factory Mutual System
FS
Federal Specification
GA
Gypsum Association
0 2007 Chapman Harvey Architects. Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 2
_8 l
ICBO
International Conference of Building Officials
3
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
MBMA
Metal Building Manufacturers Association.
MLJSFAMetal
Lath/Steel Framing Association
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association
NECA
National Electrical Contractor Association
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
NPCA
National Paint and Coating Association
NRCA
National Roofing Contractor Association
NWMA
National Woodwork Manufacturers Association
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
I
1
PCA
Portland Cement Association
PS
Product Standard
` 1
RMA
Rubber Manufacturers Association
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
--a
SDI
Steel Door Institute
l
SGCC
Safety Glazing Certification Council
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' Association
SSPC
Steel Structures Painting Council
j
TAS
Texas Accessibility Standards
TCA
Tile Council of America, Inc.
UL
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WRI
Wire Reinforcement Institute
G 2007 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090 - 3
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
WWPA Woven Wire Products Association
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 The general contractor and all sub -contractors constructing, installing, or providing materials for this
project shall provide and/or install building components that comply with these standards.
3.2 Special attention shall be given to Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Texas Accessibility
Standards (TAS) criteria. The contractors shall make themselves knowledgeable of ADA and TAS criteria
and shall comply with the latest adopted version of these standards and acts.
END OF SECTION
0 2007 Chapman Harvey Archhem, Inc.
Unauthorized duplfcatanprohfhited. REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 4
May 11, 2007
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
PART] GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submittal procedures.
B. Schedule of Values.
C. Construction Progress Schedules.
D. Application for Payment.
E. Shop drawings.
F. Samples.
G. Change Procedures.
H. Manufacturer's instructions.
I. Manufacturer's certificates.
J. Submittal Schedule.
K. AIA Form G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment.
L. AIA Form G703 - Continuation Sheet.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01700 -Contract Closeout: Contract warranty and closeout submittals.
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Transmit each submittal with AIA Form G810 or contractor's standard preprinted transmittal form.
Identify the project title, project number, numbers of copies submitted, notice of deviation from
contract documents and any other pertinent data.
B. Sequentially number the transmittal forms.
C. Identify project, contractor, subcontractors or supplier; pertinent drawing sheet and detail
number(s), and specification section number, as appropriate.
D. Coordinate and schedule submittals to expedite the project.
Oneu 7092e�'aupGcat., �o5u6nea. Inc.
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 1
May 1 I, 2007
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
E. Deliver all copies of the submittals to the architect's business address.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Using AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment, Continuation Sheet, submit
Schedule of Values to Architect.
B. Submit Schedule of Values within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. Provide
two copies.
C. Use the Table of Contents to establish Schedule of Values format. Identify each line item with
number and title of the specification section.
D. Include in each line item any amount of Allowances specified in the project.
E. Include within each line item Contractor's overhead and profit.
F. Each application, revise schedule to list approved Change Orders to date.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to
Proceed for architect's review.
B. Revise and resubmit as required.
C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous
version.
D. Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major section of work or operation,
identifying first work day of each week.
E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying work of separate stages and other
logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and
duration.
F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of work at each submission.
G. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery
dates, including those furnished by owner and under allowances.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Submit three copies of each application on AIA Form G702 - Application and Certificate for
Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet.
B. Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment.
C. Payment period to be as defined in Owner -Contractor Agreement.
D. Include one copy of waiver of liens from each subcontractor.
SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings with all product literature, cut sheets, and photographs in a bound format.
8.7 .i.7gi.�°"�.•"°` SUBMITTALS 01300 - 2
May 11.2007
B. Submit the number of copies which the contractor requires, plus three copies which will be
retained by the architect and owner. The architect will deliver two copies to owner for their review
and comment.
C. Mark in GREEN INK each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.
Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this project. The
architect's review comments will be in RED INK.
D. Apply contractor's stamp, signed, or initialed certifying that review, verification of products
required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information is in
accordance with the requirements of the work and contract documents. Submittals delivered to the
architect for review that have not been stamped and initialed will be returned without review.
E. Identify variations from contract documents and product or system limitations which may be
detrimental to successful performance of the completed work.
F. Provide space for architect's review stamps.
G. Revise and resubmit shop drawings as required, identify all changes made since previous
submittal.
H. Distribute copies of reviewed and approved shop drawings to concerned parties. Instruct parties to
promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.
I. Provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
1.9 SHOP DRAWING REVIEW
A. The architect shall affix a stamp upon the submittal with appropriate wording stating if submittal is
accepted, accepted with noted revisions, revise and re -submit, or rejected. Rejected submittals are
to be completely re -worked, assigned a new submittal number, and submitted as a new submittal.
B. The architect shall provide copies of the submittal to the owner for the owner's review at the same
time the architect is reviewing shop drawings.
C. The contractor shall not begin work or order material for which a submittal is required until a
submittal has been stamped accepted or accepted with noted revisions and returned to the
contractor.
D. Schedule submissions at least 14 working days before date reviewed submittal will be needed. The
architect shall be allowed 14 working days for each submittal review.
E. The architect shall notify the contractor when submittals are reviewed and ready for inclusion into
the project.
F. The architect shall review the same shop drawing submittal no more than two times. If more than
two submittals are required in order to achieve an accepted submittal, the contractor shall be
charged $105.00 per hour for each review beyond the initial two. The architect's review fee shall
be paid by the contractor in full prior to the release of the accepted shop drawings.
1.10 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral
parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing with work.
6��4nor' B"r�' �'P 5ft1€�..'"`. SUBMITTALS 01300 - 3
May 11, 2007
B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors or in custom
colors selected, textures, and patterns for architect's selection.
C. Include identification on each sample, with full project information.
D. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification sections. Provide at least two
copies of each item being submitted for review and selection. These copies will not be returned.
E. Reviewed samples which may be used in the work are indicated in individual specification
sections.
CHANGE PROCEDURES
A. The Architect may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed
change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications and a change in Contract Time
for executing the change. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate withing seven days.
B. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting request for change to the Architect,
describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing the
reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with, full
documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors.
Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600.
C. Architect may issue a directive, on AIA form G713 Construction Change Directive signed by the
Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion
in a Change Order. Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of
determining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute the change.
D. Owner will issue Change Orders, using the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department's Standard
Change Order Form, for signatures of all parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.
1.12 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS
1.13
PART 2
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for
delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified
for product data.
B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and contract documents.
MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to architect
for review, in quantities specified for product data.
B. Indicate that material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit
supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to
architect.
PRODUCTS
8 0 7 QM O .qP t 1. SUBMITTALS 01300 - 4
May 11. 2007
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
Section No.
Section Title
Paragraph
01400 ....................................................Quality Control...........................................................1.8
01500....................................................Construction Facilities ................................................ 1.4
..................................................................................................................................................1.7
..................................................................................................................................................1.12
01600 ....................................................Material and Equipment .............................................. 1.7
..................................................................................................................................................1.8
01700 ....................................................Contract Closeout ........................................................ 1.3
..................................................................................................................................................1.6
.................................................................................................................................................. L7
..................................................................................................................................................1.8
..................................................................................................................................................1.9
02577 ....................................................Pavement Marking ....................................................... 1.4
..................................................................................................................................................3.2
..................................................................................................................................................3.5
02810 ....................................................Landscape Irrigation...................................................1.4
02905.................................................... Landscaping................................................................1.7
03300.................................................... Concrete ...................................................................... 1.5
..................................................................................................................................................2.2
..................................................................................................................................................2.6
..................................................................................................................................................2.7
..................................................................................................................................................3.14
04340 ....................................................Reinforced Unit Masonry System ............................... 1.5
05120 .................................................:..Structural Steel ............................................................ 1.4
05500....................................................Metal Fabrications ...................................................... 1.6
06125.................................................... Wood Deck.................................................................1.4
07900....................................................Joint Sealers ................................................................ 1.6
08111 .................................................... Steel Doors and Frames..............................................1.6
08360 ....................................................Upward Acting Sectional Doors.................................1.6
08700 ....................... .............................Finish Hardware .......................................................... 1.8
09900.................................................... Painting ....................................................................... 1.7
(This list is provided as a general guideline and is not intended to list all required submittals.)
END OF SECTION
B.1%10 ff2E"P ary 5S.h6i`�a`.• Inc SUBMITTALS 01300 - 5
DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY
The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following:
DIVISION I - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01300 Submittals
01356 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures
01555 Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
02082 Pre -Cast Concrete Manholes
02084 Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers
02151 Trench Safety Systems
02210 Demolition, Removal, and Salvaging of Existing Materials
02230 Site Clearing
02300 Excavation, Subgrade Preparation, Grading, Embankment, and Topsoiling
02317 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities
02320 Utility Backfill Materials
02533 Acceptance Testing for Sewers
02540 Sanitary Sewer
02577 Pavement Markings
02665 Water Works Piping, Valves, and Miscellaneous Items
02700 Site Utilities
02720 Aggregate Base Course
02741 Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving
02751 Reinforced Concrete for Site Work
02764 Pavement Joint Sealant
p. F
SECTION 01356
STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION MEASURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Where required, the Contractor shall develop a SWPPP, file a Notice of Intent (NOI) and
implement storm water pollution prevention measures shown on the drawings. The
Contractor shall be responsible for any fines or penalties assessed by the appropriate
regulatory agency for failure to make required inspections, failure to properly document
those inspections, and/or failure to adequately implement and adjust the storm water
pollution prevention measures where a SWP3 is implemented.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Inspection Reports.
1.3 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
A. General
I 1. Structural measures shall be implemented to divert flows from exposed soils,
temporarily store flows, or otherwise limit run-off and the discharge of pollutants
from exposed areas of the site. Structural practices shall be implemented in a timely
I manner during the construction process to minimize erosion and sediment run-off.
B. Stabilized Ingress/Egress
1. Stabilized access to and from the construction site shall be installed as soon as
practical where a SWP3 is required.
L
2. In all cases, Contractor shall ensure that any soil tracked off -site is cleaned from
existing roads, alleys, and any adjacent properties as soon as possible. The
Contractor or other responsible party shall check for any pollutants (mud, silt, sand,
Icement, construction materials, etc.) tracked or washed off -site and perform
necessary clean-up measures at the end of each workday.
C. Silt Fences/Diversion Berms
1. Where necessary, the Contractor shall provide silt fences and/or diversion berms as a
temporary structural practice to minimize erosion and sediment runoff. Silt fences
7 and/or diversion berms shall be properly installed to effectively retain sediment
immediately after completing each phase of work where erosion would occur in the
form of sheet and rill erosion (e.g. clearing and grubbing, excavation, embankment,
-� and grading).
D. Sand/Gravel Bags
1. The Contractor may provide sand/gravel bags as a temporary structural practice to
minimize�erosion and sediment runoff. Bags shall be properly placed to effectively
retain sediment immediately after completing each phase of work (e.g., clearing and
grubbing, excavation, embankment, and grading) in each independent runoff area
,.,.� (e.g., after clearing and grubbing in an area between a ridge and drain, bags shall be!
placed as work progresses, bags shall be removed/replaced/relocated as needed for
work to progress in the drainage area). Sand/gravel bags must remain in good
condition, or they shall be replaced.
01275006 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION MEASURES 01356 - l
n c ins
E. Site Stabilization
l . Contractor shall disturb the Ieast amount of site area as possible.
2. Stabilization measures may include any of the following measures:
a. temporary or permanent seeding or sodding,
b. mulching,
C. geotextiles,
d. vegetative buffer strips,
e. paving.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
A. A SWP3 is only required if the limits of disturbance exceed 1.0 AC.
B. If limits of disturbance (at any project site) exceed 1 AC, the Contractor is responsible for
meeting requirements of TPDES. (Contractor shall develop SWPPP and implement
SWPPP measures).
C. A completed Construction Site Notice form in accordance with the requirements of the
State's general permit for storm water discharges from construction sites will be prepared
by the Contractor (where a SWP3 is required).
D. The SWP3 (where required) shall be continually updated as necessary to reflect current and
changing conditions on site. Additional measures not specifically shown in the SWP3 may
be used to control erosion from leaving the site.
END OF SECTION 01356
01275006 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION MEASURES 01356 - 2
May 11. 2007
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
PARTI GENERAL
I 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
ISection.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
a
A.
Quality assurance and control of installation.
B.
References.
C.
Field samples.
D.
Inspection and testing laboratory services.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01090 - Reference Standards.
B.
Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and Certificates.
C.
Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Requirements for material and product quality.
D.
Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and tests required and standards for testing.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A.
Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce work of specified quality.
B.
Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C.
Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with contract documents, request clarification from
architect before proceeding.
D.
Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the work except when more stringent
tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise
workmanship.
E.
Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
F.
Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,
vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.
1.5 REFERENCES
Bn2authonze8"daopficat, rr55u6u`eds
Inc. QUALITY CONTROL 01400 - 1
May 11. 2007
A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of contract documents.
B. Obtain copies of standards when required by contract documents.
C. Should specified reference standards conflict with contract documents, request clarification from
architect before proceeding.
D. The contractual relationship of the parties to the contract shall not be altered from the contract
documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
E. ANSFASTM E329 - Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete,
Steel, and Bituminous Materials Used in Construction.
1.6 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications sections for review.
B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the work.
C. Where field sample is specified in individual sections to be removed, clear area after field sample
has been accepted by architect.
1.7 OWNER'S INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. Owner may employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory or owner may use its
own personnel and facilities to perform inspection and testing laboratory services.
B. If the results provided by the Owner's laboratory differ from the contractor's laboratory report, the
owner's laboratory shall be final and contractor shall pay for tests.
C. Work found to be unsatisfactory according to test results, shall be removed from the project and
re -constructed at contractor's expense.
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. The contractor shall employ and pay for a reputable testing laboratory to perform inspections,
tests, and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by the
architect.
B. The testing laboratory shall be submitted to the architect for review and acceptance two weeks
prior to the first sampling of construction materials.
1. Submittal shall provide years of experience qualifications and certificates of owners, and
name lab representative who will be responsible for this project.
C. Reports will be submitted directly to the architect from laboratory, in duplicate, indicating
observations and results of test and indicating compliance or non-compliance with contract
documents. Copies of reports shall also be sent to the contractor for his use.
6.20' r..7P 5�"6��"j, Im QUALITY CONTROL 01400 - 2
May 11,2007
D. Cooperate with testing laboratory: furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools,
storage and assistance as requested.
1. Notify testing laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring
services.
2. Make arrangements with testing laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests
required for contractor's use.
E. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by
the same testing laboratory on instructions by the architect. Payment for retesting will be charged
to the contractor by deducting inspection or testing charges from the contract sum.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
6CJu�naan�-l...q,Ar�h�teCW.Inc.
nau20 onz up �rouo pro le
QUALITY CONTROL
01400 - 3
May 11. 2007
.y
1 SECTION 01500
I CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
r...
4�
r.
Ly
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this
` Section.
1
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sanitary Facilities: Contractor's employees, city employees and public.
B. Temporary Utilities: Electrical, water, sewer, gas and telephone.
C. Field Offices: Services and size.
D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the work, and storm water
control.
E. Construction Facilities: Parking, progress cleaning, and project signage.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01700 -Contract Closeout: Final cleaning.
1.4 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures.
B. Provide suitable temporary toilet facilities at beginning of work. Review proposed toilet facilities
location, and signage with architect prior to installation.
1.5 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Contractor shall furnish and install all temporary piping and wiring required for construction.
B. Contractor shall provide construction meter loop for temporary power and pay cost of electrical
power used for construction.
C. Contractor shall provide construction water and pay cost of water used for construction.
D. Contractor shall provide all service equipment and gas required for construction.
E. All temporary utility connections and distribution shall be approved by owner and respective local
utility companies, and shall be removed by contractor at completion of construction.
1.6 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES
A. Provide weather tight enclosure with lights, telephone, and layout table for drawings.
B. Facility shall be large enough to allow for at least three people to stand and meet comfortably.
Oneulhonze 'p c or� pr01io% ' .Inc.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
01500 - 1
May 11. 2007
1.7 BARRIERS
A. Provide suitable barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas while still allowing
access for owner's use of site. Protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage
during construction operation and demolition. Type of barrier to be used will be at the discretion
of the contractor and the circumstance involved. The contractor to submit proposed barrier for
review and approval by owner.
B. Protect vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
C. Clearly post warning signs all around the work sites. Signs are to be secured to the barriers.
D. Suitable barriers include durable solid partitions, chain -link fences, temporary dust and acoustic
partitions and woven fabric. Suitable barriers do not include ropes or warning tape tied to saw
horses or similar devices.
E. Prohibit traffic through landscaped areas.
F. Contractor is to maintain an 8'-0" fence around the existing reservoir throughout the project until
the new screen wall is complete and secure. r
1.8 STORM WATER CONTROL
A. Grade site for positive drainage around new construction. Maintain excavations free of water.
Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment when necessary.
B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from
soil erosion.
C. Contractor shall file and maintain a storm water Retention Plan as required by the State of Texas.
1.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification
sections.
B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in the
immediate work area so as to minimize damage of installed work.
1.10 PROTECTION OF LANDSCAPING
A. Prohibit traffic through landscaped areas. Damaged landscape shall be replaced at no cost to
owner.
B. Provide weight dissipating panels under all vehicle tires, tracks, stabilizing arms, and trailer
tongues when traveling across or parked on lawns.
C. Efforts shall be made to minimize travel on lawns or other landscaped areas. Repair damaged
landscaping to an acceptable condition.
1.11 SECURITY
A. Contractor shall provide security and facilities to protect work, existing facilities, and owner's
operations directly adjacent to new construction from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.
8.2°�4doQM'�'a� i'°` CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01500 - 2
i
Mav 11, 2007
(jj
B. The loss of building materials and/or equipment from the job site will be replaced with same at
contractor's expense.
C. Coordinate with owner's security program.
1.12 PARKING
A. Arrange for temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel.
B. Coordinate with owner for owner's employee parking.
C. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off -site parking.
1.13 PROJECT SIGNAGE
A. With permission from the City of Lubbock, contractor, sub -contractors, owner, and architect are to
share one combined sign measuring no more than 4 feet wide and 8 feet high, mounted securely to
sign posts. If the contractor wishes to share the sign, the owner shall review wording and location
before sign is installed.
B. Project sign is to be constructed of weather resistant material, submit sign material for review,
C.
Project signs are to remain in place until the project is complete. Remove signs only upon
reaching substantial completion.
1.14 PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean; orderly
condition. Do not allow lawns or weeds to grow taller than six inches.
3�
B.
Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site weekly and dispose off -site.
C.
Do not allow hazardous conditions to develop or continue. This shall include lumber with un-
pulled nails and concrete with projecting rebars.
1.15 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
..
A.
Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to
substantial completion inspections.
B.
Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
C.
Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent
facilities used during construction to specified condition.
"1
D.
Remove all job signs, barriers, fences, controls and repair holes dug for posts; regrade lawn and/or
sod as necessary.
1.16 HAUL ROUTE
A.
All materials, tools, equipment, etc. shall be transported via the shortest route possible.
B.
No vehicles are permitted in residential areas. All Haul Routes should only utilize Memphis and/or
82°d Street.
_i
6",uihoW8"du'p ca IigP of %'1bS` 1nc CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01500 - 3
May 11.2007
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
i
qn2 � pMaWnv'`onhG InCONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01500 - 4
SECTION 01555
BARRICADES, SIGNS AND TRAFFIC HANDLING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Item shall govern for providing, installing, moving, replacing, maintaining, cleaning
and removing upon completion of work, all barricades, portable barriers, signs, portable
changeable message signs, cones, lights and other such type devices and of handling traffic
as directed by the Engineer or Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
A. All barricades, signs and other types of devices listed above shall conform to details shown
on the plans or those indicated in the Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
(TMUTCD). All traffic control devices shall be crashworthy according to the guidelines set
forth in the National Cooperative Highway Research Program (NCHRP) Report 350.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall propose his own Traffic Control Plan (TCP) as necessary for phased
construction. Contractor -proposed TCP shall bear the seal of a Texas Licensed
Professional Engineer. If his plan is approved in writing by the Engineer or Owner, it may
be used. Prior to beginning work, the Contractor shall designate, in writing, a competent
person who will be responsible and available on the project site or in the immediate area to
insure compliance with the TCP.
3.2 MAINTENANCE
A. All retroreflective traffic control devices such as barricades, vertical panels, signs, etc.,
shall be maintained by cleaning, replacing or a combination thereof such that during
darkness and rain the retroreflective characteristics shall equal or exceed the retroreflective
characteristics of traffic industry standard reflective panels.
END OF SECTION 01555
01275006 BARRICADES, SIGNS AND TRAFFIC HANDLING
01555 - 1
May 11, 2007
SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
IA.
Products.
B.
Transportation and handling.
C.
Storage and
protection.
D.
Product options.
E.
Substitutions.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Instruction to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures.
I1.4
PRODUCTS
A.
Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming
II
the work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying,
F
and erection of the work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for
salvage and reuse.
B.
Do not reuse materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically
`
permitted by the contract documents or as approved b the architect.
PP Y
C.
For similar components provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer.
,. a
D.
All materials are to be certified asbestos -free.
E.
Manufacturers shall provide written certification that all equipment and controls are compliant
with Year 2000 guidelines. Such guidelines are to be identified in the Operations and Maintenance
Manual described in Section 01700, Contract Closeout.
1.5 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A.
Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are
-i
correct, and products are undamaged.
C.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement,
or damage.
s
�r�a lion�i°.c�'3u"pGea�iup roiub ie`�'°`' MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 1
May 11, 2007
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery:
1. Deliver materials, products and equipment to the project site in undamaged condition in
manufacturer's original unopened containers or packaging with identify labels intact and
legible.
2. Arrange deliveries in accordance with the construction schedule and in ample time to
facilitate inspection prior to installation in order to avoid unnecessary delays in the
construction process.
B. Storage:
1. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and
labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled
enclosures.
2. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground.
3. Provide off -site storage and protection when site does not permit on -site storage or
protection.
4. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide
ventilation to avoid condensation.
5. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Provide
mixing with foreign matter.
6. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
7. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to
assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.
C. Handling:
1. Handle materials, products and equipment in a manner prescribed by the manufacturer or
as required to protect from damage during storage and installation.
2. Do not handle material in such a way that may leave permanent scars, dents, impressions,
cracks, or blemishes.
1.7 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products specified by reference standards or by description only: Any product meeting those
standards or description.
B. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and
meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers with a provision for substitutions:
Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Instructions to bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the
bidding period to requirements specified in this section.
B. Substitutions may be considered after the bid date only when a product becomes unavailable
through no fault to the contractor.
C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution
with contract documents.
I
}J
610%7,9 �pVX12�"aft.U, MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 2
7
t�
May 11,2007
D. A request constitutes a representation that the contractor:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality
level of the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work which may be required for
the work to be complete with no additional cost to owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become
apparent.
5. Will reimburse for review or redesign services associated with re -approval by authorities.
E. Will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data
submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the
contract documents.
F. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
I1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to
one proposed substitution.
2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed
product's equivalence.
3. The architect, after consultation with owner, will notify contractor, in writing, of decision
to accept or reject request.
1.9 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION METHODS OPTIONS
A. Where contract documents indicate no specific method of construction, the contractor shall employ
standard industry practices.
B. Where contract documents indicate a specific method of construction, the contractor shall employ
the method indicated or, at his option, may submit a written request for an alternate method of
construction.
C. Architect/engineer will consider written requests for alternate construction methods, if received in
time as to allow for review and return of such requests and for alternation to be made with no delay
to total construction methods. See contract for total working days allowed.
D. Submit separate requests for each alternate. Support each request with three copes of complete
details and/or documentation for alteration.
1. Indicate changes of materials to be used.
2. Show significant effects of alterations to other affects of alterations to other affected
areas.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
��B'�'Pron pro5u6�`•'°` MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 3
: May 11, 2007
I SECTION 01700
i
` CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART1 GENERAL
I 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION
INCLUDES
}�
A.
Closeout procedures.
B.
Final cleaning.
C.
Adjustments.
D.
Project record documents.
E.
Project Record Binders.
F.
Warranties and Certificates.
G.
H.
Texas Accessibility Standards Warranty.
Spare
parts and maintenance materials.
I.
Starting of systems.
1.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.
Submit written certification that contract documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected,
and that work is complete in accordance with contract documents and ready for architect's inspection.
Final payment will be authorized only after all requirements of this section have been met, all punch
YB.
'i
list items have been completed and verified by the architect, updated record documents have been
delivered to the architect, and complete operation and maintenance manuals have been delivered to the
architect. Submit final application for payment identifying total adjusted contract sum, previous
payments, and sum remaining due.
t
1.4 FINAL
CLEANING
A.
Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.
--
B.
Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and
foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
J
C.
Clean equipment and fixtures to a new and sanitary condition.
D.
Replace all filters of operating equipment with new, clean filters. Provide owner with one complete
set of all filters required for all equipment.
E.
Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
6.2°4no °B`2�"P a1, on pmS61.`k. Im CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 1
j"
May 11, 2007
F. Clean site; sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped surfaces.
G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.
1.5 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
B. If adjustments cannot provide a smooth and unhindered operation, replace product with matching item
that will operate correctly.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the work:
1. Contract drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change orders and other modifications to the contract.
5. Accepted shop drawings, product data, and samples.
B. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. Do not wait to update Record Documents
at the end of work, update as work progresses.
D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products
installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by addenda and modifications.
E. Record documents and shop drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, showing
any and all modifications, including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish main floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original contract drawings.
F. Record Documents are to a part of the final submittal to the architect. Final submittal shall be made
prior to claim for final payment. If possible, bind record documents in Project Record Binders
described in Paragraph 1.7 of this section.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD BINDERS
A. Submit three complete sets of project record data prior to final inspection. Information is to be
organized on 8-1/2 x 11 inch pages, bound in three ring durable plastic covered binders.
$-1sam pox,—.. o��6W 1W CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 2
May 11.2007
-t l
1 B. Prepare binder covers with the printed title of "Project Record", the title of the project, the date the
project was completed, and the subject matter of the binder when multiple binders are required.
1, Label multiple binders as "Volume 1 of II" and "Volume II of lI", as appropriate.
G; 2. Label the outside of the binder cover and edge, as it would be seen when placed on a shelf.
C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as
described below, with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description
identified.
E. Part 1: Directory; listing names, addresses, telephone numbers, and contact person of the architect,
the contractor, the subcontractors, and the major equipment suppliers.
F. Part 2: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
1. All approved shop drawings and product data.
2. Hauling and dumping permits, receipts, and/or manifest.
3. Air and water balance reports.
4. Written statement certifying that all building materials installed in project are asbestos free.
5. Natural gas pressure test and certification.
6. Contractors' Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, use AIA Documents G706, 706A.
7. Certificates issued by the architect; change orders, addenda, field reports, instructions, etc.
8. General Contractor's and Sub -Contractors' warranties. (Section 01700, 1.8)
9. Texas Accessibility Standards Warranty. (Section 01700, 1.9)
10. Certificate of Occupancy issued by governing body.
G. Part 3: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification
section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of subcontractors and
suppliers. Identify the following:
1. Significant design criteria.
2. List of equipment, make, model, and serial number. Verify that numbers are convect.
3. Parts list for each component. (Section 01700, 1.10)
4. Operating instructions.
5. Photocopies of manufacturers' warranties and bonds.
6. Maintenance instructions for special fmishes, including recommended cleaning methods and
materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
1.8 WARRANTIES AND CERTIFICATES
A. Provide original warranties and certificates in bound volumes outlined in Section 01700, 1.7,
B. Where specifications request warranties and certificates, provide such items requested. Warranties are
required of each major sub -contractor who is responsible for an installed building system.
C. If applicable, provide required certifications requested by state and local governing agencies.
Contractor shall forward copies of the certificates directly to the agency, provide proof of delivery.
D. A copy of the certificate of occupancy issued by the governing body having jurisdiction over this
project shall be included in the Record Binder.
E. The following are known required certificates, other certificates may be required.
1. Flame spread/smoke density ratings of carpets.
2. Certificate of Occupancy.
h."°4h ell'3a"Pp —e.y n 5S.'%,IC4• Inc CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 3
`:1}
May 11, 2007
1.9
1.10
F. Provide a written warranty on contractor's business letterhead stating that the building is warranted
against defects in material and labor for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. This is not
necessarily the date of substantial completion. Warranty commences only after final payment.
TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS WARRANTY
A. On the contractor's letterhead, provide a written statement that all installed building components have
been installed according to the latest adopted version of the Texas Accessibility Standards.
B. The statement shall also certify that mounting heights and other locating dimensions provided by the
construction drawings have been followed.
C. A Texas Department of Licensing and Regulations inspector will walk the site within approximately
one year of the completion date. The contractor shall warrant that if, after this walk through, there are
items provided and installed by the contractor that do not comply with the code, the contractor shall
provide the necessary labor and material to correct the unacceptable items. If the construction
documents provided the correct information and this information was not followed, the corrective
work shall be at the contractor's expense. If the corrective work is necessary due to changes in the
code or omission on the documents, circumstances beyond the contractor's control, the work is to be
priced at a fair market value.
D. The contractor's warranty shall state that any necessary corrective work associated to the Texas
Accessibility Standards shall be completed within 30 days of written notification that the installed
work did not pass the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulations inspection.
E. If for some reason the contractor or sub -contractor does not believe that a given dimension or
installation detail is in compliance with the Texas Accessibility Standard, the contractor is obligated to
bring this concern to the architect's attention prior to the original installation, not after the project's
installations have failed inspections.
SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide product names, list of spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in
individual specification sections.
B. Clearly label cartons and containers, identify the contents, and applicable project.
C. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed by owner and obtain receipt prior to final
payment.
STARTING OF SYSTEMS
A. Preparation:
1. Notify architect and owner seven days prior to start-up of each system.
2. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage.
3. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those
required by the equipment or system manufacturer.
4. Verify wiring and support components are complete and tested.
5. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's and owner's representatives
in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
6. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble shooting, servicing maintenance
and shutdown of each piece of equipment to owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of
final inspection.
7. Amount of time to be devoted to instruction shall be reasonable and consistent with size of j
installation and its complexity.
1_.
$.1 o� �'�° o P" a''(;�` • In,.CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 4
i
May It. 2007
PART2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
6'a,o �IM7nP�'cai oo procggecdS'' CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700 - 5
SECTION 02082
PRE -CAST CONCRETE MANHOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section of the specifications pertains to pre -cast concrete manholes and related items.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary
conditions and other Division l specifications, apply to this section.
B. Division 2 Section 02317 — "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities".
C. Division 2 Section 02084 — "Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers".
D. Division 2 Section 02533 - "Acceptance Testing for Sewers."
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile.
B. ASTM C 443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert
Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets.
C. ASTM C 478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections.
D. ASTM C 857 — Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete
Utility Structures.
E. ASTM C 858 — Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structure.
F. ASTM C 1107 - Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Nonshrink).
G. ASTM C 1244 — Standard Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by the Negative Air
Pressure (Vacuum) Test.
H. ASTM D 698 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3)
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform to requirements of Division I Section 01300 - "Submittals".
B. Submit manufacturer's data and details of following items for approval:
1. Shop drawings of manhole sections and base units and construction details,
including reinforcement, jointing methods, materials, and dimensions.
2. Summary of criteria used in the manhole design including, as a minimum, material
properties, loadings, load combinations, and dimensions assumed. Include
certification from manufacturer that precast manhole design is in full accordance
with ASTM C 478 and design criteria as established in Paragraph 2.1 E of this
Specification.
3. Shop drawings of precast concrete vault, including reinforcement, jointing, methods,
materials, and dimensions.
4. Summary of criteria used in the vault design including, as a minimum, material
properties, loadings, load combinations, and dimensions assumed. Include
certification from manufacturer that precast manhole design is in full accordance
with ASTM C 857 and ASTM C 858 latest revisions.
01275006 PRE -CAST CONCRETE MANHOLES
02082 - 1
5. Materials to be used for pipe connections at manhole/vault walls.
6. Materials to be used for stubs and stub plugs, if required.
7. Manufacturer's data for pre -mix (bag) concrete, if used for channel inverts and
benches.
8. Material to be used for sealing of riser joints.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver number of units needed in a timely manner to the project site to ensure installation
continuity.
B. Store and handle the units at the project site to prevent cracking, distortion, staining, or
other physical damage, and so that markings are visible. Lift and support units at
designated lift points.
C. Deliver anchorage items that are to be embedded in other construction before starting such
work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for
installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRE -CAST CONCRETE MANHOLES
A. Provide manhole sections, base sections, and related components conforming tc
ASTM C 478. Provide base riser section with integral floors, unless shown otherwise.
Provide adjustment rings which are standard components of the manufacturer of the
manhole sections. Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer on
inside of barrel.
B. Provide reinforced concrete risers constructed from 48-inch-diameter standard reinforced
concrete manhole sections unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Combine various
lengths of manhole sections to total the correct height with the fewest joints. Wall sections
shall be designed for depth and loading conditions as required in Paragraph 2.1 E, but shall
not be less than 6 inches thick. Base section shall have a minimum thickness of 12 inches
under the invert.
C. Provide tops to receive cast iron frames and covers designed to support an H-20 loading,
unless indicated otherwise.
D. Design Loading Criteria: The manhole walls, transition slabs, tops, and manhole base slab
shall be designed, by the manufacturer, to the requirements of ASTM C 478 for the depth
as shown on Drawings.
E. The minimum clear distance between any two wall penetrations shall be 12 inches, half the
diameter of the smaller penetration, or as specified by the manufacturer, whichever is most
stringent.
F. For sealants used between concrete riser sections, refer to Section 02082, 2.6 B.
G. Lifting holes in manhole sections and bases are not permissible unless such openings can
be made watertight under 5 psi internal pressure, with only minor weeping under 10 psi
internal pressure.
H. Manhole sections must withstand an intermittent internal hydrostatic pressure of 10 psi
without structural failure.
I. For sanitary sewer applications, the Contractor shall supply a primer coating of 5 mils
thickness and a topcoat of 75 mils thickness on all interior surfaces of the manhole. The
primer shall be Polibrid 670 or approved equal as manufactured by Polibrid Coatings, Inc.
The topcoat shall be Polibrid 705 or approved equal as manufactured by Polibrid
01275006 PRE -CAST CONCRETE MANHOLES 02082 - 2
n c inP7
Coatings, Inc. Applications of coatings shall be by spraying as recommended by the
manufacturer. Coated surfaces shall be cleaned to permit visual inspection and spark
testing. A minimum 12 hours after application, the coating shall be spark tested with high -
voltage holiday detection equipment set at a minimum of 100 volts per mil of total coating
thickness. All pinholes detected visually or by spark testing shall be clearly marked and
then repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. At the option of the
Engineer, areas with excessive pinholes shall be re -sprayed rather than patched
individually by hand. Surfaces showing poor adhesion, improperly cured areas, or blisters
will not be accepted and shall be removed or repaired per manufacturer's
recommendations.
2.2 MORTAR
A. Conform to requirements of ASTM C 144.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
A. Provide gray -iron frames, rings, and covers conforming to requirements of Division 2
Section 02084 — "Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers".
2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Provide sealing materials between precast concrete adjustment ring and manhole cover
frame, such as ConSeal CS-202 Butyl Sealant or approved equal.
B. Provide joints between sections with ConSeal CS-202 Butyl Sealant or approved equal
conforming to ASTM C 990.
C. Provide rubber gaskets for ASTM C443 joints.
2.5 BACKFILL MATERIALS
A. Backfill materials shall conform to the requirements of Division 2 Section 02317 -
"Bxcavation and Backfill for Utilities".
2.6 NON -SHRINK GROUT
A. Provide prepackaged, inorganic, flowable, non -gas -liberating, non-metallic, cement -based
grout requiring only the addition of water.
B. Grout shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1107 and shall have a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 7000 psi.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
`"
j A. Verify that lines and grades are correct.
B. Determine if the subgrade, when scarified and recompacted, can be compacted to 95
percent of maximum Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D 698 prior to
placement of foundation material and base section. If it cannot be compacted to that
density, the subgrade shall be moisture conditioned until that density can be reached or
shall be treated as an unstable subgrade.
01275006 PRE -CAST CONCRETE MANHOLES 02082 - 3
3.2 MANHOLE BASE SECTIONS AND FOUNDATIONS
A. Scarify and compact base material to 95% ASTM D698 standard proctor density. If the
subgrade cannot be compacted to the required density or if it contains organic materials,
then excavate to stable subgrade, then backfill with lean concrete backfill to required
elevation.
B. Install base on 6 inches crushed gravel as specified in Division 2 Section 02317 -
"Excavation and Backfill for Utilities".
3.3 PRE -CAST MANHOLE SECTIONS
A. Install sections, joints, and gasket material in accordance with manufacturer's printed
recommendations.
B. Install precast adjustment rings above tops of cones as required to adjust the finished
elevation and to support the manhole frame.
C. Sea] any lifting holes with non -shrink grout where lifting holes have been allowed by the
Engineer.
D. Do not incorporate manhole steps in manhole sections for sanitary sewers.
3.4 PIPE CONNECTIONS AT MANHOLES
A. Ensure that the pipe will not pull out of manhole by using flange or corrugations as shown
on plans.
B. Grout all space between pipe and manhole wall with non -shrink grout and coat with an
epoxy bonding agent.
3.5 INVERTS FOR SEWERS
A. Construct invert channels to provide a smooth flow transition waterway with no disruption
of flow at pipe -manhole connections. Conform to following criteria:
I. Slope of invert bench: 1/2 inch per foot minimum; 1 inch per foot maximum
2. Depth of bench to invert shall be equal to '/2 the largest diameter pipe, entering the
manhole.
3. Invert slope through manhole: 0.10-foot drop across manhole with smooth transition
of invert through manhole, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
B. Form invert channels with concrete if not integral with manhole base section. For direction
changes of mains, construct channels tangent to mains with maximum possible radius of
curvature. Provide curves for side inlets and smooth invert fillets for flow transition
between pipe inverts.
3.6 MANHOLE FRAME AND ADJUSTMENT RINGS
A. Combine precast concrete adjustment rings so that the elevation of the installed casting 1
cover matches the pavement surface. Seal between adjustment ring and the precast top
section with approved sealant material. Seal between adjustment rings with approved
sealant material. Set the cast iron frame on the adjustment ring in a bed of approved
sealant. The sealant bed shall consist of two beads of sealant, each bead having minimum
dimensions of 1/2-inch thick and 3/4-inch wide.
01275006 PRE -CAST CONCRETE MANHOLES 02082 - 4
nsim
B. For manholes in unpaved areas, top of frame shall be set flush with existing ground line
unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. In unpaved areas, encase the manhole frame in
mortar or non -shrink grout placed flush with the face of the manhole ring and the top edge
of the frame. Provide a rounded corner around the perimeter.
3.7 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill materials in the area of excavation surrounding manholes in
accordance with requirements of Division 2 Section 02317 - "Excavation and Backfill for
Utilities". Provide cement stabilized backfill material, as specified for the pipe, from
manhole foundation up to an elevation 12 inches over each pipe connected to the manhole.
Provide trench zone backfill, as specified for the adjacent utilities, above the cement
stabilized backfill.
3.8 TESTING
A. Vacuum test manhole according to ASTM C 1244. Refer to Division 2 Section 02533 —
"Acceptance Testing For Sewers".
3.9 PROTECTION
A
Protect manholes from damage until work has been finally accepted. Repair damage to
manholes at no additional cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION 02082
01275006
PRE -CAST CONCRETE MANHOLES
02082 - 5
SECTION 02084
FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
L ] SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section of the specifications covers iron castings for use as manhole frames and lids, gratings,
and rings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Division 2 Section 02082 — "Pre -cast Concrete Manholes".
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials Standard
Specification for Highway Bridges.
B. ASTM A 48 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
C. ASTM C 185 - Standard Specification for Reinforcing.
D. ASTM A-15, A-16, or A-305.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data in accordance with Division 1 Section 01330 "Submittals".
B. Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details,
and installation instructions.
C. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and 'installation of casting assemblies that are not included in
4. Drawings. Include plans, elevations, sections and connection details. Show anchorage and
accessory items. Include setting drawings for location and installation of castings and anchorage
devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
'1
2.1 GENERAL CASTINGS
A. Castings for frames, grates, rings and covers shall conform to ASTM A 48, Class 35. Provide
locking covers if indicated on Drawings.
B. Castings shall be capable of withstanding the application of an AASHTO H-20 loading without
F permanent deformation.
C. Fabricate castings to conform to the shapes, dimensions, and with wording or logos shown on the
u� Drawings. Standard dimensions for manhole covers are 24 inches in diameter. Cast dimensions
may vary by +/- 1/16 inch per foot. Weight shall not vary from published weight by more than +/-
i 5 percent.
D. Castings shall be clean, free from blowholes and other surface imperfections. Cast holes in covers
shall be clean and symmetrical, free of plugs.
01275006 FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS 02084 - l
2.2 FRAMES AND COVERS FOR MANHOLES
A. Provide frames and covers for sanitary and storm sewer manholes by East Jordan Iron Works or
approved equal.
B. Cover shall be labeled "Sanitary Sewer."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install castings according to approved shop drawings, instructions given in related specifications,
and applicable directions from the manufacturer's printed materials.
B. Set castings accurately at required locations to proper alignment and elevation. Keep castings
plumb, level, true, and free of rack. Measure location accurately from established lines and grades.
Brace or anchor frames temporarily in formwork until permanently set.
END OF SECTION 02084
01275006 FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS 02084 - 2
SECTION 02151
TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEMS
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
This section of the specifications covers trench safety systems for trench excavations greater than
five feet in depth. All work performed under this section shall also comply with OSHA Part 1926,
Subpart P and all State and Local codes.
The Contractor shall be responsible for complying with the requirements of the specifications,
drawings and all applicable codes. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any
unforeseen field conditions which might affect the integrity of the trench safety system.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions
B. Supplementary General Conditions
C. Division 2 Section 02230 - "Site Clearing".
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work includes but is not limited to trench and excavation safety systems either by cut
back method or braced excavation method for all trenches five feet and deeper whether indicated on
the drawings or required by actual field conditions. Trenches not exceeding five feet in depth shall be
protected as required by OSHA, State and Local standards.
Alternative methods of trench safety may be submitted for approval to the Engineer; however,
alternative methods will not be reviewed or approved prior to bid opening.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Provide detail drawings for proposed trench safety systems. Clearly identify where each system is
proposed for use and type of system to be used. Trench excavations cannot be started until trench
safety systems have been submitted.
A. Trench Boxes - Submit manufacturer's standard data sheet and certificate of compliance signed
by a registered engineer stating the maximum allowable depth for the given design pressure for
each type of trench box proposed for use.
B. Alternative Systems - If alternative systems composed of steel, aluminum, wood or a
combination of materials are proposed, submit design calculations signed by a registered
engineer showing all member properties, design strengths and any stress increases used with
justification for their- use.
1 01275006 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEMS 02151 - I
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Trench safety systems shall be designed based on actual field conditions. The Contractor shall review
and determine the field conditions for the project.
Work shall be performed by forces having at least two years experience with similar types of trench
safety systems. All prefabricated items used in trench safety systems shall be manufactured by a
company with at least two years experience in fabricating the items. -
The Contractor shall be responsible for complying with all trench safety requirements and for the
safety of trenches and excavations. The Contractor shall have designated "responsible person" on site
while any trench is open.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Provide suitable materials capable of withstanding imposed loads without excessive deflections.
Materials shall be clean, free of rust, holes, knots and other defects.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 JOB CONDITIONS
Prior to starting trench excavations, the Contractor shall examine all site conditions and note any
conditions in existing pavements, structures and other items which may be adversely affected by
trenching operations. Contractor shall mitigate any damage to existing structures.
3.2 EXISTING UTILITIES
Prior to starting trench excavations, chart and field locate all existing utilities. Notify owners of all
utilities of work to be performed. Protect all existing utilities from damage. Provide additional support
for utility lines which cannot span trench width. Do not interrupt existing services without written
approval by the utility owner.
Any damaged utilities shall be repaired as required by the utility owner.
3.3 TRENCHING PROCEDURES
Provide shoring systems in accordance with the submitted design to adequately resist earth pressures
indicated on the drawings.
Proceed with work in an orderly fashion. Install trench bracing systems as soon as possible after
opening trenches. Do not allow workers in trench prior to installing trench bracing systems.
A. Backfill trenches as soon as possible after completion of work.
B. Stockpile excavated materials at least three feet away from edge of trench.
C. Maintain barricades and signage as required by State and Local codes to protect open
excavations.
01275006 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEMS 02151 - 2
m.a
D. Do not allow surface water to enter excavations. Properly grade areas adjacent to trench
excavations to control surface drainage away from excavations. Excavations which must remain
open during periods of rainfall shall be covered with suitable material to prevent accumulations
of water in excavation.
E. If cut back method is employed, maintain a clear distance of three feet from edge of cut to avoid
allowing loose material to enter trench.
F. Do not operate heavy equipment except for trench digging equipment within twenty feet of
edge of excavation.
END OF SECTION 02151
01275006 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEMS 02151 - 3
SECTION 02210
DEMOLITION, REMOVAL AND SALVAGING OF EXISTING MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. This item shall consist of the demolition, removal, and salvage or disposal of certain portions of
existing paving materials, including existing asphalt surfacing and base material, existing
concrete slabs and existing concrete curb and gutter, and any other concrete structures that may
be encountered during the demolition activities, and in accordance with these specifications and
in conformity with the dimensions and typical cross sections shown on the plans and with the
lines and grades established for the project.
1.2 CLASSIFICATION
A. Materials to be removed consist of portland cement concrete pavement, asphalt pavement,
flexible base and concrete curb and gutter and designated concrete structures. No consideration
shall be given to differences in thickness or volume of material for each material removed. All
pavement of each type to be removed shall be considered as being the same and equal and no
consideration shall be given to differences in thickness of material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All lines separating pavement, concrete slabs or curb and gutter to be removed from that to
remain in place shall be cut neatly and in a straight line, or shall be separated at an existing
expansion or construction joint. Cuts shall be made by means of sawing, or other methods
approved by the Owner's Representative which will produce a satisfactory edge. In no case shall
the line be cut with a motor grader blade.
3.2 REMOVING AND DISPOSING OF EXISTING CONCRETE SLABS AND CONCRETE CURB
AND GUTTER
A. All existing concrete slabs and curb and gutter to be removed shall be broken up by suitable
methods and equipment, and shall be removed from the construction site and properly disposed
of at the Contractor's expense.
B. The limits of removal of concrete slabs and curb and gutter shall be as shown on the plans or as
directed by the Owner's Representative. All existing concrete to be removed shall be broken
into pieces with an approximate maximum dimension of 24-inches and an approximate
minimum dimension of 6-inches.
01275006 DEMOLITION, REMOVAL, AND SALVAGING 02210 - 1
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to all adjacent paving, curb and gutter, and
other structures, and shall repair said damage to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative.
No additional compensation shall be allowed for the repair of such damage.
3.3 REMOVING AND DISPOSING OF ASPHALT PAVEMENT AND FLEXIBLE BASE
A. All existing asphalt pavement and flexible base material shall be removed from the construction
site and properly disposed of at the Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION 02210
{
01275006 DEMOLITION, REMOVAL, AND SALVAGING 02210 - 2 {
SECTION 02230
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Protecting existing grass to remain.
2. Clearing and grubbing.
3. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
4. Removing above- and below -grade site improvements.
5. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, abandoning site utilities in place and removing
site utilities.
6. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section 02210 — "Demolition, Removal and Salvaging of Existing
Materials" for demolition, removal and salvaging of existing pavement, wall and
chainlink gates.
2. Division 2 Section 02300 - "Excavation, Subgrade Preparation, Grading,
Embankment and Topsoiling" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site
grading.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface -soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt,
and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than
underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more
than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other
nonsoil materials.
1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared
materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
LL 1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions adjoining
construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site
clearing.
B. Record drawings, identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface
structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.
01275006 SITE CLEARING 02230 - 1
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities during site -clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on
property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.
1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Engineer.
C. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on
Owner's premises where indicated.
D. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located
before site clearing.
E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation
control measures are in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Applicable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2
3.3
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Refer to Section 01356 — "Stormwater Pollution Prevention Measures".
UTILITIES
A. Coordinate with Owner for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing
structures before site clearing.
1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site
clearing.
B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.
2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. I
01275006 SITE CLEARING 02230 - 2
C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
E. Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 2 Section 02700 — "Site Utilities".
3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of
new construction.
1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be
relocated.
2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful
manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18
inches below exposed subgrade.
4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone.
5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off -site.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and
compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with
underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds,
roots, and other waste materials.
C. Stockpile topsoil materials' away from edge of excavations without intermixing with
subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover- to prevent windblown
dust.
1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches.
2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones.
3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal.
4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.
5. Clean topsoil shall be stockpiled for use around perimeter of concrete pavement as
needed.
3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to
f facilitate new construction.
B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
1. Unless existing full -depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw -cut
"Y length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw -cut
faces vertically.
2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.
J 01275006 SITE CLEARING 02230 - 3
3.7 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished
materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off
Owner's property.
1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other noiirecyclable
materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport
them to recycling facilities.
END OF SECTION 02230
01275006 SITE CLEARING 02230 - 4
SECTION 02300
EXCAVATION, SUBGRADE PREPARATION, GRADING,
EMBANKMENT AND TOPSOILING
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. This item shall consist of excavation, subgrade preparation, grading, embankment and
topsoiling of all materials within the limits of the work required to complete the construction of
the various items included in this project in accordance with these specifications and in
conformity with the dimensions and typical sections shown on the plans and with the lines and
grades established for the project.
B. All suitable material taken from excavation shall be used in the formation of embankment,
subgrade, and for backfilling as indicated on the plans or as directed by the Owner's
Representative.
C. It is anticipated that borrow material will be required for the construction of this project. The
deficiency shall be supplied from borrow sites approved by the Owner's Representative at the
Contractor's expense. If the volume of excavation material removed from the project
construction area exceeds that required to construct the project to the grades indicated, the
excess material shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be properly disposed of in
areas off the construction site at the Contractor's expense.
1.2 CLASSIFICATION
A. All material excavated shall be defined as unclassified excavation and shall include all
excavation performed under this item regardless of the material encountered. Existing asphaltic
concrete pavement and base material, concrete slabs and curb and gutter, and concrete rubble
shall be salvaged or removed in accordance with Division 2 Section 02210 — "Demolition,
Removal and Salvaging of Existing Materials", of these specifications.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
1 A. The rough excavation shall be carried to the necessary depth to obtain the specified depth of
9 subgrade densification shown on the plans. Likewise, on embankments, the depth of subgrade
densification shall be as shown on the plans. Should the Contractor, through negligence or
3 other fault, excavate below the designated lines, he shall replace the excavation with approved
r materials, in an approved manner and condition, at his own expense. The Owner's
,...
r Representative shall have complete control over the excavation, moving, placing, and
disposition of all material and shall determine the suitability of material to be placed in
embankments. All material determined unsuitable shall be disposed of in waste areas or as
01275006 EXCAVATION, SUBGRADE PREPARATION, GRADING, 02300 - 1
directed. Topsoil shall not be used in fills or in subgrades but shall be handled and placed as
directed.
B. The Contractor shall inform and satisfy himself as to the character, quantity, and distribution of
all material to be excavated. No payment will be made for any excavated material which is used
for purposes other than those designated. All spoil areas shall be leveled to a uniform line and
section and shall present a neat appearance before project acceptance.
C. Those areas outside of the pavement areas in which the top layer of soil material becomes
compacted, due to hauling or to any other activity of the Contractor, shall be scarified and
disced to a depth of 4 inches, as directed, to loosen and pulverize the soil.
D. If it is necessary to interrupt existing surface drainage, sewers or underdrainage, conduits,
utilities, or similar underground structures, or parts thereof, the Contractor shall be responsible
for and shall take all necessary precautions to protect and preserve or provide temporary
services. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, satisfactorily repair all damage to such
facilities or structures which may result from any of his operations during the period of the
contract.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Excavation shall be performed as indicated on the contract plans to the lines, grades, and
elevation shown or as directed by the Owner's Representative, and shall be made so that the
requirements for formation of embankments can be followed. No excavation or stripping shall
be started until the Owner's Representative has taken cross -sectional elevations and
measurements of the existing ground surface, and has set control base lines for the proposed
work. All material encountered within the limits indicated shall be removed and disposed of as
directed. During the process of excavation, the grade shall be maintained so that it will be well
drained at all times. When directed, temporary drains and drainage ditches shall be installed to
intercept or divert surface water which may affect the work.
B. When selective grading is specified or required as indicated on the plans, the excavated material
shall be handled to allow the selected material to be properly placed in the embankment and in
the capping of pavement subgrades as determined from the soil profile and soil characteristics.
C. The Contractor shall so schedule the work that excavated material can be placed in its proper
section of the pavement construction. If the Contractor for his convenience desires to stockpile
material, it shall be stockpiled in approved areas for later use.
D. Rock, shale, hardpan, loose rock, boulders, or other material unsatisfactory for subgrades,
roads, shoulders, intermediate areas, or any areas intended for turfing shall be excavated to a
minimum depth of 12 inches below the contemplated surface of the subgrade or the designated
grades. Muck, peat, matted roots, or other yielding material, unsatisfactory for subgrade
foundation, shall be removed to a depth specified, to provide a satisfactory foundation.
Unsatisfactory materials shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of at
locations approved by the Owner's Representative at the Contractor's expense. The portion so
excavated shall be refilled with suitable selected material as specified, obtained from the
grading operations or borrow area and thoroughly compacted by rolling. The necessary refilling
will constitute a part of the embankment. Where rock cuts are made and refilled with selected L
material, or where trenching out is done to provide for a course of pavement, the depths thus
created shall be ditched at frequent intervals to provide adequate drainage. j
E. The Owner reserves the right to make minor adjustments or revisions in lines or grades, if -
found necessary, as the work progresses due to discrepancies in the plans or to obtain
satisfactory construction.
{
01275006 EXCAVATION, SUBGRADE PREPARATION, GRADING, 02300 - 2
-- --+ . � _ .— — . err —'rl", T7." .,
F. The removal of existing structures and utilities required to permit the orderly progress of work
will be accomplished by the Contractor as an incidental part of the work, unless otherwise
shown on the plans.
G. In cut areas, the subgrade under areas to be paved shall be compacted to the depths and to the
densities at optimum moisture as shown on the plans or as specified by the specifications, and
as determined by the compaction control tests specified in ASTM D-698. Any unsuitable
materials encountered shall be removed.
H. In cut areas, the subgrade material shall be removed to the depths indicated on the drawings.
The bottom layer of subgrade shall be compacted to the depths and density as shown on the
drawings. The remaining layers of subgrade shall be constructed as embankment as shown on
the drawings.
1. No payment or measurement for payment will be made for suitable materials removed,
manipulated, and replaced in order- to obtain density except as specified above. Any removal,
manipulation, aeration, replacement, and recompaction of suitable materials necessary to obtain
the required density, except as specified above, shall be considered as incidental to the
excavation and embankment operations, and shall be performed by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the project.
J. Stones or rock fragments larger than 4 inches in their greatest dimension will not be permitted
in the top 12 inches of the subgrade. The finished grading operations conforming to the typical
cross section shall be completed and maintained ahead of the paving operations.
K. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes shall be barred loose or otherwise
removed to line or finished grade of slope. All cut -and -fill slopes shall be uniformly dressed to
the slope, cross section, and alignment shown on the plans or as directed by the Owner's
Representative.
L. Blasting will not be permitted.
3.3 PREPARATION OF EMBANKMENT AREA
A. Embankment areas shall be cleared and grubbed. All depressions or holes below the ground
surface, whether caused by grubbing or otherwise, shall be backfilled with suitable material and
compacted to ground surface before the construction of the embankment will be permitted to
start.
B. Immediately prior to the placing of the fill materials, the entire area upon which the
embankment is to be placed, except where limited by rock, shall be scarified and broken by
means of a disc harrow or plow, or other approved equipment, to a depth of 6 inches. Scarifying
shall be done approximately parallel to the axis of the fill. All roots, debris, large stones, or
objectionable material that would cause interference with the compaction of the foundation or
fill shall be removed from the area and disposed of as directed. A thin layer (approximately 3
inches) of the fill material shall be spread over the scarified foundation and the whole area
compacted as required in the specifications.
C. Where embankments are to be placed on natural slopes steeper than 3-to-1, horizontal benches
shall be constructed as directed by the Owner's Representative. Suitable excavated material
shall be incorporated in embankments.
D. No direct payment shall be made for the preparation of the embankment area.
01275006 EXCAVATION, SUBGRADE PREPARATION, GRADING, 02300 - 3
3.4
3.5
STRIPPING
A. All vegetation such as trees, brush, heavy sods, heavy growth of grass, decayed vegetable
matter, rubbish, and any other unsuitable material within the area upon which embankment is to
be placed shall be stripped or otherwise removed before the embankment is started, and in no
case shall such objectionable material be allowed in or under the embankment. No direct
payment will be made for stripping.
FORMATION OF EMBANKMENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Embankments shall be formed of satisfactory materials placed in successive horizontal layers of
not more than 8 inches in loose depth for the full width of the cross section.
The grading operations shall be conducted, and the various soil strata shall be placed, to
produce a soil structure as shown on the typical cross section or as directed. All materials
entering the embankment shall be reasonably free of organic matter such as leaves, grass, roots,
and other objectionable material. Soil, granular material, shale, and any other material permitted
for use in embankment shall be spread in successive layers as specified.
Operations on earthwork shall be suspended at any time when satisfactory results cannot be
obtained because of rain, freezing weather, or other unsatisfactory conditions of the field. The
Contractor shall drag, blade, or slope the embankment to provide proper surface drainage.
The material in the layers shall be of the proper moisture content before rolling to obtain the
prescribed compaction. Wetting or drying of the material and manipulation when necessary to
secure a uniform moisture content throughout the layer shall be required. Should the material be
too wet to permit proper compaction or rolling, all work on all portions of the embankment thus
affected shall be delayed until the material has dried to the required moisture content.
Sprinkling shall be done with approved equipment that will sufficiently distribute the water.
Sufficient equipment to furnish the required water shall be available at all times. Samples of all
embankment materials for testing, both before and after placement and compaction, will be
taken at frequent intervals. From these tests, corrections, adjustments, and modifications of
methods, materials, and moisture content will be made to construct the embankment.
Rolling operations shall be continued until the embankment is compacted to not less than 95%,
for noncohesive soils; and 90% for cohesive soils of the maximum density, at optimum
moisture (± 2% of optimal moisture), as determined by the compaction control tests in ASTM
D-698. Under all areas to be paved, the embankment shall be compacted to the depths and to
the densities at optimum moisture as shown on the plans or as specified in the specifications, as
determined by the compaction control tests specified in ASTM D-698. On all areas outside of
the pavement areas, no compaction will be required on the top 4 inches. Any areas inaccessible
to a roller shall be consolidated and compacted by mechanical tampers.
During construction of the embankment, the Contractor shall route his equipment at all times,
both when loaded and when empty, over the layers as they are placed and shall distribute the
travel evenly over the entire width of the embankment. The equipment shall be operated in such
a manner that hardpan, cemented gravel, clay, or other chunky soil material will be broken up
into small particles and become incorporated with the other material in the layer.
In the construction of embankments, starting layers shall be placed in the deepest portion of the
fill; as placement progresses, layers shall be constructed approximately parallel to the finished
pavement grade line.
When rock and other embankment material are excavated at approximately the same time, the
rock shall be incorporated into the outer portion of the embankment and the other materials
shall be incorporated under the future paved areas. Stones or fragmentary rock larger than
4 inches in their greatest dimension will not be allowed in the top 12 inches of the subgrade.
01275006 EXCAVATION, SUBGRADE PREPARATION, GRADING, 02300 - 4
1,� - ♦ 11- -- A WTTl T1111 +l1TT T-1.1 1
Backfill shall be brought up in layers as specified or as directed and every effort shall be
exerted to fill the voids with the finer material to form a dense, compact mass. Rock or boulders
shall not be disposed of outside of the excavation or embankment areas, except at places and in
the manner designated by the Owner's Representative.
1. Frozen material shall not be placed in the embankment nor shall embankment be placed upon
frozen material.
J. The Contractor shall he responsible for the stability of all embankments made under the
contract and shall replace any portion which, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, has
become displaced due to carelessness or negligence on the part of the Contractor.
K. There will be no separate measurement or payment for compacted embankment, and all costs
incidental to placing in layers, compacting, discing, watering, mixing, sloping, and other
necessary operations of the embankments will be included in the contract price for excavation.
L. When stockpiling of excavated material and later rehandling of such material is done for the
convenience of the Contractor, no extra payment will be made for the rehandling of stockpiled
materials.
3.6 EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor may use any type of earth -moving, compaction, and watering equipment he may
desire or has at his disposal, provided the equipment is in a satisfactory condition and is of such
capacity that the construction schedule can be maintained as planned by the Contractor and as
approved by the Owner's Representative in accordance with the total calendar days or working
days bid for the construction. The Contractor shall furnish, operate, and maintain such
equipment as is necessary to control uniform density, layers, section, and smoothness of grade.
3.7 PREPARATION AND PROTECTION OF THE TOP OF THE SUBGRADE
A. On areas to be paved, the specified depth in cut areas and the top of embankment shall be
compacted to the density specified. When completed, the surface shall be true to the lines,
grades, and cross section shown on the plans or as directed by the Owner's Representative.
After all drains, structures, ducts, and other underground appurtenances along the edges or
under the pavement have been completed, the subgrade shall be compacted to a 6" depth and
98% density (± 2% optimal moisture) according to ASTM D-698. Any irregularities or
depressions that develop under rolling shall be corrected by loosening the material at these
places and adding, removing, or replacing material until the surface is smooth and uniform.
Any portion of the area which is not accessible to a roller shall be compacted to the required
density by approved mechanical tampers. The material shall be sprinkled with water during
rolling or tamping as required or when directed by the Owner's Representative.
B. All soft and yielding material and material which will not compact readily when rolled or
tamped shall be removed as directed by the Owner's Representative and replaced with suitable
material. After grading operations are complete, all loose stones larger than 2 inches in their
greatest dimension shall be removed from the surface of all proposed graded paving areas and
disposed of as directed by the Owner's Representative.
C. At all times, the top of the subgrade shall be kept in such condition that it will drain readily and
effectively. In handling materials, tools, and equipment, the Contractor shall protect the
subgrade from damage by laying planks when directed and shall take other precautions as
needed. In no case will vehicles be allowed to travel in a single track. If ruts are formed, the
subgrade shall be reshaped and rolled. Storage or stockpiling of materials on the top of the
subgrade will not be permitted. Until the subgrade has been checked and approved, no
stabilized subgrade, subbase, base, surface course, or pavement shall be laid thereon.
01275006 EXCAVATION, SUBGRADE PREPARATION, GRADING, 02300 - 5
nc MV7 V-KffD A ATV kkrMT A ATTI Tn1:)QnTT TIKT(:
3.8 HAUL
A. No payment will be made separately or directly for haul on any part of the work. All hauling
will be considered a necessary and incidental part of the work and its cost shall be considered
by the Contractor and included in the contract unit price for the pay items of work involved.
3.9 TOLERANCES
A. In those areas upon which a subbase, base course, or surface course is to be placed, the top of
the subgrade shall be of such smoothness that, when tested with a 16-foot straightedge, it shall
not show any deviation in excess of 2 inch, or shall not be more than 0.05 foot from true grade
as established by grade hubs or pins. Any deviation in excess of these amounts shall be
corrected by loosening, adding, or removing materials, reshaping, and recompacting by
sprinkling and rolling.
3.10 TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil shall be salvaged from stripping or other grading operations. Topsoil shall be the
surface layer of soil with no admixture of refuse or any material toxic to plant growth, and it
shall be reasonably free from subsoil and stumps, roots, brush, stones (2 inches or more in
diameter), clay lumps or similar objects. Brush and other vegetation which will not be
incorporated with the soil during handling operations shall be cut and removed. Ordinary sods
and herbaceous growth such as grass and weeds are not to be removed but shall be thoroughly t
broken up and intermixed with the soil during handling operations.
B. All areas outside the paved areas within the grading limits shall be topsoiled unless otherwise
shown on the plans or otherwise directed by the Owner's Representative,
C. Suitable equipment necessary for proper preparation and treatment of the ground surface,
stripping of topsoil, and for the handling and placing of all required materials shall be on hand,
in good condition, and approved by the Owner's Representative before the various operations
are started.
D. Immediately prior to dumping and spreading the topsoil on any area, the surface shall be
loosened by discs or spike -tooth harrows, or by other means approved by the Owner's
Representative, to a minimum depth of 2 inches to facilitate bonding of the topsoil to the
covered subgrade soil. The surface of the area to be topsoiled shall be cleared of all stones
larger than 2 inches in any diameter and all litter or other material which may be detrimental to
proper bonding, the rise of capillary moisture, or the proper growth of the desired planting.
Limited areas, as shown on the plans, which are too compact to respond to these operations
shall receive special scarification.
E. Grades on the areas to be topsoiled, which have been established, shall be maintained in a true
and even condition. Where grades have not been established, the areas shall be smooth -graded
and the surface left at the prescribed grades in an even and properly compacted condition to
prevent, insofar as practical, the formation of low places or pockets where water will stand.
F. Prior to the stripping of topsoil from designated areas, any vegetation, briers, stumps and large
roots, rubbish or stones found on such areas, which may interfere with subsequent operations,
shall be removed using methods approved by the Owner's Representative. Heavy sod or other
cover, which cannot be incorporated into the topsoil by discing or other means shall be
removed. i
01275006 EXCAVATION, SUBGRADE PREPARATION, GRADING, 02300 - 6
ncin7 F.MRANKMF.NT_ AND TOPSOILING
G. The Contractor shall remove topsoil from the designated areas and to the depth as directed by
the Owner's Representative. The topsoil shall be spread on areas already tilled and
smooth -graded, or stockpiled in areas approved by the Owner's Representative. Any topsoil
stockpiled by the Contractor shall be rehandled and placed without additional compensation.
H. In unpaved excavation areas, at least the upper 4 inches of material shall be topsoil, unless
otherwise shown on the plans or stated in the special'provisions. Spreading shall not be done
when the ground or topsoil is frozen, excessively wet, or otherwise in a condition detrimental to
the work. Spreading shall be carried on so that turfing operations can proceed with a minimum
of soil preparation or tilling.
After spreading, any large, stiff clods and hard lumps shall be broken with a pulverizer or by
other effective means, and all stones or rocks (2 inches or more in diameter), roots, litter, or any
foreign matter shall be raked up and disposed of by the Contractor. After spreading is
completed, the topsoil shall be satisfactorily compacted by rolling with a cultipacker or by other
means approved by the Owner's Representative. The compacted topsoil surface shall conform to
the required lines, grades, and cross sections. Any topsoil or other dirt falling upon pavements
as a result of hauling or handling of topsoil shall be promptly removed.
No direct payment will be made for topsoil as such.
END OF SECTION 02300
µ� 01275006 EXCAVATION, SUBGRADE PREPARATION, GRADING, 02300 - 7
SECTION 02317
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section of the specifications includes information on excavation, trenching,
foundation, embedment, and backfill for installation of utilities, including manholes and
pipeline structures.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division l specification sections apply to this section.
B. Division I Section 01555 — "Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling."
C. Division 2 Section 02300 — "Excavation, Subgrade Preparation, Grading, Embankment and
Topsoiling."
D. . Division 2 Section 02320 — "Utility Backfill Materials."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe Foundation: Suitable and stable native soils that are exposed at the trench subgrade
after excavation to depth of bottom of the bedding as shown on the Drawings, or
foundation backfill material placed and compacted in over -excavations.
B. Pipe Bedding: The portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of foundation
up to a level line at bottom of pipe.
C. Haunching: The material placed on either side of pipe from the foundation to the springline
of the pipe for rigid wall pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite
sidewall, excluding the bedding section as shown on the plans.
D. Initial Backfill: The portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from the top of
haunching or cement stabilized backfill up to a level line immediately below pavement
subgrade, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall.
E. Pipe Embedment: The portion of trench backfill that consists of bedding, haunching and
initial backfill.
F. Trench Zone: The portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of pipe
embedment up to a line immediately below pavement subgrade or up to final grade when
not beneath pavement.
G. Backfill: Suitable material meeting specified quality requirements, placed and compacted
under controlled conditions.
H. Ground Water Control Systems: Installations external to trench, such as well points,
eductors, or deep wells. Ground water control includes dewatering to lower ground water,
intercepting seepage which would otherwise emerge from side or bottom of trench
excavation, and depressurization to prevent failure or heaving of excavation bottom.
I. Surface Water Control: Diversion and drainage of surface water runoff and rain water
away from trench excavation. Rain water and surface water accidentally entering trench
shall be controlled and removed as a part of excavation drainage.
J. Excavation Drainage: Removal of surface and seepage water in trench by sump pumping
or other approved means.
01275006 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 02317 - 1
K. Trench Conditions are defined with regard to the stability of trench bottom and trench
walls of pipe embedment zone. Maintain trench conditions that provide for effective
placement and compaction of embedment material directly on or against undisturbed soils
or foundation backfill, except where structural trench support is necessary.
1. Dry Stable Trench: Stable and substantially dry trench conditions exist in pipe
embedment zone as a result of typically dry soils or achieved by ground water
control (dewatering or depressurization) for trenches extending below ground water
level.
2. Stable Trench with Seepage: Stable trench in which ground water seepage is
controlled by excavation drainage.
a. Stable Trench with Seepage in Clayey Soils: Excavation drainage is provided
in lieu of or to supplement ground water control systems to control seepage
and provide stable trench subgrade in predominately clayey soils prior to
bedding placement.
b. Stable Wet Trench in Sandy Soils: Excavation drainage is provided in the
embedment zone in combination with ground water control in predominately
sandy or silty soils.
3. Unstable Trench: Unstable trench conditions exist in the pipe embedment zone if
ground water inflow or high water content causes soil disturbances, such as
sloughing, sliding, boiling, heaving or loss of density.
L. Subtrench: Subtrench is a special case of benched excavation. Subtrench excavation below
trench shields or shoring installations may be used to allow placement and compaction of
foundation or embedment materials directly against undisturbed soils. Depth of a subtrench
depends upon trench stability and safety as determined by the Contractor.
M. Over -Excavation and Backfill: Excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory bearing
capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below top of foundation as shown
on Drawings, and backfilled with foundation backfill material.
N. Foundation Backfill Materials: Natural soil or manufactured aggregate of controlled
gradation, to control drainage and material separation. Foundation backfill material is
placed and compacted as backfill to provide stable support for bedding.
O. Trench Safety Systems include both protective systems and shoring systems.
P. Trench Shield (Trench Box): A portable worker safety structure moved along the trench as
work proceeds, used as a protective system and designed to withstand forces imposed on it
by cave-in, thereby protecting persons within the trench. Trench shields may be stacked if
so designed or placed in a series depending on depth and length of excavation to be
protected.
Q. Shoring System: A structure that supports sides of an excavation to maintain stable soil
conditions and prevent cave-ins, or to prevent movement of the ground affecting adjacent
installations or improvements.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 558 - Test Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soil Cement Mixtures.
B. ASTM D 698 - Test Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate
Mixtures Using 5.5-lb (2.49-kg) Rammer and 12-in. (304.8-mm) Drop.
C. ASTM D 1556 - Test Method for Density in Place by the Sand -Cone Method.
D. ASTM D 2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.
E. ASTM D 2922 - Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth).
F. ASTM D 3017 - Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth).
01275006 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 02317 - 2
G. ASTM D 4318 - Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.
H. TxDOT Tex-1 01-E - Preparation of Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing.
1. TxDOT Tex- 110-E - Determination of Particle Size Analysis of Soils.
J. Federal Regulations, 29 CFR Part 1926, Standards -Excavation, Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA).
1.5 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule work so that pipe embedment can be completed on the same day that acceptable
foundation has been achieved for each section of pipe installation, manhole, or other
structures.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform to Division l Section 01300 — "Submittals".
B. Submit a written description for information only of the planned typical method of
excavation, backfill placement and compaction, including:
1. Sequence of work and coordination of activities.
2. Selected trench widths.
3. Procedures for foundation and embedment placement, and compaction.
4. Procedure for use of trench boxes and other premanufactured systems while assuring
specified compaction against undisturbed soil.
C. Submit backfill material sources and product quality information in accordance with
requirements of Division 2 Section 02320 — "Utility Backfill Materials".
D. Submit record of location of pipe as installed, referenced to survey control points. Include
locations of utilities encountered that are not shown on drawings or rerouted for the
convenience of the Contractor. Give stations, coordinates, elevations, inverts, and gradients
of installed pipe, casing, etc.
E. Submit field density tests of trench backfill.
F. Submit laboratory density compaction curves for each material.
1.7 TESTS
A. Perform backfill material source qualification testing in accordance with requirements of
Division 2 Section 02320- "Utility Backfill Materials".
B. Perform field density tests of trench backfill representative of each 150 linear feet of trench
and each compacted layer.
C. Once within pavement subgrade depth under paved areas, perform field density tests of
subgrade at the frequency specified in Division 2 Section 02300 — "Excavation, Subgrade
Preparation, Grading, Embankment and Topsoiling".
D. The Owner will perform his own check of field densities at random intervals at Owner's
expense for passing tests. Failing tests will be charged to the Contractor.
01275006 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 02317 - 3
nsim
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
A. Perform excavation with hydraulic excavator or other equipment suitable for achieving the
requirements of this Section.
B. Use only hand -operated tamping equipment until a minimum cover of 12 inches is
obtained over pipes, conduits, and ducts. Do not use heavy compacting equipment until
adequate cover is attained to prevent damage to pipes, conduits, or ducts. Do not use
vibratory equipment until 5 feet of cover over pipes, conduits and ducts are obtained. Do
not use vibratory equipment if adjacent structures are affected.
C. Use trench shields or other protective systems or shoring systems which are designed and
operated to achieve placement and compaction of backfill directly against undisturbed
native soil.
2.2 MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS
A. Embedment and Trench Zone Backfill Materials: Conform to classifications and product
descriptions of Division 2 Section 02320 — "Utility Backfill Materials".
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Install 12 inches below finished grade acid- and alkali -resistant
polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground
utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the
utility; colored as follows:
B. Continuously coated 10-ga. locating wire. See Plans for specific location.
1. Red: Electric.
2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
4. Blue: Water systems.
5. Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install flexible pipe to conform to the trench details shown in the drawings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Establish traffic control to conform with requirements of Division 1 Section 01555 —
"Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling" and the drawings.
B. Perform work to conform with applicable safety standards and regulations. Employ a
trench safety system as required. t
C. Immediately notify the agency or company owning any existing utility line which is
damaged, broken, or disturbed. Obtain approval from the Engineer and agency for any
repairs or relocations, either temporary or permanent.
01275006 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 02317 - 4 l
ncrm
D. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, to conform
with requirements of Division 2 Section 02220 — "Demolition, Removal and Salvaging of
Existing Material".
E. Maintain permanent benchmarks, monumentabon, and other reference points. Unless
otherwise directed in writing, replace those which are damaged or destroyed.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, existing structures, and other permanent objects outside of
grading limits and within the grading limits as designated on the Drawings.
B. Protect and support above -grade and below -grade utilities which are to remain.
C. Restore damaged permanent facilities to pre -construction conditions unless replacement or
abandonment of facilities are indicated on the Drawings.
D. Take measures to minimize erosion of trenches. Do not allow water to pond in trenches.
Where slides, washouts, settlements, or areas with loss of density or pavement failures or
potholes occur, repair, recompact, and pave those areas at no additional cost to Owner.
3.4 EXCAVATION
A. Perform excavation work so that pipe, conduit, and ducts can be installed to depths and
alignments shown on the Drawings. Avoid disturbing surrounding ground and existing
facilities and improvements.
B. Determine trench excavation widths based on the requirements shown on the plans.
C. Use sufficient trench width or benches above the embedment zone for installation of well
point headers or manifolds and pumps where depth of trench makes it uneconomical or
impractical to pump from the surface elevation. Provide sufficient space between shoring
cross braces to permit equipment operations and handling of forms, pipe, embedment and
backfill, and other materials.
D. Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for
removal, or concealed conditions, discontinue work at that location. Notify the Engineer
and obtain instructions before proceeding.
E. Shoring of Trench Walls.
1. Install Special Shoring in advance of trench excavation or simultaneously with the
trench excavation, so that the soils within the full height of the trench excavation
walls will remain laterally supported at all times.
2. For all types of shoring, support trench walls in the pipe embedment zone
throughout the installation. Provide trench wall supports sufficiently tight to prevent
washing the trench wall soil out fi•om behind the trench wall support.
3. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, leave sheeting driven into or below the
pipe embedment zone in place to preclude loss of support of foundation and
embedment materials. Leave rangers, walers, and braces in place as long as required
to support sheeting, which has been cut off, and the trench wall in the'vicinity of the
pipe zone.
4. Employ special methods for maintaining the integrity of embedment or foundation
material. Before moving supports, place and compact embedment to sufficient
1 depths to provide protection of pipe and stability of trench walls. As supports are
moved, finish placing and compacting embedment.
5. If sheeting or other shoring is used below top of the pipe embedment zone, do not
disturb pipe foundation and embedment materials by subsequent removal. Maximum
thickness of removable sheeting extending into the embedment zone shall be the
01275006 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 02317 - 5
equivalent of a 1-inch-thick steel plate. Fill voids left on removal of supports with
compacted backfill material.
F. Use of Trench Shields. When a trench shield (trench box) is used as a worker safety device,
the following requirements apply:
1. Make trench excavations of sufficient width to allow shield to be lifted or pulled
freely, without damage to the trench sidewalls.
2. Move trench shields so that pipe, and backfill materials, after placement and
compaction, are not damaged nor disturbed, nor the degree of compaction reduced.
3. When required, place, spread, and compact pipe foundation and bedding materials
beneath the shield. For backfill above bedding, lift the shield as each layer of
backfill is placed and spread. Place and compact backfill materials against
undisturbed trench walls and foundation.
4. Maintain trench shield in position to allow sampling and testing to be performed in a
safe manner.
5. Contractor shall provide trench shield for Owner's tests within the trench as required
in paragraph 3.11.B.
3.5 HANDLING EXCAVATED MATERIALS
A. Use only excavated materials which are suitable as defined in this Section and conforming
with Division 2 Section 02320 — "Utility Backfill Materials". Place material suitable for
backfilling in stockpiles at a distance from the trench to prevent slides or cave-ins.
3.6 TRENCH FOUNDATION
A. Excavate bottom of trench to uniform grade to achieve stable trench conditions and
satisfactory compaction of foundation or bedding materials.
3.7 PIPE EMBEDMENT, PLACEMENT, AND COMPACTION
A. Immediately prior to placement of embedment materials, the bottoms and sidewalls of
trenches shall be free of loose, sloughing, caving, or otherwise unsuitable soil.
B. Place embedment including bedding, haunching, and initial backfill as shown on
Drawings.
C. For pipe installation, manually spread embedment materials around the pipe to provide
uniform bearing and side support when compacted. Do not allow materials to free -fall from
heights greater than 24 inches above top of pipe. Perform placement and compaction
directly against the undisturbed soils in the trench sidewalls, or against sheeting which is to
remain in place.
D. Do not place trench shields or shoring within height of the embedment zone unless means
to maintain the density of compacted embedment material are used. If moveable supports
are used in embedment zone, lift the supports incrementally to allow placement and
compaction of the material against undisturbed soil.
E. Do not damage coatings or wrappings of pipes during backfilling and compacting
operations. When embedding coated or wrapped pipes, do not use crushed stone or other
sharp, angular aggregates.
F. Place haunching material manually around the pipe and compact it to provide uniform
bearing and side support. If necessary, hold small -diameter or lightweight pipe in place
with sand bags or other suitable means during compaction of haunch areas and placement
beside the pipe.
01275006 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 02317 - 6
G. Shovel in -place and compact embedment material using pneumatic tampers in restricted
areas, and vibratory -plate compactors or engine -powered jumping jacks in unrestricted
areas. Compact each lift before proceeding with placement of next lift. Water tamping
and water jetting are not allowed.
H. For flowable fill, such as cement stabilized backfill, vibrate flowable backfill with concrete
vibrator to consolidate material under haunches.
1. Install specified location tape and wire as shown on the drawings and per Section 2.3A
and B.
3.8 TRENCH ZONE BACKFILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION
A. Place backfill for pipe or conduits and restore surface as soon as practicable.
B. Place trench zone backfill in lifts and compact by methods selected by the Contractor.
Fully compact each lift before placement of the next lift.
1. Native Material/Borrow Material
a. Maximum lift thickness determined by Contractor to achieve uniform
placement and required compaction, but not exceeding 6 inches.
b. Compaction by trench sheep's foot or by vibratory equipment to a minimum
of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to
ASTM D 698. Use of vibratory equipment limited as specified in
paragraph 2.1.13.
C. Moisture content within 2% of optimum determined according to
ASTM D 698.
2. Topsoil
a. Maximum lift thickness determined by Contractor to achieve uniform
placement and required compaction, but not exceeding 6 inches.
b. Compaction by sheep's foot, by steel wheel roller or by vibratory equipment
to a minimum of 85 percent of the maximum dry density determined
according to ASTM D 698. Use of vibratory equipment limited as specified in
paragraph 2.1.13.
C. Moisture content within 2% of optimum determined according to
ASTM D 698.
3. Bedding Material
a. Sand bedding shall be loosely placed in trench as shown on drawings.
3.9 MANHOLES, JUNCTION BOXES, AND OTHER PIPELINE STRUCTURES
A. Meet the requirements of adjoining utility installations for backfill of pipeline structures, as
shown on the Drawings.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test for material source qualifications as defined in Division 2 Section 02320 — "Utility
Backfill Materials".
B. Provide excavation and trench safety systems at locations and to depths required for testing
p_ and retesting during construction at no additional cost to Owner.
C. Tests will be performed by Contractor on a minimum of three different samples of each
material type for plasticity characteristics, in accordance with ASTM D 4318, and for
gradation characteristics, in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E. Additional
`7 classification tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material
gradation or plasticity.
4. 01275006 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 02317 - 7
D. At least three tests for moisture -density relationships will be performed initially for backfill
materials in accordance with ASTM D 698. Additional moisture -density relationship tests
will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity.
E. In -place density tests of compacted pipe foundation, embedment and trench zone backfill
soil materials will be performed according to ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 2922 and
ASTM D 3017, and at the following frequencies and conditions.
1, A minimum of one test for every 150 linear feet of compacted trench zone backfill
material for each compacted layer.
2. Density tests will be distributed among the placement areas. Placement areas are:
foundation, bedding, haunching, initial backfill and trench zone.
3. The number of tests will be increased if inspection determines that soil type or
moisture content are not uniform or if compacting effort is variable and not
considered sufficient to attain uniform density, as specified.
4. Density tests may be performed at various depths below the fill surface by pit
excavation. Material in previously placed lifts may therefore be subject to
acceptance/rejection.
5. Two verification tests will be performed adjacent to in -place tests showing density
less than the acceptance criteria. Placement will be rejected unless both verification
tests show acceptable results.
6. Recompacted placement will be retested at the same frequency as the first test series,
including verification tests.
F. Recondition, recompact, and retest at Contractor's expense if tests indicate Work does not
meet specified compaction requirements. For hardened cement stabilized backfill with
nonconforming density, core and test for compressive strength at Contractor's expense.
G. Acceptability of crushed rock compaction will be determined by inspection.
3.11 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL
A. Dispose of excess materials offsite or at an area designated by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 02317
01275006 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLL FOR UTILITIES
02317-8
SECTION 02320
UTILITY BACKILL MATERIALS
PART] -GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section of the specifications covers materials related to the backfill of utilities.
Included are the following:
1. "Concrete" sand.
2. Native soil materials.
3. Topsoil.
4. Borrow material.
5. Crushed Stone
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 specifications, apply to this section.
B. Division 2 Section 02300 — "Excavation, Subgrade Preparation, Grading, Embankment and
Topsoiling".
C. Division 2 Section 02317 — `Excavation and Backfill for Utilities".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Division 2 Section 02317 — "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities".
1.4 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C 33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregate.
B.
ASTM C 40 - Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete.
C.
ASTM C 123 - Test Method for Lightweight Pieces in Aggregate.
D.
ASTM C 131 - Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small -Size Coarse
')
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
E.
ASTM C 136 - Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
_. F.
ASTM C 142 - Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates.
G.
ASTM D 698 — Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft').
H.
ASTM D 1140 - Test Method for Amount of Materials in Soils Finer Than No. 200 Sieve.
I.
ASTM D 2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
]
Classification System).
J.
ASTM D 2488 - Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual -
Manual Procedure).
K.
ASTM D 4318 - Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.
L.
ASTM D 4643 - Method for Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil by the
Microwave Oven Method.
M.
I
TxDOT Tex-l01-E - Preparation of Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing.
N.
TxDOT Tex-104-E - Test Method for Determination of Liquid Limit of Soils (Part 1).
a:l
01275006
UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS 02320 - 1
0. TxDOT Tex-106-E -Test Method -Methods of Calculating Plasticity Index of Soils.
P. TxDOT Tex-110-E -Determination of Particle Size Analysis of Soils.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform to requirements of Division 1 Section 01300 — "Submittals".
B. Submit a description of source, material classification and product description, production
method, and application of backfill materials.
C. Submit test results for samples of off -site backfill materials.
D. For each delivery of material, provide a delivery ticket which includes source location.
1.6 TESTS
A. Perform tests of sources for off -site backfill material.
B. Verification tests of backfill materials may be performed by the Owner, at Owner's
expense; however, failing tests will be charged to the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL DESCRIPTIONS
A. "Concrete" Sand
1. Coarse -grained, well -graded, sand (natural, manufactured, or a combination of both)
conforming to requirements of ASTM C33.
2. Gradation shall conform to ASTM C136 and the following limits.
Sieve
Percent Passing
3/8"
100
No. 4
95 to 100
No. 8
80 to 100
No. 16
50 to 85
No. 30
25 to 60
No. 50
10 to 30
No. 100
2 to 10
B. Native Soil Material for Backfill
1. Provide backfill material that is free of stones greater than 6 inches, free of roots,
waste, debris, trash, organic material, unstable material, non -soil matter,
hydrocarbon or other contamination.
C. Topsoil
1. Provide topsoil material that is free of stones greater than 3 inches, free of roots,
waste, trash, debris, organic material, unstable material, non -soil matter,
hydrocarbon or other contamination.
2. Surface should be made clear of rock and other debris before planting.
3. Use top 3 feet of excavated material for topsoil backfill. This material shall be set
aside to prevent mixing with other excavated material. Topsoil is only required in
non -paved areas.
D. Borrow
1. All borrow material must be approved by Engineer.
01275006 UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS 02320 - 2
ns mM
E. Crushed Stone (Alternate backfill to native material)
1. Crushed stone shall be free of waste, trash, debris, organic material, unstable
material, or other non -gravel matter.
2.2 MATERIAL TESTING
A. Ensure that material selected, produced and delivered to the project meets applicable
specifications and is of sufficiently uniform properties to allow practical construction and
quality control.
B. Source or Supplier Qualification. Perform testing, or obtain representative tests by
suppliers, for selection of material sources and products. Provide test results for a
minimum of three samples for each source and material type. Tests samples of processed
materials from current production representing material to be delivered. Tests shall verify
that the materials meet specification requirements. Repeat qualification test procedures
each time the source characteristic changes or there is a planned change in source location
or supplier. Qualification tests shall include, as applicable:
1. Gradation. Complete sieve analyses shall be reported regardless of the specified
control sieves. The range of sieves shall be from the largest particle through the
No. 200 sieve.
2. Plasticity of material passing the No. 40 sieve.
3. Los Angeles abrasion wear of material retained on the No. 4 sieve.
4. Clay lumps.
5. Lightweight pieces
6. Organic impurities
C. Production Testing. Provide reports to the Engineer from an independent testing laboratory
that backfill materials to be placed in the Work meet applicable specification requirements.
D. Assist the Engineer in obtaining material samples for verification testing at the source or at
the production plant.
E. Native material requires testing only when questionable material is encountered.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SOURCES
A. Use of material encountered in the trench excavations is acceptable, provided applicable
specification requirements are satisfied. If excavation material is not acceptable, provide
from other approved source. Top 3 feet of excavated material shall be used as topsoil.
B. Identify off -site sources for backfill materials at least 21 days ahead of intended use so that
the Engineer may obtain samples for verification testing.
C. Obtain approval for each material source by the Engineer before delivery is started. If
sources previously approved do not produce uniform and satisfactory products, furnish
materials from other approved sources. Materials may be subiected to inspection or
additional verification testing after delivery. Materials which do not meet the requirements
of the specifications will be rejected. Do not use material which, after approval, has
become unsuitable for use due to segregation, mixing with other materials, or by
contamination. Once a material is approved by the Engineer, expense for sampling and
testing required to change to a different material will be at the Contractor's expense with
no additional cost to the Owner.
0127.5006 UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS 02320 - 3
3.2 MATERIAL HANDLING
A. Establish temporary stockpile locations in areas shown on plans for practical material
handling and control, and verification testing by the Engineer in advance of final
placement.
B. Pea gravel shall be consolidated upon placement by using rodding or pneumatic vibratory
methods. Shovel slicing shall be used as necessary to ensure filling of voids, filling around
and under haunches of pipe and filling of spaces between corrugations.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality Control
1. The Engineer may sample and test backfill at:
a. Sources including borrow pits, production plants and Contractor's designated
off -site stockpiles.
b. On -site stockpiles.
C. Materials placed in the Work.
2. The Engineer may resample material at any stage of work or location if changes in
characteristics are apparent.
B. Production Verification Testing: The Owner's testing laboratory will provide verification
testing on backfill materials, as directed by the Engineer. Samples may be taken at the
source or at the production plant, as applicable. Contractor shall cooperate with Owner and
Engineer in allowing access to materials.
END OF SECTION 02320
i
01275006 UTILITY BACKFILL MATERIALS 02320 - 4
W
May 11, 2007
SECTION 02444
FENCE, CHAIN LINK
PART] GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary Genera] Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
B. Fencing shall be installed to line and grade indicated, if not shown, maintain straight lines, level
tops. A graded fence line shall be established prior to the installation of fencing. The grade shall be
such that a maximum clearance of two inches between the fence fabric and the concrete mow strip
or earth.
C. Excavation for posts and other concrete embedded items shall be coordination prior to beginning
of any concrete casting.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work under this section includes the providing and installing of all posts, railings, fence fabric,
hinges, clamps, caps, tension cables and filler strips.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 - Concrete Work.
L4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A-392, Galvanized Wire Fabric.
B. ASTM A-123, Galvanized Pipe.
C. ASTM A-153, Galvanized Hardware.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, gates, fencing components, size quantity
lengths, accessories and installation procedures.
B. Certificates of Conformance: Submit certificates for the manufacturer attesting that all materials
meet these specifications.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STORAGE
A. Deliver fencing material to the site in an undamaged condition. Carefully store material off the
ground to provide proper protection against oxidation.
2.2 CHAIN -LINK FENCE ACCESSORIES
A. The following chain -link fence accessories shall be furnished and installed:
6n1alnor�ize�"dupltcuii n'Pfo`tnh5Item j FENCE, CHAIN LINK 02444 - 1
May 11, 2007
1.Caps
2.Rails and Brace Ends
3.Rails Sleeves
4.Wire Ties and Clips
5.Brace Bands
6.Tension Bands
7.Tension Bars
8.Tension Wire
9.Truss Rods
IO.Barbed Wire
11.Barbed Wire Support Arms
12.Miscellaneous
B. All accessories shall be in accordance with Federal Specification RR-FF-191/4A unless otherwise
specified or shown on the drawings. Tension wire (No. 7 gauge) is required at the top sans bottom
of all fencing.
2.3 BARBED WIRE
A. All barbed wire shall conform to the applicable requirements of Federal Specification RR-F-
191/lA, (zinc -coated steel). Barbed wire shall be 3 strand twisted No. 122 gauge wire with 4 point
barbs of No. 14 gauge spaced 4 to 6 inches apart. Zinc coating shall have a minimum weight of
0.80 oz. per square foot of wire surface on No. 122 gauge wire and 0.60 oz. per square foot on the
No. 14 gauge barbs. Three strands of barbed wire on 45-degree support arms required for all
fencing.
2.4 CONCRETE
A.. Concrete around posts shall be adequate to maintain the posts truly plumb under the stresses
imposed and shall have a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 2,500 psi.
2.5 WIRE FABRIC
A. The chain link fabric shall conform to the applicable requirements of Federal Specification RR-F-
191/IA, as modified herein, for Type I (zinc -coated steel). Zinc coating shall have a minimum
weight of 1.2, Class I, ounces per square foot of uncoated wire surface. The fabric shall be 72
inches high except where otherwise shown on the drawings, and shall be No. 9 gauge with 2-inch
mesh. The fabric shall be twisted and barbed at the top and bottom selvage.
2.6 POSTS TOP RAILS AND BRACES
A. Posts, top rails and braces shall be zinc -coated steel and shall conform to all applicable
requirements of Federal Specification RR-F-191/3A as modified herein. Chain -link fence posts,
top rails and braces shall be of the following types and classes as specified:
1. Type I — Posts
Class 1 — Steel Pipe
Class 2 — Formed Steel
Class 4 — Steel H Sections
Class 5 — Steel Square Sections
2. Type II -Top Rails
Class 1 — Steel Pipe
Class 2 — Formed Steel
3. Type III — Braces
.Pp— SuS'°` FENCE, CHAIN LINK 02444 - 2
May 11, 2007
Class 1 — Steel Pipe
Class 2 — Formed Steel
End, corer and pull posts shall be as specified in Federal Specification RR-F-I91/3A except all
such posts for 6 foot fabric shall be 2.975" O.D, pipe, 5.79 tbs. per foot, or 2.5" square, 5.7 lbs.
per foot, or formed steel 3.5" X 3.5", 5.10 tbs per foot. Intermediate line posts for 6 foot fabric
shall be 2.375" "C" section, 2 25" X 1.70", 2.64 tbs per foot (45,000 psi yield). Steel pipe used for
top rails and braces shall be 1.660" X 1.25", weight not less than 1.35 tbs per foot. Weight of the
zinc -coating shall be not less than 1.8 oz per square foot.
2.7 PADLOCK
A. The owner to provide padlock. Provide a temporary construction padlock key to the City of
Lubbock.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The fence shall be construction as specified herein, and all work shall be performed in a
workmanlike manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The finished fence shall be plumb, taut, true to
line and ground contour, and complete in ever detail.
3.2 INSTALLING FABRIC
The fabric shall be unrolled on the outside of the fence line with the bottom edge of the fabric against the
posts. The carious rolls shall be spliced by bringing the ends close together and weaving in a picket in such
a way that it will engage both of the roll ends and catch with each twist each separate mesh of the end
pickets of both rolls of fabric. The fabric shall be raised and tied loosely to the top rail with a temporary tie
wire at intervals of about 29 feet. The fabric shall be installed by a method approved by the Engineer. One
method used is given below.
A. At end, comer or gate posts, the stretcher bar shall be slipped through the end picket of the fabric
and the stretcher bar bands at the same time. Then the bolts in the stretcher bar bands shall be
tightened. Additional rolls of fabric shall be spliced and placed as the erection progresses along the
fence.
B. In long sections, the fence shall be stretched at intervals of about 100 feet. After the stretching is
complete, the fabric shall be tied to the top rails with No. 9 gauge galvanized wire clips securely
clinched at the back of the rail. The fastenings shall be spaced not more than 24 inches on centers
for the top rail.
C. The fabric shall be attached to the line posts with No. 9 gauge galvanized wire clips securely
clinched to the back of the line posts. The fastenings shall be spaced not more than 14 inches on
centers for line posts. The topmost clip shall be placed on the line posts as near the top of the
fabric as possible and the lowest clip as near the bottom of the fabric as possible.
D. At terminal (end, corner and pull) and gate posts the fabric shall be fastened with stretcher bars and
bands. The fastenings shall be spaced not more than 14 inches on centers for terminal (end, corner
and pull) and gate posts. The topmost back shall be placed on these posts as near the top of the
fabric as possible and the lowest back as near the bottom of the fabric as possible.
3.3 INSTALLING TOP RAILS
nauthonz"ell"au°pl'co 11 on pfoS,�6n.., Inc. FENCE, CHAIN LINK
-r
02444 - 3
May 11, 2007
A. To start the installation, a length of top rail shall be run through the first couple of post tops; a rail
clamp shall be assembled on the end, corner or gate post, as the case may be. The end of the rail
already placed shall be butted into the clamp and fastened. The top rail shall be installed along the
run of the fence and the various sections joined with sleeve couplings at not more than every 100
feet an expansion coupling shall be placed to take care of expansion and contraction of the rail.
The rail shall be clamped in the end, corner or gate post at the end of the run of the installation of
top rail.
3.4 INSTALLING POSTS
A. All posts shall be spaced not more than 10 feet apart. Terminal (end, corner, pull and brace) and
gate posts shall be set in 38 inch concrete bases. All line posts shall be set in 36 inch concrete
bases. The tops of the concrete bases shall be slightly above grade, trowel finished, and sloped to
drain away from the posts. Holes of full depth and size for the concrete bases for posts shall be dug
to the size and depth as specified. All post settings shall be done carefully so that all posts shall be
vertical and in true alignment and rigidly secured in position. Diameter of the holes shall be not
less than 9 inches not 3 times the diameter of the post.
B. 'On terminal (end, corner, pull and brace) and gate posts, the post tops and brave rail clamps
around the posts shall be placed before setting the posts in concrete bases. In setting the gate posts,
great care must be taken to make sure that gate posts are set the exact distance apart as required by
the Bats furnished. A line drawn across from the top of one gate post to the other must be level,
regardless of the grade at the ground line. If the ground is not level, the upgrade gate post shall be
set first to get the proper height for the downgrade gate post. The concrete bases for end, corner,
pull, brace and gate posts shall be placed first and allowed to cure for 14 days. Stretcher bar bands
and truss bands as specified shall be spread and slipped on end, comer, pull, brace and gate posts
as the next operation. Post tips are then inserted on all posts. No extra compensation shall be made
for rock excavation. Rock excavation shall not be grounds for extension of time.
3.5 INSTALLING BRACES
A. All horizontal braces shall be attached together with truss rods at all terminal (end, comer and pull)
and gate posts to the brace posts.
3.6 CLEARING FENCE LINE
A. The site of the fence shall be sufficiently cleared of obstructions, and surface irregularities shall be
graded so that the fence will conform to the general contour of the ground. The fence line shall be
cleared to a minimum width of 2 feet on each side of the centerline of the fence. This clearing shall
consist of the removal of all stumps, brush, rocks, trees or other obstructions which will interfere
with proper construction of the fence. Stumps within the cleared area of the fence line shall be
grubbed or excavated. The bottom of the fence shall be placed a uniform distance of 1 1/2-inches
above the ground.
B. The work shall include the handling and disposal of all material cleared, excavated or removed,
regardless of the type, character, composition or condition of such material encountered.
3.7 CORNER POSTS
A. Corner posts shall be placed at each horizontal angle point. Corner posts shall have braces and
truss rods as specified.
3.8 CLEAN-UP
oo pp0077 ��
Onaufho pLcoiionpm5u iu1., Inc. FENCE, CHAIN LINK 02444 - 4
I
May 1 I.2007
A. All post, hardware, fabric and accessories of the fence shall have all concrete removed from the
finish. Post set in concrete shall not have concrete splash marks above the finished concrete.
B. Completely remove all fence debris from the project.
C. Fillerstrips shall be cleaned per manufacturer's instructions. Remove all stained and broken strips
and replace with new matching strips.
END OF SECTION
nsa
007 Cha n }H{ano�i•e • ArAr, hlen . Inc.
ulhonze8 pl�cauig ed�.
FENCE, CHAIN LINK
02444 - 5
SECTION 02533
ACCEPTANCE TESTING I+OR SEWERS
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Acceptance testing of sewers including:
1. Visual inspection of sewer pipes.
2. Leakage testing of sewer pipes.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM F 1417 — Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity
Sewer Lines Using Low Pressure Air.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Maximum allowable leakage for Infiltration or Exfiltration.
1. The total exfiltration, as determined by a hydrostatic head test, shall not exceed
50 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours at a minimum test head of
2 feet above the crown of the pipe at the upstream manhole or 2 feet above the
groundwater elevation, whichever is greater. The low-pressure air test listed below
may be used in lieu of a hydrostatic head test.
2. When pipes are installed more than 2 feet below the groundwater level, an
infiltration test shall be used in Iieu of the exfiltration test. The total infiltration shall
not exceed 50 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours. Groundwater
elevation must be at least 2 feet above the crown of the pipe at the upstream
manhole.
B. Perform air testing in accordance with requirements of this section and the referenced
standards in paragraph 1.2. Refer to Table 02533-1, Time Allowed For Pressure Loss From
3.5 psig to 2.5 psig, at the end of this Section. Hydrostatic head test may be used in lieu of
low pressure air tests.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform to requirements of Division l Section 01300 — "Submittals".
B. Test Plan: Before testing begins and in adequate time to obtain approval through the
submittal process, prepare and submit a test plan for approval by Engineer. Include testing
procedures, methods, equipment, and tentative schedule. Obtain advance written approval
for deviations from the Drawings and Specifications.
C. Test Reports: Submit test reports for each test on each segment of sewer.
1.5 GRAVITY SEWER QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Repair, correct, and retest manholes or sections of pipe which fail to meet specified
requirements when tested.
01275006 ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SEWERS 02533 - 1
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Perform testing after installation is complete.
B. Coordinate testing schedules with Engineer. Perform testing under observation of
Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXFILTRATION TEST
A. Test Equipment:
l . Pipe plugs.
2. Pipe risers where the manhole cone is less than 2 feet above highest point in pipe or
service lead.
2.2 INFILTRATION
A. Test Equipment:
I. Calibrated 90 degree V-notch weir.
2. Pipe plugs.
2.3 LOW PRESSURE AIR TEST
A. I Minimum Requirement for Equipment:
1. Control panel.
2. Low-pressure air supply connected to control panel.
3. Pneumatic. plugs: Acceptable size for diameter of pipe to be tested; capable of
withstanding internal test pressure without leaking or requiring external bracing.
4. Air hoses from control panel to:
a. Air supply.
b. Pneumatic plugs.
C. Sealed line for pressuring.
d. Sealed line for monitoring internal pressure.
B. Testing Pneumatic Plugs: Place a pneumatic plug in each end of a length of pipe on the
ground. Pressurize plugs to 25 psig; then pressurize sealed pipe to 5 psig. Plugs are
acceptable if they remain in place against the test pressure without external aids.
2.4 GROUND WATER DETERMINATION
A. Equipment: Pipe probe or small diameter casing for ground water elevation determination.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Provide labor, equipment, tools, test plugs, risers, air compressor, air hose, pressure meters,
pipe probe, calibrated weirs, or any other device necessary for proper testing and
inspection.
01275006 ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SEWERS 02533 - 2
3.2 LEAKAGE TESTING FOR GRAVITY SEWERS
A. Test Options:
1. Test gravity sewer pipes for leakage by either exfiltration or infiltration methods, as
appropriate, or with low pressure air testing.
2. Test new sewer manholes with water or low pressure air. Manholes tested with low
pressure air shall undergo a physical inspection prior to testing.
3. Leakage testing shall be performed after backfilling of a line segment.
4. If no installed piezometer or monitoring well is within 2,000 feet of the sewer
segment, Contractor shall provide a temporary piezometer or monitoring well for
this purpose. If no groundwater is encountered during pipe installation, then this
requirement -will be waived.
B. Compensating for Ground Water Pressure:
1. Where ground water exists, install a pipe nipple at the same time sewer line is
placed. Use a 1/2-inch capped pipe nipple approximately 10 inches long. Make the
installation through manhole wall on top of the sewer line where line enters
manhole.
2. Immediately before performing line acceptance test, remove cap, clear pipe nipple
with air pressure, and connect a clear plastic tube to nipple. Support tube vertically
and allow water to rise in the tube. After water stops rising, measure height in feet of
water over invert of the pipe, Divide this height by 2.3 feet/psi to determine the
ground water pressure to be used in line testing.
C. Exfiltration test:
1. Determine ground water elevation.
2. Plug sewer downstream.
3. Plug incoming pipes in upstream manhole.
4. Fill sewer pipe with water to a point 2-1/2 feet above highest point in sewer pipe or
ground water table, whichever is highest.
5. Allow water to stabilize for one to two hours. Take water level reading to determine
drop of water surface, in inches, over a one -hour period, and calculate water loss
(1 inch of water in 4 feet diameter manhole equals 8.22 gallons) or measure the
quantity of water required to keep water at same level.
D. Infiltration test: Ground water elevation must be not less than 2.0 feet above highest point
of sewer pipe.
1. Determine ground water elevation.
2. Plug incoming pipes in upstream manhole.
3. Insert calibrated 90 degree V-notch weir in pipe on downstream manhole.
4. Allow water- to rise and flow over weir until it stabilizes.
5. Take five readings of accumulated volume over a period of 2 hours and use average
for infiltration.
E. Low Air Pressure Test: When using this test conform to ASTM C 924, ASTM C 1 ]03, or
ASTM F 1417, as applicable, with holding time not less than that listed in Table 02533-1.
1. For 4-inch:
a. Determine ground water level.
b. Pressurize pipe to 4.0 psig. Increase pressure 1.0 psi for each 2.3 feet of
ground water over highest point in system. Allow pressure to stabilize for 2 to
4 minutes. Adjust pressure to start at 3.5 psig (plus adjustment for ground
water table). See Table 02533-1 at the end of this Section.
01275006 ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SEWERS 02533 - 3
C. To determine air loss, measure the time interval for pressure to drop to
2.5 psig. The time must exceed that listed in Table 02533-1 at the end of this
Section for pipe type, diameter and length.
F. Retest: Any section of pipe which fails to meet requirements shall be repaired and retested.
3.3 TEST CRITERIA TABLES
TABLE 02533-1
MINIMUM TESTING TIMES FOR LOW PRESSURE AIR TEST (PLASTIC PIPE)
PIPE DIAMETER
MINIMUM TIME
LENGTH FOR
TIME FOR
MINIMUM TIME
LONGER LENGTH
(INCHES)
(MIN: SEC)
(FEET)
(SECONDS)
4 (and below)
3:46
597
.380 (L)
6
5:40
398
.854 (L)
3.4 LEAKAGE TESTING FOR MANHOLES
A. Perform vacuum test as specified by Cherne Industries, Inc. in accordance with
ASTM C 1244.
B. After completion of manhole construction, wall sealing, or rehabilitation, but prior to
backfilling, test manholes for water tightness using vacuum testing procedures.
C. Plug incoming and outgoing lines with suitably -sized pneumatic or mechanical plugs.
Ensure plugs are properly rated for pressures required for test; follow manufacturer's safety
and installation recommendations. Place plugs a minimum of 6 inches outside of manhole
walls. Brace inverts to prevent lines from being dislodged if lines entering manhole have
not been backfilled.
D. Vacuum testing:
1. Install vacuum tester head assembly at top access point of manhole and adjust for
proper seal on straight top section of manhole structure. Following manufacturer's
instructions and safety precautions, inflate sealing element to the recommended
maximum inflation pressure; do not over -inflate.
2. Evacuate manhole with vacuum pump to 10 inches mercury (Hg), disconnect pump,
and monitor vacuum for the time period specified in Table 02533 — 2 at the end of
this section.
3. If the drop in vacuum exceeds 1 inch Hg over the specified time period, locate leaks,
complete repairs necessary to seal manhole and repeat test procedure until
satisfactory results are obtained.
G
01275006 ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SEWERS 02533 - 4
TABLE 02533 — 2
MINIMUM TEST TIMES FOR VARIOUS MANHOLE DIAMETERS
Depth, Feet
Diameter, Inches
48
Time, Seconds
8
20
10
25
12
30
14
35
16
40
18
45
20
50
22
55
24
59
26
64
28
69
30
74
The values listed above are taken from ASTM Specification C1244-93 "Standard Test Method for Con-
crete Manholes by the Negative Air Pressure (Vacuum) Test."
END OF SECTION 02533
r 01275006 ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SEWERS
nc ins
02533-5
SECTION 02540
SANITARY SEWER
PART] -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
l . Pipe and fittings, including cleanouts.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. FRP: Fiberglass -reinforced plastic.
B. HDPE: High -density -polyethylene plastic.
C. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Pipe and fittings, including cleanouts.
B. Shop Drawings: Include manhole openings, covers and pipe connections.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of septic
tank system and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements."
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 DISTRIBUTION PIPES AND FITTIINGS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for identification of systems where piping
materials specified below are used.
B. Sewer Pipe and Fittings: PVC, complying with ASTM D 3034, SDR 35 and F-679. Pipe
shall be jointed with an integrated bell, bell and spigot type rubber gasketed joint.
l . Gaskets: ASTM F 477.
2. Components shall conform to ASTM D 1784.
3. Must meet dimensional, chemical and physical requirement outlined in
ASTM D 3034 and F 679.
4. Shall be installed per ASTM D 2321.
01275006 SANITARY SEWER 02540 - 1
5. Each joint shall be marked with the following.
a.
Manufactures Name.
b.
Nominal Pipe size.
C.
PVC Cell Classification.
d.
SDR.
e.
ASTM D 3034 or F 679.
2.2 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Description: Comply with ASTM C H 73, elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition
coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping
to be joined and corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each
end.
1. Sleeve Materials:
a. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
b. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with
pipe materials being joined.
2.3 CLEANOUTS
A. Cast -Iron Cleanouts: ASME A 112.36.2M; with round, flanged, cast-iron housing and
secured, scoriated, heavy-duty loading class, cast-iron cover, cast-iron ferrule, and
countersunk brass cleanout plug. (Traffic Areas)
B. PVC Cleanouts: PVC pipe fitting for solvent -cement or elastomeric gasket joint with PE or
PVC threaded cleanout plug. (Non -traffic Areas)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting installation of lines.
B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of soil structure and materials.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling for piping are specified in Division 2
Section 02317 - "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities".
1. Stockpile topsoil for reuse in finish grading without intermixing with other
excavated material. Stockpile materials away from edge of excavation and do not
store within drip line of remaining trees.
2. PIace, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent
windblown dust.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION f
A. Install distribution piping according to the following:
1. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2321. {
r
i
01275006 SANITARY SEWER 02540 - 2
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join distribution piping according to or with the following:
1. Install distribution pipe and fittings to connect septic tank distribution box, and
headers for absorption fields with closed joints.
2. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3212 and ASTM D 3034 for gasketed
joints.
B. loin dissimilar pipe materials according to ASTM D 5926, with couplings and gaskets
compatible with pipe materials being joined.
3.5 CLEANOUT APPLICATIONS
A. Use cleanouts according to the following:
1. At Each Change in Direction of Distribution Piping: Cast-iron cleanouts.
3.6 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Cast -Iron Cleanouts: Install with PVC fitting riser from distribution piping to cast-iron
cleanout housing at grade. Use NPS 4 (DN 100) PVC sewer pipe and fittings with solvent -
cemented joints for risers. Attach riser to cleanout housing with rubber gasket or coupling.
B. Cleanout Support: Set cleanouts in concrete blocks 48 x 48 x 12 inches for two-way
cleanouts and 18 x 18 x 12 inches for one way cleanout deep, unless location is in concrete
pavement.
C. Set top of concrete work 1 inch (25 mm) above surrounding rough grade, or set flush with
grade if installed in pavement.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identification materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section 02317 —
"Excavation and Backfill for Utilities". Arrange for installation of green warning tape
directly over piping (including absorption -field piping), at outside edges of underground
structures, and at outside edges of absorption fields.
B. Use detectable warning tape over piping.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has
occupied. Inspect after installing approximately 24 inches of back -fill material.
1. Submit separate report for each system installation.
2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between
structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or
cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
C. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects
are within a]lowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
01275006 SANITARY SEWER 02540 - 3
ncim
B. Test new piping in accordance with Division 2 Section 02533 — "Acceptance Testing for
Sewers".
l . Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least
24 hours advance notice.
4. Submit separate report for each test.
C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
D. Replace leaking pipe with new material, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work
progresses.
B. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in
ends of uncompleted pipe at end of workday or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 02540
t
i
01275006 SANITARY SEWER 02540 - 4 '-
nc in7
SECTION 02577
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART] -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division l - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section covers the painting stripes and installation of traffic buttons on the surface of
parking areas applied in accordance with this specification and at the locations shown on the
plans.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 2 Section 02741 — "Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT
A. Paints for parking areas shall conform to Fed. Spec. TT-P-1952, color shall be as shown on the
plans.
B. Paint shall be in sealed containers that plainly show the designated name, formula or
specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, manufacturer's name,
formulation number and directions, all of which shall be plainly legible at time of use. The
paint shall be homogenous, easily stirred to smooth consistency, and shall show no hard
settlement or other objectionable characteristics during a storage period of six months.
2.2 TESTING
A. Materials will be approved for use based on either of the following data furnished by the
Contractor:
l . A test report showing that the proposed batch meets all specified requirements.
2. A test report showing that a previous batch manufactured using the same formulation as
that used in manufacturing the proposed batch met all specified requirements, and a
report showing rest results on the proposed batch for the following properties required in
the material specifications: weight per gallon, viscosity, fineness of grind, drying time
and gradation.
01275006 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02577 - 1
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. General
All equipment for the work shall include the apparatus necessary to properly clean the existing -
surface, a mechanical marking machine, and such auxiliary hand painting equipment as may be
necessary to satisfactorily complete the job.
B. Paint Applicators
The equipment for applying paint to pavements shall be self-propelled or mobile -drawn
pneumatic spraying machine with suitable arrangements of atomizing nozzles and controls to
obtain the specified results. The machine shall be capable of applying the stripe widths
indicated, at the paint coverage rate specified in paragraph 3.1, and of even uniform thickness
with clear-cut edges.
The paint applicator shall have paint reservoirs or tanks of sufficient capacity and suitable
gauges to apply paint in accordance with requirements specified. Tanks shall be equipped with
suitable air -driven mechanical agitators. The spray mechanism shall be equipped with quick -
action valves conveniently located, and include necessary pressure regulators and gauges in full
view and reach of the operator. Paint strainers shall be installed in paint supply lines to insure
freedom from residue and foreign matter that may cause malfunction of the spray guns.
Pneumatic spray guns shall be provided for hand application of paint in areas where the mobile
paint applicator cannot be used.
C. Abrasive Blasting Equipment
Abrasive blasting equipment shall include an air compressor, hoses and nozzles of proper size
and capacity as required for cleaning surfaces to be painted. The compressor shall be capable of
furnishing not less than 150 cfm of air at a pressure of not less than 90 psi at the nozzle for each
nozzle used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TRAFFIC PAINT
A. Surface Preparation
New pavement surfaces shall be allowed to cure for a -period of not less than 5 days before
application of marking materials. All surfaces to be marked shall be thoroughly cleaned before
application of the paint. Dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits shall be removed by
sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water, or a combination of these methods
as required. Rubber deposits, surface laitance, existing paint markings and other coatings
adhering to the pavement shall be completely removed with scrapers, wire brushes, abrasive
blasting, approved chemicals or mechanical abrasion as directed. Where oil or grease are
present on old pavements to be marked, affected areas shall be scrubbed with several
applications of trisodium phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser, and
rinsed thoroughly after each application. After cleaning, oil -soaked areas shall be sealed with
cut shellac to prevent bleeding through the new paint. If abrasive blasting method is utilized,
then abrasive material shall be of non -silicon type.
B. Layouts and Alignment
1. On those sections of pavements where no previously applied figures, markings or stripes
are available to serve as a guide, suitable layouts and lines of proposed stripes shall be
spotted in advance of the paint application. Control points shall be spaced at such
intervals as will insure accurate location of all markings.
01275006 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02577 - 2
n,
2. The Contractor shall provide an experienced technician to supervise the location,
alignment, layout, dimensions and application of the paint.
1 C. Rate of Application
kPaint shall be applied evenly to the pavement surface to be coated at a rate of 105 plus or minus
five square feet per gallon.
D. Paint Application
i Paint shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces and, unless otherwise approved, only when air and
Ipavement temperatures are above 40°F. and less than 95°F. Paint temperature shall be
maintained within these same limits. Paint shall be applied pneumatically with approved
equipment at rate of coverage specified herein. The Contractor shall provide guidelines and
templates as necessary to control paint application. Special precautions shall be taken in
marking numbers, letters and symbols. All edges of markings shall be sharply outlined. The
maximum drying time requirements of the paint specifications will be strictly enforced to
prevent softening of the bitumen and pick-up, displacement or discoloration by tires of traffic.
If there is a deficiency in drying of the markings, painting operations shall be discontinued until
ry cause of the slow drying is determined and corrected.
--, E. Weather Limitations
The painting shall be performed only when the existing surface is dry and clean, when the
atmospheric temperature is above 40°F, and when the weather is not excessively windy, dusty
orfoggy.
3.2 DEFECTIVE WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIAL
I When any material not conforming to .the requirements of the specifications or plans has been
delivered to the project or incorporated in the work or any work performed is of inferior quality, such
material or work shall be considered defective and shall be corrected as directed and shall be corrected
as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 02577
01275006 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02577 - 3
SECTION 02665
WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
This section of the specifications covers all water piping, valves, and fittings required for the project.
The term piping as used herein shall include all piping, valves, fittings, and accessories as shown on
the plans and/or as specified herein.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions
B. Supplementary Conditions
C. Division 2 Section 02317 — "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities".
1.3 MATERIAL SCHEDULE
A. All water mains shall be AWWA C-900 PVC, Class 150 (DR18).
B. Miscellaneous piping shall be furnished and installed as indicated on the drawings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submit all manufacturers' data for all pipes, valves and fitting including all pipe thickness class
calculations.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 PVC PIPE
All water main piping should be AWWA C900 PVC, Class 150 (DR] 8). All C900 PVC Pipe shall be
approved by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) for use in the transportation of potable water
and shall bear the NSF seal of approval.
A. An approved pipe is Diamond C-900, or approved equal. Pipe shall match IPS dimensions.
B. Compounds shall conform to ASTM D-1784.
C. Gasketed joints shall meet ASTM F-477.
D. PVC Sewer Pipe
l . Refer to Specification Division 2 Section 02540 - "Sanitary Sewer".
01275006 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES, AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 02665 - 1
2.2 PIPE FITTINGS
General - Pipe fittings shall be of a type and design especially suitable for use with the type of piping
with which they are installed. Pressure rating of fittings shall not be less than that of the pipe.
A. General - Pipe fittings shall be of a type and design especially suitable for use with the type of
piping with which they are installed. Pressure rating of fittings shall not be less than that of the
pipe.
B. Fittings shall be ductile iron and shall be mechanical joint or push -on joint unless otherwise
specified or shown on the drawings.
All flanged fittings shall be faced and drilled in accordance with the standard drilling for
ANSI B 16.1 Class 125 flanges rated for at least 250 psi working pressure. Bolts for flanged
joints shall be of the length and diameter required by the ANSI Specification. Bolts and nuts
shall be of best quality mild steel and shall be provided with hexagonal heads. Suitable 1/8"
thick rubber ring gaskets shall be provided for all flanged joints.
C. Ductile Iron Fittings - Ductile iron fittings shall conform to AWWA C153. Fittings shall be
mechanical joint or push -on joint unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings. All
fittings shall have a pressure rating equal to that of the pipe with which they are used but in no
case less than 150 psi.
Unless otherwise indicated, all ductile iron fittings shall have an external bituminous coating
and shall be cement -lined in accordance with the specifications for coating and lining the pipe.
All ductile iron fittings shall be cast from the same quality of metal used in casting the ductile
iron pipe and shall be subjected to the same test requirements. Marking and weighing shall be
as required for the ductile iron pipe.
Where flanged fittings are used the flanges shall be of the same material as the fitting. Where
bell or mechanical joint fittings are used, the bells shall be cast integrally with the fitting.
Screwed -on bells will not be acceptable.
D. PVC Fittings for Sewer Pipe
Refer to Specification Division 2 Section 02540 - "Sanitary Sewer".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
All pipe and accessories shall be unloaded, handled, laid, jointed, tested for defects and for leakage
and disinfected in the manner herein specified.
3.2 INSPECTION
The pipe, fittings, valves, casing and accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the
progress of the work and any material found to be defective will be rejected by the Engineer, and the
Contractor shall remove such defective material from the site of the work.
01275006 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES, AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 02665 - 2
3.3 RESPONSIBILITY FOR MATERIALS
The Contractor shall be responsible for all material furnished by him and he shall replace at his own
expense all such material that is found to be defective in manufacture or has become damaged in
handling after delivery.
3.4 HANDLING PIPE AND ACCESSORIES
All pipe, fittings, valves, and other accessories shall, unless otherwise directed, be unloaded at the
point of delivery, hauled to and distributed at the site of the work by the Contractor. In loading and
unloading, they shall be lifted by hoists or slid, or rolled on skidways in such a manner as to avoid
shock or damage to the materials. Under no circumstances shall they be dropped. Pipe handled on
skidways must not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground.
The pipe, fittings and accessories shall be placed along the site in such a manner as to be kept as free
as possible from dirt, sand, mud and other foreign matter.
3.5 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the lines shown on the plans or as established on the ground
by the Engineer.
Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line either in a vertical or horizontal plane to
avoid obstructions, to plumb valves, or where vertical or horizontal curves are shown or permitted, the
degree of deflection at each joint shall not exceed the maximum deflection recommended by the
manufacturer of the particular type of pipe being laid and the degree of deflection shall be approved by
the Engineer.
3.6 MANNER OF HANDLING PIPE AND ACCESSORIES INTO TRENCH
After the trench grade has been completed, all bell holes dug and the grade inspected, the pipes and
accessories may be placed in the trench. All pipe, fittings, and valves shall be carefully lowered into
the trench piece by piece by means of derricks, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment, in such a
manner so as to prevent damage to the material in any way. Under no circumstances shall pipe or
accessories be dropped or dumped in to the trench.
3.7 CLEANING AND INSPECTING
Before lowering into the trench, the pipe shall be again inspected for defects and the pipe, while
suspended, shall be lightly hammered to detect cracks. Any defective, damaged or unsound pipe and
materials shall be rejected.
All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the inside of the pipe and from all bells, spigots or
parts of the pipe used in forming the joint, before the pipe is lowered into the trench, and it shall be
kept clean by approved means during and after laying.
At time when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by approved means,
and no trench water shall be allowed to enter the pipe.
01275006 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES, AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 02665 - 3
3.8 LAYING AND JOINTING PVC PIPE
A. General - PVC pipe shall be handled and installed in strict accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer. Special care shall be exercised in handling PVC pipe, in
preparation of the trench for pipe laying, and in compacting the bedding under and around each
side of the pipe.
3.9 SETTING VALVES, VALVE BOXES AND FITTINGS
Valves and fittings shall be set at the locations shown on the plans or at locations as established by the
Engineer, and shall be set and jointed to the pipe in the manner heretofore specified for pipe
installations. All valves buried in the ground shall have a valve box set over the valve. All valves shall
be thoroughly inspected and checked for operation before installation. Concrete blocking shall be
provided for all buried valves and fittings.
Valve boxes shall be firmly supported and maintained centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the
valve, with box cover flush with the surface of the ground or at such level as directed and encased
with concrete as shown on the drawings.
3.10 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING
A. The trench shall be excavated to the lines and grades as established by the Engineer and as
shown on the plans. The minimum depth of cover for all pipe shall be thirty-six (36) inches
unless otherwise specifically shown on the drawings.
The trench shall be excavated to an even grade so that the bottom of the pipe will rest on the
bottom of the trench over the entire length of pipe. In order to obtain a true even grade, the
trench shall be fine graded by hand.
Any part of the trench excavated below grade shall be corrected by filling with approved
material and compacting thoroughly.
If ledge rock, rock fragments or other unyielding material is encountered in the bottom of the
trench it shall be removed to a depth of six inches below grade, refilled with selected material,
and thoroughly compacted.
Bell holes of ample dimensions shall be dug at each joint to permit the jointing of pipe to be
made properly, and of sufficient depth to prevent the bell of the pipe from resting on
undisturbed materials.
Wherever necessary to prevent caving, the trench shall be adequately supported. The Contractor
is entirely responsible for assuring that trenches are adequately supported to protect both his
workmen and the public.
Trench digging machinery may be used to make the trench excavations except in places where
operation of same would cause damages to pipelines, fences or other existing structures either
above or below ground; in such instances hand methods shall be employed. The Contractor
shall locate all existing underground lines of which he has been advised, whether or not they are
shown on the drawings, sufficiently in advance of trenching operations to prevent any damage
thereto. The operators of all oil or gas pipelines shall be notified prior to excavation around
01275006 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES, AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 02665 - 4
such lines so that these operators may be present during excavation. Extensive care shall be
used to prevent damage to these lines and the Contractor shall be fully responsible for damage
to any such line.
All excavated material shall be piled in a manner that will not endanger the work or existing
structures. Excess trench excavation, not used for backfilling, shall be disposed of by
Contractor, by spreading in a thin layer on Owner's property adjacent to the trench.
There will be no classification of the excavated materials and the term excavation shall include
all materials encountered in excavating the trenches or structural excavations.
All new and existing lines shall be properly supported to prevent settlement or damage to the
line both during and after construction.
B. Refer to Division 2 Section 02317 — "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities".
3.11 BACKFILLING
A. Backfill Material - All backfill material shall be free from cinders, ashes, refuse, vegetable or
organic material, boulders, rocks or stones, or other unsuitable material. From 1 foot above the
top of the pipe to the existing ground, however, material containing stones up to 4-inches in
their greatest dimension may be used. Selected materials from trench excavations shall be used
for backfilling except where special bedding material is required.
B. Backfilling Under Pipe - All pipe shall be backfilled by hand from the bottom of the trench to
the centerline of the pipe with selected backfill material free from rocks or boulders greater than
2 inches in size or other unsuitable material. The material shall be placed in 3-inch layers,
moistened if necessary, and thoroughly compacted under and on each side of the pipe. Backfill
material shall be deposited in the trench for its full width on each side of the pipe, fitting, and
appurtenances simultaneously.
C. Backfilling Over Pipe - From the centerline of the pipe to a depth of 1 foot above the top of the
pipe, the trench shall be backfilled by hand or by approved mechanical methods using materials
free from rocks or boulders greater than 2 inches in size. The material shall be moistened and
placed in lifts not exceeding 6-inches in thickness and compacted by tamping to a density of not
less than 95% of maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D698. The
Contractor shall use special care in placing this portion of the backfill to insure placement under
and around the pipe and to avoid injuring or moving the pipe.
D. Backfilling to Grade - From 1 foot above the top of the pipe to finish grade shall be backfilled
by tamping. Jetting will not be allowed for any backfill purposes in any location.
The material shall be placed in 6-inch layers, moistened if necessary, and thoroughly compacted
with mechanical tampers from the bottom of the trench to the finish grade to a density of at
least 95% of maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D698.
E. Refer to Division 2 Section 02317 — "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities".
01275006 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES, AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 02665 - 5
3.12 LINE TESTING
After the pipe is laid and the joints completed, each section or run of piping, shall be tested as
specified herein. The Contractor shall bear all costs of providing all equipment, materials, labor and
other incidentals required to test pipe lines as specified herein. The Contractor shall provide suitable
means for filling the lines and developing the required pressure in the lines. Testing procedure shall be
as follows:
A. Duration - The duration of the hydrostatic test shall be a minimum of four (4) hours.
B. Pressure - The pipeline shall be tested so that the pressure at the lowest point in the test section
is at least 100%, but not greater than 120% of the pipe pressure class of the pipe, and the
minimum pressure at the highest point in the test section is not less than 85%o of the pipe
pressure class of the pipe.
C. Allowable Leakage - The maximum allowable leakage for push -on joints is the number of
gallons per hour as determined by the following formula(s):
PVC: Ductile Iron:
NDy P SDd P
L= L=
7,400 133,200
where:
L = Allowable leakage in gallons/per hour
N = Number of joints in length of pipe tested
S = Length of pipe
D = Nominal diameter of the pipe in inches
P = Average of the max. and min. pressures within the test section in psi
Any leakage which becomes evident prior to final acceptance of the project shall be found and
repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer even though the particular line has been previously
accepted and tested.
3.13 DISINFECTION OF PIPE LINES
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for the disinfection of all
pipe lines, which shall be disinfected before being placed in service. The lines shall be disinfected by
the application of a chlorinating agent in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C651.
After disinfection has been completed and the pipe is filled with water, the Contractor shall sample the
water in the pipe for bacteriological testing. If acceptable bacteriological test results are not received,
the Contractor shall disinfect the pipe again and provide whatever measures are necessary to achieve `
an acceptable result. Acceptable results shall be the bacteriological requirements forpotable water as
defined by the TCEQ.
END OF SECTION 02665 L
01275006 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES, AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 02665 - 6
SECTION 02700
SITE UTILITIES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents:
1. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements
(Division 1), apply to the work, specified in this section.
B. Section Includes:
1. General utilities.
2. Other site utilities.
1.2 UTILITY LOCATION
A. Before any work commences, Contractor shall notify Dig Tess for locating all utilities
within the project area.
B. Contractor shall coordinate location of existing utilities such as irrigation systems with Owner's
personnel. Care shall be taken to salvage all components of the system to be removed unless
otherwise directed by Owner.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Perform site survey, research owner's utility records, and verify existing utility locations.
Contact utility -locating service for area where Project is located as required.
B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned.
1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate utility down time with Owner and City of Lubbock.
B. Coordinate with other utility work.
C. Provide utility entity at least 72 hours advance notification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REPLACING DAMAGED PRODUCTS
A. If damage is done to Owner's utility service, Contractor shall coordinate replacement of
damaged parts with Owner at no cost to the Owner. Repair shall occur in a timely manner to
prevent excessive down -time for Owner.
01275006
SITE UTILITIES 02700 - I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION 02700
01275006 SITE UTILITIES
nS im
r
02700 - 2
SECTION 02720
AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section covers excavating, crushing, hauling, and spreading base material and wetting,
compacting and shaping it to form a flexible base course for paving, to the lines, grades and
typical cross sections shown on the plans, and as specified herein. The Contractor shall furnish
all materials, equipment, tools, labor and superintendence, and incidentals necessary to
complete the work. The base material shall be caliche base course, crushed aggregate base
course or gravel aggregate base course as specified below.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02223 — Excavation, Subgrade Preparation, Grading, Embankment and Topsoiling.
B. Section 02741 — Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving.
C. Section 02751 — Reinforced Concrete for Site Work.
1.3 BASE MATERIAL
A. The base material shall consist of argillaceous limestone, calcareous or calcareous clay
particles, with or without stone, conglomerate, gravel, sand or other granular materials.
Materials for use in constructing the base course shall be furnished by the Contractor from a
source approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for locating the source of
caliche, securing approval of the source, and for making arrangements with the owner of the
property, on which the pit is located, for use of the material. The pits shall be stripped of all
unacceptable material and the stripping shall be disposed of in a manner agreeable to the owner
of the property on which the pit is located. The pits shall be opened so as to immediately expose
the vertical faces of all of the various strata of acceptable material. Unless otherwise directed,
the material shall be secured in successive vertical cuts extending through all of the exposed
strata. Any incidental costs, including securing, stripping, or crushing the base material, shall be
paid for by the Contractor and shall be included in the bid price.
1.4 MATERIAL TESTS
A. Contractor will provide all preconstruction testing of material to verify it meets the
requirements of 2. LA and 2. LB on the next page.
`I ` 01275006 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 02720 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CALICHE MATERIAL
All acceptable material shall be screened and the oversized material crushed and returned to the
screened material in such a manner that a uniform material is produced. The processed base material
shall conform to the following test requirements:
A. Sieve Analysis
Retained on 1-3/4 inch Sieve......................................5 to 10%
Retained on 7/8 inch Sieve.........................................10 to 35%
Retained on 1/2 inch Sieve.........................................30 to 50%
Retained on No. 4 Sieve..............................................45 to 65%
Retained on No. 40 Sieve............................................70 to 85%
B. Soil Binder
The material passing the No. 40 sieve shall be known as soil binder and shall meet the
following requirements:
The liquid limit shall not exceed................................45
The plasticity index ..................................................... Minimum 3, Maximum 15
The linear shrinkage shall not exceed ......................... l 0 Maximum
WetBall Mill..............................................................55
Maximum increase on passing No. 40 ........................25%
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCEPTANCE OF SUBGRADE
A. Prior to placing any base material, the Contractor shall verify that the subgrade has been shaped
and compacted to the cross sections and grades in accordance with the plans. The Contractor
shall notify the Owner of any deficiencies. By placing base on the subgrade the Contractor
accepts the condition of the subgrade as conforming with plans and specifications.
3.2 MATCHING EXISTING PAVEMENT
A. In locations where new pavement abuts existing pavement, the Contractor shall saw cut the
existing pavement along a straight line approximately 12-inches from the existing edge of
pavement.
B. Contractor shall remove existing material to top of existing base within 6-inches of saw cut.
Beyond 6-inches of the saw cut, existing material shall be removed by the contractor to top of
proposed subgrade.
C. A smooth transition shall be provided between typical section of new construction and edge of
existing pavement.
01275006 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 02720 - 2
,.
3.3 HAULING AND PLACING
A. Equipment: All equipment used shall be suitable for efficiently and properly accomplishing the
work in this item. All equipment required for doing the work shall be in first class operating
condition and on the project prior to the start of any work under this item. All equipment shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
B. Flexible base shall be constructed in one course. The material shall be delivered in approved
vehicles of uniform capacity, and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to supply the
amount of material required to construct the base course to the thickness shown on the plans.
Spreading and shaping shall be done in a manner which will thoroughly mix the material and
prevent segregation. Sprinkling during this process will be required if necessary to prevent
segregation. When shaping is completed the material shall be uniformly well graded and of the
proper thickness. Material deposited upon the subgrade shall be spread and shaped the same
day. In the event inclement weather or other unforeseen circumstances renders impractical the
spreading of the material during the day in which it is deposited, the material shall be scarified,
mixed and spread as directed by the Engineer. All areas and nests of segregated coarse of fine
materials shall be corrected and removed or replaced with well graded material. If additional or
corrective binder is required, it shall be furnished and applied in the amount directed by the
Engineer. Such binder material shall be carefully and evenly incorporated with the material in
place by scarifying, harrowing, or other approved method.
3.4 FINISHING AND COMPACTING
1 A. The processed base course shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling. The rolling shall progress
from one side toward previously placed material by lapping uniformly each preceding rear -
wheel track by one-half of the width of such track. Rolling shall continue until the material is
l thoroughly set, the interstices of the material reduced to a minimum and until creeping of the
--. material ahead of the roller is no longer visible. Rolling shall continue until the base material
has been compacted to not less than 95 percent density (± 2% optimum moisture), as
j determined by ASTM D698. Blading and rolling shall be done alternately, as required or
directed, to obtain smooth, even and uniformly compacted base.
B. The base shall not be rolled when the underlying course is soft or yielding or when the roller
causes undulation in the base course. When the rolling develops irregularities that exceed 3/8
inch when tested with a 16-foot straightedge, the irregular surface shall be loosened, refilled
with the same material as that being used in constructing the course and rolled again as
required.
C. In areas inaccessible to the roller, the base course material shall be thoroughly tamped with
M t mechanical tampers.
D. The sprinkling during rolling, if necessary, shall be in the amount and by equipment approved
by the Engineer.
E. Shape base to required elevations and cross section slope grades.
F. Surface Test: After the course has been completely compacted, the surface shall be tested for
smoothness and accuracy of grade and crown. Any portion lacking the required smoothness or
failing in accuracy of grade or crown shall be scarified reshaped, recompacted and otherwise
manipulated as the Engineer may direct until the required smoothness and accuracy are
obtained. The finished surface shall meet requirements of paragraph 3.4 of this Section.
G. Protection: Work on the base course shall not be accomplished during freezing temperatures or
when the subgrade is wet. When the material is frozen or when the underlying course is frozen
the construction shall be stopped.
l r 01275006 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 02720 - 3
Hauling equipment may be routed over completed portions of the base course, provided no
damage results and provided such equipment is routed over the full width of the base course to
avoid rutting or uneven compaction. However, the Engineer shall have full and specific
authority to stop all hauling over completed or partially completed base course when, in his
opinion, such hauling is causing damage. Any damage resulting to the base course from routing
equipment over the base course shall be repaired by the Contractor at his sole expense.
H. Determine the thickness of the base course by depth tests or cores taken by the Owner and
observed by the Owner's Representative at intervals so that each test represents no more than
300 square yards. Density tests shall be made at intervals of not more than 300 square yards.
3.5 IRREGULARITIES, DEPRESSIONS OR WEAK SPOTS
A. All irregularities, depressions or weak spots which develop during compaction shall be
corrected immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding or removing material as required,
reshaping and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling. Immediately prior to placing of
surfacing, the base shall be checked for grade and cross section, and any deviation in excess of
three -eighths (3/8) inch from grade or true cross section shall be corrected. "Blue tops" set to
finished base elevations shall be set by the Contractor, in order to check the base for proper
grade and elevation.
3.6 MAINTENANCE
A. If the base course is opened to traffic before application of the surfacing, the base shall be
satisfactorily maintained by wetting, blading and rolling until the wearing surface is placed
thereon. The Contractor shall perform all maintenance work necessary to keep the base course
in a condition satisfactory for priming. After priming, the surface shall be kept clean and free
from foreign material. The base course shall be properly drained at all times. If cleaning is
necessary, or if the prime coat becomes disturbed, any work necessary to correct the deficiency
shall be performed at the sole expense of the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
r
01275006 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 02720 - 4
nr in-7
SECTION 02741
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hot -mix asphalt paving.
2. Hot -mix asphalt patching.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Division 2 Section 02300 — "Excavation, Subgrade Preparation, Grading, Embankment and
Topsoiling".
C. Division 2 Section 02720 — "Aggregate Base Course".
D. Division 2 Section 02764 — "Pavement Joint Sealants".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO T 102 Spot Test of Asphaltic Materials
B. AASHTO T 245 Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall
Apparatus
C.
AASHTO M 248
Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed White and Yellow Traffic
Paints
D.
AI MS-2
(1994) Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot -
Mix Types
E.
AIMS-22
Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements
F.
ASTM C 29/C 29M
(1991; Rev. A) Unit Weight and Voids in Aggregate
G.
ASTM C 88
(1990) Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or
Magnesium Sulfate
H.
ASTM C 117
(1995) Materials Finer than 75-Micrometer (No. 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing
1.
ASTM C 127
(1988; R 1993) Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse
Aggregate
J.
ASTM C 128
(1993) Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
K.
ASTM C 131
(1996) Resistance to Degradation of Small -Size Coarse Aggregate
by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
L.
ASTM C 136
(1996; Rev. A) Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
M.
ASTM C 188
(1995) Density of Hydraulic Cement
N.
ASTM D 70
(1982; R 1990) Specific Gravity of Semi -Solid Bitununous Materials
O.
ASTM D 75
(1987; R 1992) Sampling Aggregates
P.
ASTM D 242
(1995) Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures
01275006 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - l
Q. ASTM D 546
(1994) Sieve Analysis of Mineral Filler for Road and Paving
Materials
R. ASTM D 692
(1994; Rev. A) Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures
S. ASTM D 854
(1992) Specific Gravity of Soils
T. ASTM D 946
(1982; R 1993) Penetration -Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in
Pavement Construction
U. ASTM D 979
(1996) Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
V. ASTM D 995
(1995; Rev. B) Mixing Plants for Hot -Mixed, Hot -Laid Bituminous
Paving Mixtures
W. ASTM D 1073
(1994) Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures
X. ASTM D 1075
(1996) Effect of Water on Cohesion of Compacted Bituminous
Mixtures
Y. ASTM D 1 188
(1996) Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous
Mixtures Using Paraffin -Coated Specimens
Z. ASTM D 1559
(1989) Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using
Marshall Apparatus
AA. ASTM D 2027
Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Medium -Curing Type)
BB. ASTM D 2041
(1995) Theoretical Maximum Specific ,Gravity and Density of
Bituminous Paving Mixtures
CC. ASTM D 2172
(1995) Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving
Mixtures
DD. ASTM D 2726
(1996; Rev. A) Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non -
Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
EE. ASTM D2950
Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place
by Nuclear Methods
FF. ASTM D 3381
(1992) Viscosity -Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement
Construction
GG. ASTM D3405
Standard Specification for Joint Sealants, Hot -Applied, for Concrete
and Asphalt Pavements
HH. ASTM D3549
Standard Test Method for Thickness or Height of Compacted
Bituminous Paving Mixture Specimens
II. TEX-126-E
Molding, Testing and Evaluating Bituminous Black Base Materials
JJ. TEX-204-F
Design of Bituminous Mixtures
KK. TEX-224-F
Determining Flakiness Index
LL. TxDOT Item 292
Asphalt Treatment (Plant -Mixed)
MM.TxDOT Item 300
Asphalt, Oils and Emulsions
NN. TxDOT Item 301
Asphalt Antistripping Agents
00. TxDOT Item 340
Dense -Graded Hot -Mix Asphalt (Method)
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and L
performance properties.
B. Job -Mix Designs
1. Submit a job -mix design, for approval prior to preparing and placing the bituminous__
mixture. Design mix using procedures contained in Chapter III, Marshall Method of
Mix Design, of AI MS-2. Formulas shall indicate physical properties of the mixes as
shown by tests made by a commercial laboratory approved by the Engineer, using
materials identical to those to be provided on this project. Submit formulas with
material samples. Job -mix formula for each mixture shall be in effect until modified
I
i
01275006 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 2
„C ,,,,
in writing by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer
formula for each source change.
C. Qualification
Data
l .
Submit qualifications for product manufacturers.
D. Material Test Reports
1.
Specific gravity test of asphalt
2.
Coarse aggregate tests
3.
Weight of slag test
4.
Percent of crushed pieces in gravel
5.
Fine aggregate tests
6.
Specific gravity of mineral filler
7.
Bituminous mixture tests
8.
Aggregates tests
9.
Bituminous mix tests
10.
Pavement courses
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Provide a new job -mix
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated,
as documented according to ASTM E 548.
B. Asphalt -Paving Publication: Comply with City of Lubbock, Texas Standard Specification
for Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete Surface (HMAC) and TxDOT Item 340 "Hot Mix Asphaltic
Concrete Pavement".
C. Required Data
1. Job -mix formula shall show the following:
a. Source and proportions, percent by weight, of each ingredient of the mixture;
b. Correct gradation, the percentages passing each size sieve listed in the
specifications for the mixture to be used, for the aggregate and mineral filler
from each separate source and from each different size to be used in the
mixture and for the composite mixture;
C. Amount of material passing the No. 200 sieve determined by dry sieving;
d. Number of blows of hammer compaction per side of molded specimen;
e. Temperature viscosity relationship of the asphalt cement;
f. Stability, flow, percent voids in mineral aggregate, percent air voids, unit
weight;
g. Asphalt absorption by the aggregate;
h. Effective asphalt content as percent by weight of total mix;
i. Temperature of the mixture immediately upon completion of mixing;
j. Asphalt viscosity grade and/or penetration range; and
k. Curves for the asphalt stabilized base and hot mix asphalt paving courses.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage and store with a minimum of handling.
Store aggregates in such a manner as to prevent segregation, contamination, or intermixing
of the different aggregate sizes.
01275006
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02741 - 3
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or
excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met:
1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F.
2. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of
placement.
B. Pavement -Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and
at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil -based materials, 50 deg F
for water -based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F.
1.9 MIXING PLANT
A. Provide mixing plant capable of meeting the needs of the project
B. At no time shall the plant hinder the progress of the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aggregate General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in
previous installations.
1. Coarse Aggregate — Coarse aggregate shall conform to ASTM D692.
a. The coarse aggregate shall be the material retained on a No. 10 sieve, and
shall consist of clean, tough, durable fragments of crushed stone of uniform
quality. Mixing or combining of crushed gravel and crushed stone will not be
permitted. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed to the extent that produces a
minimum of 50% crushed faces retained on an No. 4 sieve for Type "C" and
Type "D" HMAC when tested in accordance with ASTM D 692.
b. Coarse aggregate shall have a maximum loss of 15% when subjected to 4
cycles of the Magnesium Sulfate Soundness Test ASTM C-88. The amount of
organic matter, clays, loams, or particles coated therewith, or other
undesirable materials shall not exceed 2 percent. When subjected to the
Los Angeles Abrasion test, the coarse aggregate shall not have a loss greater
than 40 percent by weight.
2. Fine Aggregate — fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM D1073.
a. The fine aggregate shall be that part of the material passing the No. 10 sieve
and shall consist of sand and/or screenings. The plasticity index of that part of
the sand passing the 40 sieve shall not exceed 6. The plasticity index of the
screenings shall not exceed 9.
b. Sand shall be composed of durable stone particles free from injurious foreign
matter. Screenings shall be of the same or similar material as specified for
coarse aggregate.
01275006 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 -4
nc ins
3. Mineral Filler
a. Mineral filler shall conform to ASTM D242 and consist of thoroughly dry
stone dust, portland cement or other material dust approved by the Engineer.
1 The mineral filler shall be free of foreign and other injurious matter and shall
meet the following gradation:
Percent Retained on No. 30 Sieve 0-5
Percent by Retained on No. 80 Sieve 25 maximum
Percent by Retained on No. 200 Sieve 45 maximum
B. Asphalt
1. Asphalt shall be performance grade 64-28 S or L, AASHTO Performance Graded
Binder Specification (MP1) or AC 10 with latex.
2. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the source of asphaltic material for
approval prior to production of the asphaltic mixture.
3. The optimum asphalt content shall be determined by the Marshall Stability method.
4. The percent asphalt content in HMAC surface shall be optimum as indicated by
Marshall Stability optimum plus 0.5 percentage point for Type "C" and Type "D"
HMAC.
5. The asphalt content of the paving mixture shall not be below optimum, or vary from
the specified design asphalt content by more than plus 0.3 percent dry weight, based
on total mixture.
C. Prime Coat
1. The surface shall be primed using an application of 0.25 gallons per square yard of
MC asphalt conforming to ASTM D 2027 — MC 30.
D. Tack Coat
1. The asphaltic material for tack coat shall meet the requirements for Cut -Back
Asphalt RC-2.
E. Pavement -Marking Paint
1. Alkyd -resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with
AASHTO M 248, Type N.
2. Color, dimension and spacing of markings to match those existing prior to removal.
F. Mix Design
1. Hot -Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot -laid, hot -mix asphalt plant mixes approved by
authorities having jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in Al MS-2, "Mix
Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot -Mix Types"; and complying
with the following requirements:
a. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area
where Project is located.
2. Base Course
a. Provide caliche base course as specified in Division 2 Section 02720 —
"Aggregate Base Course".
3. Surface Course
a. Hot mix asphalt concrete surface shall consist of a compacted mixture of
coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, mineral filler (if required), and asphalt
cement mixed hot in a mixing plant in accordance with these specifications.
Unless otherwise specified, the materials and construction shall conform to
TxDOT Item 340 standard specification for "Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete
Pavement (HMAC).
►" 01275006
nc in-?
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 5
b. The combined mineral aggregate, after final processing by the nixing plant
and prior to addition of asphalt and mineral filler, shall have a sand equivalent
value of not less than 45 when tested in accordance with Test Method Tex
203-F. The percent of flat or elongated slivers of stone for any aggregate shall
not exceed 25% when tested in accordance with Test Method Tex 224-F.
C. Asphaltic mixtures shall be conditioned with either lime or liquid anti -
stripping agent approved by the Engineer. Anti -stripping agents shall meet
requirements of TxDOT Item 301 "Asphalt Antistripping Agents".
d. Type "C" and Type "D" Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete (HMAC) shall be used
for asphalt -paved street reconstruction as shown on the plans. The Contractor
shall provide a current HMAC mix design using the approved materials
indicating gradation and optimum asphalt content. The aggregate mixture
shall conform to the following master gradation:
Type "C" Type "D"
(Fine Graded (Coarse Graded
Surface Course) Surface Course)
Percent passing 7/8" 100 N/A
Percent passing 5/8" 98-100 100
Percent retained on 3/8" 12-25 5-15
Percent retained on No 4 15-30 30-50
Percent retained on No 10 12-30 12-30
Percent retained on No. 40 10-20 10-20
Percent retained on No. 80 5-15 5-15
Percent retained on No. 200 5-15 5-15
Percent passing No. 200 1-6 1-6
Material passing the No. 40 sieve shall be known as soil binder and shall meet
the following requirements:
Liquid Limit shall not exceed 45
Plasticity Index shall not exceed 15
Linear Shrinkage shall not exceed 5
The mineral aggregate shall not contain more than 0.5% moisture prior to
entering the pugmill for mixing with asphalt.
The HMAC mixture shall consist of a uniform mixture of mineral aggregate
and asphalt material. The percent asphalt in the mixture shall be determined to
meet the Marshall Stability criteria as follows:
Marshall Criteria Type "C" Type "D"
Percent Asphalt Content Optimun plus
0.25% to 0.50010
No. Blows (each end of specimen) 75 50
Minimum Stability (Lb.) 1,500 1,200
Flow (units of 0.01 inch) 8 min to 16 max 8 min to 18 max
Percent Air Voids 2 min to 5 max 3 min to 6 max
01275006 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 6
Alin-
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Proof -roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic -tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or
that require further compaction.
C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. Surface shall be clean and free of loose dirt, rock, or any other foreign matter.
3.2 PRIME COAT
A. Application
1. Immediately following the surface preparation, apply the bituminous material by
means of the bituminous distributor. Apply the bituminous material at a pressure
range of 25 to 75 pounds per square inch within the temperature limits specified
herein, and at the rate of not less than .25 gallon of bituminous material per square
yard. Apply the bituminous material so that uniform distribution is obtained over the
entire surface to be treated. Unless the distributor is equipped to obtain satisfactory
results at the junction of previous and subsequent applications, spread building paper
on the surface of the applied material for a sufficient distance back from the ends of
each application, so that flow from the sprays may be started and stopped on the
paper, and so that all sprayers will operate at full force on the surface to be treated.
Immediately after the application, remove the building paper and apply bituminous
material to spots missed by the distributor.
B. Curing
1. Following the application of bituminous material, allow the surface to cure without
being disturbed for a period of not less than 48 hours or longer, as may be necessary
to attain penetration into the foundation course and evaporation of the volatiles from
the bituminous material. Furnish and spread enough sand to effectively blot up and
cure excess bituminous material. Maintain the primed surface until the succeeding
layer of pavement is placed by protecting the surface against damage and by
repairing and repriming deficient areas.
C. Temperature
1. Maintain application temperature between 68 ° F and 149 ° F.
D. Protection
l . Keep traffic off surfaces freshly treated with bituminous material. Provide sufficient
warning signs and barricades to prevent traffic over freshly treated surfaces.
3.3 TACK COAT
A. Application
Yl 1. Apply the tack coat when the surface to be treated is dry. Immediately following the
preparation of the surface for treatment, apply the bituminous material by means of
the bituminous distributor, within the limits of temperature specified herein and at a
rate of not less than 0.05 gallon nor more than 0.15 gallon of diluted emulsion per
square yard. Apply the bituminous material so that uniform distribution is obtained
over the entire surface to be treated. Treat lightly coated areas and spots missed by
the distributor with the bituminous material. Following the application of bituminous
I material, allow the surface to cure without being disturbed for period of time
necessary to pernut setting of the tack coat. Apply the bituminous tack coat only as
01275006 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 7
fat- in advance of the placing of the overlying layer as required for that day's
operation. Maintain and protect the treated surface from damage until the succeeding
course of pavement is placed.
B. Temperature
1. Maintain application temperature between 122' F and 1850 F.
C. Material Test
I. Perform spot test for asphalt in accordance with AASHTO T102 on each shipment.
D. Traffic Controls
1. Keep traffic off surfaces freshly treated with bituminous material. Provide sufficient
warning signs and barricades so that traffic will not travel over freshly treated
surfaces.
3.4 SURFACE COURSE
A. HMAC shall be placed with a minimum compacted thickness of 2.0 inches for Type "C" or
Type "D" unless otherwise shown on the plans.
B. Air temperature requirements as follows:
1. November 1 to April 1
a. HMAC shall not be placed when the air temperature is below 55 degrees F
and falling.
b. HMAC may be placed when the air temperature is above 50 degrees F and
rising.
2. April 1 to November 1
a. ' HMAC shall not be placed when the air temperature is below 50 degrees F
and falling.
b. HMAC may be placed when the air temperature is above 45 degrees and
rising.
C. Air temperature shall be determined by the National Weather Service hourly
report.
C. If the temperature of any HMAC, measured while passing through the lay down machine,
is 25 degrees F less than the mixing temperature, that material shall be rejected. No
payment will be made for rejected material.
D. The asphaltic mixture shall be dumped and spread on the approved prepared surface using
an approved spreading and finishing machine. The material shall be placed in such a
manner that when properly compacted the finished course is smooth, of uniform density,
and in conformance with the cross -sections and grades shown on the associated plans.
E. A level up course, '/2 inch or more in thickness, shall require the use of ASB or a coarse
grade of HMAC approved by the Engineer.
F. When the asphaltic mixture is placed in a small area where use of a finishing machine is
not practical, the contractor may use other methods approved by the Engineer provided a
satisfactory surface can be obtained.
G. Adjacent to curbs, gutters or other flush structures, the surface shall be finished uniformly
high so that when compacted it will be'/a inch above the curb or flush structure.
H. All joints shall present the same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the
course. The joints between old and new pavements or between successive day's work shall
be made to insure a continuous bond between the old and new sections of the course. The
transverse edges of old pavement and, if required by the Engineer, the successive day's
pavement shall be cut with an approved concrete saw to expose an even vertical surface for
the full thickness of the course. All contact surfaces of previously constructed pavement
shall be painted with a thin uniform coat of hot bituminous material (tack coat) before the
fresh mixture is placed.
01275006 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 8
nc Jr»
I. Rolling with three wheel and tandem rollers shall start longitudinally at the sides and
proceed toward the center of the pavement, overlapping on successive trips by at least half
the width of the rear wheels. Alternate trips of the roller shall be slightly different in
length. On super -elevated curves rolling shall begin at the low side and progress toward the
high side.
J. The motion of the rollers shall be slow enough to avoid displacement of the mixture.
Rollers shall not be permitted to stand on pavement which has not been fully compacted.
Any displacement of the mixture shall be corrected immediately by the use of rakes and
fresh mixture where required.
K. Places inaccessible to the rollers may be compacted using lightly oiled tamps. Limited
areas where required compaction cannot be obtained using a three wheel roller shall be
compacted with a trench type roller.
L. The surface of the pavement after compaction shall be smooth and true to the established
line, grade, and cross-section. When tested with a 10 foot straight edge placed parallel to
the centerline of the roadway, or other means acceptable to the Engineer, the maximum
deviation shall be not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet. An acceptable 10 foot straight edge shall
be provided by the Contractor. Any point in the surface not meeting this requirement shall
be corrected as directed by the Engineer. When placed on existing surfaces, the 1/8 inch
maximum deviation requirements may be waived by the Engineer.
3.5 JOINTS
A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct
joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot -mix
asphalt course.
1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints.
2. Construct transverse joints as described in Al MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix
Asphalt Pavements."
3. Compact joints as soon as hot -mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive
displacement.
4. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.
3.6 COMPACTION
A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot -mix paving will bear roller weight
without excessive displacement. Compact hot -mix paving with hot, hand tampers or
vibratory -plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.
B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints
and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated
crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with
requirements.
C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling
while hot -mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until
hot -mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
1. Average Density: 96 percent of density according to bulk specific gravity and 93
density according to the maximum theoretical specific gravity (Rice.) per
ASTM D 2041 and TEX-227-F.
D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot -mix asphalt is
still warm.
n1?75nnA T-i(-)T-MTV' A.RPT-TAT TPAVTTT(; n^'^I
E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to
proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.
F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and
replace with fresh, hot -mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface
smoothness.
G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has
cooled and hardened.
H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to
become marked.
3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following
tolerances:
1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the
following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or
longitudinally to paved areas:
1. Base Course: 1/4 inch.
2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch.
3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.
Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall perform field tests and inspections and prepare test
reports.
I. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether
tested work complies with or deviates from specified requirements.
B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
C. Thickness: In -place compacted thickness of hot -mix asphalt courses will be determined
according to ASTM D 3549.
D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot -mix asphalt course will be tested for
compliance with smoothness tolerances.
E. In -Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and
compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979 or AASHTO T 168.
1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results
from four samples of hot -mix asphalt -paving mixture delivered daily to site, g
prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job -mix
specifications.
2. In -place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples
according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
a. One core sample will be taken for every 2000 sq. yd. or less of installed
pavement. _-
b. Field density of in -place compacted pavement may also be determined by
nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with
ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
i
HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 10
F. Remove and replace or install additional hot -mix asphalt where test results or
measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
G. Owner may elect to take confirmation tests at Owner's expense. Contractor shall cooperate
with Owner's testing agency. Failing tests taken at Owner's direction shall be charged to
the Contractor. Failing test charges shall include pro-rata technician charges, actual failing
test charge, pro-rata mileage charge, and other pro -rated charges.
END OF SECTION 02741
01275006 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 1 I
SECTION 02751
REINFORCED CONCRETE FOR SITE WORK
PART] -GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section includes the following:
1. Driveways.
2. Concrete Slabs.
3. Concrete Sidewalk.
4. Concrete curb and gutter.
5. Miscellaneous reinforced concrete.
B. This section applies wherever Contractor has elected to remove, or is required to remove,
and replace concrete pavement and driveway as part of the construction. Section applies
also for repair or replacement of facilities otherwise damaged by Contractor's operations.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections apply to this section.
B. Division 2 Section 02300 — "Excavation, Subgrade Preparation, Grading, Embankment and
Topsoiling".
C. Division 2 Section 02720 — "Aggregate Base Course".
D. Division 2 Section 02764 — "Pavement Joint Sealants".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of
blended hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans,
ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica fume.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data in accordance with Division I Section 01300 — "Submittals".
B. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
C. Design Mixes: For- each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when
characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
-= results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on
comprehensive testing of current materials:
1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.
-5 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
3. Fiber reinforcement.
4. Admixtures.
5. Curing compounds.
1 6. Applied finish materials.
t_.
01275006 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOR SITE WORK 02751 - 1
Bonding agent or adhesive.
Joint fillers.
E. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing, fabricating, bending, and placing concrete
reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing
Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, materials, steel grades, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement and methods
of support.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready -mixed concrete products complying
with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mix Concrete
Association's Plant Certification Program.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand
from the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source.
E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless
modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.
F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities and emergency services.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood, or other approved panel -type
materials to provide full -depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.
1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet or less.
2. Forms should be no less than 10 ft. in length.
B. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent with a maximum of
350 g/I volatile organic compounds (VOC's) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely
affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
C. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snap -off metal form ties
designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal.
Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed
concrete surface.
1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter
in the concrete surface.
01275006 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOR SITE WORK 02751 - 2
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into
flat sheets, shall be 6" x 6" — 10 gauge welded wire fabric, or as shown on plans.
B. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
C. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to
length with ends square and free of buns.
D. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
E. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, internally and externally threaded. Design hook -bolt
joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting
operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.
F. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcement bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar
supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or
precast concrete or fiber -reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete,
and as follows:
1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material
will not support chair legs.
2. Space reinforcing supports at 5'-0" maximum in any direction.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same
manufacturer throughout the Project.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, II, III or Type V or ASTM C175 and ASTM
C226, IA, IIA, or IIIA or Type VA for air entrained.
C. Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, from a single source, as follows:
1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal.
Aggregate shall be graded from fine to coarse and shall conform to ASTM C 136.
The gradation for aggregate shall meet the following requirements by weight:
FINE AGGREGATE
COARSE AGGREGATE
Sieve
Percent Retained
Sieve
Percent Retained
3/8 inch
0
1-3/4 inch
0
No. 4
0-5
1-1/2 inch
0-5
No. 16
20-55
3/4 inch
30-65
No. 30
45-75
3/8 inch
70-90
No.50
70-90
No.4
95-100
No.100
98-100
Maximum amounts of organic impurities shall conform to ASTM C 40 and
ASTM C 87. Maximum amounts of impurities finer than the #200 sieve shall
conform to ASTM C 117. Maximum amounts of soft particles shall conform to
ASTM C 123. Maximum amounts of friable particles shall conform to
ASTM C 142.
Stockpiles shall be protected from dusty conditions by drift fences or other methods
approved by the Engineer. Stockpiling methods used shall not allow aggregate to
roll down the slope as it is added to existing stockpiles. Stockpiles shall be built in
01275006 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOR SITE WORK 02751 - 3
layers of uniform thickness. Equipment shall not be permitted to operate over the
same lift repeatedly.
2. Coarse aggregate shall have a maximum loss of 18% when subjected to 5 cycles of
the magnesium sulfate soundness test (ASTM C-88).
3. The percentage of wear shall be no more than 40 when tested in accordance with
ASTM C-131 or ASTM C-535.
4. Aggregates delivered to the mixer shall consist of crushed stone, crushed gravel, or
natural sand. Crushing shall result in a product in which the coarse aggregate shall
have at least 95% by weight of particles with one or more fractured faces and 75%
by weight of particles with two or more fractured faces. The aggregate shall be
composed of sound, tough, durable particles and shall meet the requirements for
deleterious substances given in ASTM C33. The aggregate in any size group shall
not contain more than 8 percent by weight of flat or elongated pieces. A flat or
elongated particle is one having a ratio between the maximum and the minimum
dimensions of a circumscribing rectangular prism exceeding 5 to 1.
D. Water: ASTM C 94.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
The use of any material added to the concrete mix shall be approved by the Owner's
Representative.
A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent
water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures.
B. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other required admixtures.
C. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
D. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.
E. Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
F. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
2.5 FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A. Fiber reinforcement may be used in place of wire mesh only if approved by Engineer and
Owner.
B. Fiber reinforcement shall be 100% virgin polypropylene, collated, fibrillated fibers, made
for use as concrete reinforcement, containing no reprocessed olefin materials, and
conforming to ASTM C 1116, Type III.
C. Specific gravity - .91
D. Tensile Strength — 70,000 psi to 100,000 psi
E. Length — 2"
2.6 COVER MATERIAL FOR CURING
A. Curing materials shall conform to one of the following specifications:
1. Liquid membrane -forming compounds for curing concrete shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C309, Type 2 (all resin base).
2. White polyethylene film for curing concrete shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM C171.
01275006 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOR SITE WORK 02751 - 4
3. White burlap -polyethylene sheeting for curing concrete shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C171.
4. Waterproof paper for curing concrete shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM C171.
2.7 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic
fiber.
B. Texture Surface for Ramps
l . Meet requirements of the Texas Accessibility Standards.
2. Color as selected by Owner.
3. Surface should be non-skid.
4. Durabak with Safti-Traxx Detacable Warning System by Cote-L Distribution
Company, or approved equal.
C. Bonding Agent
1. Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base.
D. Sand Cushion
1. Clean, manufactured or natural sand with plasticity index of 8 or less.
E. Epoxy Adhesive
1. ASTM C 881, two -component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces.
Provide material type, grade, and class to suit project requirements.
2.8 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI301, for each type and strength of
normal -weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix
designs for the trial batch method.
1. Do not use Owner's field quality -control testing agency as the independent testing
agency.
C. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties:
1. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
D. Classification
1. The following classes of concrete shall be used:
Class A — Curb and gutter, sidewalks, curb ramps, drainage channels, medians, inlet
boxes, headwalls, junction boxes, driveways, and retaining walls.
Class B — Valley gutters and fillets, alley returns, and alley paving.
Class C — Concrete street pavement.
Class D — Utility encasements.
Class E — Fast setting concrete pavement such as "Fast Track" Concrete Pavement
or other special design.
E. Mix Design
1. At least 20 days prior to beginning any concrete pavement construction the
Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer for approval:
a. Test certificates from an approved commercial testing laboratory on all
proposed aggregate. Certificates shall indicate material source, gradation, and
loss from 5 cycle Magnesium Sulfate or Sodium Sulfate test (not to exceed
18 %).
b. A mix design based on water -cement ratio.
01275006 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOR SITE WORK 02751 - 5
C. Results of compression tests in conformance with ASTM C 39 and/or flexural
tests in conformance with ASTM C 78, made by an approved commercial
testing laboratory. Tests shall be made on 6 cylinders and/or 6 beams at
curing times appropriate to the class of concrete.
2. The Engineer will approve or reject the mix design and materials based on these
submittals. This approval shall be subject to additional testing during construction.
3. Mix designs for various classes of concrete shall conform to the following:
Minimum Sacks
Maximum Gal
Maximum Slump
Class
Cement per CY
Water per Sack
Inches
A
5.0
6.5
5
B
5.5
5.5
5
C
6.0
6.0
3
D
4.5
6.5
5
E
7.0
5.0
As specified by
Concrete batch plant
F. Strength Requirements
1. The various classes of concrete shall conform to the following strengths in psi as
determined by the average of two test cylinders or beams. If cores are subsequently
used to prove compressive strength where test cylinders indicate failures, the
required compressive strength shall be increased by 10%.
COMPRESSIVE FLEXURAL
Class 3 Day 7 Day 28 Day
A - 2,100 3,000 -
B 2,500 3,000 - -
C - 2,500 3,600 600 (28 day)
D - - 2,500 -
E 3,000 psi at 24 hours
G. Properties
1. Air Entrainment: 5% +/- 1'/2% ASTM C 260.
2. Synthetic Fiber: Use manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than
1.0 lb/cu.yd. (where applicable).
2.9 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94. j
B. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94 and
ASTM C 1116 when synthetic fibers are involved.
1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery
time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce
mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
C. Project -Site Mixing: Comply with requirements and measure, batch, and mix concrete
materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate
drum -type batch machine mixer.
1. For mixers of I cu. yd. or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least one and one-
half minutes, but not more than five minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before
any part of batch is released.
i_
01275006 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOR SITE WORK 02751 - 6
2. For mixers of capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for
each additional 1 cu. yd..
3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating
Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and
amount of water added.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Proof -roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for
additional compaction. Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions have
been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.
B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing
concrete.
3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement
to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work
and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's (CRSI) "Manual of Standard
Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing
Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond -reducing
materials.
C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position
during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least
one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction.
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Construct isolation, contraction, construction joints and tool edgings true to line
with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right
angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously
placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at
locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless
pavement terminates at isolation joints.
1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do
not continue -reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise
indicated.
nI "CrNn4 DPTKTFnT?r'FTl (nN('RFTF FnR CTTF WORK 02751 - 7
3.5
2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated.
3. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C.. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint -filler strips abutting concrete
curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where
indicated.
1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
2. Terminate joint filler less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if
joint sealant is indicated.
3. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not
indicated.
4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required,
lace or clip joint -filler sections together.
5. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other
temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on
both sides of joint.
D. Driveways and Pavements
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and
finishing each edge of joint with groover too] to the following radius. Repeat
grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover
marks on concrete surfaces.
a. Refer to plans for joint dimensions.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation,
reinforcement steel, and items to be embedded or cast in.
B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing
concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed.
Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required
finish elevation and alignment.
D. Comply with requirements and with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing,
transporting, and placing concrete.
E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not
push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
F. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -spading,
rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to
recommendations in ACI 309R.
1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an
internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side
forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand -spreading and consolidation.
Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint
devices.
G. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to
the required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats
immediately in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed.
1. Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more
than 15 minutes without being covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if
approved by Engineer.
01275006 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOR SITE WORK 02751 - 8
H. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating
using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before
excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete
surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading dry -shake surface treatments.
I. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on
concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.
J. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work
from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions,
or low temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to, or is expected to fall below, 40 deg F, uniformly
heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of
not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
K. Hot -Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and
as follows when hot -weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of
placement below 90 deg F. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to
control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of
mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover reinforcement steel with water -soaked burlap so steel temperature will not
exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog -spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating or finishing
operations is prohibited.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed -water sheen has disappeared
and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with
power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units.
Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface
immediately to uniform granular texture.
1. Light to Medium Broom Finish: For concrete sidewalks and miscellaneous slabs.
2. Medium -to -Coarse -Textured Broom Finish: For concrete pavement and driveways,
provide a medium -to -coarse finish by dragging float -finished concrete surface 1/16
to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff -bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.
3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI306.1 for cold -weather protection and follow
recommendations in ACI 305R for hot -weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding,
and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from
concrete surface.
n11"rnn� RFrntFORCFT) CONCRETE FOR SITE WORK 02751 - 9
3.8
D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture -retaining -cover curing,
curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with
the following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water -fog spray.
C. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends
lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately
repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof
tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or
roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to
heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of
coating and repair damage during curing period.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports
during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control include those specified
in this Article.
B. Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh concrete shall be
obtained according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with
ASTM C 94.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive -strength
test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete.
Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive -strength
test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air -entrained
concrete.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of
compressive -strength specimens.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard
cylinders for each compressive -strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders
shall be molded and stored for laboratory -cured test specimens unless field -cured
test specimens are required.
6. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each
concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each
additional 50 cu. yd. One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at
28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required.
7. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive -strength tests
for a given class of concrete, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
01275006 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOR SITE WORK 02751 - 10
C. Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer and Contractor within 24 hours of
testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and
number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and
class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength at 28 days,
concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break
for both 7- and 28-day tests.
D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Engineer but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection.
E. Additional Tests: Contractor shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results
indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been
met, as directed by Engineer. Contractor may conduct tests to determine adequacy of
concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
F. Contractor shall pay for failing tests.
G. Questionable Concrete
1. Concrete shall be considered "Questionable Concrete" where any of the following
test evaluations occur:
a. Individual test strength is below specified strength; or
b. Samples of concrete for acceptance test cylinders or acceptance test beams are
not representative of concrete -in -place in the pavement; or
C. Insufficient or inadequate concrete curing; or
d. Insufficient number of acceptance test cylinders or acceptance test beams for
day's concreting were made for testing.
2. Except where core tests will impair the strength of the structure, core test as directed
by the Owner shall be made at no cost to the Owner to resolve Questionable
Concrete. If core tests fail to demonstrate the test strength required by the contract
documents or structural analysis does not confirm the adequacy of the structure, the
Owner may, at his discretion, reject the work or require load tests or additional
construction. Should structural analysis confirm the adequacy of the pavement, the
Owner may, at his discretion, accept the concrete with credit for the full value of the
concrete delivered to the site in accordance with the General Conditions.
3. The Contractor shall pay all costs incurred in providing the additional testing or
analysis to resolve the acceptability of Questionable Concrete.
4. Core Tests
a. Three representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of
concrete for each test considered questionable. Location of cores shall be as
directed by the Owner to least impair the strength of the pavement. Damaged
cores shall be replaced.
b. Cores shall be obtained and tested in accordance with ASTM C42 except that
if concrete in the structure will be dry under service conditions the cores shall
be air dried (temperature 60 degrees F. to 80 degrees F., and relative humidity
less than 60%) for 7 days before test and shall be tested dry. If the concrete in
the structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, the
cores shall be immersed in water for at least 48 hours and tested wet.
C. Questionable concrete will be considered structurally acceptable if the
average of the cores is equal to or greater than 90% of the specified strength
and no single core is greater than 500 psi below specified compressive
strength (50 psi below specified beam strength).
01275006 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOR SITE WORK 02751 - 11
3.9 REPAIRS OF DEFECTIVE PAVEMENT SLABS
A. General
Broken slabs, random cracks, nonworking contraction joints near cracks, and spills along
joints and cracks shall be replaced or repaired as specified hereinafter at no cost to the
Owner.
B. Broken Slabs
Pavement slabs containing multiple cracks through more than 1/4 of the depth of the slab
separating the slab into three or more parts and pavement slabs with one or more cracks
through more than 1/4 of the depth of the pavement extending diagonally across more than
1/3 of the slab either transversely or longitudinally shall be entirely removed and replaced.
Pavement slabs containing a single diagonal crack intersecting the transverse and
longitudinal joints within 1/3 of the width and length of the slab from the corner shall be
repaired by removing and replacing the smaller portion of the slab. Repairs of broken slabs
shall be made in conformance with Paragraph 5.
C. Grooving and Repairing Cracks in Pavement Slabs
Random cracks penetrating more than 1/4 of the depth of the pavement shall be grooved,
the crack filled with epoxy -resin and the groove filled with epoxy -resin grout. The top of
the crack shall be grooved to a minimum depth of 3/4-inch and to a width not less than
3/8-inch nor more than 5/8-inch by means of an approved grooving machine. The grooving
machine shall be of the vertical rotary -cutting type and shall be capable of following
closely the path of the crack and of widening the top of the crack to the required section
without spalling or otherwise damaging the concrete. Random cracks that are tight and that
penetrate less than 1/4 of the depth of the pavement shall be filled with epoxy -resin. When
necessary, the depth of crack penetration shall be determined by inspection of cores not
less than 4 inches in diameter drilled by the Contractor at his expense at locations directed.
The core holes shall be refilled with portland-cement concrete bonded to the pavement
with epoxy -resin grout. In addition, when a longitudinal crack is continuous across one or
more slabs and penetrates more than 1/4 the depth of pavement, core holes not less than
6 inches in diameter shall be drilled through the full depth of slab at both ends of the crack.
In the operation to drill cores at the longitudinal -crack ends the core bits shall be so
positioned that the core removed will include not more than 3 inches of the crack.
Sandblasting and high-pressure air jets shall be used to remove any fines near the apparent
ends of the crack to permit accurate determination of ends of the crack. All fines, dust, and
other loose material on the wall of the cored holes shall be removed by scrubbing with a
stiff -bristle brush, followed by washing and dewatering of the core hole. These core holes
shall be refilled with epoxy -resin concrete. A prime coat of epoxy -resin binder thinned
with 3 parts toluene to 7 parts epoxy binder, by volume, shall be applied and brushed into
the vertical wall of the core hole. Placement of the epoxy -resin concrete shall be delayed
until the prime coat becomes stringy or approaches dry to touch. The epoxy -resin concrete
shall be placed in layers not over 6 inches thick. The time interval between placement of
additional layers shall be such that temperature of the epoxy -resin concrete does not exceed
140' F at any time during hardening.
01275006 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOR SITE WORK 02751 - 12
3.10 NONWORKING (UNCRACKED) CONTRACTION JOINTS
A. When a transverse random crack terminates in or crosses a transverse contraction joint, the
uncracked portion of the joint shall be filled with epoxy -resin mortar or grout and the crack
shall be routed and sealed. When a transverse random crack approximately parallels the
planned contraction joint and is within a distance of 25, percent of the slab length from a
contraction joint, the crack shall be routed and sealed, and the joint shall be filled with
epoxy -resin grout or mortar. When a transverse random crack is more than 25 percent of a
slab length from the nearest contraction joint, both the joint and the crack shall be sealed.
Joints to be filled with epoxy -resin mortar or grout shall be thoroughly cleaned. Cleaning
and sealing of cracks and joints shall be as specified in Division 2 Section 02764 —
"PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS", of these specifications.
3.11 SPALLING ALONG JOINTS AND CRACKS
A. Spalls shall be repaired by making a saw cut at least 1 inch outside the spalled area and to a
minimum depth of 2 inches. When the spalled area abuts a joint, the saw cut shall be made
to a depth of 2 inches or 1/6 the slab thickness, whichever is greater. The concrete between
the saw cut and the joint or primary crack shall be removed to a minimum depth of
2 inches below the original concrete surface, and to such additional depth where necessary
to expose a surface of sound, unweathered concrete that is uncontaminated by oils, grease,
deicing salts or solutions, or other substances that would inhibit the performance of the
epoxy -resin bonding material. Removal of the concrete volume between the saw cut and
the joint or primary crack shall be accomplished using a hydraulic impact hammer, or other
methods approved by the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall exercise care in
removing the required concrete such that no damage is inflicted on the adjoining concrete
slab. Damage of adjoining concrete shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense to the
satisfaction of the Owner's Representative.
The concrete void to be patched shall be thoroughly cleaned with compressed air,
sandblasting, or other approved methods to remove all loose material. A prime coat of
epoxy -resin binder thinned with 3 parts toluene to 7 parts epoxy binder, by volume, shall
be applied to the dry, cleaned surface of all sides of the cavity, except the joint or primary
crack face. The prime coat shall be applied in a thin coating and scrubbed into the surface
with a stiff -bristle brush. Placement of portland-cement concrete or epoxy -resin, concrete or
mortar shall be delayed until the prime coat becomes stringy or approaches dry to touch.
The epoxy concrete shall then be placed in the cavity in layers not exceeding 2 inches
thick. The time interval between placement of additional layers shall be such that the
temperature of the epoxy -resin concrete does not exceed 140 degrees F. at any time during
hardening. Mechanical plate, screed, float vibrators, or hand tampers shall be used to
consolidate the concrete or mortar. Excess mortar or concrete on the adjacent surfaces of
the hardened concrete shall be removed before it hardens. After the finishing operations
and while the epoxy -resin concrete or mortar is still tacky, a thin coating of portland
cement shall be uniformly spread on the surface of the repaired area and lightly brushed
into the surface. If the spalled area to be patched abuts a working joint or a working crack
which penetrates the full depth of a slab, an insert or other bond -breaking medium shall be
used to maintain working joints or cracks during the repair work. Surface embedment of a
flexible polyethylene or other suitable type hose shall be used for fornung a groove along
the working crack to be filled with appropriate type of joint -sealing material. The hose
shall be removed carefully before the concrete hardens sufficiently to form a high bond.
01275006 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOR SITE WORK 02751 - 13
The groove shall be thoroughly cleaned and filled with a sealer as specified in Division 2
Section 02764 — "PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS", of these specifications.
3.12 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF DEFECTIVE PAVEMENT AREAS
A. Defective pavement areas shall be removed and replaced as specified herein with
pavements of the thickness and quality required by these specifications. The defective
pavement shall be carefully removed in such manner that the adjacent pavement will not be
damaged and the existing reinforcement at the joints will be left intact. When a portion of
an unfractured slab is to be replaced, a saw cut 2 inches deep shall be made transversely
across the slab in the required location, and the concrete shall be removed to provide an
essentially vertical face in the remaining portion of the slab. Prior to placement of the fresh
concrete, the face of the slab shall be cleaned of debris and loose concrete, and then
thoroughly coated with epoxy -resin grout. The epoxy -resin coating shall be approximately
1/16-inch, and shall be applied by scrubbing a thin coat of grout into the surface with a
stiff -bristle brush followed by a second application. Strips of polyethylene sheeting shall be
placed on the vertical faces of adjacent slabs at the juncture with the slab to be patched as a
bond -breaking medium. Placement of the fresh portland-cement concrete shall be
accomplished while the epoxy -resin is still tacky and in such manner that the grout coating
will not be removed. Longitudinal and transverse joints of the replaced slab or portion
thereof shall be constructed as indicated. The joints shall be sealed as specified in Division
2 Section 02764, "PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS", of these specifications. The
replaced pavements will be paid for at the contract price but no payment will be made for
the defective pavements removed nor for the cost of removing the defective pavements.
3.13 TOLERANCE IN SLAB THICKNESS
A. The thickness of the slab shall be determined by average caliper measurement of cores
tested in accordance with ASTM C174. The Owner's Representative may elect to measure
thickness of concrete pavement prior to placement based on measurements from a string
line stretched across the forms or in the plastic concrete behind the concrete placing
operation.
B. Areas found deficient in thickness shall be removed and replaced with concrete of the
thickness shown on the plans at the Contractor's expense. If cores are used to determine the
concrete thickness, the core holes shall be filled with non -shrink grout by the Contractor at
the Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION 02751
01275006 REINFORCED CONCRETE FOR SITE WORK
i
iE
02751 - 14 {!
SECTION 02764
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Expansion and contraction joints within portland cement concrete pavement.
2. Joints between portland cement concrete and asphalt pavement.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Division 2 Section 02751 — "Reinforced Concrete for Site Work".
C. Division 2 Section 02741 — "Hot -Mix Asphaltic Concrete Paving".
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 1193 — Use of Joint Sealants
B. ASTM D 5249 — Backer Material for Use With Cold -and -Hot -Applied Joint Sealants in
Portland Cement Concrete and Asphalt Joints
C. ASTM D 1751 — Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)
D. ASTM D 3405 — Joint Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements
E. ASTM D 3406 — Joint Sealant, Hot Applied, Elastomeric Type, for Portland Cement
Concrete Pavements
F. ASTM C 920 — Elastomeric Joint Sealants
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint -
sealant samples in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
e y C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From joint sealant manufacturer indicating the
following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint -sealant backer materials have been
tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
- E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating joint sealants comply
with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations.
ni?MM PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 1
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint
sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose
work has resulted in joint -sealant installations with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals"
Article from a qualified testing agency, based on testing current sealant formulations
within a 36-month period.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according
to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
2. Test joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing
standard specifications and test methods.
D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturer,
for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact oi• affect joint sealants.
1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other
specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion
of joint sealants to joint substrates.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life,
curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent
their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or
other causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by
joint sealant manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. When blowing dust conditions exist.
B. Joint -Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint
widths are less than that allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Joint -Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until
contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
01275006 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 2
C':
application, as demonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Bituminous pre -molded expansion joint shall conform to ASTM D 1751.
C. Elastomeric sealant for contraction joints shall be, or shall be equivalent to, W.R. Meadows
"SOF-SEAL" oi- "Gardox".
1. Hot poured sealant for joints between portland cement concrete and bituminous
concrete shall conform to ASTM D 3405.
2. Hot poured sealant for all other joints in portland cement concrete pavement shall
conform to ASTM D 3406.
3. Cold poured joint sealant shall conform to ASTM C 920.
D. Mix material in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
2.2 JOINT -SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint -sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with
joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by joint sealant manufactures- based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Round Backer Rod for Cold- and Hot -Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of
diameter and density required to control sealant depths and prevent bottom -side adhesion
of sealant.
C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot -Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness
and width required to control sealant depths, prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant, and
fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.
D. Round Backer Rods for Cold -Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and
density required to control sealant depths and prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant.
2.3 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Product recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion
of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint- sealant -
substrate tests and field tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting joint -sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by
joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
.. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto
adjoining surfaces.
_.s
nt 97SMA PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 3
3.3
3.4
3.5
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions
applicable to products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements
apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C l 193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative
to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials.
3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth,
uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact
and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint sealant manufacturer and
that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions,
unless otherwise indicated.
G. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations
indicated.
CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite
such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from the original work.
END OF SECTION 02764
01275006 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 4
DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY
The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following:
DIVISION 2 — SITE WORK
02810 Irrigation Systems
03275006 - NWLL DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY MCD - 1
1 1 /06
SECTION 02810
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDER -LICENSING
A. The Bidder shall supply the name and license number of the licensed irrigator who is
responsible for the project with the bid submittal. The irrigation installer shall be licensed
in the state of Texas or from where the Contractor is based. Out, of state licensing, shall
only be acceptable if the licensing state shares reciprocity with Texas. A licensed irrigator
or installer shall be on the job site at all times when irrigation work is in progress.
B. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if bidder is not qualified based on the above
given criteria.
1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The Bidder is to conform to all local, state, and federal codes and ordinances.
1.3 DISCREPANCIES
A. It is the intent of this contract that all work must be completed and all material must be
furnished in accordance with the generally accepted practice of the area. In the event of
any discrepancies between the plans and specifications or doubts as to the meaning and
intent of any portion of the contract, the Owner shall define what is intended to apply to
the work.
1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Examination of Site
I. Bidder shall visit the project site and compare drawings and specifications to the
actual site. Failure to do so will in no way relieve the successful Bidder from the
responsibility of completing the project in accordance to project specifications at no
additional cost to the Owner.
B. Utilities
1. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that other underground utility lines
may exist of which the Owner is not aware. It is the Contractor's obligation to
locate and familiarize himself with all utilities and to provide for their safety.
Damage to utilities will be repaired at the Contractor's expense.
2. Water Supply (if applicable) — Installation of the meter or other water source is the
responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for all connections to
the City's water system. The connection and DCV shall be the same size as the
irrigation main, unless otherwise specified.
3. Electrical Power Supply (if applicable) - The Contractor will install power
connection to the meter box. The Contractor shall set the meter box. The Contractor
shall run power to the controller. Contractor mist satisfy City of Lubbock electrical
codes for electrical connections. The Contractor is required to have a licensed
electrician provide the electrical connections.
03275006 - NWLL IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 021810 - 1
:_ 1 1 /06
4. Bores / Road crossings (if applicable) - Contractor is responsible for bores and
sleeving necessary to go under city streets/utility drives to provide any utility
service to the project site. Bored holes shall be of the smallest diameter that will
permit installation of encasement pipe. Pipe sleeving under city streets, park roads,
and or parking lots shall be 16-gauge smooth steel pipe with a minimum wall
thickness of one -quarter (1/4") inch when pipe size is greater than four (4") inch
diameter. Irrigation lines crossing sidewalks shall be sleeved with Schedule 40 PVC
pipe twice that of the pipe when line is less than six (6") inch diameter. Pipe to be
large enough for irrigation pipe and conduit for electrical control wires (if
necessary). Notes shown on plans shall over ride specifications. Sleeves shall
extend at least two (2') feet out from under the surface structure.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor's on Site Responsibilities
I. The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect all existing
landscaping, sidewalks, buildings, vehicles, utilities, etc., in the area where the work
is being done or that may be located adjacent to or in -route across City property to
the job site. The Contractor shall rebuild, restore, and make good at his own
expense, all injury and damage to same which may result from work being carried
out under this contract.
2. The Contractor shall not park or drive any vehicles or equipment beneath the drip
line of on -site trees and shrubs. The Contractor and employees shall not park on
unsurfaced park property and shall not drive vehicles across City land unless it is
directly necessary to deliver materials to the job site.
3. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure the safety of any
pedestrians during the demolition, construction, and clean-up operations. The
Contractor shall maintain and keep in good repair the work intended under these
Plans and Specifications and shall perform all necessary repair, construction, and
renewal to the date of acceptance by the Owner.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for the Texas Prevention Legislation. The
Texas damage prevention law (Utilities Code Title 5, Chapter 251) took effect
October 1, 1998. This law requires excavators too call 48 hours before they dig.
Texas Excavation Safety System Inc. (TESS) is a non profit corporation formed by
member companies to prevent damage to underground facilities. The service is
100% free to -excavators by calling 1-800-DIG-TESS.
5. Any utility and irrigation lines shown on plans are for design and construction
information only. The depths of utility lines are not guaranteed. All underground
lines are referenced from known surface structures. It is not implied that all existing
public utility lines are shown on plan. Park utilities, are not listed with DIG-TESS;
they include, but are not limited to irrigation systems, and park lighting, all others
are public utilities. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that other
underground utility lines may exist of which the Owner is not aware. The Owner
does not assume any responsibility for any public utilities that are not shown on
plans. It is the Contractor's obligation to locate and familiarize himself with all
utilities and to provide for their safety. Damage to utilities will be repaired at
Contractor's expense. Park development staff will assist in the design and
relocation of utility lines.
6. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of unfinished work and shall
be responsible for the safety of individuals Llsing the unfinished equipment. The
03275006 - NWLL IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 2
1 1 /06
Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences,
lights, and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the
protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary.
7. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to work due to the failure of
barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the
damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by the Contractor at
his own expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades,
signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's
certificate of acceptance of the project.
8. The Contractor shall be responsible for removal, hauling, and disposal of all debris
and unusable material from proposed construction area and designated sites as
shown on plans and in specifications. The Owner shall retain the right to any
existing materials deemed to have value.
9. The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of site, to verify the completion
of all work as described in the specifications and shown on plans.
10. The Contractor shall furnish and supply all supervision, equipment, and labor
necessary to perform excavation, grading, backfill, compaction, and stock piling of
material as specified herein and on the plans.
B. Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling
1. Protect all materials from inclement weather: wet, damp, extreme heat, or cold,
theft, damage, or vandalism.
2. All manufacturers' labels, installation instructions, and shop drawings shall be in
included for each item ordered.
C. Equipment Check
1. The Contractor shall, one week after installation of equipment, check that all parts
are secure and are in good working condition.
2. Verify the completion of all work as described in the specifications and shown on
plans. ,
D. Clean-up
1. Demolition debris shall be removed from the site prior to commencement of
construction work
2. Within three days after completion of the site, the Contractor shall clean, remove
rubbish and temporary structures from the site. He shall restore adequately all
property, to its original integrity both public and private, which has been damaged
during the execution of work, and leave the entire site of the work in a neat and
presentable condition. The cost of the "cleanup" shall be included as a part of the
cost of the various items of work involved, and no direct compensation will be made
for this work. This work shall be done before final acceptance by the Owner will be
considered.
3. The Contractor shall clean up and dispose of all construction debris, including
excavated rock material. The area shall be graded back into existing grade
smoothly.
4. All spare parts or other pieces of equipment shall be turned over to the Owner
following completion of the project.
03275006 - NWLL IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 3
,__: 1 1 /06
1.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Responsibility of Materials
I. The Contractor shall be responsible for all materials furnished by him and shall
replace at his own expense all material found to be defective in manufacture or if it
has become damaged in handling after shipment.
B. Responsibility of Property
I. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection and preservation of all plant
material, monuments, and structures during installation. Any damage shall be
repaired or replaced by the Contractor, at his own expense, to the satisfaction of the
Owner.
2. All trenching or any excavation is to be no less than six (6) feet from the trunk of
any plant material. If questions arise, the Contractor shall contact the Owner for
clarification.
C. Barricades and Protective Measures
I. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of unfinished work. The
Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences,
lights, and danger signals. He shall also take such other precautionary measures for
the protection of persons, property, and the work as may be necessary.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of
barricades, signs, and lights to protect it. When damage is incurred, the damaged
portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own
cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades,
signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to of City's certificate of
acceptance of the project.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Materials
I. At the completion of the job, the Contractor shall furnish spare parts, special tools,
and equipment required to operate and maintain the system.
B. Maintenance Data
I. The Contractor shall furnish two (2) copies of parts list and repair manuals for
controllers, valves, and heads.
C. Project Record Document
1. The Contractor shall prepare "as -built" plans of system after final check. Work to be
done on vellum paper with legend describing symbols for equipment. "As -built"
plans shall be accurate. Inaccurate plans will not be accepted. Final payment will
not be made until "as -built" plans are submitted and approved by Park Development
staff.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE OF SPECIFIED MATERIAL
A. All specifications given for materials are based on the performance of the equipment. This
is to assure the integrity and proper hydraulics for which the system is designed. If bid
material does not conform to Qiven performance specifications, the bid will be rejected by
the Owner based on grounds that proper function of system could not be maintained by
using equipment that does not meet the performance specifications required.
03275006 - NWLL IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 4
1 1 /06
-j
fy, B. All material to be new, unused, and current.
► C. All material must be a standard product of a nlall,llfilCllll'el'.
D. The Contractor shall provide performance records to verify equipment capabilities.
2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Conditions for substitutions Co►' approved equal')
1. In the event that the clause 'or approved equal' is used in the specifications
pertaining to materials, the Bidder desiring to make substitutions for specified
equipment shall submit the following:
a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name, address, and product
literature.
b. Product description.
C. Product performance and test date.
d. Reference standards.
e. Manufacturer instructions for maintenance and repairs.
2, Request for substitution shall be included with the overall bid and will be
considered before contract is awarded.
3. After the contract is awarded, no substitutions will be considered. It will be the
Bidder/Contractor's responsibility to assure the availability of specified product or
substitution before the bid date.
4. The Bidder shall provide the same guarantee for substitution as for product or
method specified.
5. The Bidder shall coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, making
such changes as may be required for work to be complete in all aspects.
6. The Bidder shall waive all claims for additional costs related to substitution that
consequently becomes apparent.
7. The Bidder shall be prepared to send the Owner a price breakdown of any and/or all
items on which he has bid. Price breakdowns will only be requested after the bid
opening has taken place.
B. Substitutions will not be considered if:
1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or project data submittals without
being formally described in detail as to their differences from what was originally
specified.
2. Acceptance will require substantial revision of the original layout of the project.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. PVC Pipe
,7 1. All polyvinyl chloride pipes shall be class 200, SDR 21 un-plasticized polyvinyl
chloride, Type I, Grade I.
B. Fittings
rl I. All pipe must have manufacturer's markings clearly printed on them during
installation
2. All class 200 pipes must conform to ASTM. D-2241
3. All lateral piping under four (4) inches shall be solvent weld.
4. All mainline piping four (4) inches and larger shall use belled ends or belled
COUplingS uSiIlg rubber gaskets in twenty- (20) foot layln'; lengths.
I 5. All fittings for four (4) inches or larger mainline shall be 200 psi Gasketed Fittings.
6. All fittings shall be pressure rated for 200-psi nulxinuull Working pressure.
03275006 - NWLL IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 5
1 1 /06
1.
d
7. Gaskets shall be designed for pressure and vacuum with maximum deflection
(ASTM F-477).
8. PVC Fittings
9. Schedule 40 fittings must conform to ASTM D-2466. i
10. Schedule 80 fittings must conform to ASTM D-2464.
1 1. Three (3) X Four (4) Reducing Male adapters shall not be used.
C. Swing Joints
1. Nipples: Schedule 80 with molded threads on both ends, unless specified otherwise
in construction detail.
2. Elbows: (90 degree) Schedule 40 FIPT X FIPT.
3. Pre -fabricated swing joints are acceptable as specified Sec. 03,VI, C, 5b.
4. Lateral line fittings: Schedule 40.
D. Flow Meter— Data Industiral with wire to controller.
E. Valves
I. Manual Control Gate Valve
a. All gate valves shall have resilient seats, iron body, bronze mounted
throughout, threaded 3/a", brass or bronze, and shall meet all requirements of
AWWAC 509. All valves shall be mechanical joint. All valves shall open by
turning to the left, and unless otherwise specified shall have non -rising stem
when buried and outside screw and yoke when exposed. Gate valves shall be
furnished with a two-inch operating nut when valves are buried and shall be
furnished with hand wheels when exposed. Gate valves shall be furnished
with O-ring stem packing.
2. PVC Ball Valves: (If Applicable)
a. All Ball Valves shall be Thermoplastic; single entry type constructed of PVC
Type I cell Classification 12454; with Buna-N O-Rings. All valves shall have
Safe-T-Shear stems and double stops; Polypropylene handle. The valve union
nuts shall have Buttress threads, and all valve components shall be
replacable. The valves shall be certified for potable water use by the N.S.F.
The 3" valves shall be pressure rated at 150 psi for water at 73 degrees; as
manufactured by Spears Mfg. Co. Use threaded 3" Male Adapters in valves y
for connection with piping. L
3. Quick -coupler Valves
a. Rain Bird # 44-RC, I", Single lug, 2-piece body, heavy cast bronze with
Rubber Cover Lid `or approved equal'.
b. Standard cover.
C. The Contractor shall supply the Owner with seven- (7) valve keys for each
Quick -coupler type.
d. Installed with minimum ten- (10) inch diameter with a minimum six- (6) inch
opening concrete doughnut (for I" valves). Donuts shall be installed flush
with finished ground level and shall not shift when walked upon.
4. Section Valve Hunter ICV-301 G or `approved equal.
a. Sized according to plan.
b. Direct burial, remote control electric valve normally closed.
C. Solenoid - Waterproof molded epoxy resin construction having no carbon
steel components exposed, having a captive solenoid plunger
d. Internal Manual Bleed to keep valve boxes dry. I `
e. Diaphragm - made with fabric reinforcement.
f. Flow adjustment system.
g. Cold water working pressure: - 20 to 220 psi
03275006 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 6
08/06-
h. Heavy-duty glass -filled UV resistant nylon with captive bonnet bolts with
matching brass body inserts.
5. Double Check Valve: (If Applicable)
a. The double check valves shall be a Febco series 950 "or approved equal".
Size to handle design flow as specified on the irrigation plans.
b. The unit shall have non -rising stem resilient seat gate valves.
C. The unit shall consist of four (4) test cocks with plugs which provide for in -
time testing and maintenance.
d. The double check valves are to be accessible from the top of the device
without removing the check valve body from the line.
e. Stainless steel springs and corrosion resistant materials shall be used
throughout.
f. Valve boxes to be used. (See V. Products, B., 6., Valve boxes, a.)
6. Valve Boxes
a. Valve Box (Ametek "or approved equal").
1) Supplied by the Contractor
2) To be installed by the Contractor
3) Minimum dimensions: 15" x 21" x 12" deep, molded plastic.
Extensions shall be used as necessary to bring valve box to grade and
shall be compatible with box to achieve depth required (no bricks shall
be used).
4) Bolt -in green lid with cover lift holes (rectangular, lid shall have snap
lock tab closure).
7. Sprinkler Heads.
a. Specified Head #1: Hunter I-25 Plus series with stainless steel risers and flow
rates ranging between 3.8 and 31.5 gpm. ( `or approved equal').
1) Sprinklers shall be pop-up type with gear drive for full circle and part
circle coverage. The final gear drive and bull gear drive shall be made
of stainless steel and brass. The nozzle and drive assembly shall also be
encased in stainless steel.
2) Sprinklers shall be mounted up to one-half (1/2") inch below finished
grade.
3) Sprinklers shall have nozzles as shown on the Plan. These flows, radii,
and precipitation rates are listed in a chart on the Plan Notes.
b. Specified Head #2: Hunter I-20 Ultra series with stainless steel risers and
flow rates ranging between 3.8 and 31.5 gpm. ( `or approved equal').
1) Sprinklers shall be pop-up type with gear drive for full circle and part
circle coverage. The final gear drive and bull gear drive shall be made
of stainless steel and brass. The nozzle and drive assembly shall also be
encased in stainless steel.
2) Sprinklers shall be mounted up to one-half (1/2") inch below finished
grade.
3) Sprinklers shall have nozzles as shown on the Plan. These flows, radii,
and precipitation rates are listed in a chart on the Plan Notes.
8. Controller: (If Applicable)
a. Shall be a RainMaster Evolution DX2 and all Accessories, stations to be
specified on plans. Controller will be provided by City, Controllers are
currently vvarehoused at Watermaster Irrigation. 6001 Brownfield Hwy,
Lubbock TX 79464,
03275006 - NWLL IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 7
1 1 /06
9. Controller Enclosure; (If Applicable)
a. Box to enclose the controllers shall be a Barfield manufacturing BGSSE
182630SP. The box will be provided by the City. The boxes are currently
warehoused at Watermaster Irrigation, 6001 Brownfield Hwy. Lubbock TX
79464.
10. Lightning Arrestors with Grounding Rods: (If Applicable).
a. Arrestor to be installed at controller by Contractor. Lightening rods shall be
installed by Contractor.
b. Ground Rods -Copper coated steel using copper coated or bronze one-piece
clamps.
11. Control Wiring
a. All 24 volt wiring to be ## AWG-annealed copper, Baron UF, 600 volt, PVC
coated UL approved direct burial.
b. All wire to be single stranded, one wire for each electric valve and a common
wire.
C. 12 gauge Common wire
d. 14 gauge Zone wire
e. Flow Sensor wire — EV-CAB-SEN — 2 conductor direct burial shielded cable
for connectiong flow sensors to controllers. Maimum allowable distance is
2000 feet.
f. All control wires to be installed at minimum depth of eighteen (18") inch and
directly alongside any pipe if the same ditch is used.
g. Add yellow and green 14 gauge spare wires looped in mainline ditch.
12. Miscellaneous Equipment
a. Wire Connectors shall be 3M model DBY.
b. Provide moisture -proof connection for underground wiring.
C. Solvent Cementing
1) Primer- Weld -On P-68 Purple Colored Only (All pipe and fittings)
2) Sol vent- '/2" then 1 '/2" Weld -On #705; 2" three-10" Weld -On #717.
3) Manufactures Recommendations shall be followed at all times.
d. Thrust Blocks
1) Concrete "ready -mix" - 3,000 PSI. in 28 days with number #3 rebar
installed. To be placed at all angles and terminal ends of two and one-
half (2'/2") inch or greater pipe. To be placed at all angles (90's, 45's,
tees) and at terminal ends of pipe. (Refer to Thrust Block Detail)
Thrust Blocks must be installed against the pipe and extend to twelve
(12") inches of an undisturbed vertical wall of the trench. All pipe and
fittings to be wrapped in thirty (30) pound felt to protect from
movement.
e. All pipe to have a one (1') foot minimum vertical separation from all non -like
utility lines.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANDLING OF MATERIALS
A. The Contractor shall exercise care in handling, loading, and unloading of all equipment.
All PVC pipe, fittings, and other equipment shall be adequately covered and protected
03275006 - NWLL IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 8
1 1 /06
from the elements. Pipe and fittings also shall be transported in such a fashion as to be
protected from excessive bending and from external, concentrated load at any point.
3.2 TRENCHING
A. To have straight, flat bottoms and of sufficient depth for sprinkler head and operable
swing joint
B. Trench Size:
I . Minirllunl width: Six (6") inches
2. Minimum cover over installed supply piping: Eighteen (18") inches
3. Minimum cover over installed branch piping: Fourteen (14") inches
4. Minimum cover over installed outlet piping: Fourteen (14") inches
5. Maximum centerline depth main line shall not exceed twenty-four (24") inches at
zone valves.
C. Pipe pulling is not acceptable.
D. All trenches and adjoining areas shall be hand raked to leave the grade in as good or better
condition than before construction started.
E. All settling and low areas that occur within the first twelve (12) months shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to fill and level.
F. Trench to accommodate grade changes.
G. Maintain trenches free of debris, material, or obstructions that may damage pipe.
H. Where rock or other undesirable materials are encountered trenches are to be over
excavated by three (3")inches to allow for a three (3") inch layer of finely graded sand
under all piping. After the piping is installed, finely graded sand shall be placed around the
piping up to a point three (3") inches above the. piping.
I. All trenches are to be inspected and approved by Owner before covering.
J. Trench digging machinery may be used to make trench excavation except in places where
operation of same would cause damage to existing st uctures ' either above or below
Cr
ground; in such instances, hand methods shall be employed.
K. The Contractor shall locate all existing underground lines, of which he has been advised
whether or not they are shown on the drawings, sufficiently in advance of the trenching to
make whatever provision necessary to prevent damage thereto. Extreme care shall be used
to prevent such damage and the Contractor shall be fully responsible for damage to any
such lines.
L. There will be no classification of, or extra payment for excavated materials and all
materials encountered shall be excavated as required. Adjacent structures shall be
protected from damage by construction equipment. All excavated material shall be piled in
a manner that will not endanger the work or existing structures and which will cause the
least obstruction to roadways.
M. The Contractor will be required to locate all known utility lines far enough in advance of
the trenching to make proper provision for protecting the lines and to allow for any
deviations that may be required from the establishment lines and grades.
N. Excess trench excavation, not used for backfill, shall be disposed of by the Contractor, and
at the Contractor's expense as directed by the Owner.
O. All trench backfill shall be flooded to prevent settling to 95% Standard Proctor Maxinlum
Density. Tamping is required, at road crossings the material shall be placed in 8-inch
layers. moistened if necessary, and thorought)' compacted with mechanical tampers from
the bottom of the trench to the finish grade to a density of at least 95% of maximum
density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D698.
03275006 - NWLL IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 9
:_m 11/06
P. It is understood that the piping layout is dynamic and piping shall be routed in such a
manner to achieve the intent of the plan.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe, valves, controls, and outlets in accordance with manufacturer's inst►l►ctions.
B. Connect to utilities.
C. Set outlets and box covers at finish grade elevations.
D. Provide for thermal movement of components in system.
E. Swing Joints
1. Swing joints shall be used on all rotary gear driven sprinklers and shall be of the
same diameter as the inlet opening and shall have a twelve (12") lay length.
2. Pre -manufactured swing joints shall be used as manufactured by Spears swing joint
schedu le 80t, Lasco G 132-212, or KBI TSA- I OOOTT.
F. Wiring:
1. All wiring shall be Type UF, copper direct bury type made for the irrigation
industry. Wiring shall be color -keyed: 12 ga. white for ground, 14 ga. red for
operation of equipment, and a one (1) foot loop in each valve box of a 12 ga green
and a 12 ga.yellow spare.
2. Wire splices will only be allowed to occur within an accessible control box. Inline
direct burial splices will not be allowed. Wire splices shall be DBY model as
manufactured by 3M Company or approved equal.
3. Provide looped slack at valves and turns in trench to allow for contraction of wires.
4. All wire passing under existing paving, sidewalk, etc., shall be encased in plastic
conduit extending at least twelve (12") inches beyond edges of paving or
construction.
5. All electrical control wiring shall be wrapped together on 10-feet increments with
plastic straps. An electrical wiring schematic shall be furnished with the equipment.
6. Extra yellow and green wires shall be installed in mainline ditch.
G. After piping is installed, but before outlets are installed and backfill commences, open
valves and flush system with full head of water.
H. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Construct joints using adapters that are compatible
with both piping materials, outside diameters, and system working pressure.
I. Concrete Thrust Blocks are required at all turns and dead -ends on pipe sizes three (3")
inches and over. Pipe of smaller sizes may also require thrust blocks if so directed by the
Owner. Concrete shall have a twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 3000 psi,
minimum. (See Detail).
3.4 LAYING OF PVC PIPE
A. The pipe is to be snaked from side to side of trench bottom to allow for expansion and
contraction of the pipe.
B. All foreign matter is to be removed from inside of pipe before joining. Keep clean during
laying operations by means of plugs or other approved methods.
C. All lumber, rubbish, and large rocks shall be removed from the trenches. Pipe shall have
firm, uniform bearing for the entire length of each pipeline to prevent uneven settlement.
D. Do not lay pipe in water, or when trench or weather conditions are unsuitable for work.
E. When work is not in progress, securely close the open ends of pipe fittings so that no
trench water, earth, or other substance will enter pipes or fittings.
F. Take up and relay any pipe that has the grade or joint disturbed after laying.
03275006 - NWLL IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 10
1 1 /06
G. Fittings at bends in the pipeline and at ends of lines shall be firmly wedged against the
vertical face of the trench, but not against rock.
H. Thrust blocks to be used. (See V. Products, B., 12.d., Thrust Blocks)
I. Make joints in all threaded fittings by applying Teflon tape on male threads. Use of Teflon
dope is prohibited.
J. Where threaded PVC connections are required, use threaded PVC adapters.
K. There shall be no less than nine (9) inches of pipe between any two fittings. except for
close nipples used in swing joints.
L. No cross tees or street ells are to be used at any time.
M. On cut pipe, all burrs to be removed, tees and pipe to be cleaned, and primer and solvent
applied as to standard application process.
N. After pipe has been solvent welded, do not apply water pressure for a time less than that of
the manufacture's recommendation, considering current weather conditions.
O. All pipe shall be installed so that manufacture's markings are facing in the up position.
P. Excess PVC Solvent shall be removed from joints before drying to prevent pipe
weakening. Pipe connections made with excess solvent will not be accepted.
Q. Solvent welding will not be permitted if weather conditions prevent joints from remaining
free of dirt or moisture, while the joint is being made. Also, if the temperature is below
that specified by the pipe or solvent manufacturer's recommendations.
R. The Owner must be given twenty-four (24) hour notice before the pipe trenches are
covered so that Owner's representative may be present for inspection. After the pipe
system has been inspected and approved, trenches may be closed.
S. All pipe shall have a one (P) foot minimum vertical separation from all utility lines in
close proximity.
T. Thrust blocks to be used. (See V. Products B.,12d. Thrustblock)
3.5 INSTALLATION OF VALVES (GATE, BALL, QUICK COUPLER, DOUBLE CHECK, AND
SECTION VALVES)
A. Install all new valves on a level grade with the mainline. Valve boxes shall extend a
minimum of three (3") inches below bottom of valve. Valve box extensions shall be used
as necessary and shall be compatible with the valve box.
B. Double check valves two (2) inches or smaller shall be installed with PVC unions on both
sides of the valve assembly. Double check valves three (3) inches or larger shall be flange
mounted.
C. After installing valves and valve boxes, backfill holes with a three (3") inch minimum
washed gravel, three-quarters (3/4") inch size up to bottom of valve.
D. Quick -coupler valve to be installed on swing joint. Top to be flush with finish grade.
3.6 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. All sprinkler heads to be installed at spacing indicated on plans.
B. Sprinkler heads installed on swing joint assemblies shall be installed so that the top of
head is slightly above ground level to allow for settling.
C. All sprinkler heads to be set to properly arc by the Contractor.
D. All sprinkler heads to be installed six (6) inches from existing and/or proposed fence line
03275006 - NWLL IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 11
t_, 1 1 /06
3.7 FLUSHING
A. The mainline and valves will be flushed after installation. Full working pressure must be
used to flush all lines. On a loop system the two valves the greatest distance from the
water source will be opened. On any other configuration of mainline, the last valve on
each mainline will be opened for flushing. The Owner's representatives must be given
twenty-four (24) hours notice before flushing begins so they may be present for
inspections. After mainlines have been inspected and flushed, the lateral lines may be
installed.
B. The lateral lines will be flushed just before head installation. The flushing procedure will
consist of pointing all swing joints away from ditch line to prevent contamination. Next,
open the valve with full working pressure and begin capping each swing joint with a
threaded cap, beginning with the swing joint closest to the valve and ending with the
swing joint the greatest distance from the valve. Twenty-four (24) hour notice must be
given to Owner's representatives for inspection.
C. Flush pipes until free of all rock, dirt, trash, pipe shavings, and debris.
3.8 LEAKAGE TEST
A. After pipe is laid, line to be pressurized and all air expelled from line at highest point of
each section.
B. Each line to be inspected for leaks. Any joints showing leaks shall be repaired and any
cracked or defective pipes or fittings shall be removed and replaced with good material.
3.9 BACKFILL
A. Trenches to be backfilled with the excavated earth from trench work. All rocks and debris -
to be removed and no item larger than one (1) inch diameter to be placed back in the
trench. Backfill is to be compacted and flooded to settle trench. The Contractor shall add
more backfill if needed to bring trenches to existing grade.
3.10 CONTROLLER (IF APPLICABLE)
A. Contractor to locate controller as indicated on plans.
B. Contractor shall install a concrete slab four (4) inches thick flush to ground. The
Contractor shall provide and install a stainless steel rain -tight controller pedestal which is
designed for use with the specified controller. Contractor shall install grounding rod
through concrete slab inside of the stainless steel rain -tight box.
C. Contractor shall install rigid conduit from edge of slab, ell up through and attach to
controller box. One conduit for power source; one conduit for common/section wires.
D. Power wire conduit to be 3/a" diameter rigid conduit to meet city code.
E. One duplex plug shall be installed in the controller box.
3.11 WIRING
A. Control wires from controller to valves shall be laid in sprinkler line trenches (if
applicable -wiring to be installed along wiring route on plan).
B. Control wires to be taped together every twenty (20) feet along trench.
C. Expansion loops shall be made at every turn in the trench and every 50 foot length of wire
run by wrapping at least five (5) turns of wire around a one (1) inch rod or pipe. Next,
withdam the rod leaving turns in wire.
03275006 - NWLL IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 12
I i /06
D. All wire connections or splicing work shall have moisture proof connectors, and their
location must he denoted on the as -built plan. Contractor shall minimize amount of splices.
E. Common valve wiring shall he white through entire system.
F. Section valve wiring shall be red through entire system. White wire may not be used as
section wire.
3.12 LIGHTNING ARRESTORS AND ROD
A. A lightning arrestor and rod shall be installed at each controller. The rod shall be installed
by the contractor and placed within the concrete slab below the controller.
B. Rod shall be copper coated steel, minimum 8 feet long, and 5/8" diameter.
C. Rod shall have minimum resistance of twenty-five (25) OHMS or less.
D. Rod to be connected to controller by a copper coated or bronze one piece clamp.
E. Wire used to connect controller to lightning rod shall be 6 gauge solid copper wire or one
C' larger than power wires, whichever is largest.
3.13 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Do not allow any of the work in this section to be covered or enclosed until it has been
inspected, tested and approved by the Owner or Owner's Representative.
B. Prior to backfill, the main line and with control valves in place but before the lateral lines
are connected, completely flush and test the main line.
C. Fill the main line with water for a twenty-four (24)-hour period prior to testing.
D. Pressure test main lines with 100 psi for a period of two (2) hours. Allowable leakage shall
be as determined by the formula listed in AWWA C600. The Owner will witness and
approve all tests. Notify -the Owner at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all
testing.
E. Provide all testing equipment and personnel required to complete the testing procedure.
Repeat testing as required.
F. Flush, clean, adjust, and balance all systems.
G. Adjust heads for proper coverage.
H. Double Check Valves shall be tested and certified, and two (2) copies shall be provided to
the owner as required by local, state, and federal codes and ordinances
3.14 INSPECTION/ ACCEPTANCE
A. Preliminary Inspection
1. When all initial installation is done and all incidentals necessary to the proper
function of the system is done, the Contractor shall request the Owner to walk
through system and visually check the operation of the system. At this time the
Owner and the Contractor will discuss repairs that may need to take place.
B. Final Inspection
I. After preliminary inspection has taken place and all corrections and repairs have
been completed by the Contractor, the Contractor and the Owner will again walk
through system to check operation. This procedure will be repeated until system
operates to the Owner satisfaction. At this time the Owner will accept system from
the Contractor. An acceptance form will follow from the Owner to the Contractor.
03275006 -1\WLL IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 13
�.� 1 1 /O6
3.15 CLEAN UP AND ADJUSTING
A. Removal of Site Debris.
l . The Contractor shall:
a. Make final clean up of all parts of work.
b. Remove all construction material and equipment.
C. Prepare the site in an orderly and finished appearance.
d. Remove from site any rock or extra dirt that resulted from this and restore site
to its original condition.
e. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other
devices.
f. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating
pressure required for each sprinkler circuit.
g. Carefully adjust lawn sprinklers so they will be flush with, or not more than
one-half (1 /2") inch below finish grade after completion of landscape work.
h. Adjust settings of controllers and automatic control valves.
i. The Contractor will be required to remove all construction debris from the
site. Final clean up by the Contractor must be acceptable to the Owner.
3.16 COMMISSIONING
A. Starting Procedures
I . Follow manufacturer's written procedures. If no specific procedures are prescribed
by proceed as follows:
a. Verify that specialty valves and their accessories have been installed correctly
and operate correctly.
b. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.
C. Check that sprinklers and devices are correct type.
d. Check that any damaged materials, valves and devices have been replaced
with new materials.
e. Check that potable water supplies have correct type backflow preventers.
f. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
g. Adjust operating controls.
2. Operational Testing: Perform operational testing after hydrostatic testing is
completed, backfill is in place, and rotor heads are adjusted to final position.
B. Demonstration
1. Demonstrate to the Owner that system meets coverage requirements and that
automatic controls function properly.
2. Demonstrate to the Owner's maintenance personnel operation of equipment,
sprinklers, specialties, and accessories. Review operating and maintenance
information.
3. Provide a seven (7) day written notice in advance of demonstration.
C. Guarantee
l . The Contractor shall:
a. Make all needed repairs or replacements due to defective workmanship or
materials for exactly one (I ) year following date of final acceptance.
b. Be responsible for all expenses necessary for repairs and replacement.
03275006 - NWLL IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 14
1 1 /06
C. Pay all expenses incurred if the Contractor fails to act upon a request from
-, the Owner for repairs to system. If the Contractor Fails to do work within ten
(10) days after request has been made by the Owner, the Owner will proceed
with repairs and charge al expenses to the Contractor.
d. Pay for expenses incurred to project due to vandalism prior to final
acceptance.
e. Owner shall pay for all expenses incurred due to vandalism after final
acceptance.
CND OF SECTION
03275006 - N WLL IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 15
1 1 /06
F_
May 11.2007
SECTION 02905
LANDSCAPING
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of
this Section.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02300 — Excavation, Subgrade Preparation, Grading, Embankment, and Topsoiling
B. Section 02810 — Irrigation
1.3 CONTRACT SCOPE
A. This contract includes purchase, delivery, and installation of trees, plants, sodding, mulch, and
ground cover.
B. Coordination of landscaping, irrigation, and pavement work shall assure that work is installed as
shown at no extra cost to owner.
C. Preparation of soil, placement of plants, ground cover, seed, sod, and fertilizer.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Nursery: Company specializing in growing and cultivating the plant life specified in this section.
B. Sod Producer: Company specializing in sod production and harvesting.
C. Maintenance Services: Performed by installer at regular intervals as required for a period of one
year.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year warranty, including one continuous growing season of plants, from death or
unhealthy conditions.
B. Replacements: Plants of same size and species as specified, planted in the next growing season,
with a new warranty commencing on date of replacement.
1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintain sodded areas and plant life for one year from date of substantial completion. Owner will
contract mowing service separate from this agreement.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit labels of all planting material shown on the drawings and specified.
B. Submit soil preparation procedures that will be used for review and approval.
Oaeulhor�izaea aopl�ceii , Voiobu`ed" .• Inc.LANDSCAPING 02905 - 1
May 11, 2007
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LAWN
2.2
2.3
2.4
A. Use hydromulch products outside of ball field fenced area, all spectator areas; and all player warm
up areas.
B. Use sod products within the ball field fence.
GRASS
A. Sod: ASPA Certified field grown grade; cultivated grass sod; with strong fibrous root system.
1. Common Bermuda grass (Cynodon dectylon)
2. Approved Equal.
B. Hydromulch: Conwed, Weyerhauser, or Texas Fiber Company.
C. Machine cut sod with minimum 1/2 inch and maximum one inch topsoil base.
SOIL AND SOIL ENHANCEMENT MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth,
free of subsoil, clay or impurities, plants, weeds, and roots.
B. Submit product labels and list of material sources for review.
FERTILIZER
A. General
C.
1. Fertilizer shall be a commercial product, uniform in composition, free flowing and
suitable for application with approved equipment. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site
in fully labeled original containers. Fertilizer which has been exposed to high humidity
and moisture, has become caked or otherwise damaged making it unsuitable for use, will
not be accepted.
Initial Planting Application
1. Fertilizer for the initial planting application shall be a starter fertilizer with a N-P-K ratio
of 4-5-1 (19-26-5) or approved equal. The phosphorus component must be derived from
monoammonium phosphate to stimulate vigorous development of new roots, stolons, and
rhizomes. This initial application must be applied and incorporated into the soil
immediately prior to sodding or sprigging and applied immediately after seedings begin to
emerge on seeded areas.
a. Specification Submittal: Submit a sample label or specification of the fertilizer
proposed to be used for the Owner's approval.
Post Planting Application
1
Fertilizer for the post planting application will be a complete fertilizer of chemical base
containing by weight the following percentages of nutrients: 27-3-4 + 2% Fe (N-P-K) or
I
I
6.2 00�S�7onze0 ficaaliotYp�rv�hbE�eW.,Inc. LANDSCAPING 02905 - 2
I
May 11, 2007
approved equal from methylene urea or the nitrogen equivalent of 33-3-10. The
application rate should provide one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet.
a. Specification Submittal: Submit a sample label or specification of the fertilizer
proposed to be used for the Owner's approval
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Wood Pegs: Softwood, sufficient size and length to ensure anchorage of sod on slope.
B. Edging: Galvanized steel.
C. Stakes: Painted steel stakes of sufficient length.
D. Wire: Use 12 gage double strands of wire and rubber hose to brace plants
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE
A. Athletic fields and warm-up areas shall be established and ready for acceptance no later than
February 1, 2007.
B. Non -athletic areas are to be established and in acceptable condition no later than March 1, 2007.
C. Failure to comply with these dates may be cause for liquidated damages at the owner's discretion.
3.2 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION.
A. Verify that required underground utilities are in proper location.
B. Prepare subsoil to eliminate uneven areas. Maintain profiles and contours. Make changes in grade
gradual. Blend slopes into level areas.
C. Scarify subsoil to a depth of 3 inches.
3.3 PLACING TOPSOIL
A. Spread topsoil to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Rake smooth.
B. Grade topsoil to eliminate rough, low or soft areas, and to ensure positive drainage.
C. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to control erosion until grass is established. Continue to
replace eroded soil and grass until grass is established.
D. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 LAYING SOD
A. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod.
B. Lay sod immediately on delivery to site with tight staggered joints.
C. Water sodded areas immediately after placement.
°Qhor e�"�u°phcai oXp uSU agf...la`. LANDSCAPING 02905 - 3
May 11, 2007
3.5 MAINTENANCE
wo
A. Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at a maximum height of 2-1/2 inches. Do not cut more
than 1/3 of grass blade at any one mowing.
B. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out, continue to water until accepted by owner.
C. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides and pesticides in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Remove excess soil from walks, drives, and planing areas.
B. Remove shipping material from site.
C. Remove excessive tire marks from pavement caused by installation equipment. Take care to not
cause cracks in paned surfaces, replacement of damaged pavement shall be at contractor's expense.
D. Repair ruts caused in lawn by equipment.
E. Leave site clean and trim prior to final inspection.
END OF SECTION
t
6a2a0%7o asap ��bt , Inc. LANDSCAPING 02905 - 4 y
May 11.2007
SECTION 03300
CONCRETE WORK
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the drawings.
B. Metal Stair Nosings.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02223 — Excavation, Grading, and Subgrade Preparation.
B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provision of the following codes, specifications and
standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1.
ACI 301
"Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings"
2.
ACI 304
"Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and
Placing Concrete"
3.
ACI 311
"Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection"
4.
ACI 318
"Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete"
5.
ACI 347
"Recommended Practice for Reinforced Concrete"
6.
MSP-1-90
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice"
B. Workmanship: The contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not
conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct
deficient concrete as directed by the architect.
C. Design and Testing
1. The contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory
designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual
cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the architect. A proven,
established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used. Provide a minimum of
5 recent different compression test reports for the proposed mix.
D. Concrete Testing Service: Employ, at contractor's expense, a testing laboratory acceptable to
architect to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
1. Job site cylinders shall be taken as directed by the architect. The contractor shall notify
.. the testing laboratory. The laboratory shall come to the site and take the concrete
cylinders and be responsible for their care and handling, including breaking same at
laboratory.
2. Test results shall be furnished to the architect, engineer, and the contractor.
' 3. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the
architect, at any time during the progress of the work. Allow free access to material
1 aeulBonze8"�u"pfi�e,, �'Pf`o5h"6SeW.., Inc. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 1
May 11, 2007
stockpiles and facilities at all items. Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the j
owner's expense, including the retesting of the rejected materials and installed work, shall
be done at the contractor's expense.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation
instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories,
admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, patterns, stair nosings and others as requested by
the architect.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete
reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced
Concrete Structure" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of
concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete
structures.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork
for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed plywood -faced or other
acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish
in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on
the Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -
placed concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or
good as new.
B. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood" Class
I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edgesealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark of
an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to architect.
C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in
finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber
dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
D. Earth Trench Forms: Earth trench type forming shall only be used where continuous type or
square spot footings are shown on the drawings.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, except No. 3 ties and stirrups may be Grade 40.
B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 x 6 - W2.1 x W2.1, welded steel fabric unless other wise
noted.
C. Dowels for load transfer in floors shall be plain steel bars conforming to ASTM A 675, Grade 60
or ASTM A 499.
6.21ul�4a;'7P `�'`6�J,'°` CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 2
May 11, 2007
2.3
2.4
D. Supports for Reinforcement:
1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices
for spacing supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place.
Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood,
brick, and other devices will not be acceptable.
2. For slab -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base
material will not support chair legs.
3. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms,
provide supports with legs that are hot -dip galvanized, or plastic protected or stainless
steel protected.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement:
1. ASTM C 150, type I, unless otherwise acceptable to architect.
2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to
architect.
B. Fine Aggregate:
1. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances.
2. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable.
C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud,
loam or foreign matter as follows:
l . Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone.
2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run gravel is not permitted.
3. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete.
4. Maximum Aggregate Size:
a. Not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms,
one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing
between individual reinforcing bars of bundles or bars.
b. The limitations may be waived if, in the judgement of the architect, workability
and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without
honeycomb of voids.
D. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable.
E. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
F. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, containing not more than 0.1%A chloride
ions.
G. Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows:
1. Type B, Retarding
2. Type C, Accelerating
3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding
4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating
H. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by
Architect.
I. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G
containing not more than 0.1 % chloride ions.
RELATED MATERIALS
6n2aourrcaervuoent AUlcia. Inc.
CONCRETE WORK
03300 - 3
May 11, 2007
A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated
otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth of slab.
B. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per square
yard, complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.
C. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.
1. Waterproof paper.
2. Polyethylene film.
3. Polyethylene -coated burlap.
D. Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A.
1. Guardian Chemical Company, clear bond at the rate of 400 square feet to the gallon.
E. Hardening, Sealing, and Dustproofmg: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. All exposed slabs not
covered with tile on other applied surface finish shall receive second application where
construction work is complete.
1. A second application of Guardian Chemical Company, Clear Bond at the rate of 600
square feet to the gallons over the curing compound cost.
2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable
provisions of ASTM C 94. Use and independent testing facility acceptable to the architect for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used
for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the architect.
B. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials
to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1.
C. Submit written reports to the architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15
days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by
the architect.
D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on the
Drawings and schedules:
1. 3000 psi 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum (non -air -entrained),
0.46 maximum (air entrained).
E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the contractor when
characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant,
at no additional cost to the owner and as accepted by the architect. Laboratory test data for revised
mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the architect before using in
the work.
2.6 ADMIXTURES
A. Use water -reducing admixture or high range water -reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in
concrete as required for placement and workability. I [
B. Use color admixture in concrete where noted and at pattern concrete locations. Submit color
selection chart for approval. Color admixture is to be added at the mixing plant, not at the site.
�� a as .7,%, 11"1'6�tR'tec. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 4
May It. 2007
C. Use non-cliloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below
50 degrees F.
D. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air -
entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of
placement having air content within the following limits:
1. 5.5% with 1 1/2" maximum aggregate
2. 6.0%with 1" maximum aggregate
3. 6.0% with 3/4" maximum aggregate
4. 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate
E. Use admixture for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
directions.
F. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions
prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain
quality control.
2.7 SLUMP LIMITS
A. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows:
1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3".
2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than 3".
3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8" after
addition of HRWR to verified 2"-3" slump concrete.
4. All Other Concrete: Not more than 4".
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, and as herein
specified.
B. Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to the batch for material with
insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted.
C. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing
time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be required.
D. When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F.,
reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
2.9 PATTERN CONCRETE
A. Submit slate design patterns for use in the four concrete paving sections and along glass under the
entrance canopy where shown on plans. Submit tactile flat domes pattern at ramps.
B. Pattern concrete shall meet the same specifications as required for other concrete paving in this
proj ect.
C. All pattern concrete is to have pigmented concrete, color to be selected by architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FORMS
8 20 Cl a�rt�en+iarvev Ar�h6ec1
nau ortz up tceuon pro ned�.
CONCRETE WORK
03300 - 5
May 11, 2007
A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that
might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork
so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position.
B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in -place
concrete surface and adjacent materials.
C. Forms shall not leak cement paste.
D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surface.
Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces.
Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom
forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent
swelling, and for easy removal.
E, Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is in accessible for cleanout, for
inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary
openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on
forms at inconspicuous locations.
F. Chamfer exposed comers and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips
fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
G. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable length, removable or snapoff metal form ties, designated
to prevent form defection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal.
H. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at least
1-1/2" inside concrete. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes
larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface.
I. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work for
other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing
such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.
Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete.
Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms
after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks.
3.2 PLACING REINFORCING
A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's
recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement
placement and supports, and as herein specified.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or
destroy bond with concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork,
construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs,
runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required.
D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange,
space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete
9-1%Kw NERp iu''Gi"aff'm CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 6
May 1 I. 2007
4
placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete
surfaces.
E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not
use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction
loads.
F. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full
mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in
either direction.
3.3 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints
1. Locate and install construction joints, where are not shown on the drawings, so as not to
impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the architect.
2. Provide keyways at least 1 1/2" deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs, and between
walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs.
3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all
reinforcement across construction joints.
B. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground:
1. Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or
directed. Use screed type joints equal to those manufacturer by Superior Concrete
Accessories, Inc. Screed key joints are of 24 gauge galvanized steel with 1 1/8" dowel
knockouts at 6" on centers. Install with a minimum of five special 16 gauge by 1" stakes
per ten feet of length of material.
C. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of
contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls,
grade beams, and elsewhere as indicated.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings,
diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto.
B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkhead and intermediate screed
strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finishes slab surface. Provide
and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete
surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted
compacting type screeds.
3.5 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES
A. Coat the contact surface of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed.
Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, nor
adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces
requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing
compounds.
B. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, in amount, and under conditions of
I ' the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material
6r04naeB'2�"Po oXPSShG'ea'" CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 7
May 11, 2007
W
to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh
concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. General:
1. Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified.
2. Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the time concrete is batched
in amounts in accordance with approved submittals for this types of concrete. Mix
batched concrete in strict accordance with the fibrous concrete reinforcement
manufacturer's instruction and recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion.
3. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be
placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or
planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously,
provide construction joints as herein specified.
4. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to
rehandling or flowing.
B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect, and complete the formwork
installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit
the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required.
Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings
are not used.
C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 18" and
in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -
spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element
submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced location not farther than the visible effectiveness of the
machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At
each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the
concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without
causing segregation of the mix.
D. Placing Concrete Slabs
1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of
construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate
concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats
or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle
water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing
operations.
3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations.
E. Cold Weather Placing
1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which would be caused
by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein
specified.
2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F., uniformly
heat all water and aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of
placement.
���geo e@�a°� caano`dP^om ne1,Inc. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 8
Ta
of
May 11. 2007
4
e 3. Do not use frozen materials or material containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
1 4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
F. Hot Weather Placing
1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the quality and strength of
'concrete, place concrete on compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.
2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement
below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control
the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total
amount of mixing.
3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot so that the steel
and temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before
embedment in concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete.
4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
3.7 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES
A. Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work
or by other construction, unless otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having
the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with defective areas repaired and patched as
specified, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down with wood blocks.
B. Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view, or that are -to be covered
with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to the
concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting, or other similar system. This is the as -
cast concrete surface as obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas repaired and
parched as specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completely removed and
smoothed.
C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces
occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across
adjacent surfaces, unless otherwise shown.
3.8 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor
topping or mortar setting beds for tile or other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring
material, and as shown on the drawings.
1. After placing slabs, plane surface to a tolerance not exceeding 1/2" in 10 feet when tested
with a 10 foot straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After
leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.
- • B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and
other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or
elastic roofing, and as shown on the drawings or in schedules.
1. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for
floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has
stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driver floats or both. Consolidate
surface with power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to
power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10 feet
I when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots.
6a..&C�e��upGce[ionpro5a'b�` '�` CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 9
May 11.2007
I
Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a
uniform, smooth, granular texture.
C. Trowel finish:
1. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view, unless
otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint, or
other thin film finish coating system.
2. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final
troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface.
Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks,
uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8"
in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which
would telegraph through applied floor covering system.
D. Non -Slip Broom Finish:
1. Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platform, steps and ramps, walks and
elsewhere as shown on the drawings or in schedules.
2. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming
perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the architect
before application.
E. Pattern Finish:
1. Apply pattern finish to exterior concrete ramps as shown on the drawings.
2. Use only the approved pattern finish as submitted.
3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General
1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period
of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening.
2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete
surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not
less than 72 hours.
3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete
has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily
consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50
degrees F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period.
B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture retaining cover curing
or by membrane -forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified.
1. Provide moisture curing by following methods:
a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous
water -fog spray.
b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating,
cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to
provide coverage of concrete surface and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent
absorptive covers.
2. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows:
a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete,
placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and
sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears [
during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows:
i
6��4noe@'�'�a o`XP S"''1;,�"�a`'"` CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 10
May H. 2007
a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final
finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours).
b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance
with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3
hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing
damage during this curing period.
C. Do not apply membrane curing compounds on surface which are to be covered
;. with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener,
waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other
s coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to the architect.
C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surface, including undersides of beams, supported
slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until
forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as
applicable.
D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and
other flat surfaces by moist curing.
1. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless specified otherwise, by methods specified above, as
applicable.
2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of
moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed.
3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A.
Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar
parts of the work, maybe removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24
hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form
-'
removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.
B.
Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beams, soffits, joists, slabs and other structural
elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum
compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength if inplace concrete by
testing field -cured specimens representative of concrete location or members.
C.
Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical
supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or
disturbing shores and supports.
3.11 RE -USE OF FORMS
A.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or
otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating
compound material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork.
B.
When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove
fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do
not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to architect.
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS
j 3
CONCRETE ITEMS
A.
Filling -in: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other
trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure
concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous
r
concrete filling shown or required to complete work.
6oa�4no�ae8'�upGc wed pro5%gg.. Inc. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 11
1
t!
May 11, 2007
B. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where !
indicated on the drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during
concrete placement.
3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Patching Defective Areas:
1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms,
but only when acceptable to architect.
2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/3" in any dimension, and holes left by tie
rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 ". Make
edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or
proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the
areas to be patched with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding agent.
3. For exposed to view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement
so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at
inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with
patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding
surface.
B. Repair of Formed Surfaces:
1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to
satisfaction of architect. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities; cracks;
spalls; air bubbles; honeycomb; rock pockets; fins and other projections on surface; and
stains and other discoloration that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie
holes, fill with dry pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with
bonding agent.
2. Where possible, repair concealed formed surfaces that contain defects that adversely
affect the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the
concrete.
C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces
1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, form smoothness and to verify surface
plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as
herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition
to smoothness, using a template having required slope.
2. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability
of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or
which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections
regardless of width, spalling, pop -puts, honeycomb, rock pockets and other objectionable
condition. l
3. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 l
days.
4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after, completion of
surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete.
Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds
may be used when acceptable to architect.
5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter,
by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound
concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance
all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with a
neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same
materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. Place,
®n�a°4V
,gvo�P�h''I-IeJ.'CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 12
1'
May 11. 2007
compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as
adjacent concrete.
Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry pack
method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt,
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout
coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry pack, consisting of one part portland cement
to 2 1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as
required for handling and placing. Compact dry pack mixture in place and finish to match
adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by architect.
E. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of architect.
3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. The contractor will employ a testing laboratory to perform all other tests and to submit test reports.
i
B. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the
following, as directed by the Architect.
+ 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with
i ASTM C 94.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and one test
for each set of compressive strength test specimens.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight concrete; ASTM C 231
pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test
specimens.
i 4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below,
and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens
made.
5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each
compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for
laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required.
6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu. yds. or fraction
thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5000 sq. ft. of surface
area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 28
days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. The acceptance test
results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days.
JJ a. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given
class on concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or
from each batch if fewer than 5 are used.
b. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., the
strength test may be waived by the architect, if, in his judgement, adequate
=r- evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.
C. When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion
- laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete.
C. Test results will be reported in writing to the architect , engineer and the contractor on the same
day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing services,
concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at
28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break
for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.
€i"aulhor ieTrP'ca ion profShb �`e�' Inc.CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 13
May I I, 2007
D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test
results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in
the structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determined
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as
directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be
required when unacceptable concrete is verified.
3.15 TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS
A. All new concrete walks, sloped walks, ramps, curb cuts, curb ramps, surface textures, and
dimensions shall comply with the Texas Accessibility Standards of the Architectural Barriers Act,
Article 9102, Texas Civil Statutes.
B. New and renovated concrete surfaces shall provide at least a 2% positive slope away from
accessible routes. Do not allow any water to stand within accessible routes.
END OF SECTION
6.117"p P S,c` Inc CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 14
May 1 I. 2DD7
SECTION 04300
UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
PART]
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED
DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in
this Section.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Concrete unit masonry walls, complete with reinforcement and anchorages.
B.
Built-in items supplied by other trades.
C.
Cut and fit for items furnished and installed by other trades.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03300 - Concrete Work.
B.
Section 04340 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System.
C.
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrication.
D.
Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.
E.
Section 07105 - Dampproofng and Waterproofing.
F.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
G.
Section 08111 — Steel Doors.
H.
Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform concrete unit masonry work in accordance with requirements of ANSI A 41.1, unless
indicated otherwise herein.
1.5
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C 90-95 Hollow load bearing CMU.
B.
ASTM C 91 Masonry Cement
C.
ASTM C 140 Sampling and Testing Concrete MasonryUnit.
D.
ASTM C 150 Portland Cement.
E.
ASTM C 207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
6��Q?,2eBPceiono`hA6i�gInc UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 1
May 11, 2007
F. ASTM C 216 Facing Brick.
G. ASTM C 270 Specifications for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
H. ASTM C 426 Test for Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Block.
I. ASTM C 476 Specification for Grout for Masonry.
J. ASTM A 82 Cold -Drawn Steel Wire - Plain for Reinforcement.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Compliance: Manufacturer's certification that masonry units furnished meet or
exceed requirements of this section.
B. Test Reports: Certify that concrete masonry units and mortar mix proposed conform to the
following:
1. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C140 and C426.
2. Mortar: ASTM C270.
C. Product literature of items specified; include manufacturer's literature on sizes, maintenance,
cleaning, water repellent, and grate control.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials off ground and protected from wetting by capillary action, rain or snow and
protected from mud, dust or other material and contaminating material.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Hot Weather Requirement:
1. Protect all masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun for 48 hours after
erection when ambient air temperature exceeds 99 degrees F and when shaded with
relative humidity less than 50 percent.
2. Provide suitable coverings or barriers to deflect direct sunlight and wind.
B. Temperature: No masonry work shall be conducted when ambient temperature is falling and
below 50 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Concrete Masonry Units.
1. Featherlite Building Products.
B. Water Repellent
1. Thoro: Thoroclear 777.
2. Okon.
3. Prime-A-Pell200.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Masonry Units:
fr��ih'oe@�'v "o3P � i"ea`'U" UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 2
May 11, 2007
IN
1. Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" high (15-
5/8" x 7-5/8" actual), unless otherwise indicated. Thicknesses as indicated on the
drawings.
2. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints,
headers, bonding and other special conditions.
3. Hollow Loading -Bearing CMU: ASTM C 90-95, Grade "N".
4. Weight: Provide lightweight units using aggregate complying with ASTM C 331
producing dry net unit weight of not more than 105 lbs. per cubic foot, unless otherwise
indicated.
5. Curing: Cure units in a moisture -controlled atmosphere or in an autoclave and normal
pressure and temperature to comply with ASTM C 90-95, Type I.
a. Limit moisture absorption during delivery and until time of installation to the
maximum percentage specified for Type I units for the average annual relative
humidity as reported by the U.S. Weather Bureau Station nearest the project site.
Mortar:
1. Mortar mixes: Conform to ASTM C 270, and the following:
a. Type "S" Mortar, for all masonry. One part Portland Cement, 1/4 to 1/2 part
hydrated lime, 2-3/4 to 4-1/2 parts damp loose sand or 1/2 part Portland Cement,
I part masonry cement, 3-3/8 to 4-1/2 parts damp loose sand.
2. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1, one sack 94# net, considered one cubic foot.
3. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 furnished in sacks containing one cubic foot each, marked
with the weight. One sack considered one cubic foot. Exterior masonry cement shall
contain integral waterproofing. Masonry cement shall be manufactured by Atlas, Lehigh,
Lonestar, Trinity or an approval equal.
4. Sand: (Fine Aggregate) 80# damp, considered one cubic foot ASTM C 144 of acceptable
color graded within the following limits:
SIEVE NO. PERCENT OF SAND RETAINED
MAX. (BY WEIGHT) MIN.
4
0
0
8
5
0
16
40
0
30
65
30
50
85
65
100
98
85
5. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil acids, soluble salts, and organic
impurities.
6. Colors shall be as selected by architect.
7. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or antifreeze agents.
8. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchoring Devices:
1. Zinc -Coated Wire: ASTM A 82 for uncoated wire, ASTM A 641, Class 3 for zinc
coating.
2. Joint Reinforcement: Welded -wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side
rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet. Fabricate from
cold -drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82, and a unit width of 1-1/2" to 2" less
than thickness of wall or partition, with prefabricated corner and tee units, and as follows:
a. Wire Size for Side Rods: 9 gauge diameter.
b. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 9 gauge diameter.
C. For multi-wythe or cavity exterior masonry back-up fabricate units with
additional side rods spaced for embedment in inside face of back-up wythe.
3. Veneer Anchors and Ties: Screw on anchor of at least 12 gage hot dipped galvanized
metal with two screen, holes per anchor. Flexible wire ties of hot dipped galvanized 3/16
^aulhoniell'�uphc (a ,on pro�hh6n cV.. Inc UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 3
May 11, 2007
inch wire by suitable length. Flexible straps of hot dipped galvanized 16 gage by at least
1 1/4 inch wide by suitable length with 1/4 inch anchor holes.
4. Miscellaneous Masonry Anchors: Fabricated from 16 gauge steel sheet or 3/8" steel rod,
1.5 oz. hot -dip zinc coating after fabrication.
D. Flashing for Masonry:
1. Provide concealed flashings, shown to be built into masonry.
2. Provide concealed flashings as follows:
a. Asphalt -Coated Copper: Copper coated both sides with flexible fabricated
asphalt.
b. Fabricate with 3 oz. copper, unless otherwise indicated, as produced by AFCO
Flashings or Equal.
Provide plastic flashing as follows:
a. Sheet polyvinyl chloride, 30 mil thickness (0.030), 3.3 oz/SF, ASTM D 822, 48
or 72 inches wide rolls. York Flashings: Wascoseal.
b. Use rubber base adhesive compound for bonding polyvinyl chloride sheets.
E. Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories:
1. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 of the sizes shown.
2. Metal Expansion Joint Strips: Provide the following formed to the shape shown.
a. Bond Breaker Strips: 30 lb. asphalt roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
or 30 lb., coal -tar roofing felt complying with ASTM D 227.
b. Premolded Control Joint Strips: Solid rubber strips with a Shore A durometer
hardness of 60 to 80, designed to fit standard sash block and maintain lateral
stability in masonry wall, size and configuration as indicated.
3. Rubber Expansion Joints: Provide rubber Blok-Tite gaskets as produced by AA Wire
Products Co., or equal. Install as shown on the drawings.
4. Cleaning Solution: Non -acidic as recommended by masonry manufacturer.
F. Water Repellent:
1. Masonry water repellent shall be equal to Prime -A -Pell 200, manufactured by Chemprobe
Corporation. Cover all exposed exterior masonry, full height of wall.
2. Install per manufacturer's instructions.
G. Graffiti Control:
1. Graffiti control shall be equal to Defacer Eraser, manufactured by ProSoCo, Inc.,
telephone 913-281-2700. Cover all exposed exterior masonry, full height of wall.
2. Provide at least two gallons of Defacer Eraser Graffiti wipe supplement to Graffiti
Control. Store where directed by Owner.
F.'0u4n9ell2Pa"o P `se6ii`'"` UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 4
A
May 1 I.2007
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine other construction which is to support or interface with masonry work for conditions that
would prevent proper installation of masonry.
B. Where footings and shelves are not sound or level, where anchorage devices have not been
installed, where interfaces exist, or where there are other conditions unsuitable for proper
installation of masonry, do not start masonry work until other construction has been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install masonry units in running bond.
B. Cut exposed masonry units, where necessary with a power saw.
1. Avoid the use (by proper layout) of less than half size units.
C. Hold uniform joint sizes of 3/8", unless otherwise indicated. Hold joint sizes to suit modular size
of masonry units.
D. Cut joints flush and tool slightly concave, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Reinforce horizontal joints with continuous masonry joint reinforcement, spaced 16" vertically.
Do not bridge control and expansion joints in the wall system.
F. Build other work into the masonry work as shown, fitting masonry units around other work, and
grouting for secure anchorage.
G. Protect newly laid masonry from exposure to precipitation, excessive drying, freezing, soiling,
backfill and other harmful elements.
H. At end of each day's work, use a medium soft dry nylon brush to clean masonry work.
I. Structural Bonding of Multi-Wythe Masonry:
l . Use continuous joint reinforcing embedded in horizontal joints for bond tie between
vythes. Install at not more than 16" o.c. vertically as specified. Provide continuity at
corners and intersections using prefabricated "L" and "T" units.
J. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing:
1. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Fully embed
longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on
exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6" at
ends of units. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcing, unless
otherwise indicated. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of
prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for
continuity.
2. Space continuous horizontal reinforcing as follows:
a. For multi-vythe walls where continuous horizontal reinforcing also acts as
structural bond or tie between wythes, space reinforcing as required by code but
not less than 16" o.c. vertically.
b. For single-wythe walls, space reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise
indicated.
ii� �4no�e92np m npro�h'i�ieu..''"` UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 5
May i I.2007
3.3
3.4
Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1'-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing
placed in two horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, both immediately above the lintel
and below the sill. Extend reinforcing.a minimum of T-0" beyond jambs of the opening,
bridging control joints where provided.
K. Anchoring Masonry Work:
1. Provide anchoring devices of the type shown as specified. If not shown or specified,
provide standard type for facing and back-up involved.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such members to
comply with following:
a. Provide an open space not less than 1" in width between masonry and structural
member, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid
materials.
b. Anchor masonry to structural members with metal ties embedded in masonry
joints and attached to structure. Provide anchors with flexible tie sections and
metal compatibility unless otherwise indicated.
C. Space anchors as shown, but not more than 16" o.c. horizontally.
d. Bond intersecting walls with masonry units or provide anchors spaced 16" o.c.
PROTECTION
A. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaging completed work.
B. Keep expansion joint voids clear of mortar.
C. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
D. At end of each day or shutdown period, protect all exposed walls by covering with a strong
waterproof membrane, extending at least two feet down each side of wall and secured in place.
E. Seal wall with anti -graffiti masonry sealer, submit for review.
POINTING AND CLEANING
A. After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample panels before proceeding with cleaning of entire
masonry work.
3. Clean brick masonry by bucket and brush hand cleaning method described in BIA
"Technical Note No. 20 Revised" using the following cleaner:
a. Acidic cleaner approved by unit masonry manufacturer.
4. Clean concrete unit masonry to comply with masonry manufacturer's directions and
applicable NCMA "Tek" bulletins.
5. Clean accessories of all excess mortar.
B. On completion, point up all exposed masonry. Cut out defective joints and repoint where
necessary. Reclean masonry as necessary.
C. Remove white scum from masonry with Sure Klean White Scum Remover, PorSoCo, Inc.,
telephone 913-281-2700.
END OF SECTION
���g'AM-
.Perm opfO%hLl�`�' Inc.UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 6
May IL 2007
SECTION 04340
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in
this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work under this section includes the providing and installing of all reinforcing and grouting
associated with reinforced unit masonry.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C 404 Aggregate for Masonry Grout.
B. ASTM C 143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
C. ASTM C 144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
D. ASTM C 615 Deformed and Plain Billet Steel for Concrete Reinforcement.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, size, quanity lengths and
placement of reinforcement bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for
Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures." Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup
spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and
placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Refer to Section 04300 - Unity Masonry System, 1.8 Project Conditions and conform to these
requirements under this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Refer to Unit Masonry section for masonry materials and accessories not included in this
section.
B. Reinforcement Bars: Provide deformed bars, grade 60 KSI yield billet steel deformed bars
complying with ASTM A 615, except as otherwise indicated.
C. Mortar and Grout:
a°4n �@'2�P'ceionproS11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04340 - 1
May 11.2007
1. Portland Cerement ASTM C 150, Type I.
2. Blended Hydraulic Cement ASTM C 595, Type IS, IP or S.
3. Masonry Cement ASTM C 91, Type S.
4. Hydrated Lime ASTM C 207, Type S.
5. Aggregates:
a. Sand ASTM C 144.
b. Coarse for Grout ASTM C 404, Size No. 8.
6. Water: Clear, clean and potable.
7. Mortar Color:
a. All natural exposed to view mortar, as selected by the architect.
b. All other locations: Natural grey.
2.2 MIXES
A. Masonry Grout Mix: Conform to ASTM C 476 and the following for coarse grout:
1. One part Portalnd Cement, 0 to 1/10 part hydrated lime, 2-1/4 to 3 parts damp, loose
sand, 1 to 2 parts coarse aggregate.
2. Meet physical requirements for grout as specified in ASTM C 476.
3. Grout for filling of reinforced cells in concrete block walls shall have a strength of 2500
pounds per square inch in 28 days.
B. Fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM Spec. C144 except for soundness and lightweight particles
and shall have the following screen analysis:
% passing No. 4 screen 100
% passing No. 8 screen 95 to 100
% passing No. 100 screen 25 maximum
% passing No. 200 screen 10 maximum
C. Course aggregate shall conform to ASTM Spec. C404 and shall have the following screen analysis:
• passing No. 1/2 in. 100
• passing No. 3/8 in. 86 to 100
• passing No. 4 10 to 30
• passing No. 8 0 to 10
• passing No. 16 0 to 5
PART EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will
reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on
drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or
other causes.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Reinforcing:
1. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing indicated. Support and secure vertical
bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work
progresses. Where vertical bars are shown in proximity, provide a clear distance between
bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or 1 inch (which ever is greater);
2. Splice reinforcement bars at intervals not to exceed 5 feet. Provide lapped splices. In
splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire -tie.
e�Qno "d�"P ei n P S� �i`,g.., Inc REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04340 - 2
��i
May 1 I. 2007
F
C.
Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcement as the work progresses, with a
minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior face of walls and 1/2 inch at other locations. Lap
units not less than 6 inches at ends. Use prefabricated "L" and "T" units to provide
continuity at corners and intersections. Cut and bend units as recommended by
manufacturer for continuity.
Anchor reinforced masonry walls to non -reinforced masonry where they intersect.
Masonry:
1. Refer to Section 04300, Unit Masonry System for general installation requirements of
unit masonry.
2. Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU).
3. Lay CMU units with full -face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints
between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a unit to a distance behind face
equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross -webs of
starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if not shown,
provide 3/8 inch joints.
4. Walls:
a. Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units in 1/2 running bond with vertical joints in
each course centered on the units in courses above and below, unless otherwise
indicated. Bond and interlock each course at comers and intersections. Use
special -shaped units where shown, and as required for corners, jambs, sash,
control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions.
b. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced
and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide
minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars. Keep
cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced
cores or cells.
C. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units to
allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcement bars.
Grouting:
1. Use "Fine Grout" per ASTM C 476 for two-wythe walls with grout spaces less than 2
inches.
a. Concrete masonry units provide minimum clear dimension of 2 inches and clear
area of 8 square inches in vertical cores to be grouted.
2. Use "Coarse Grout" per ASTM C 476 for two-wythe walls with grout spaces of 2 inches
or larger.
a. Concrete masonry units with clear dimension of 2 inches or greater and clear
area of 8 square inches or greater in vertical cores.
3. Grouting Technique: Use low -lift grouting techniques subject to requirements which
follow.
4. Low -Lift Grouting:
a. Construct low -lift masonry by placing reinforcement, laying masonry units and
pouring grout as work progresses.
b. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of
maximum pour height as required for splicing. Support in position at vertical
intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 feet.
C. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5 feet height, or if bond
beam occurs below 5 feet height, stop pour at course below bond beam. Do not
exceed a 12 inch pour height for two-wythe masonry walls.
d. Lay masonry units prior to each grout pour, but do not construct more than 12
inches above maximum grout pour height in one exterior wythe and 4 inches
above in other exterior wythe. Provide metal wall ties if required to prevent
blowouts.
l � °4h n�ie8"�u"Pl"c 110 on pfoS�6 �c�, Inc. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04340 - 3
9
May I I, 2007
e. Pour grout using chute or container with spout. Rod or vibrate grout during
placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more
than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1-1/2 inches below top course of pour. If
poured in lifts, place from center to center of masonry courses.
f. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1-1/2 inches below bond beam course.
Place horizontal reinforcing in bond beams; lap at comers and intersections as
shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond
beam.
g. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced
and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimension indicated and to provide
minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars. Keep
cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced
cores or cells.
D. Formwork:
1. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support
of reinforced masonry elements. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork.
2. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently
tight to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie, and support as
required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced
masonry.
3. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has hardened
sufficiently to carry its own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be
placed on it during construction.
4. Allow not less than the following minimum time to elapse after completion of the member
before removing shores or forms, provided suitable curing conditions have been obtained
during the curing period.
a. Seven days for arches.
5. Limit extent of masonry construction to sections which do not exceed the maximum pour
requirements specified hereafter. Provide temporary dams or barriers to control
horizontal flow of grout at ends of wall sections. Build dams full height of grout pour. If
masonry units are used, do not bond into permanent masonry wythes. Remove temporary
dams after completion of grout pour.
END OF SECTION
6��4n r' A'2�"Pijcatj 'P Sa%tct .. Inc'
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04340 - 4
May 11, 2007
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURALSTEEL
PART] GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A, The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of structural steel work is shown on the drawings, including schedules, notes and details
to show size and location of members, typical connections and type of steel required.
B. Structural steel is that work defined in the AISC "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise
shown on the drawings.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06125 — Wood Deck.
B. Section 07610 — Sheet Metal Roofmg.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standard: Comply with the provisions of the following except as otherwise indicated.
1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" Paragraph 4.2.1 of the
above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence: "This approval
constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any
connections designed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop
drawings".
2. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings" and including the "Commentary" and supplements thereto as issued.
3. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved
by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering
Foundation.
4. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code".
5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet
Piling and Bars for Structural Use".
-1 B. Qualifications for Welding Work:
1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard
Qualification Procedure".
,.- 2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed
AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months.
3. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the contractor's responsibility.
C. Source Quality Control:
1. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and test in the mill, shop,
and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not
- relieve the contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures
in compliance with specified requirements.
6naulhonze8"au"phtaatiod'P.5`xh6`ieil.Inc STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1
May 11, 2007
Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply
D. Design of Members and Connections:
l . All details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise
indicated. Verify dimensions at the site whenever possible without causing delay in the
work.
2. Promptly notify the architect whenever design of members and connections for any
portion of the structure are not clearly indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings, Structural Steel:
1. Submit shop drawings prepared under the supervision of registered professional engineer
including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members,
and details, schedules, procedures, and diagrams showing the sequence of erection.
Submit in accordance with Section 01300.
2. Architect's review of shop drawings will be for general consideration only. Compliance
with requirements for materials fabrication and erection of structural steel is the
contractor's responsibility.
3. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate
welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld.
4. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and
other anchorages to be installed by others.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work.
B. Steel beams shall be delivered to the jobsite in an upright position and shall be unloaded with a
two point sling on a winch line from a crane or winch truck. Allowing steel members to fall from
the bed of a truck will not be permitted.
C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the
ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Store in an upright position with blocking
spaced not more than 15 feet on center. Protect steel members and packaged materials from
erosion and deterioration.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36, except where other type steel is shown.
B. Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B, Fy-46 ksi.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A 501.
D. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A regular low- carbon steel bolts and nuts.
1. Provide either hexagonal or square heads and nuts, however use only hexagonal units for 1
exposed connections.
E. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and
hardened washers, as follows.
1. Quenched and tempered medium -carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with
ASTM A 325.
6��17oPAY1 -'pro`�'64�` In, STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2
May 11, 2007
F. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code.
G. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Modified Alkyd; TT-P-86d, Type I and II.
2.2 FABRICATION:
A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly:
1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to the greatest extent possible.
Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as
indicated on the final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members as shown.
2. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery
sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.
3. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before
start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces on members exposed in the final
structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects.
B. Connections:
1. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated.
2. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are
indicated.
3. Provide high -strength threaded fasteners for all principal bolted connections, except
where unfinished bolts are shown.
4. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only the bolted connections of secondary
framing members to primary members (including purling, girts, and other framing
members taking only nominal stress) and for temporary bracing to facilitate erections.
C. High -Strength Bolted Construction:
1, Install high -strength threaded fasteners in accordance with the AISC "Specifications for
Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts".
D. Welded Construction:
1. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods
used in correcting welding work.
2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of
axes without warp.
E. Holes for Other Work:
1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for the
passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final shop
drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as shown to
receive other work.
2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or
enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
F. Splicing:
1. Splicing of beams shall be as shown on the drawings. All other splicing shall be made
only with the written consent of the architect and/or engineer. When approved, copies of
weld test shall be furnished to the architect and engineer. Splicing of columns will not be
permitted under any circumstances.
2.3 SHOP PAINTING
,...1 A. General:
ye
hneu4n �eB'ii�°PI"�oXP oSu6i`e`�' STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3
May 11, 2007
1. Shop paint all structural steel work, except those members or portions of members to be
embedded in concrete or mortar.
2. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high -strength bolted with friction -type
connectors.
3. Apply two coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection.
Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust,
loose mill scale, and splatter, slag, or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel
Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows:
a. SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or
b. SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or
C. SP-7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning".
C. Painting:
1. Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness
of 2.0 mils. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners,
edges, and all exposed surfaces.
2.4 CORROSION PROTECTION
A. After anchor bolt nuts are installed, throughly cover with roof mastic bolts, nuts, column base
plate, and column one inch above the level of concrete.
PART 3 EXAMINATION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed,
and notify the contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion
of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to the erector.
3.2 ERECTION
A. General: Comply with the AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as specified.
B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with
connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and
connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made.
C. Comply with AISC Specifications: For bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment,
and the removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
D. Do not enlarge holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins, except in secondary
bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
E. Gas -Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in the (--
structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under `a
stress, as acceptable to the architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when
permitted.
b.!
o�°P>Ka A, 6, ` Inc.STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4
May 11.2007
3.3
F. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of the shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with the same material as used for
shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
G. Cover with roof mastic all metal anchor bolts, nuts, column base plates, and columns that will be in
contract with concrete.
SPLICING OF MEMBERS
A. Generally, splicing of beams will not be permitted unless specifically approved by the architect.
B. Any splicing proposed shall be clearly noted on the shop drawings and shall be initialled by the
architect prior to fabrication.
END OF SECTION
i0a°roof well daaPlH�a on proSh6'Ii€`� Inc STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5
May 11, 2007
SECTION 05313
METAL FLOOR DECK
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This contract shall include all materials, equipment and labor required to construct a foundation
system for each portable classroom unit to be famished under this contract.
1.3 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate square and in alignment each way to the dimensions shown on the drawings.
B. Excavate to a true plane meeting the elevations shown on the drawings.
PART2 PRODUCT
2.1 STEEL DECK
A. Steel deck to be equal to 3C20 gauge Conform Decking.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 LEVELING
A. Leave foundation level, true, and properly aligned to receive concrete slab.
3.2 ROUGH -IN
A. Coordinate all rough -in conduit, pipe, duct, anchors, and/or miscellaneous building systems as may
be necessary to provide a complete job.
B. Avoid having to return to this portion of the project to correct rough -in over sights.
END OF SECTION
]j'aaoinor�ize8'aupl,caw proh�btm... li", METAL FLOOR DECK 05313 - 1
Mav 11, 2007
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART] GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal.
B. Handrails.
1.3 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 03300 - Concrete Work: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.
B. Section 04230 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A53 - Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe.
C. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated From Rolled, Pressed and
Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.
D. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
E. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars.
F. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
G. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
H. ASTM A386 - Zinc -Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products.
I. ASTM A500 - Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and
Shapes.
J. ASTM A501 - Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
K. ASTM B177 - Chromium Electroplating on Steel for Engineering Use.
L. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols.
M. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
N. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council
6��4n.0eB Pf� onprorhh6�`e`a� 1 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 1
I
May 11.2007
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and
type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where
applicable.
C.
Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld
lengths.
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Prepare shop drawings under direct supervision of a professional structural engineer experienced
in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas.
B.
Welders' Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01300, certifying welders employed on
the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.7
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
The contractor shall verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
B.
It shall be the responsibility of the fabricator to accurately construct items to meet required
dimensions.
PART2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Steel Sections: ASTM A36.
B.
Plates: ASTM A283.
C.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325.
D.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
E.
Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide.
2.2
FABRICATION
A.
Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
B.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C.
Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt
tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
D.
Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located;
consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.
E.
Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.
E�.gffff([on "p �' bit '° METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2
May 11, 2007
2.3 FINISHES
A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required.
C. Prime paint items with two coats.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to
appropriate sections.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.
D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
E. Obtain architect's approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in
contact with concrete.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise noted.
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise noted.
END OF SECTION
Doauthon1z'l�XupGce io�FproSh6ua. Inc• METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3
May 11, 2007
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Roof curbs and cants; blocking in wall and roof openings; wood furring and grounds; concealed
wood blocking; concealed fire stopping.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrication.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with the following agencies:
1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.
B. Meet or exceed ASTM E 84 criteria.
C. Meet or exceed UL 723:PR-S criteria.
D. Submit certification that all wood products built into the project and left in place meet NFPA 703,
Fire Retardant Impregnated Wood and Coatings for Buildings, Class A rating.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Lumber Grading Rules: AWPA, Rule C-1, Timber Product -Preservative Treatment.
B. All miscellaneous wood products incorporated into this project shall be fire retardant impregnated
wood as tested in accordance with NFPA 703.
2.2 SHEATHING MATERIALS
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing; sanded.
B. Plywood Floor Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing Span Rating; sanded.
C. All miscellaneous wood products incorporated into this project shall be fire retardant impregnated
wood as tested in accordance with NFPA 703.
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Plywood Underlayment: APA Rated Sheathing; sanded.
6.21 `2�P eilod'P5S,n6tm.' ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1
May 11, 2007
B. All miscellaneous wood products incorporated into this project shall be fire retardant impregnated
wood as tested in accordance with NFPA 703.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity, and treated wood locations, plain finish
elsewhere.
B. Die Stamped Connectors: Galvanized steel.
C. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type
for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel.
2.5 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Fire retardant: AWPA Treatment C20, Exterior Type, chemically treated and pressure
impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread of 25 or less and have a smoke
developed rating not exceeding 200.
B. D-Blaze, Bowie -Sims -Prange Treating Corporation.
C. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment Cl using water -born preservative
with 0.25 percent retainage.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FRAMING
A. Erect wood framing members in accordance with applicable code. Place members level and
plumb. Place horizontal members crown side up.
B. Curb all roof openings except where curbs are provided. Construct curb members of single pieces
per side.
3.2 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Site apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Treat site -sawn cuts. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on untreated wood in contact
with cementitious materials roofing and related metal fleshings.
C. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members.
3.3 CONCEALED GROUNDS
A. Provide fire resistant concealed grounds in framing as required for secure anchoring of wall
mounted building components, such as wall mounted grab bars.
B. All concealed blocking or built-in wood products that are intended to remain shall be certified by
the manufacturer of passing the NFPA fire retardant tests described above.
END OF SECTION
6��''PR,gvPIg
4., Inc.ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2
May 11.2007
SECTION 06125
WOOD DECK
PART] GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Roof curbs and cants; blocking in wall and roof openings; wood furring and grounds; concealed
wood blocking.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05120 — Structural Steel.
B. Section 07610 — Sheet Metal Roofing.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with the following agencies:
1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.
B. Meet or exceed ASTM E 84 criteria.
C. Meet or exceed UL 723:PR-S criteria.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA, WWPA.
B. Fire resistant treated 2 x 6: NFPA.
2.2 SHEATHING MATERIALS
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing; sanded.
B. Particleboard Roof Sheathing: ANSI A208.1 wood chips set with waterproof resin binder; sanded
faces.
C. Plywood Floor Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing Span Rating; sanded.
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Plywood Underlayment: APA Rated Sheathing; sanded.
B. Particleboard Underlayment: ANSI A208.1; wood chips set with waterproof resin binder; sanded
faces.
fi'��4i;o ue8'duphcai on pr§ ae0.• Inc. WOOD DECK 06125 - 1
May 11, 2007 [.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity, and treated wood locations, plain finish
elsewhere.
B. Die Stamped Connectors: Galvanized steel.
C. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type
for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel.
2.5 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Fire retardant: AWPA Treatment C20, Exterior Type, chemically treated and pressure
impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread/smoke development rating of 25 or
less.
B. D-Blaze, Bowie -Sims -Prange Treating Corporation.
C. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C1 using water -born preservative
with 0.25 percent retainage.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FRAMING
3.2
3.3
A. Erect wood framing members in accordance with applicable code. Place members level and
plumb. Place horizontal members crown side up.
B. Curb all roof openings except where curbs are provided. Construct curb members of single pieces
per side.
SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Site apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Treat site -sawn cuts. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on untreated wood in contact
with cementitious materials roofing and related metal flashings.
C. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members.
CONCEALED GROUNDS
A. Provide fire resistant concealed grounds in framing as required for secure anchoring of wall
mounted building components.
END OF SECTION
6'0 ` o p att '�a5`'6 ca.. ` WOOD DECK 06125 - 2
.5
f May 11. 2007
�l
€ SECTION 06400
ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Special fabricated cabinet units.
B. New countertops on new cabinet units.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09900 - Painting: Finishing cabinet exterior and interior.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. FS MM-L736 - Lumber, Hardwood.
B. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact.
C. NWMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
D. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
F. PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
G. PS 58 - Basic Hardboard.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work to custom quality in accordance with Quality Standards of the Architectural
Woodwork Institute (AWI).
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Include materials, component profiles, fastening methods, assembly methods, joint details,
accessory listings, and schedule of finishes.
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300.
D. Submit fire treated lumber certificate under provisions of Section 01300.
PART2 PRODUCTS
EaeulhDr�ize�aunPlica� n p'101 se Inc' ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 1
May 1 I.2007
2.1 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI; maximum moisture content of 6
percent; species and grade as follows:
ITEM SPECIES CUT
Cabinet Frame White Pine Plain Sliced
Exposed Frame Birch Plain Sliced
B, Hardwood Lumber FS MM-L-736; graded in accordance with AWI; maximum moisture content of
6 percent; species and grade as follows:
ITEM SPECIES CUT
Exposed Frame Birch Plain Sliced
C. Cabinet concealed wall grounds are to be fire treated lumber; submit certificate for review. Refer
to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
2.2 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Wood Particleboard: Per AWI standard, composed of wood chips, made with high waterproof
resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded faces, located as follows:
ITEM: Shelving; Bulkheads; Non -exposed tops, bottoms and ends.
B. Hardboard: PS 58; pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, smooth two sides,
located as follows:
ITEM: Drawer Bottoms; Cabinet Backs; Drawer Faces and Doors; Edges of shelves, drawers faces,
and door faces.
C. Softwood Plywood: PS 1; graded in accordance with AWI; core material of particleboard; species
and cut as follows:
ITEM: Underlayment
D. Hardwood Plywood: PS 51; graded in accordance with AWI; core material of particleboard; type
of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cut as follows:
ITEM FACE SPECIES CUT
Door and Drawer Fronts Birch Birch
Drawer Construction White Pine Plain Sliced
�mutho�e��upG- out `�,a�a".• Inc.ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 2
May 11, 2007
2.3 ACCEPTABLE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS
1 A. Wilsonart Manufacturing.
B. Formica.
C. Nevamar.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2A LAMINATE MATERIALS
A. Plastic Laminate: NWMA LD 3, GP - 50 general purpose type; color as listed in plastic laminate
schedule at the end of this section.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130. Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application.
B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application.
D. Computer Keyboard: Micro Computer Accessories, Inc. No. 620 with mouse tray No. 6295.
E. Grommets and Sleeves: 2 inch round hole, similar to Valencia 44-N027384, black.
2.6 HARDWARE
A. Shelf Standards and Rests: K & V No. 255AN and 256AN.
B. Drawer and Door Pulls: Stanley No. 4484.
C. Catches: Stanley No. SP46.
D. Drawer Slides: K & V No. 1429, full extension, 100111. rated.
E. Drawer Lock and Key: Stanley, fmish to match cabinet hardware.
F. Hinges: Grass America No. 1203 with appropriate base plates.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Submit full range of manufacturer's finishes for selection by architect.
B. Provide examples to architect of all finishes under consideration.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. All millwork is to be flush overlay construction per the Architectural Millwork Institute.
B. Ship assembled casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through
building openings.
6naulhnr�iielj"duP 'caCod pm�ii6leil`.' 1nt ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 3
May 1[, 2007
C. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges to have less than 1/16 inch gap in any joint. Exposed edges
to have hardwood edges.
D. Door and drawer fronts: 3/4 inch thick with hardwood edges.
E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide
trim for scribing and site cutting. All field cuts through laminate are to have two coats of adhesive
in order to minimize laminate deterioration at plumbing fixtures.
F. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Make
corners and joints hairline. Slightly bevel arrises.
G. Cap exposed plastic laminate edges with material of same finish and pattern.
H. Provide cutouts for grommets and sleeves, plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and
other fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Seal contact
surfaces of cut edges.
I. All shelf standards are to be recessed flush with adjacent surface. All units with adjustable shelves,
either open shelves or closed cabinets, are to have recessed metal standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify adequacy and location of backings and support framing members that are concealed within
walls.
B. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions.
3.2 HARDWARE
A. Provide twenty-four (24) drawer lock and key assemblies, location of locks to be selected by
owner.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Set and secure casework in place rigid, plumb, and level.
B. Use purpose designed fixture attachments at concealed locations for wall mounted components.
C. Carefully scribe casework which is against other building materials, leaving gaps of 1/32 inch
maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
D. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
E. Do not cut hole for equipment cord grommet through counter top until unit is completely installed
and approved. Actual locations of grommets will be verified by architect prior to cutting hole. See
millwork elevations for general locations.
F. Provide concealed grounds in all wall framing areas to receive wall and base cabinets, refer to
Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
6��4n°c'�P�' o'P S°�6�"�a`' ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 4
May I I. 2007
A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures, and other moving or operating parts to function
smoothly and correctly.
B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.
END OF SECTION
6'��4ho�'r o"a.P ai oA pr.ftrV'' ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 5
May I I, 2007
SECTION 07105
DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work under this section includes providing and installation of waterproofing and/or dampproofing.
B. The following types are included under this section:
1. Waterproofing at sills, heads and elsewhere as detailed.
2. Spray applied masonry water repellent for brick masonry.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04340 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System.
B. Section 09900 - Painting.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit all types of waterproofing and dampproofmg to architect for approval before any materials
are ordered; installation instructions are to be included in this submittal.
B. Submit photographs of actual application of dampproofmg and waterproofing material on this job;
include applicable evidence that products were applied as directed.
1.5 SAMPLE DAMPPROOFING APPLICATION
A. Apply per manufacturer's instructions, to not less than 200 sq. ft. (per coat) of substrate material
matching job conditions.
B. Determine coverage rate for application.
C. After treatment fully cures, water test to verify that repellent will repel moisture from surface.
D. Verily that no surface stains or discoloration will result from application.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver to site in original sealed containers, clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand name,
and type of material.
B. Comply with instruction for storage, shelf life, and handling.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
5.11 " "P�� P alkete`�:' DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 07105 - 1
May 11.2007 1
A. Do not proceed under the following conditions:
1. If substrate contains frozen water.
2. In rain.
3. In high or gusty winds.
4. In ambient temperatures lower than 40 degrees F.
B. Do not proceed with work if application will create a hazard to workers, owner's, employees that
may be on the site, or to neighboring persons and property.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Each type of waterproofing and dampproofing shall be guaranteed against leakage of water,
excessive deterioration, or otherwise failing to perform as required within the guarantee period,
due to failure of materials or workmanship. The period of guarantee is for term of 5 years after
acceptance of building by owner and architect.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Waterproofing:
1. W.R. Meadows, Inc.
2. Celotex.
3. Rubber and Plastic Compound Company.
B. Dampproofing:
1. W.R. Meadows, Inc.
2. Chemprobe Corporation.
3. Thoro Systems Incorporated.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Waterproofing shall be Nervastral Seal-Pruf HD, or equal, as manufactured by Rubber and Plastics
Compound Company, Long Island, N.Y.; Gauge shall be 0.30, 3.3 oz/SF.
B. Masonry water repellent shall be equal to PRIME-A-PELL 200, manufactured by Chemprobe
Corporation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Proceed with waterproofing and dampproofmg only after substrate construction and penetration
work has been completed. Installer shall not commence his operations until all substrate and other
conditions are acceptable to him for a satisfactory installation.
B. Proceed with work under this heading only when weather conditions comply with manufacturer's
recommendations.
8��4no ° "v'�i,7P `>v�6;i`�":'"` DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 07105 - 2
May 11, 2007
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verif}, surfaces to receive water repellent coatings are clean, free of efflorescence, oil, grease, or
other foreign matter detrimental to application.
B. Remove loose particles and foreign matter. Remove grease or oil with a solvent, effective alkaline
cleaner, or detergent as instructed by coating manufacturer. Scrub surfaces with water.
C. Allow surfaces to dry prior to application.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. All waterproofing and dampproofing products shall be applied in strict accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions. All surfaces shall be dry and compatible in every other way to
provide a first-class dampproof installation.
B. Waterproofing: Waterproofing at sills and similar type waterproofing requirements shall receive
Nervastral, or equal, synthetic sheeting embedded in solid Nervaplas, or equal, cold applied
mastic, minimum of one gallon to 40 sq. ft. of sheeting areas. Sheeting shall not be deformed to
the extent to promote cracking.
C. Dampproofmg: All exterior surfaces of masonry shall be given one brush or spray coat of clear
water repellent waterproofing applied in accordance with manufacturer's specific written
directions. Care shall be taken to not over -run other adjacent materials. Special care should be
taken to protect all glazing materials and similar products.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating. If applied on unscheduled surfaces,
remove immediately by method approved by the manufacturer.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove any over spray from adjacent materials not scheduled to receive dampproofing and
waterproofing.
B. Completely restore adjacent surfaces to their condition prior to over spraying.
END OF SECTION
h.104n ���83 pl¢auoi Ploin610i DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 07105 - 3
May 11, 2007
M' SECTION 07213
BATT, BLANKET, AND RIGID INSULATION
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this
Section.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Provide rigid cavity wall type insulation at masonry construction and unfaced batt insulation at
exterior stud walls where shown on the drawings.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04340 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System.
B. Section 07105 - Dampproofmg and Waterproofing.
C. Section 09511 — Suspended Acoustical Ceilings
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Thermal Resistivity: Where thermal resistivity properties of insulation materials are designated by
r-values they represent the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick,
measured by test method included in referenced material standard or otherwise indicated. They are
expressed by the temperature causing one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean
temperatures indicated.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those whose
fire performance characteristics as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a
part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by UL or other testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Contractor shall be an established firm regularly engaged in installation of wall insulations for the
past five years.
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E 84.
B. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
C. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
D. Thermal Performance: ASTM C653.
E. Acoustical Performance: ASTM C665.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
E a°4nAgB"d�P eiiOnproSn60. BATT, BLANKET, AND RIGID INSULATION 07213 - 1
May 11.2007
A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of insulation
required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.
B. Certified Test Reports: With product data, submit copies of certified test reports showing
compliance with specified performance values, including R-values (aged values for plastic
insulations), densities, compression strengths, fire performance characteristics, perm ratings, water
absorption ratings, and similar properties.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or
snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during
installation. All materials damaged from above instances will not be used and will be disposed of
properly from the site.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Batt Insulation:
1. Owens/Coming Corporation.
2. CertainTeed
B. Substitutions:
1. In accordance with Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Insulation above ceiling, installed on top of ceiling, shall be unfaced batts with a minimum R-value
of 19.0 at 75 degrees F mean temperature as indicated on the drawings. Flame spread of 0-25,
smoke developed of 50.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Installation procedures constitutes acceptance of the substrate.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. The installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which the insulation work is to
be performed and notify the contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed
with the insulation work until substrate is satisfactory.
B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for the particular conditions of installation in each case;
including method of support or anchorage to the substrate, as appropriate for each application
indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to the project conditions, consult
the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with
the work.
C. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire surface to be insulated.
D. Apply a single layer of insulation of the thickness indicated or the required thickness for the
thermal value indicated, unless otherwise shown or required to make up the total thickness.
U 0`2 P cam i�6ij• Inc. BATT, BLANKET, AND RIGID INSULATION . 07213 - 2
May 11.2007
E.
Apply insulation units of the type shown to the substrate by the method indicated. If not otherwise
indicated and except for units resting on horizontal surfaces, bond units to substrate with adhesive
or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
END OF SECTION
Enauihof�ize8"d Pai on pro`hh6€.•'"` BATT, BLANKET, AND RIGID INSULATION 07213 - 3
May 11. 2007
SECTION 07465
PREFORMED METAL SIDING
PART] GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Prepare roof deck and substrates to receive metal surfaces.
B. Provide and install metal roofing, flashing, coping and trim as shown and detailed on the drawings.
C. Provide and install metal gutter as shown and detailed on the drawings.
D. Provide and install metal panels to roof, walls and soffit panels as shown and detailed on the
drawings.
E. Installation of hat channel support shims, clips, fasteners, cleats, and other required devices.
F. Applying flashings and sealants as shown on drawings and recommended by manufacturer.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
B. Section 07610 — Sheet Metal Roofing.
C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain related materials from a single source.
B. Applicator:
1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer of primary roofing materials.
2. Work performed by firm with five years'minimum experience in successful installation of
similar systems of project complexity.
C. A pre -roofing conference shall be scheduled prior to beginning any work to the roof panels, roof
deck, roof insulation, or support shims. Contractor shall give seven days' notice to the architect
prior to scheduled conference. Contractor and related subcontractors shall attend conference.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit shop drawings showing layout, dimensions, anchorage, supports and applicable details and
accessories for the conditions indicated on the plans and drawings.
6nauihor�izeg"dup.mon pro`lu� n d�' li PREFORMED METAL SIDING 07465 - 1
May 11, 2007
C. Submit samples of all types of exposed metal finish materials, min. 24 inches long.
D. Submit certification by manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store felts and roof insulation on wood pallets or other similar raised surface.
B. Do not allow materials to become wet or soiled. Remove wet, unsuitable, or damaged materials
from project site.
C. Store rolls on end. Deformed rolls or rolls with edge damage will be rejected.
D. Do not store materials in or on building in such concentrations as to impose excessive stress on
deck or structural members.
E. Preformed metal shapes, components, and accessories shall be checked for moisture accumulation.
If moisture is present, then items should be uncrated and wiped dry, then restacked and loosely
covered so as to allow air to circulate between individual pieces and yet protect items from
collecting deposits of foreign matter or incurring physical damage. All preformed metal shapes
and components are to be checked again prior to installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Submit a 20 year written warranty signed by the manufacturer and contractor agreeing to replace
roofmg panels and accessories with fail in material and workmanship. Warranty shall include
rupture, structural failure, faulty workmanship and perforation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND FABRICATORS
A. Walls: MBCI, FW-12-2, Architectural Wall Panels, 24 gauge, Signature 300 finish.
B. Roof. MBCI, LokSeam, 16 inch width, 24 gauge, Signature 300 finish.
C. Substitutions
1. Items of same function and performance are acceptable in accordance with Section
01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Prefmished metal gutters and downspouts:
1. Type: Rectangular type gutter as shown on drawings.
2. Material: 24 gauge.
3. Finish: pre -finished.
4. Conformance: ASTM A-792.
B. Blocking and Shims:
1. Types:
a. Standard and field cut shapes.
b. Zee or hat channel support shims.
2. Materials:
a. Wolmanized lumber; see Section 06100: Roof Carpentry.
b. Hat channel support shims; 1-1/4 inches, 16 gage sheet metal.
��°4non�zel�a�upL.,, repro b�J PREFORMED METAL SIDING 07465 - 2
May I I. 2007
_s
q
C. Fasteners:
1. Types: Cups, cleats, rivets, anchors, expansion bolts as recommended by manufacturer.
Roof panels must be anchored directly to support shims as shown on drawings.
2. Materials: Non -corrosive metals compatible with roof material.
D. 30 pound felt moisture barrier ASTM D 2178.
E. Miscellaneous Accessories:
1. Flashing Cement: ASTM D 2822.
2. Gaskets and sealants as recommended by manufacturer.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, and as required to fulfill indicated performance
requirements which have been demonstrated by factory testing. Comply with indicated profiles
and dimensional requirements, and with structural requirements.
B. Forming: Custom-made fascia and flashing at curved walls shall be stretch wrap contoured by an
acceptable fabricator to dimensions shown on the drawings, and not to exceed manufacturer's
maximum allowable tolerances. Radii shall be achieved by uniformly distributed pleats as
required. Cutting material to form radii is not acceptable.
C. Water Penetration: No significant, uncontrolled leakage at 4 pounds per square foot pressure with
spray test.
D. Air Infiltration: 0.02 cfin per square foot for gross roof/wall areas, with 4 pounds per square foot
differential pressure.
E. Condensation: Fabricate panels for control of condensation, including vapor inclusion of seals and
provisions for breathing, venting, weeping, and draining.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that work which penetrates roof deck has been completed and secured.
B. Verify that roof deck surfaces are flush, clean, dry, and free of depressions or imperfections that
exceed the manufacturer's allowable clearances for roof system installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove debris and matter detrimental to proper roof installation.
B. Protect adjacent building surfaces prior to installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Moisture barrier:
1. Apply felts and bitumen over insulation or roof deck in strict accordance with
manufacturer's instruction.
2. Shingling of the roof plies shall begin at low point of roof.
&au0h r�'izeo'aupGc onproiu�ii a. Inc. PREFORMED METAL SIDING 07465 - 3
May 11, W
3.4
3.5
B. Preformed metal panels, support shims, fascia and trim:
1. Prior to installing metal panels, install a rosin coated paper over base felt.
2. Set preformed metal shapes and trim flat and fasten to substrate as per manufacturer's
recommendations. Periodic checks of panel alignment and flush placement of clips and
anchors shall be required.
3. At the ridge an EPDM closure shall be placed behind a panel closure piece in a bed of
sealant.
4. Metal pieces to field cut shall be cut on the ground. (Refer to metal fabrications Section
05500). Field cuts shall conform to the same standards as shop cuts.
5. Installer shall follow layout and dimensions carefully as indicated on the drawings. Avoid
unhemmed edges, "oil canning", or telegraphing imperfections from substrate surfaces to
the exposed roof panel surface.
6. Gutters and downspouts to be set plumb and level with EPDM liner continuous.
7. Carefully establish the required arc for support shims prior to installing roof panels.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Comply with panel fabricator's and material manufacturer's instructions and
recommendation for installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates.
Anchor panels and other components of the work securely in place, with provisions for
thermal/structural movement.
B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet
on level/plumb/slope and location/line as indicated, and within 1/8 inch offset of adjoining faces
and of alignment of matching profiles.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the work which have been damaged or
have deteriorated beyond successful repair by means of fmish touch-up or similar minor repair
procedures.
B. Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films (if any) as each panel is
installed. Upon completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel
manufacturer, and maintain in a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION
���4no P�" �",a��6�er� Inc PREFORMED METAL SIDING 07465 - 4
May 11, 2007
SECTION 07610
SHEET METAL ROOFING
PART] GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of
this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Precoated galvanized steel roofing and associated flashings. This contract shall include all roofing
material necessary to make roof system complete.
B. This contract shall provide a warranty as described herein, to cover the entire roofing system.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06125 — Wood Deck.
B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
C. Division 15 - Mechanical.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,
flashings, termination, and installation details.
B. Samples: Submit two samples, 12x12 inch in size of each metal roofing profile, illustrating design,
standing seam, external corner, ridge, material, color, and finish.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with the following:
1. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing Manual.
B. Installed metal roof system shall meet Underwriters Laboratories 90 Wind Uplift rating criteria.
C. Metal roof components shall carry an Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistance certificate.
1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide
ventilation.
B. Care shall be maintained throughout the work to prevent overloading of the existing structure with
concentrated piles of roofing materials, distribute material over roof such that excessive loading of
the structure does not occur.
0 NOTIFICATION
n`aufho2eguphc to ion pro�h6 �qc. Inc
SHEET METAL ROOFING
07610 - 1
May 11, 2007
A. The architect shall set a date and time for a pre-roofmg conference. Notify the architect at least
five working days in advance of the date desired to start roofing operations in order to scliedule
conference.
B. Roofing materials shall be reviewed by the architect at the job site during the pre-roofmg
conference. The roofing contractor shall have at least a portion of all materials to be used on the
project available at the job site during the conference.
1.8 CLEAN UP
A. Roofing contractor shall exercise care to prevent scattering of debris during roofing operations.
Paper wrappers, scrap felt, etc., shall be weighted to prevent blowing.
B. No burning of debris will be permitted on the job site. Remove such debris from the site and haul
to the public landfill area.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Roofing contractor shall be approved by the accepted roofing manufacturer prior to
commencement of roofing installation.
B. Contractor shall arrange for such inspections as may be required by the roofing manufacturer as the
work progresses.
C. Upon completion, furnish to the owner a twenty year material warranty issued by the accepted
roofing manufacturer. The contractor shall include in his bid the cost of such warranty.
D. Upon completion, furnish to the owner a ten year weather tightness warranty issued by the
accepted roofing manufacturer. The contractor shall include in his bid the cost of such warranty.
E. The roof installer shall provide a certificate stating that the roof installer is recognized by the
accepted roof manufacturer to install this type of roof system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Fabricators:
1. MBCI.
2. Equal Manufacturers
B. The metal panels listed below are based on MBCI so as to establish a minimum level of quality.
Alternate products of equal quality will be considered, subject to the final approval of the architect.
C. Roof panels to be equal to MBCI Lokseam, 16 inch width, 24 gauge, Signature 300 finish.
D. Wall panels to be equal to MBCI Architectural Panels, FW-12-2, 24 gauge, Signature 300.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Finish exposed fasteners same as flashing metal.
6��R;o `P> Can np 5�6Hee�• Inc' SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 2
May 11.2007
B. Damp Proofing: No. 30 asphalt saturated roofing felt.
C. Underlayment: Wood as shown on drawings.
D. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper.
E. Protective Backing Paint: FS TT-C-494, bituminous.
F. Sealant: Type specified in Section 07900.
G. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.
2.3 SHOP FABRICATION
A. Form components true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. Form
pieces in longest practical lengths.
B. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet, interlockable with sheet.
C. Hem exposed edges on underside, miter and seam corners. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom
edge formed outward and hemmed to form drip.
D. Form material with standing seam.
E. Fabricate comers in one piece, long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.
2.4 FINISH
A. Signature 300 Standard Colors.
B. Colors to be selected from standard manufacturer's color chart.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that roof openings, roof penetrations, cant strips, and reglets are in place, and that nailing
strips are properly located.
B. Verify that deck is dry and free of snow or ice. Verify that joints in wood deck are solidly
supported and fastened.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to drawing details included in SMACNA manual.
B. Install starter and edge strips and offset cleats per manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Cleat and seam all joints using a concealed fastening system.
D. Use bedding compound for joints between metal and bitumen or metal and felts.
E. Provide miscellaneous trim as designed in same material as roof.
F. Back paint surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials.
ooaulhor�'iz�nilu'p�i to ton pro�tbtietd�' Inc.
SHEET METAL ROOFING
07610 - 3
May 11. 2007
3.3 STANDING SEAM ROOFING
A. Conform to current SMACNA and manufacturer's details.
B. Provide cover battens of matching material where ribs turn from roof to eaves.
C. Provide rake trim, ridge cover, and miscellaneous exposed flashing of matching material.
D. Provide rivet heads, screw heads, and colored sealant matching roof material color.
3.4 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove all debris from construction site.
B. Remove stains and dirt from panels. Damaged panels are to be removed and replaced with new
matching panels.
END OF SECTION
€�°�4>7o °a p>" od p o5�'' t&., Inc SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 4
May 11, 2007
PART 1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this
Section.
WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide caulking in conjunction with interior painting operations and as otherwise indicated on
drawings for interior caulking.
B. Provide sealant where indicated on the drawings in conjunction with weather seals, and as
otherwise noted.
C. Perform all work required to complete the joint preparation, joint packing or filler, priming,
caulking and sealing indicated by the drawings and specified herein. Furnish all supplementary
items necessary.
D. In fire rated partitions, install only fire resistant sealants.
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04340 — Reinforced Unit Masonry System.
B. Section 08115 — Steel Doors and Frames.
C. Section 09900 - Painting.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications:
1. Minimum two year's experience in applying sealants and approved by manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer's Representative:
1. Arrange for technical representative to be on project site to advise installer of proper
procedures and precautions for use of materials and to check installation.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS TT-S-00230C, Type II Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component.
B. FS TT-S-001543A Sealing compound: Silicone Rubber Base.
C. FS TT-S-00227E, Type I, Class A Joint Sealant: Self Levelling.
D. ASTM C834 Standard Specification for latex sealing compounds.
6nau20 �'3�'P'caionproSii6Veit.i"` JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 1
I
May 11. 2007 €
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following:
1. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for
sealant, backing, and related materials.
2. Samples:
a. Color charts for selection by architect.
b. Furnish samples of custom colors.
3. Certification:
a. Letter of certification from manufacturer or certified test laboratory report that
materials are chemically compatible with each other and with substrate.
b. Letter from manufacture that certifies material's fire resistant qualities.
C. When requested by the architect, submit samples of cured sealants and a 6 inch
long sample of each type of joint backup.
1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials in unopened containers as packaged by the manufacturer. Store in a manner to
protect materials from the weather.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warrant, in writing, materials and workmanship against air and water leakage for a five-year
period.
B. Provide written warranty of materials fire resistance and accepted use in at least a one hour fire
resistant assembly.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
A. Pecora Chemical corporation.
B. Sonneborn Building Products.
C. W.R. Grace and Company.
D. General Electric Company.
E. Products Research and Chemical Corporation.
F. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Polysulfide (Type I):
1. Two-part conforming to FS TT-S-00227E, Class A, Type I (self -leveling) or Type 2
(nonsag) as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Color: As selected by architect.
Fnaui6o�nz�eg°fupGCTa 8.pro.hb1ge`J.•'°` JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 2
May 11. 2007
I 3. Acceptable products:
a. Synthacalk GC-5, Pecora Corp.
b. 350, PRC.
C. Sonolastic, Sonneborn-Contech, Inc.
B. Chlorosulfonated Polyurethane (Type 2)
1. One part conforming to FS TT-S-230C.
2. As selected by architect.
3. Acceptable products:
a. Synthacalk, Pecora.
C. Polyurethane (Type 3):
1. Two-part conforming to FS TT-S-0000227E, Class A, Type I or II.
2. Color: As selected by architect.
3. Acceptable products:
a. NR-200, Pecora.
b. No. 200, PRC.
C. Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant, Sonnebom-Contech.
d. THC-900/901, Tremco.
D. Polyurethane (Type 4):
1. One -part conforming to FS TT-S-000230C, Class A, Type II.
2. Color: Custom color as selected by architect.
3. Acceptable products:
a. No. 6000, PRC.
b. NP 1, Sonneborn - Contech.
C. Dymonic, Tremco.
E. Silicone (Type 5):
1. One part rubber based silicone conforming to FS TT-S-001543, Class A, Type I.
2. Color: Custom color as selected by architect.
3. Acceptable products:
a. 790 Building Sealant, Dow Corning.
b. Silproof, General Electric.
C. Proglaze, Tremco.
F. Acrylic, Solvent Cure (Type 6):
1. One -part, FS TT-S-00230.
f 2. Acceptable products:
-- a. Unicrylic, Pecora.
b. Permacryl, Schnee -Moorhead Chemicals, Inc.
'- C. Mono, Tremco Manufacturing Company.
G. Nondrying, Nonskinning (Type 7):
1. One -part sealing compound.
2. Acceptable products:
a. GC-55, Noncuing, Goal Chemical.
b. BR-96, Pecora.
L C. Curtain Wall Sealant, Tremco.
H. Bitumen Impregnated Sealant (Type 8):
1. Precompressed bitumen impregnated foam joint sealant.
2. Size: As recommended by manufacturer for joint condition as rain seal.
3. Acceptable product: Emseal compressed, Emseal Corporation.
Un2�Qno�� 10plhrtionPA011gte`t'Inc' JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 3
May 11, 2007
I. Backer Rod: Closed cell expanded polyurethane or polyethylene "Denver" foam, compatible with
sealant; sized and shaped to control depth of sealant; and to maintain 20% to 50% compression of
material. f
J. Joint Cleaners and Primers: As recommended by sealant manufacturer.
K. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive adhesive polyethylene tape.
L. Masking Tape: Pressure sensitive adhesive paper tape.
M. Sealant Tape:
1. Compressible adhesive -cohesive tape of cross -linked butyl polyisobutylene rubber that
accommodates variations and movement, sized as necessary to allow for joint movement
of + or - 25%.
2. Acceptable product: PTI 606, Protective Treatments, Inc.
N. Expansion Joint Filler:
1. Closed cell polyethylene compatible with sealant.
2. Acceptable product: Sonoflex F, Sonneborn.
3. Fire resistant to be used in at least a one hour fire rating classification.
2.3 MIXING
A. Mix components in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
PART EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine all surfaces to receive sealant and report all conditions not acceptable. Installation shall
be deemed as acceptance of the surface.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean all surfaces and joints thoroughly, removing all foreign matter, dust, oil, grease, water
surface, dirt, frost, old caulking material, and previously applied paint or primer.
B. Prime and prepare surfaces in strict accordance with sealant or caulk manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations.
C. Remove loose mill scale from steel surfaces. Remove dirt, oil, or grease by solvent cleaning and
wipe surfaces. All surfaces must be clean and dry. Any protective coating on building materials
that will impair sealant bond shall be removed.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Sealants:
1. Follow sealant manufacturer's instructions regarding preparation, priming, application
life, and application procedure.
2. Apply masking tape where required in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge.
Remove tape immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled as directed.
3. Apply sealant under pressure with gun having nozzle of proper size or other appropriate
means. Provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints.
E.1u�41;oy"p�CB 1lII on p oSubi`' 1oc JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 4
May 1 I. 2007
4. Neatly point or tool sealant to provide proper contour. Use clean water -wet tool or
tooling solution recommended by manufacturer when tooling white or light colored
sealant.
B. Caulking:
1. Caulking: Apply caulking joints before final coat of paint is applied to adjacent surface.
Apply caulking with a pressure gun having a nozzle of proper size to fit joint. Completely
fill joint and firmly tool against backing to make a smooth, convex bed, and assure good
adhesion. Caulking shall develop a firm skin before paint is allowed.
C. Joint Size:
1. Sealant and Caulking: Depth equal to 1/3 times joint width or as recommended by
manufacturer.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess caulking or sealant materials and smears from adjacent surfaces as work
progresses.
B. On non -porous surfaces excess uncured sealant shall be removed with a solvent moistened cloth
immediately. On porous surfaces excess sealant should be allowed to cure overnight, then removed
by lightly wirebrushing or sanding. All adjacent surfaces shall be clean and free from stains.
C. Remove all debris resulting from these operations from the site.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A. Interior and Exterior Joints Subject to Movement (Not Including Traffic): Type 1, 2, 4, or 5 at
Contractor's option and as recommended by manufacturer for joint condition and sealant color.
B. Interior and Exterior Horizontal Joints Subject to foot and Vehicular Traffic: Type 2, self -leveling.
C. Interior Horizontal and Vertical Joint Not Subject to Movement (Not Including Traffic): Type
6.
D. In contact with roofing and waterproofing materials: Type 3 or 4, low modulus, unmodified.
E. Unexposed window joints: Type 7.
F. Interior fire resistant rating of at least a one hour rated assembly subjected to minimal movement:
Type 2.
G. Secondary seal and exterior brick expansion joint secondary seals: Type 8.
END OF SECTION
61eulh r�ize@?"pGta i� on pr55 ggW..'a`. JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 5
May 1 I. 2007
SECTION 08115
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. The extent of hollow metal doors and frames is shown on the drawings and schedules; all shall be
custom hollow metal work.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04340 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System.
B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
D. Section 08115 — Steel Doors and Frames.
E. Section 08700 - Finish Hardware.
F. Section 09900 - Painting.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide hollow metal doors and frames manufactured by a single firm specializing in the
production of this type of work.
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. In addition to other specified requirements, comply with Steel Door Institute "Recommended
Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI-100), for the following classifications:
1. Exterior Doors: SDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, Minimum 16-gauge
faces.
B. Comply with latest adopted version of the Texas Accessibility Standards and Americans with
Disabilities Act.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. With manufacturer's standard details and specifications for steel doors and frames, submit shop
drawings showing application to project, as required.
B. Provide a written warranty letter per Section 01700, 1.8, on business letterhead stating that
installed door components comply with TAS and/or ADA.
PART PRODUCTS
"M2°4n 2B'�"P ` ,on pro`hh6 t` ` STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08115 - 1
f
May 11, 2007
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. Hollow Metal:
1. Steelcraft/Div. American Standard Co.
2. Republic Builders Products Corp./Subs. Republic Steel.
3. Tex -Steel Corporation.
4. Hol-O-Met, Inc.
5. Superior Door and Sash Company.
6. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Metal steel doors and frames; hot -rolled, pickled and oiled per ASTM A 569 and A 568; cold -
rolled per ASTM A 366 and A 568.
B. Exterior Doors: SDI-100, Grade III, extra -heavy duty, Model 2, Minimum 16-gauge faces.
C. Anchors and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard units. Use galvanized items for units built into
exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp or buckle. Weld
exposed joints continuously, grind, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.
B. Prepare steel doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware, including
cutouts, reinforcing, drilling and tapping, complying with ANSI A 115 "Specifications for Door
and Frame Preparation for Hardware".
C. Reinforce units to receive surface -applied finish hardware to be field applied.
D. Locate finish hardware as indicated or, if not indicated, per DHI "Recommended Locations for
Builder's Hardware".
E. Shop paint surfaces of doors and frame units, including galvanized surfaces, using manufacturer's
standard baked -on rust -inhibitive primer.
F. Doors: Comply with SDI-100, of the types and styles indicated, for materials quality, metal
gauges, and construction details.
G. Frames: Comply with SDI-100, of the types and styles indicated, for materials quality, metal
gauges, and construction details.
H. Provide standard hollow metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other
openings as indicated. Frames 6 feet wide and under shall be constructed of 16 gauge material.
I. Prepare frames to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single -swing frames and 2 silencers of
double -swing frames.
J. Provide 26 gauge steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of hardware
cutouts where installed in concrete, masonry or plaster openings.
K. Protect inside faces of frames in plaster or masonry wall construction which are placed with anti-
freeze additives, using high -build flbered asphalt emulsion coating.
6 4i;o�'n ffiy"pGca[ on pro�h %c `°` STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08115 - 2
May It, 2007
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install hollow -metal units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and final shop drawings.
Fit doors to frames and floors with clearances specified in SDI-100.
B. Finish hardware is specified in Section 08700.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEANING
A. Prime coat touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touch-up paint of compatible air -frying primer.
B. Final adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and
frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.
END OF SECTION
6,r10 4no �B P aBo�'P 5S�6u`e : Inc.STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08115 - 3
May 11, 200'
SECTION 08360
UPWARD ACTING ROLLING DOORS
PARTI GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Fully compatable track and counterbalance spring system.
B. Sectional door panels, manual hoist, and associated hardware.
C. Motor operated hoist and controls.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications
B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry
C. Section 08700 - Finish Hardware
D. Section 09900 - Painting.
E. Division 16 — Electrical
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A569 - Steel, Carbon, Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.
B. ASTM A591 - Steel Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Electrolytic Zinc Coated.
C. ASTM C236 - Steady State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies
D. ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Doors
E. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
F. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.
G. ANSINAGDM 102 - Industry Standards for Windloads
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to NAGDM standards and guidelines.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
h��4no "dinpS�1atpcaroGMUPWARD ACTING SECTIONAL DOORS
W
08360 - 1
May 11, 2007 1
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Indicate track configuration, door panel design, anchor spacings, anchor types, location of cutouts
for hardware and reinforcement, wheatherstripping, glazing type and gasket, and operator system.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Protect tracks, panels, and moving parts with resilient packaging.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Overhead Door Corporation, Series 600, Rolling Door
B. Ceco/Windsor Door
C. Ideal Door Company
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 DOOR PANELS
A. Rolling: Slats of 24 gauge galvanized steel, similar to Overhead Door series 600.
B. Thickness: Slat sections to be nominal 9/16 inches wide by 2 5/8 inches high by required length.
C. Fabrication: Provide weathertight inter locking joints, full width structural rigidity.
D. Deflection: Fully assembled door is not to deflect more than 1/120 of the door width.
E. Finish: Door sections to be galvanized.
2.3 TRACKS
A. Material: Rolled steel with angle mounts.
B. Dimensions: 2" deep.
C. Anchors: Bolted or welded as recommended by manufacturer and as detailed.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation: NONE
B. Door Seal: Bottom weatherstrip to be flexible PVC with reinforced retainer.
6n2a l% p4Ta No 5 .DO..• Inc' UPWARD ACTING SECTIONAL DOORS 08360 - 2
May 11.2007
C. Counter Balance: As recommended by manufacturer.
D. Hoist: Door to be operated by an electric hoist and have a chain hoist backup.
PART EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install tracks, panel sections, operators, and accessories in accordance with NAGDM.
B. Coordinate with wall construction for anchor placement.
C. Install minimum of 5 anchors per track.
3.2 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion:. 1/ 16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Immediately after erection, provide barriers and warning tapes to protect door from damage.
END OF SECTION
E
'nauihD�nz'eB"aupiva i n Pfo5h6 ie`�:1nc UPWARD ACTING SECTIONAL DOORS 08360 - 3
_3
May 11.2007
SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of
this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum doors, frames, and glazed lights.
B. Glass.
C. Door hardware.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04340 — Reinforced Unit Masonry System.
B. Section 06400 — Architectural Millwork
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System performance to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused
by temperature cycling.
B. Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.06 cfin/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference
differential pressure across assembly of 1.57'psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E283,
C. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a test pressure
difference of 2.86 lbf/sq ft.
D. Design and size members to withstand dead loads caused by pressure and suction of wind.
E. Drain water entering the framing system, to exterior.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system and component dimensions; components within assembly; framed
openings requirements and tolerances; anchorage and fasteners; glass and infills; door hardware
requirements; and affected related work.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01600 including coverage for insulated
glass units.
B. Provide a written warranty letter per Section 01700, 1.8, on business letterhead stating that
installed door components comply with TAS and/or ADA.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
a�Pn'WAIl pP0. pfo�h6�a :' ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 1
May It. 2007
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Fabricators:
1. Kawneer: Trifab 450.
a. Use 450 - 070 pivot mullions at non 90 degree comers.
b. Use 451 - 011 intermediate frame.
C. Use 451 - 110 steel insert for mullions.
d. Use 450-067 outside comers.
B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 alloy.
C. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209.
D. Sheet Steel: ASTM A446; galvanized.
E. Steel Sections: Structural shapes to suit mullion sections; galvanized.
F. Primer: Zinc chromate for shop application and field touch-up.
G. Fasteners: Galvanized steel.
H. Sealant and Backing Materials: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.2 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08800 to the following type description:
1. Glass in Exterior Lights: '/" Tempered, gray tint.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors and frames allowing for minimum clearances and shun spacing around perimeter
of assembly.
B. Accurately and rigidly fit and secure joints and comers, flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
C. Arrange fasteners, attachments, and jointing to ensure concealment from view.
D. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware and door operator hinge
hardware.
A. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: Clear Anodized.
B. Interior Aluminum Surfaces: Clear Anodized.
C. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanize to 2.0 oz/sq ft.
D. Apply bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or
dissimilar materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
8.11-Cam p4r.7P 1-flo, Inc. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 2
May 11.2007
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of
this section.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors, frames, glazing, hardware and flashings in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions - AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide
Specifications Manual.
B. Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame assembly to structure.
C. Align assembly plumb and level and free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances and align with adjacent work.
D. Coordinate attachment and seal of air and vapor barrier materials. Pack fibrous insulation in shim
spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.
E. Install hardware using templates provided.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Variation from plane: 0.03 inches per foot maximum.
END OF SECTION
Naoilior�'ize8"nuPllcz 111 on pfoS119n`e`a`' Inc. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 3
May 11. 2007
SECTION 08700
FINISH HARDWARE
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Complete sets of hardware for all new doors. New hardware is to match existing hardware
manufacturer, style, type, finish, and installation heights.
B. Butts and hinges, locks and latch sets, closers, push/pulls, trim units, kick plates, silencers, and
miscellaneous items required for a complete installation.
C. Provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the
drawings and/or herein, including all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary and
required for their completion. Any item of finish hardware not specifically mentioned, but which
is necessary for proper completion of the work shown on the Drawings shall be provided without
additional cost to owner. Any omissions shall be called to the attention of the Architect prior to
bid opening; otherwise the Drawings and Specifications will be considered complete.
D. Exchange or replace all damaged existing door hardware with new hardware; no additional money
shall be granted for such items.
E. Exchange all existing door hardware that does not meet current Texas Accessibility Standards
criteria with new hardware which does meet T.A.S. criteria; existing knobs replaced with levers of
matching manufacturer and finish.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06400 - Architectural Millwork.
B. Section 08115 — Steel Doors and Frames.
C. Section 8410 —Aluminum Entrances.
D. Section 08800 - Glazing.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act, 36 CFR.
B. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
C. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute.
D. BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association.
o�4n7o M3aP�'�,.%. , j m` FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 1
May 11. 2007
1.5
1.6
1.7
E. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute.
F. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
H. SDI - Steel Door Institute
I. ANSI Al 15.2 - Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4 inch Doors.
J. ANSI A115.9 - Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single Acting.
K. ANSI A156.1 - Butts and Hinges.
L. ANSI A156.2 - Locks and Lock Trim.
M. ANSI A156.4 - Door Controls (Closers).
N. ANSI A156.6 - Architectural Door Trim.
O. ANSI A156.7 - Template Hinges.
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of this section with other sections involving manufacturer of any internal
reinforcement for door hardware.
B. Hardware subcontractor shall examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of
hardware quantities required. Should any particular door or item be omitted in any scheduled
hardware group, provide such door or item with hardware similar to that required for similar
conditions on the project. Locks, bolts, hinges, pulls, levers shown on the plans for non -factory
manufactured cabinet and casework shall be included in the Division of Finish Hardware.
C. When new hardware is to match an existing owner's standard, new shall match in every way so
long as it does not violate Texas Accessibility Standards criteria. New door hardware shall comply
with T.A.S. Contractor shall confirm what is owner's standard prior to ordering material.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three
year's experience.
B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial and institutional door
hardware with five year's documented experience.
C. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods
needed for proper performance of the work of the section.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable codes for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames.
Gna20lhIA�"�"up0wa iioCiipAr�oSub�at. Inc.
FINISH HARDWARE
08700 - 2
�t.
May 11. 2007
B. Conform to the applicable sections of Chapter 5 of NFPA 101.
C. Conform to criteria stated in the most current edition of the Texas Accessibility Standards.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit schedule, shop drawings, and product data under provisions of Section 0 13 00.
Resubmittals will be required until complete architectural approval is obtained.
B. Indicate location and mounting heights of each type of hardware. Show required mortising and
internal reinforcing of metal products.
C. Provide product data on specified hardware.
D. Submit keying diagrams to shove grandmaster, master, etc. level of hierarchy.
E. Submit proposed replacement levers, finish, function, and example of new hardware that is
replacing existing hardware.
1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to
preventative maintenance.
C. Lost or stolen hardware shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Replace all items lost or
stolen with identical items at no cost to owner.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify package with door opening code to match
hardware schedule.
B. Protect hardware from theft by cataloging and storing in secure area.
1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.
B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Provide a written warranty per Section 01700, 1.8, on business letterhead stating that installed door
components comply with TAS and/or ADA.
B. Provide warranties for all hardware furnished under this division to the general contractor for
transmittal to the architect. Warranties shall be for a period of one (1) year (five [5] years for
closer) from date of owner acceptance, against defects in material and workmanship of the
merchandise.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
nealhur�ize�"dupGca n�roShba e`�. Inc. FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 3
May 11, 2007
A. Locksets and Latches: Sargent.
B. Hinges: McKinney.
C. Closers: Sargent.
D. Exit Devices: Sargent.
E. Kickplates, stops, and silencers: Trimco; Rockwood.
F. Smoke seals: Pemko.
G. All manufacturers shall match those currently being used by the City of Lubock.
2.2 STYLE
A. All hardware components shall match throughout the facility in finish, style, and function.
B. Provide a knurled grip or similar, acceptable texture on levers of doors leading to a potentially
hazardous situation for a physically or visually challenged person; ie, mechanical rooms and stairs.
2.3 KEYING
A.
All cylinders are to be keyed alike or as instructed by the City of Lubbock.
B.
Supply two keys for each lock.
C.
Coordinate new keying system with owner.
2.4 FINISHES
A.
Finishes for new hardware are identified in the schedule at end of this section.
Submit for architect's approval.
B.
Finishes for replacement of existing hardware is to match the existing finish.
Submit for architect's approval.
2.5 EXIT
DEVICES
A. Sargent 8800 series, smooth mechanism case, designed for l N" doors.
B. Devices are intended for door openings without a mullion.
C. Provide devices with concealed vertical rods.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
Onsoihor�'izae�su"ppeiion MSuf'b�iJ m°. FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 4 � (....
May 11.2007
t..
�3
C. The Owner reserves the right to request and pay for an inspection by a representative of the
referenced organization to determine that the work of this Section has been performed in
accordance with the specified requirements.
D. In the event such inspection determines that the work of this Section does not comply with the
specified requirements, immediately remove the non -complying items and immediately replace
them with items complying with the specified requirements, all at no additional cost to the Owner,
and reimburse the Owner for the cost of the inspection.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of SDI,
NAAMM, AWI, ANSI/NFPA 80, BHMA, DHI, and Texas Accessibility Standards.
B. The contractor shall install all finished hardware plump, square, true and in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, using the best practices as approved by architect. Hardware shall be
fitted and operated prior to painting, then removed and painting completed before final installation.
All hardware must be thoroughly cleaned, free from mars and blemishes and in perfect operating
condition when turned over to the owner. Damaged or malfunctioning hardware will not be
acceptable.
C. No extra costs will be allowed to facilitate proper installation of any hardware. The general
contractor shall be responsible for the proper fabrication of all materials and work to receive
hardware.
D. Finish hardware shall be furnished with all necessary screws, bolts, or other fastenings of suitable
size use and long life and shall harmonize with the hardware as to material and finish. These
fastenings shall be furnished where necessary with expansion shield, security bolts, toggle bolts or
other approved anchors according to the material to which it is applied and recommended by the
manufacturer. All hardware fastened to concrete shall be furnished with machine screws and lead
shields. Extension flushbolts shall be edge mounted in all cases. Wrought box strikes shall be
furnished where strikes are mortised into wood. Strikes shall have sufficiently extended lips where
required to protect trim from being marred by latch -bolts, but no more than necessary. Strikes for
pairs of doors shall have 1" lips to center. All backsets of locks and latches shall be 2-3/4" from
the door edge unless otherwise indicated.
E. Hardware for fire doors shall conform to the requirements for NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. In case of
conflict between the type of hardware specified in these specifications or the type required for fire
protection, materials of equal quality and design required by NFPA, shall be furnished, at no
additional cost to owner.
Eaa°�417o��Pei on pfoSu6'i`ea' I"` FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 5
May 11, 2007
3.3 HANDICAP ACCESSIBILITY PROVISIONS !
1
A. Door Hardware: Handles, levers, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices on accessible
doors shall be mounted no higher than 48 inches above the floor or ground surface and shall have a
shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or
severe twisting to operate. The force required to activate door hardware shall be no greater than
five lbf. Designs include lever -operated mechanisms, push -type mechanisms and U-shaped
handles. When sliding doors are fully open, operating hardware shall be exposed and usable from
both sides. Doors to hazardous areas such as loading platforms, boiler rooms, mechanical and
electrical rooms, and to other areas that might be dangerous to a blind person, shall be made
identifiable to the touch by a textured surface on the door handle, lever, pull or other operating
hardware. This textured surface maybe made by knurling or roughening or by a material applied to
the contact surface. Such textured surfaces shall not be provided for emergency exit doors or any
doors other than those to hazardous areas.
B. Door Closer: If a door has a closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that
from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least three (3) seconds to move to an
open position of approximately I2 degrees.
C. Door Opening Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall comply with
this paragraph. For hinged doors, the force shall be applied perpendicular to the door at the door
opener or 30 inches from the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge. For sliding or
folding doors, the force shall be applied parallel to the door at the door pull or latch.
1. Exterior hinged doors shall not exceed 8.5 lbf. Slight increases in opening force shall be
allowed where 8.5 lbf is insufficient to compensate for air pressure differentials.
2. Sliding doors, folding doors, and interior hinged doors shall not require a force exceeding
five lbf.
3. Fire doors may be adjusted to meet the minimum opening force allowed by the governing
authority or applicable building code.
D. Thresholds: The height of any floor level change plus the height of any applied threshold at
doorway sills shall no exceed 1/2" and shall be beveled with a slope no greater than 1" in 2".
E. Conform to latest adopted version of the Americans with Disabilities Act and Texas Accessibility
Standards criteria for positioning, operating, and opening force requirements. In case of conflict,
materials of equal quality and design required by ADA or TAS shall be provided.
3.4 HARDWARE LOCATIONS
A. Adjust any of the following heights, as required to maintain the existing standards established by
the owner.
B. Locks, latches: Finish floor to C/L of knobs, 40-5/16"
C. Deadlocks: Finish to C/L of cylinder, 48"
D. Push/Pull Plates: Finish floor to C/I, of plate, 46"
E. Flushbolts: C/L of bolt face to top (and bottom) edge of floor, 12"
F. Exit Devices: Per template and installation instructions; Rails shall not conflict with door liter,
mounting heights shall be adjusted to center exit rail on appropriate door rail.
G. Closer, O/H Holders: Per template and installation instructions.
8.2ugno "P o P`hh '..Inc. FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 6
May 11.2007
H. Stops: To protect doors and hardware from contact with parts of the building or other conflicting
doors.
I. Butt Hinges:
1. Top anchor butt - per template instructions;
2. Top butt hinge - top edge of butt leaf to rabbet, 5"
3. Bottom butt hinge - bottom edge of butt leaf to finish floor, 10"
4. Intermediate butt hinge - equal distant between top and bottom butts.
3.5 ADJUSTMENT AND MAINTENANCE
A. Within thirty (30) days after Owner Acceptance of the Project, the subcontractor shall meet with
the Owner's maintenance foreman and thoroughly instruct him in the care and adjustment of all
movable hardware furnished under this division. Provide him with a Manufacturer's Parts List for
all locks, exits and closer, a Bound Care and Adjustment Manual, and an adjustment tool for each
type of adjustable hardware. Included shall be a copy of an approved Hardware Schedule.
3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
PRESSBOX:
HDW SET #1
DOOR #IP
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EACH
HINGES
TA2714 — 4 '/2 X 4 %2
US32
MCKINNEY
1 EACH
LOCKSET
1005 LJ
US32D
SARGENT
I EACH
KICKPLATE
10" X 2" LDW
US32
ROCKWOOD
(interior face)
1 EACH
STOP
409
US32
ROCKWOOD
1 SET
GASKETING
S88D
BLACK
PEMKO
1 EACH
DOOR SHOE
216AV
ALUM
PEMKO
1 EACH
THRESHOLD
270A
ALUM
PEMKO
HDW SET #2
DOORS #2P and #3P
EACH TO HAVE:
2 EACH HINGES TA2714 — 4 %2 X 4 %2 US32 MCKINNEY
I EACH LOCKSET 1005 Li US32D SARGENT
I EACH GASKETING S88D BLACK PEMKO
CONCESSION AND TOILETS:
HDW SET #3
GATES #1CT and #3CT
a04n�" �@�P Yo P ,SS ... Im FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 7
May 11.2007
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EACH HINGES TA2714 —4'/2 X 4 %2 US32 MCKINNEY
Balance of hardware by steel fabricator.
HDW SET #4
DOORS #2CT
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EACH
HINGES
TA2714 — 4 %2 X 4 %
US32
MCKINNEY
1 EACH
LOCKSET
1005 LJ
US32D
SARGENT
1 EACH
STOP
409
US32
ROCKWOOD
3 EACH
SILENCERS
1229A
TRIMCO
HDW SET #5
DOORS #4CT and #7CT
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EACH
HINGES
TA2714 — 4 % X 4'/z
US32
MCKINNEY
1 EACH
EXIT DEVICE
12-8813 ETL
US32D
SARGENT
1 EACH
PULUPLATE
110-RM302/70A
US32
ROCKWOOD
(omit pull at Door 47, exit only)
1 SET
GASKETING
S88D
BLACK
PEMKO
1 EACH
KICKPLATE
10" X 2" LDW
US32
ROCKWOOD
(interior face)
1 EACH
CLOSER
EB350-P9 X TB
US32D
SARGENT
1 EACH
DOOR SHOE
216AV
ALUM
PEMKO
1 EACH
THRESHOLD
270A
ALUM
PEMKO
HDWE SET #6
DOORS #5CT and
#6CT
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EACH
HINGES
TA2714 — 4 % X 4 %
US32
MCK.iNNEY
1 EACH
LOCKSET
1005 LJ
US32D
SARGENT
1 EACH
CLOSER
EB350-P9 X TB
US32D
SARGENT
1 SET
GASKETING
S88D
BLACK
PEMKO
1 EACH
DOOR SHOE
216AV
ALUM
PEMKO
1 EACH
THRESHOLD
270A
ALUM
PEMKO
END OF SECTION
F a�9no�a aP�cr
'5''6��`'°` FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 8
Mav 11.2007
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass and glazing for sections referencing this section for products and installation.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
B. Section 08410 - Aluminum Windows.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
B. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in
Buildings.
C. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass.
D. ASTM C1048 - Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.
E. FGMA - Glazing Manual.
F. FGMA - Sealant Manual.
G. FS TT-C-00598 - Caulking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type.
H. FS TT-S-001657 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, Solvent Release
Type.
I. FS TT-S-00230 - Sealing Compounds, Synthetic -Rubber Base, Single Component, Chemically
Curing.
J. FS TT-S-01543 - Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base.
K. FS TT-G-410 - Glazing Compound, Sash (Mental) for Back Bedding and Face Glazing (Not for
Channel or Stop Glazing).
L. Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Bill Rh"r�izeij"aup6ce,, pfo ltee.. Inc GLAZING 08800 - 1
May 11, 2007
A. Glass and glazing materials of the section shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and
air barrier:
1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900.
2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to
heel bead of glazing sealant.
B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of
glass as calculated in accordance with 1985 U.B.C. in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330.
C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials,
whichever is less.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product data on glass types specified: Provide structural, physical and environmental
characteristics, size limitations, special handling, or installation requirements.
C. Product data on glazing compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
D. Samples:
1. Submit 2 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected.
2. Submit 12" x 12" piece of each glass indicated.
E. Manufacturer's installation instructions: Indicate special precautions required.
F. Manufacturer's certificate: Certify that glass meets or exceeds specified requirements.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual, SIGMA and
Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the drawings.
B. Actual site measurements are the responsibiity of the contractor.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01040.
B. Coordinate the work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to
adjacent work. ! j
ena'4non�z�@"clao°PtHrs,oXPTa`1uh6a" Inc.GLAZING 08800 - 2
1
May 11, 2007
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and replacement of same.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. PPG Industries, Inc.
B. Ford Glass Division
C. ASG Industries
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600
2.2 MATERIALS — GLASS
A. Tempered Glass — Tinted
I. Type: Fully tempered light. Equal to PPG Solar Gray.
2. Light Transmittance: 21 %
3. Light Reflectance: 35%
4. Shading Coefficient: 0.45
5. Thickness: I/4 inch
6. Conformance: ASTM 1048-85, Quality q3.
2.3 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A. Shall conform to ASTM C669 and as required by the glazing manufacturer.
B. Butyl Sealant (Type GC-B): FS TT-S-001657; Shore A hardness of 10-20 black color; non -
skinning.
C. Acrylic Sealant (Type GC-C): FS TT-S-00230, Type II, Class A; single component; cured Shore
A hardness of 15-25; color as selected.
D. Polysulphide Sealant (Type GC-D): FS TT-S-00227, Glass A Type II; two component; cured
Shore A hardness of 15-25; color as selected.
E. Polyurethane Sealant (Tupe GC-E): FS TT-S-00230, Type II -non -sag, Class A; as recommended
by the manufacturer.
F. Silicone Sealant (Type GC-F): FS TT-S-01543, Class A; single component; chemical solvent
curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25
color as selected.
2.4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
Sa?,�Qno�ae@`���ca ion pro`w6ne'e`.' Inc GLAZING 08800 - 3
May 11, 2007
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square
foot (25 nun for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4 inch (100 mm) x width of glazing
rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch (75 mm) long x
one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face.
C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 - 15
Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color.
D. Glazing Splines: Resilient polyvinyl chloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot;
color: black.
E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS
A. Provide testing and analysis reports of glass under provisions of Section 01400.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify prepared openings under provisions of Section 01040.
B. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to
receive glazing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Sea] porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
D. Remove all evidence of existing putty glazing from existing steel frames scheduled to be reglazed.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with referenced FGMA standards and instructions of manufacturers of glass,
glazing sealants, and gaskets, to achieve airtight and watertight performance, and to minimize
breakage.
B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. Inspect glass during installation
and discard pieces with edge damage that could affect glass performance.
C. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700.
6 °S 2�P>H ,oa 5„`6,t.2, In` GLAZING 08800 - 4
May 11, 2007
B. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
C. Remove labels after work is complete.
D. Clean glass.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01500.
B. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark
heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
C. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.
D. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove
immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
E. Remove and replace glass which is broker, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways
during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.
END OF SECTION
fi.21 olize8 aun ua on pro�h��ted�' Inc.
GLAZING
08800 - 5
May 15, 2007
SECTION 09261
METAL STUDS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Metal stud wall and wall furring.
B. Metal channel ceiling framing.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for support of toilet accessories.
B. Section 09511 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings: Ceiling Furrdown Construction.
C. Section 09900 - Painting: surface finish.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring
Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
B. ANSI/ASTM C646 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Sheet Material to Light
Gage Steel Studs.
C. ANSI/ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum
Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water Resistant Backing Board.
D. ANSI/ASTM E 119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in metal stud systems work with three years' documented
experience.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide product data on metal framing and accessories.
B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
U0..u%6 heE� ph"aalto,,p u�1 14.. Inc.METAL STUDS 09261 - 1
May 15, 2007
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Dietrich - metal stud system.
B.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2
FRAMING
MATERIALS
A.
Interior Framing
1. Studs and Tracks: ANSI/ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 3 5/8" by 25 gage thick, 'C'
shape.
2. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ANSI/ASTM C645; 3 5/8" by 25 gage.
B.
Exterior Framing:
1. Studs and Tracks: ANSI/ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 6" by 20 gage thick,'C'
shape.
2. Furring, Framing, and Accessories: ANSI/ASTM C645; 6" by 20 gage.
C.
Fasteners: ANSI/ASTM C1002
2.3
ACCESSORIES
A.
Grounds: concealed 9 gage steel metal.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as instructed by
the manufacturer.
B.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate.
3.2
METAL STUD INSTALLATION
A.
Install studding in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C754.
B.
Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center.
C.
Partition Heights: To minimum 6 inches above suspended ceilings, or as noted on drawings.
Install additional bracing for partitions extending above ceiling. Allowable deflection of L1240.
D.
Door Openings and Window Openings: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud
tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs.
E.
Grounds: Anchor wood blocking or metal sheetsto studs. Install blocking for support of
plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, and hardware.
F.
Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work placed in or
behind partition framing.
$.106o���aa[;o�Sa�6;R Inc.METAL STUDS 09261 - 2
May 15.2007
3.3 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Erect free-standing metal stud framing tight to masonry and plaster walls, attached by adjustable
furring brackets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Erect furring studs vertically. Secure in place at maximum 16" on center.
C. Space furring studs maximum 16 inches on center.
D. Install thermal insulation Batts between studs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
END OF SECTION
naonzeg`�upLFcaiion'Pfof.�l6`i`' Inc METAL STUDS 09261 - 3
May 11.2007
SECTION 09511
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 GENERAL NOTES
A. This contractor shall furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete all acoustical ceiling
work as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. This contractor shall be responsible for the
furnishing and installation of all accessories required for the completion of the work.
B. See reflected ceiling plan for locations of electrical and mechanical items related to the acoustical
ceilings. Cooperate with electrical and mechanical contractors to insure a first class appearance in
the completed work.
1.3 RELATED SECTION
A. Section 07213 — Batt and Blanket Insulation
1.4 COOPERATION
A. This contractor shall consult and cooperate with trades whose work precedes and follows ceiling
installation to permit orderly procedure in executing work under this contract. Installation of tile
shall not start until foundation work to receive the tile has been obtained to proceed. The
contractor shall give the architect advance notices for such operations.
B. The contractor shall inspect personally all surfaces to receive material and shall report to the
architect any defects or conditions which would affect his installation.
C. When crown molding is included in project, this contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with the
carpentry contractor to see that a uniform border is maintained around the ceiling area.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. This contractor shall furnish a written warranty that the work under this division shall be free from
defects of materials and workmanship for a period of two years from the date of final acceptance of
his work, and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the
warranty.
B. The following shall be judged as defective work: loosening, buckling, undue shrinkage, warping,
cracking, settling, chipping, spotting, and loss of acoustical properties of material.
1.6 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit to the architect for approval four sets of manufacturer's literature describing the ceiling
boards and suspension system proposed for the project.
PART2 PRODUCT
6na�9noizh'eB�upGcstl u,pro`hil a, Inc SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09511 - 1
May 11, 2007
2.1
PART 3
3.1
3.2
MATERIALS
A. Ceiling board shall be 24 x 48 x 518 inches square edged, random fissured mineral fiber with an
NRC of at least .50 to .60, STC of 35 to 39, Class A rating, and a white color coating.
1. USG Interiors, Inc. — OMNI
2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. — MINABOARD
B. Exposed suspension system shall be equal to DONN, DX system, white enameled steel. Main
beams shall be generally spaced at 48 inches on center except where light fixture locations dictate
a 24 inch spacing. Use 48 inch cross tees and 24 inch sub cross tees. Wall angle shall be white
enameled steel. Provide an intermediate -duty classification.
EXECUTION
EXPOSED SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. The contractor shall employ workmen who are experienced in the erection of the types of ceilings
specified and shall maintain competent supervision of the work at all times.
B: Erect runner level and true to the elevation shown on the drawings. Start channels a minimum of 1
foot from walls, and space 4 feet on center thereafter. Where splices occur in channels, use special
splice bars as furnished with system specified.
C. Lay out ceiling work symmetrically in the various rooms with no less than one-half tile at the walls.
Cut tile accurately around electrical outlets.
D. Upon completion of the work, all tile shall be cleaned and left free form defects of any kind. With
the approval of the architect, small abrasions, etc., may be touched up with paint.
E. In general, lighting fixtures of fluorescent type shall be suspended directly on the runner bars.
Where fixture centers between two runner bars, both shall be main runner bars. See reflected
ceiling plans for fixture locations.
F. The use of wall angles to support more than 1 foot of suspended acoustical board ceilings will not
be permitted.
HANGERS
A. Hanger wires shall be #12 soft annealed wire. Hanger wires shall be plumb and taut in the
completed work. Slanting of hanger wires will not be permitted unless an equal and opposite
hanger wire is installed to offset the thrust of the original wire hanger. This may be done only with
the expressed permission of the architect.
C.
Where hanger wires occur directly under ductwork or other overhead obstructions, provide a
trapeze of 1-1/2 inch channel iron. Install regular hanger wire at proper location along the length
of trapeze.
The use of bridging angles spanning between bar joists is expressly forbidden for attachment of
hanger wires for supporting ceiling suspension systems.
Hanger wires shall be attached to the bottom chords of bar joists or to special scissor clips attached
to steel subpurlins supporting the roof deck.
6�°4no�p lw7Pralubie� I SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 2
May 11. 2007
E. Where acoustical board ceilings occur below concrete structural members provide power driven
studs with eyes into vertical face of concrete joists.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF TILES
A. Contractor shall only install ceiling tiles in which a building system is anchored to or through the
tile in order to complete the installation of the building system.
1. Once Phase I is complete and systems are operational, the contractor shall schedule with
the architect a pre -final building system walk through.
2. Do not install ceiling tiles that do not support a building system component, building
systems are to be visible.
B. Phase II: After pre -final walk through and all corrective work is completed, install balance of
ceiling tiles.
1. Complete ceiling system is to be installed prior to final project walk through.
3.4 EXTRA TILE
A. Upon completion of the work furnish to the owner one unopened carton of each type of acoustical
board installed in the project.
END OF SECTION
fne1.11g.C1a9"Pc`n`'Pfh6u`�i �°� SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 3
May 11. 2007
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART] GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Surface preparation.
B.
Surface finish schedule.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
B.
Section 04340 — Reinforced Unit Masonry System
C.
Section 08115 — Steel Doors and Frames.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ANSIIASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related
Products.
B.
ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.
C.
SSPC - SP1 - Solvent Cleaning
D.
SSPC - SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning
1.5
DEFINITIONS
A.
Conform to ANSI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products
with five years experience.
B.
Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with three years
documented experience.
C.
Flame Spread: Interior finishes must meet Class II flame spread, 26-75 index, or less.
Un lufhoi¢°e��uphcaiion proSii6lie�.' 1eC'
PAINTING
09900 - 1
May 11, 2007
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide product data on all finishing products.
B. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300.
C. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each
surface finishing product scheduled, after color selection.
D. Submit manufacturer's application instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
E. Certify that material installed on this project does not contain insecticide, mildewcide, and no more
than 0.06 percent lead.
1.8 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Provide one field sample panel, 12 inches long by 12 inches wide, illustrating special texture, and
finish.
NI
B. Accepted sample may not remain as part of the work.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ...
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
C. Deliver products to site in sealed and labelled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
D. Container labelling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code,
coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing
and reducing.
E. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 450 F and a maximum of 90' F, in well
ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
F. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures
above 55' F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required
otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent,
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 55° F for interiors; 65' F for exterior;
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 650 F for interior or exterior, unless
required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Provide lighting level of 50 footcandles measured mid -height at substrate surface.
r
6.2.%7jp @`2 p PAINTING 09900 - 2
May 11. 2007
i}.
1.11 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide two gallon containers of each color and surface texture to owner.
B. Label each container with color, texture, and room locations in addition to the manufacturer's label.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS — PAINT
A. Glidden Coatings and Resins Division of SCM Corporation.
B. PPG Industries, Inc. Coatings and Resins Division.
C. Kelly -Moore Paint Co., Inc.
D. Sherwin Williams Company,
E. Monarch Paint Company.
F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste
consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating.
B. Coatings: Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners, and other materials not
specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Refer to schedule at end of section for surface finish schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition
that may potentially affect proper application.
C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Report any condition
that may potentially affect proper application.
1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
3. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016.
4. Exterior Located Wood: 12 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016.
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces.
('
6611 .P SS�Bi`'"` PAINTING 09900 - 3
'L
May 11.2007
F
3? PREPARATION
A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or
finishing.
B. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section.
C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and
bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
E. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair.
F. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat
of etching primer.
G. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose
mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a
solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering
of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water.
Allow to completely and thoroughly dry.
H. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster.
Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.
I. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt and rust. Where heavy coatings of
scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply
a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned.
Spot prime paint after repairs.
J. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to
make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.
Prime metal items including shop primed items.
K. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has
dried; sand between coats.
L. Concrete Paving Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion
of finishing materials.
M. Hollow Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration.
B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this section.
C. Furnish drop cloths, shields and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring
other surfaces.
D. Remove empty paint containers from site.
6.1n�ze� pLcei u`�p ohh�,g.1DC. PAINTING 09900 - 4
May H. 2007
e
3.4 APPLICATION
_
A.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
J'
B.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
C.
Apply each coat to uniform finish.
D.
Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than proceeding coat unless otherwise approved.
E.
Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
m.i
F.
Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
G.
Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set.
Wipe excess from surface.
i
H.
Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.
1.
Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss
varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.
,._
J.
Apply new paint as specified on new and renovated existing surfaces. The entire renovated surface
-m ..
shall be painted, not just the repaired portion. Renovated surfaces shall be painted from floor to
ceiling, corner to comer, or break in surface plane.
J
_
K.
Repainting the entire surface (new, renovated, or existing): shall be required if the surface is
damaged by construction activities. The architect will make the final determination.
3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A.
Refer to Section 15 and Section 16 for schedule of color coding and identification banding of
equipment, ductwork, piping and conduit.
B.
Paint shop primed equipment.
C.
Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers,
brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefinished.
D.
Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidently.
E.
Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat
black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, and grilles, to match face
panels.
F.
Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.
G.
Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before
installing equipment.
H.
Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements
indicated. Color band and identify as required.
I.
Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
.�4 aChe[IyP�'ta onpro5.h6lt'"` PAINTING 09900 - 5
May t I.2007
3.6 CLEANING
A. As work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.
B. During progress of work, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment,
surplus materials, and debris.
C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal
containers, and remove daily from site.
3.7 SCHEDULE - SHOP PRIMED ITEMS FOR SITE FINISHING
A. Metal Fabrications (Section 05500): Steel Bollards; Steel Channel Frame for Canopy.
B. Grating & Floor Plates (Section 05530): Sidewalk Grate & Frame.
3.8 SCHEDULE OF PAINTING
A. The kinds and brands of paint and number of coats required on the various surfaces shall be those
listed below. The types of paint are identified with Pittsburg Paint or Sherwin Williams numbers.
B. The owner and architect shall select color, tint, and sheen from manufacturer's standard color
chart.
C. Exterior and Interior Metal:
1. First Coat: PPG 6-6 Speedhide enamel undercoat
2. Second Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide enamel
3. Third Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide enamel
D. Interior Wood: For paint finish
1. First Coat: PPG 6-6 Speedhide enamel undercoat
2. Second Coat: PPG 6-90 Series low sheen enamel
3. Third Coat: PPG 6-90 Series low sheen enamel
E. Interior Wood: For transparent finish
1. First Coat: Rez 77 line semi -transparent stain
2. Second Coat: PPG Speedhide 6-10 sanding sealer
3. Third Coat: PPG Lo-sheen varnish or flat lacquer
4. Fourth Coat: PPG Lo-sheen varnish or flat lacquer
F. Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings
1. First Coat: PPG 6-2 Speedhide drywall sealer
2. Second Coat: PPG 6-510 Speedhide acrylic latex enamel
3. Third Coat: PPG 6-510 Speedhide acrylic latex enamel
G. Galvanized Metal
1. First Coat: PPG 6-209 galvanized steel primer
2. Second Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide enamel
3. Third Coat: PPG 6-252 Speedhide enamel
H. Concrete and Asphalt Pavement
1. First Coat: PPG Traffic & Zone Marking Paint, I Line yellow unless noted otherwise.
2. Second Coat: PPG Traffic & Zone Marking Paint, accessible parking zones to recieve a
second coat.
Em°a4h'o uae@"�u'PGc to w7p Or �tuln�R `nc' PAINTING 09900 — 6
f
May 11. 2007
iltY[
I. Concrete Unit Masonry
1. First Coat: SW ProMar B25 Block Filler
2. Second Coat: SW A-100 Satin Latex A82
3. Third Coat: SW A-100 Satin Latex A82
J. Concrete Walks
I. First Coat: PPG Traffic & Zone Marking Paint, blue unless noted otherwise. Accessible
ramps and sloped walks.
END OF SECTION
>0pp7 Ch taan �larvev%jhgec. Inc.
tnwlhonz up capon pru UD11M.
PAINTING
09900 - 7
May I I. 2007
SECTION 10155
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
High density resin toilet compartments.
B.
Urinal screens.
C.
Partition Type: Floor mounted, headrail braced.
1.3
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to ANSI Al 17.1 and applicable code for provisions for the physically handicapped.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan and elevation views, dimensions, details of floor supports,
and door swings.
B.
Samples: Submit two samples, 6x6 inches in size, illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen.
PART2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Capital Partitions; Congress.
B.
Panel Construction: Poly -Pro advanced solid polymer resin; color to be selected by architect.
C.
Head Rails: Hollow aluminum channel.
D.
Attachments and Bolts: Steel, with heavy duty aluminum brackets.
E.
Steel Plate Internal Reinforcement: Carbon steel.
2.2
HARDWARE
A.
Hinges: Cast pivot hinges, gravity type, nylon bearings.
B.
Latch and Keeper: Thumb turn latch, door strike and keeper with rubber bumper.
C.
Coat Hook: Cast alloy, with rubber bumper tip.
U� 20t 7 Chn an �-1 my Ariir6ec�. Inc.
nau ru up aauon pro n
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155 - 1
May 11, 2007
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with plastic laminate finish to faces and edges of core material.
B. Doors and Panels: 1 inch thick, face pressure bonded to core.
C. Pilasters: 1 1/4 inch thick, constructed same as doors.
D. Pilaster Shoes: Formed chromed steel.
E. Internal reinforcement: Provide for attached hardware and fittings.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Hardware to be chrome.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that opening dimensions and plumbing fixture and rough -in locations are as instructed by
the manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install partition components secure, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Attached panel brackets securely using anchor devices.
C. Provide adjustment for height variations with threaded rods through steel saddles. Conceal
fastenings with pilaster shoes.
D. Equip each door with two hinges, one door latch, and one coat hook and bumper. Equip out -
swinging doors with additional bumpers.
E. Adjust and align door hardware so that free movement is attained.
END OF SECTION
Inc- TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 2
May 11. 2007
SECTION 10350
FLAGPOLES
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Flagpoles
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02514 - Concrete Curbs, Walks and Paving.
B. Section 03300 - Concrete Work.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B241.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty.
B. Submit warranty information for review according to Section 01300.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Concord Industries, Inc.
l . Executive ground set.
B. Pole -Tech Co., Inc.
1. Model PT 305C series.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Length: 30 feet above ground, 33 feet 0 inches overall length.
B. Ball: Mast ball 6 inches in diameter, natural anodized.
C. Wind Speed: 94 miles per hour minimum resistance.
f,2M7onz Cha��an larve�• i1rSh6ec1 ,Inc.
nau hup icatton pro a neJ�.
FLAGPOLES
10350 - 1
May 11. 2007
D. Truck: Revolving non -fouling truck of aluminum body, 26 stainless steel bearings, 2-3/8" cast
nylon sheaves, cast aluminum spindle.
E. Shaft: Aluminum tapered seamless alloy 6063-T6, minimum wall thickness of 0.156 inches, clear
anodized finish meeting AA M32-C22-A41.
F. Halyards: No. 10 white polypropylene with two chrome swivel -snaps to secure flag.
G. Cleat: 9 inch aluminum with stainless steel sockethead bolts, finish to match shaft.
H. Collar: Provide FC-11, matching shaft finish.
I. Flag: Provide 5 feet x 8 feet fabric U.S. flags, submit material and design'for review.
J. Provide one flag per flag pole.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Excavation: Excavate for foundation concrete to neat clean lines.
B. Concrete: Provide forms to control concrete cast. Concrete to be 3000 psi compressive strength
meeting ASTM C150. Tool all exposed edges.
C. Flagpole: Install according to manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Clean all surfaces of excess concrete and residue.
B. Clean using manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
ff e°�4nlaae@'u'P 9iMp 5a wg..• �°` FLAGPOLES 10350 - 2
May 11. 2007
SECTION 10440
SIGNS
PART] GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Exterior Facility Sign attached to the public side of the Concession service area screen wall.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04340 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System.
B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 0 13 00.
B. Submit letter style and colors for selection.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Provide a minimum of 12 months on finish.
B. Submit according to Section 01300.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. Gravoply.
B. Andco.
2.2 MATERIAL - EXTERIOR FACILITY SIGN
A. Design intent is cast metal letters mounted on metal studs anchored to perforated metal panel.
B. Text: Allow up to 35 characters, text is as shown on the drawings.
C. Sign is to be mounted to face of metal screen of entrance archway.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 MOUNTING
A. All letters shall be securely anchored to resist damage during high winds.
2oQ7 cha an�Ier,n A,,%IgCg`. Inc. mSIGNS
nau horn up auon pro i u
'_...a
10440 - 1
May 11. 2007
B. Locate signs where shown on drawings or directed by the architect.
C. Provide mounting information along with product data submittals.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Clean signs and adjacent surfaces of any adhesive residue, mastic, concrete, mortar, etc.
B. Protect signs from damage until substantial completion is accomplished and accepted by the
Architect.
C. Remove all protective covers, wrappings, or tape prior to substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
S.20
N702 s uP aaiiotipr0 ta, Inc. SIGNS 10440 - 2
Mny 11. 2007
SECTION 10522
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Fire extinguishers.
B. Cabinets.
C. Accessories.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04340 — Reinforced Unit Masonry System.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers.
B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Directory.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to NFPA 10 - Requirements for Extinguishers.
B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for rated assemblies.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Include physical dimensions, fire rating, operational features, color and details.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Included test, refill or recharge schedules, procedures and re -certification requirements.
�� u4hori'e8"iuP�a iuX 5516S1InFIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
10522 - 1
May 11, 2007
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures may cause freezing.
B. Install extinguishers only after the interior temperatures are controlled.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES
A. J.L. Industries.
B. Larsons Fire Protection & Safety Equipment.
C. Modern Metal Products by Muckle.
2.2 EXTINGUISHERS
A. Multi -Purpose Dry Chemical Type: Steel tank, Model Cosmic 10E manufactured by J.L.
Industries, with pressure gauge, UL rated 4A-60BC.
2.3 CABINETS
A. Cabinet: J.L. Industries Ambassador model 1015 Fire-FX, formed sheet steel, 18 gauge primed,
recessed type, tub inside dimensions of 10 1/2 x 24 x 6 inches. Electrostatic white epoxy finish.
B. Trim: Flat, 1 1/4 inches wide face.
C. Door: Contemporary V, 18 gauge thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch only.
D. Glass: 1/4 inch clear tempered glass.
E. Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Form body of cabinet with tight inside corners and seams.
B. Predrill holes for anchorage.
C. Form perimeter trim (and door stiles) by welding, filling and grinding smooth.
D. Hinge doors for a 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Extinguisher: Red enamel.
B. Cabinet Trim and Door: Paint to match adjacent wall.
C. Cabinet Interior: White enamel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
2aLW Onon�F pRan n P a`'61-19.' Inc- FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
10522 - 2
i
li
3"4
May 11.2007
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings where shown on the drawings.
B. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install cabinets so that center line of latch is 42 inches above finished floor.
END OF SECTION
L. luihonie8"�u"p pi un F oI S1100ra`i`:1nc FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
10522 - 3
....J
May 1 i, 2007
{�
SECTION 10800
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART
GENERAL
"t
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
-'
Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Toilet accessories.
B.
Attachment hardware.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
j
A.
Section 04340 — Reinforced Unit Masonry System.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI Al 17.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable by
Physically Handicapped People.
B.
ANSI/ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled,
Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates Bars and Strips.
C.
ANSI/ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.
D.
ANSI/ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot -dip) on Assembled Steel Products.
E.
ANSI/ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and
Nickel Plus Chromium.
1
F.
ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
G.
ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
.71
H.
NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
J
. Tl
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment
methods.
B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for installing work in conformance with ANSI Al 17.1.
B. Comply with the latest adopted version of the Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) and Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA).
I
&s04ho l'aP P r6i"ea`'a` TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1
May 1 I, 2007
2.2
2.3
2.4
1.7
PART 2
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories
B. The Bobrick Company
C. Bradley Corporation
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: ANSI/ASTM A366.
B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304.
C. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel.
D. Adhesive: Contact type, waterproof.
E. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized tamperproof.
F. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for
component and substrate.
G. Wall Grounds: Provide concealed grounds of 9 gage metal plates or fire resistant 2x wood
blocking.
FABRICATION
A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components.
B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints.
C. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.
D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
E. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
F. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
G. Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices.
H. Concealed grounds shall be at least 9 gage metal or 2 x 6 wood.
FACTORY FINISHING
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the work of this section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and
reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.
PRODUCTS
EnauWonz upGcaz no5ub �`•'°` TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 2
May I I, 2007
i
I
A. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake.
B. Stainless Steel: 18 gauge type 304 satin finish.
- PART 3 EXECUTION
E 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions as instructed by the
manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site at appropriate time for building -in.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C. Concealed grounds are to be securely anchored to partition framing.
D. Installed grab bars must be able to support a steady force of 250 pounds.
3.4 ACCESSORY LOCATIONS
A. In toilet rooms where only one sink is provided, provide a handicap accessible mirror. In toilet
rooms where more than one sink is provided, provide one handicap accessible mirror above the
accessible sink and one mirror above each of the non accessible sinks.
B. Comply with the latest adopted version of the Texas Accessibility Standards, Chapter 4, location
and mounting heights criteria.
3.5 TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
Bobrick McKinney
A. Grab Bars B-6206.99 x 36 B6206.99 x 42 9605-F36, 9605-F42
2561 Series Anchor Plate 9580 Wall Anchor Plate
B. Mirrors B-290 18 x 44 170 18 x 44
C. Toilet Tissue Dispensers B-686 1430 D
D. Supply only products that are currently being used by the City of Lubbock.
E. Electric Hand Dryer AmeraProducts, Inc. 1-800-608-6568
Model A60, 110-120V, 60 Hz, 1,725 watts, cast iron, push button, wall mount.
END OF SECTION
fra�lnoi¢e8auphca1�110 proehbieaf I TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 3
May 11. 2007
SECTION 13122
SHADE CLOTH
PART] GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications shall cover the construction and installation of shade covers on
the dugouts, bleachers, and other areas as shown on the plans.
B. Shade fabric and structures provided and installed for this ball park shall match those found at the
Cavazos ball fields of McAlister Park, Lubbock.
1.3 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS
A. Comply with the following codes and standards except as modified herein:
1. International Building Code
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Architect four (4) copies of the shop drawings of the shade structures. Drawings
shall be sealed and signed by the aforementioned engineer who is under contract to the
manufacturer.
B. Provide a written warranty letter per Section 01700, 1.8, on business letterhead stating that
installed metal building components comply with AISC and MBMA standards.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Section 03300 - Concrete
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The following list of manufacturers and suppliers are those known to be acceptable in this bid.
This list is provided for the convenience of the Contractor in preparing his bid.
1. Sun Ports International, Inc.
8319 Chancellor Row
Dallas, Texas 75247
(214) 905-9500
(214) 905-9514
(214) 850-5651 mobile
2. Cedar Forest Products Co.
Paul E. Allen Co., Inc.
Enauihot(fipfic ua on pro�h6n. Inc.
SHADE CLOTH
13122 - 1
May 11. 2007
Rt. 1 Box 185
Italy, Texas 76651
(214) 483-6883
(214)483-7406
3. Shade Concepts
Hunter Knepshield
P.O. Box 260677
Plano, Texas 75026-0677
(800) 451-4138
2.2 SHADESURE CLOTH
A. Shadesure cloth shall be a knitted high density polyethylene (HDPE), color concentrated and ultra
violet light stabilized, monofilament and tape yarn, in a relationship of 57% and 43% respectively.
1. Burst strength: 48 pounds per square foot.
2. Approximate shade: 40% (light colors); 80% (dark colors).
3. Nominal thickness: 0.045 — inch
4. Fire retardant: ASTM E84-91A; Class I (FSI 10) Flame spread; Smoke -developed index
(SDI) 30.
B. Contractor shall provide color samples for selection by the Architect. Provide a 5 year limited
cloth warranty.
2.3 BLEACHER SHADE STRUCTURE
A. Free standing steel frame with tension cable woven into the fabric perimeter.
B. Structure shall consist of four round posts, a ridge roof frame, and fabric.
C. Shade structure provided for this project are to match the shade structures found at the Cavozos
ball fields of McAlister Park, Lubbock.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
8.3Vh ��@"d�a°P a� P 5`��L 4.• 1°` SHADE CLOTH 13122 - 2
7r-1
May 15.2007
SECTION 13125
ALUMINUM BLEACHERS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work under this section includes all aluminum bleacher assemblies, bleacher handrails, and
required bleacher hardware.
B. Submitted bleachers shall match aluminum bleachers found at the Cavazos ball field of the
McAlister Park, Lubbock.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 - Concrete
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Installed bleachers must comply with all regulations of the Texas Accessibility Standards,
including Chapter 4.33, Assembly Areas, and Chapter 4.1.3 (19), Assembly Areas.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit certifications stating that installed bleachers will comply with Texas Accessibility
Standards.
B. Submit shop drawings, color charts, material specifications assembly instructions, warranty, and
anchoring details for review by architect prior to placing order.
C. Bleachers delivered to the site without first being submitted for review may be rejected without
cause.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide written one year warranty that bleachers will be free from defects in materials and
workmanship when used as designed and not exposed to abnormal conditions.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Outdoor Aluminum
Geneva, Alabama
1-800-225-4249
C 2007 Chapman Harvev Architects. Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
ALUMINUM BLEACHERS
13125 - 1
May u. 2007
B.
Southern Bleacher Company
Graham, Texas
1-800433-0912
C.
Sturdisteel
Hewitt, Texas
1-800433-3116
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Structural shapes meeting ASTM A36/A572 grade 50, A529-50, or A500 grade B.
B.
Shop connections are seal welds.
C.
Steel to be hot -dipped galvanized to ASTM A123 after fabrication.
D.
Extended Aluminum seats, risers, railing, stanchions, end caps, and accessories are to be 6063-T6
alloy.
E.
Finish extruded aluminum to be clear anodized.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Provide a live load assembly of at least 129 psf, lateral sway load of at least 24 psf, and
perpendicular sway load of at least 10 plf.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
All work performed by technicians experienced in bleacher seating installation.
B.
Assemble bleachers in accordance with approved shop drawings.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Coordinate bleacher installation with other trades on the site.
B.
Start of bleacher installation assumes acceptance of site conditions.
3.3
CLEAN-UP
A.
Remove all packing material from site.
B.
Clean up all debris caused by this section.
C.
Remove all protection films, tape, labels from bleachers.
D.
Protect bleachers from damage until accepted by owner. Replace any damaged bleacher
components at contractor's expense.
3.4
MAINTAINANCE
A.
Provide repair and cleaning manual to owner.
END OF SECTION
® 2007 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. ALUMINUM BLEACHERS 13125 - 2
Unauthorized duplication prohibited
{' LITTLE LEAGUE BASEBALL COMPLEX
NORTHWEST LEAGUE
N. UNIVERSITY & CLOVIS HIGHWAY
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
Division 15
15010
._. 15020
15060
15250
15400
15650
15804
15840
15870
I
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Mechanical
General Mechanical Provisions
Testing
Piping
Insulation
Plumbing
Air Conditioning
Ventilating
Ductwork
Grilles, Registers and Ceiling Diffusers
J!Vdp. ... * 91
to ... ..
CARL W. WAMPLER
,• �. 111 U
l'
17 SECTION 15010
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all materials and
labor as required for the installation of a plumbing system and heating and air conditioning system,
all as shown on the drawings, as herein specified, or both.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations of the General Conditions, Supplementary
Conditions, and General Requirements for work required under this section.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
B. This Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of all submittal data covering proposed equipment to the
Architect for approval prior to installation. All equipment shall be submitted atone time in abound
folder with an index of submittal.
1.4 REGULATIONS
A. All work shall be done in strict accordanceand compliance with State and Local Laws, together with
regulations of the particular Utility Companies concerned.
B. Obtain permits as required by the local authorities.
1.5 DRAWINGS
A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. Each Contractor shall check these
drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or
omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor
with any missing portions of the drawings and/or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of
sheets or pages of the Contract Documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work
Lj required by the complete Contract.
B. The plans accompanying these specifications are intended to show the general arrangement and the
extent of the work contemplated. The exact location amid arrangement of all parts shall be
determined after equipment has been approved by time Architect and as directed by the Architect.
All materials or labor necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these
specifications shall be furnished by each Contractor without additional charge as if called for in these
specifications or shown on the plans.
C. Should the particular equipment which any bidderproposes to install require other space conditions,
supports or clearances other than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such items
with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary because of failure
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-1
to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the
Contractor's) own expense.
D. This Contractor shall thoroughly lay out all his work and check all conditions to insure that the work
as shown on the Drawings can be installed without modifications. No material shall be fabricated
or delivered to the job until these conditions have been determined.
E. The Owner or Owner's Representative reserves the right to make changes during constriction, if
required, and no allowances will be made for prefabricated material or on job materials which can
not be used due to actual conditions.
1.6 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
A. Where manufacturer's names are mentioned in these specifications, it has been done, in most cases,
in order to establish a standard. The products of others than the particular manufacturers mentioned
will be acceptable, if of suitable type and construction, but any substitution must be of quality as
good as, or better than, the named article.
B. If the Contractor elects to substitute other equipment or materials for that specifiedby name, lie shall
be fully responsible for all coordination with other trades involved. Any expense incurred because
of modifications to accommodate larger sizes, larger electrical service, fuel piping requirements
resulting from such substitution shall be borne by the Contractor substituting other equipment.
C. Upon being awarded the Contract for the work under one of the following sections, the Contractor
shall, within thirty (30) days, submit for approval a complete list of the materials which he proposes
to use. The list shall give the manufacturer's names and designations corresponding to every item
and where submitted materials are different from that specified by name, the submission shall be
accompanied by a complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data and drawings,
necessary to give full and complete details for the completed installation.
D. Any item on this list which is rejected because of unsuitability or interior quality, must be replaced
by an acceptable item within two (2) weeks following notification of the Contractor of such
rejection. If no satisfactory material is submitted within two (2) weeks, then the Architect reserves
the right to notify the Contractor as to the type and make of materials he will be required to furnish.
Six (6) copies of the material and the equipment list shall be furnished by the Contractor in neat and
firmly bound brochures for approval.
1.7 PRECEDENCE
A. The work covered in this section shall have precedence over each other in accordance with the
following sequence:
1. Soil and waste piping
2. Duct work
3. Cold and hot water piping
4. Electric wiring
1.8 COOPERATION
A. Each contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor and all other contractors to properly
coordinate their work, to avoid interference and delays, and arrange all parts of the work so as to
harnionize in service and appearance with all other parts.
I
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-2
1.9 INTERFERENCES
A. The plans are generally diagrammatic and the Contractor must harmonize the work of the different
trades so that interference between piping, equipment, architectural and structural work will be
avoided. All necessary offsets in piping, fittings, etc., required to properly install the work must be
kept as close as possible to walls, ceiling, colunuis, etc., so as to take up the minimum amount of
space, and all offsets, fittings, etc., required to accomplish it must be furnislied and installed by the
contractor without additional cost to the Owner.
B. Exact locations of mechanical and electrical outlets or equipment may be varied a reasonable amount
by die Architect before installation without additional cost to the Owner.
C. All equipment and controls shall be so located and arranged that all puts will be available for proper
maintenance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Materials shall be new and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from any defects.
Materials and equipment for which the Underwriters' Laboratories have established as standard, shall
be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and shall bear their label.
B. Each Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to the job and shall be
responsible for the storage and protection of same. This will be provided until final acceptance of
the job.
C. Each Contractor shall provide protection against weather, so as to maintain all materials and
equipment free from injury and damage. All new work likely to be damaged shall be covered during
the day and at die end of each day.
D. Each Contractor will furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools, appurtenances and all labor
required for the safe and expeditious execution of this contract.
E. The workmansluip shall be in all respects, the highest grade and all construction in accordance with
the best practice of the trade.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SOUND ISOLATION
A. To prevent sound transmission and vibration, all operating equipment shall be isolated from the
building construction by means of mountings designed to obtain the highest efficiency of sound
isolation. Isolator sizes and methods of installation shall be in accordancewith the recommendations
of Chapter 47 of the 2003 ASHRAE Handbook "HVAC Applications."
3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of these specifications shall furnish and install
all foundations and supports required by equipment included in his work.
B. .All piping, both vertical and horizontal, shall be supported at sufficient close intervals to keep its
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-3
alignment, prevent sagging and to prevent pipe from being supported by equipment or equipment
comiections.
C. Vertical pipes shall be supported from floor with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and adequately
support their weight. Vertical copper tubing, 1-1/4" and smaller shall be supported at 3' intervals
and at the base of pipe risers, where required for proper support. Hangers shall be manufactured by
Kindorff, Unistrut, Elcen or equal. Where multiple pipes are indicated, they may be supported on
a continuous hanger. All hangers must meet the Architect's approval. Use of perforated straps will
not be pernutted.
D. All horizontal pipes suspended with structure above shall be supported by hanger rods of the
following size:
1. Pipes up to and including 2" 3/8" rods
2. 2-1/2" and 3" pipe 1/2" rods
3. 4" and 5" pipe 5/8" rods
4. 6" pipe 3/4" rods
E. Wherepipes are supported from overhead concrete construction, the hangerrods shall be provided
as detailed on the plans.
F. Soil pipe shall be supported at all turns and at intervals not to exceed 5' on centers on straight runs.
The following table gives maximum hanger spacing for copper and steel lines but hangers shall be
more closely spaced where necessary:
SIZE OF LINE
HANGER SPACING
3/4" and smaller
5'
1"
6'
1-1/4"
7'
1-1/2"
8'
2" to 4"
10,
Larger than 4"
12'
G. If pipes of different Contractors can be racked on the same supporting structure, each Contractor
shall cooperate with the other involved to properly locate the supporting members and shall furnish
a proportionate share of the labor and materials involved in the installation.
3.3 FLASHING
A. Vent pipes shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with 4 lb. sheet lead. Flaslungs shall
extend not less than eight inches (8") from the vent pipes in all directions, shall be extended up the
vent pipes a minimum of six inches (6") at which point threaded standard cast-iron or malleable -iron
recess roof couplings shall be installed to form counter -flashing or rain guards. Flashings in
connection with cast-iron pipe vents shall be turned down into the pipes or hubs. Roof drains shall
be flashed as detailed on the drawings. Flaslungs in metal roofs shall be made with Dektite flashings
or approved equal.
3.4 FIRE PARTITIONS
A. Any penetrations through a fire wall or floor shall have the ancillar space sealed with a fire retardant
material such as Link -Seal or equal. Fire and smoke dampers shall be installed where required or
as shown on the drawings.
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-4
f
3.5 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION OF PIPES
ir
A. Swing joints, turns, expansion loops, or long offsets, shall be provided wherever shown on the
drawings, and where necessary to allow for the expansion of piping within the building. Broken
pipes or Fittings due to rigid comiection shall be removed and replaced at die Contractor's expense.
Anchors shall be installed where shown or required to control expansion of piping system. Anchors
shall be of the clamp type securely fastened to the building structure.
3.6 UNIONS
A. Unions shall not be placed in any pipe in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of
the building unless shown on drawings or specified. Unions shall be installed on both sides of all
valves, regulators, check valves, traps, etc., so that such equipment may be readily disconnected.
Where copper pipe joins iron or steel pipe, an insulation union using a "Bakelite" insulator shall be
used.
3.7 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Where exTosed to view, pipes insulated or bare, passing through floors, walls, or ceilings, shall be
filled with near, heavy spun or stamped steel escutcheons, firmly secured to the pipes. Escutcheons
shall be of sufficient outside diameter to surround both the pipe and the sleeves. The sleeve shall
have a nickel plated finish, fabricated in one piece and shall be firmly anchored in space. "Snap -on"
type escutcheons will not be permitted.
3.8 PAINTING
A. No painting will be required under this section.
3.9 TESTING
A. This contractor shall test all plumbing lines and equipment as described under "Testing" section of
these specifications.
3.10 ELECTRICAL
A. Electric motors shall be of the speed, phase and voltage as specified and shall be of type
recommended by motor manufacturer for type of service involved.
B. Tlie Contractor furnishing the motor shall install it. The Contractor shall furnish such motor controls
and starting equipment as specified or as required. The erection and connection of all switches,
starting and control equipment, and the wiring of same, shall be done as required. Conduits from
controllers to motors shall be flexible for not over three feet (T) and shall be attached to the terminal
housing of Line motor. All flexible conduit to motor shall be waterproof type with neoprene jacket.
C. Where autonnatic controls are called for in the Plumbing, Heating and Air Conditioning
specifications, the control instruments, such as motorized damper motors, motorized valves,
thermostats, etc., shall be installed by the Contractor furnishing the controls, but all wiring necessary
shall be clone by the Electrical Contractor. The Contractor furnishing the controls shall furnish a
control wiring diagram to the Electrical Contractor.
D. Starters on air cooled condensing units shall be furnished by die equipment manufacturer. Sta ters
for Heating and Ventilating units shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer.
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-5
1_
3.11 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Each contractor shall provide sleeves for service lines passing through walls, roof or floors, subject
to Architect's approval and/or as shown on the Drawings. Pipes passing through interior wall sleeves
shall be free to move through sleeve. Sleeves exposed to view shall be equipped with cast brass
escutcheons.
B. All sleeves installed in vertical position shall be constructed of standard weight galvanized steel pipe.
All sleeves in horizontal position shall be constructed of standard weight steel or extra heavy cast
iron pipe unless otherwise noted, welded to steel plate in vertical position as detailed on the
drawings. Pipe sleeve diameter shall be a minimum of 2 diameters larger than the outside of pipe
passing through same, and a minimum of 1" larger than pipe plus insulation. Insulation shall pass
thru sleeves.
C. Where pipe extends through exterior walls below grade, oversize pipe sleeves, 2 diameters larger,
made of standard weight steel pipe shall be used, and the annular space between service pipe and
sleeves shall be filled with picked oakum and cement, or lead where required, to make a waterproof
Joint.
D. All sleeves shall be installed flush with finished surfaces and/or as detailed on the Drawings. Copper
pipes passing through steel pipe sleeves shall be installed with rubber insulation between pipe and
sleeves. Isolator insulation shall be similar to Johns -Manville Aeratube.
E. Where any pipe passes through fire walls, smoke walls, and concrete slabs between floors, the
Contractor shall furnish and install fire seals, U.L. listed, type LS, link -seal, as manufactured by
Thunderline Corp., or approved equal. Fire and smoke seals shall be installed in steel pipe sleeve
of correct size for pipe and insulation.
3.12 INSULATING COUPLINGS
A. This Contractor shall furnish and install insulating couplings whereverpiping material changes from
galvanized steel pipe to copper, or from black steel to copper, and where shown on the drawings.
3.13 INSULATION
A. Furnish and install pipe, duct, and equipment insulation as specified under "Insulation" section of
these specifications.
3.14 EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS
A. This Contractor shall make final connections of waste, water, and ventilation systems to items
furnished by others. Furnish all traps, shutoff valves, wiring connections as required for a complete
system.
3.15 LABELS
A. This Contractorshall label all valves with permanent metal name tags, 1-1/2" diameterby 3/16" thick
brass name tags. Each tag shall describe fully the function of each valve by a stamped number on
each side of tag and legend mounted under glass in each Mechanical Room. Each tag shall be
applied to the handle of each valve with a hog ring and wrench.
B. Heating and air conditioning units shall have a permanent metal tag or laminated plastic (min.
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-6 ! I
a�
R thickness .093 inch) attached by riveting to identify as shown on die drawings. Letters on tag shall
be 1/4" to 3/8" in height.
1.16 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES
A. All exposed pipes passing through floors, ceiling, or walls shall be provided with approved nickel
or cliromium plated cast brass ceiling plates securely attached with set screws.
3.17 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION
A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical,
or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings.
3.18 INSTRUCTION MANUALS
A. Furnish four (4) complete bound copies of hnstntction Manuals on all operating equipment to Owner.
Manuals: complete with repair instructions, replacement parts list, and complete operating
instructions and wiring diagrams.
3.19 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. After completion of the work but before final payment is made, the Contractor shall run test over
a sufficient period of time to prove the proper capacity and performance of apparatus, etc., and of
system as a whole to the approval of the Architect and Engineer. See Testing section of the
Specifications.
3.20 GUARANTEE
A. This Contractor shall guarantee the workmanship and material against defects for a period of one (1)
year from the date of acceptance, unless specified otherwise in other sections of this specification.
END OF SECTION
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-7
SECTION 15020
TESTING
PART] GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide specified testing and testing as required by governing authorities.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable, clauses and regulations for other requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit a certificate signed by the job superintendent certifying that all tests have been satisfactorily
completed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
A. All testing required under the contract of the plumbing contractor or heating and ventilating and air
conditioning contractor shall be approved by the Engineer before acceptance. Provide the necessary
valves for cutting off existing work not to be tested.
B. The contractor shall perform the various tests as specified and as required by State and Local
Authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests.
C. Any leaks or defective material found shall be repaired and replaced, and tests shall be repeated until
no further leaks or defects are indicated.
D. Drainage System: The entire drainage, roof drainage, and venting system shall have all necessary
openings plugged to permit the entire system to be filled with water to the level of the highest vent
stack without showing a drop of greater tliin four inches (4"). Where a portion of the system is to
be tested, the test shall be conducted in the same manner as described for the entire system, except
that a vertical stack ten feet (10') above the highest horizontal line to be tested may be installed and
filled with water to maintain sufficient pressure, or a pump may be used to supply the required
pressure. The pressure shall be maintained for four (4) hours.
E. All Domestic Hot and Cold Water System: Upon completion of any part of the roughing -in and
setting of fixtures, the entire hot and cold water piping system shall be tested at a hydrostatic
pressure of not less than 100 lbs. per square inch gauge, stand proof tight at this pressure for not less
than eight (8) hours. Each particular part of the hot and cold water system shall be tested as above
specified.
TESTING 15020-1
F. Gas Piping: All gas piping shall be tested under a pressure of 15" of mercury air pressure for a
period of twenty-four (24) hours and be proof tight.
G. Air Balancing: All supply acid return air registers shall be balanced by the Contractor to supply
CFM shown, and results of all tests, together with type of equipment used, shall be submitted to the
Architect's office at completion of the job, and if the Architect deems it necessary, this Contractor
shall perform such tests as may be necessary to illustrate to the satisfaction of the Architect that
equipment installed performs properly.
H. All heating and air conditioning systems shall be tested for proper operation both in the lieating
season and cooling season.
END OF SECTION
TESTING 15020-2
SECTION 15060
PIPING
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This contract shall include the furnishing and installation of all labor and material necessary to
complete all plumbing and gas fitting as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING GENERALLY
A. Type of piping for the various systems shall be as specified under specific headings.
B. Pipe ends shall be square cut. Ends of pipes shall be reamed and shall be wiped clean to remove
cuttings. Before installation, pipe shall be stood on end and rapped sharply to remove cuttings and
other foreign material from interior. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned inside and .outside.
C. Screwed joints shall be made with best linseed oil and graphite or "Jointite" used on male threads
only. Omil compound on two (2) end starting threads.
D. Pipe shall be accurately cut to fit. Bending or springing of pipe will not be permitted.
E. The various service pipes, valves, fittings, etc., running parallel with each other and near together
shall be in line with each other and shall be kept a sufficient distance from each other and other
work, to permit not less than 1/2" between finished coverings on the different services.
F. No unions are to be placed in any pipe in a location which will be inaccessible after cornpletion of
the building unless so shown on drawings or specified. Unions must be installed on each side of all
special vah=es, regulators, etc., and one (1) side of all check valves, thermostatic traps, and at all
pieces of equipment such as pumps, condensers, tanks, etc., so that such equipment may be readily
discomiected.
G. Each Contractor shall furnish all foundations, structural or pipe supports indicated or called for
specifically, or that may be required to support his particular equipment and material, unless hangers
are definitely indicated as being furnished by others. All horizontal nuns of piping slrall be securely
supported by pipe hangers spaced not more than 10' apart, and closer when necessary to prevent
sagging. Soil pipe slrall be supported every 5.
PIPING 15060-1
H. Perforated strap hangers will not be allowed for any part of hangers.
I. Swing .joints, offsets, and anchors shall be provided in piping where required to provide for and
control expansion or contraction of pipe.
All piping, except waste piping, shall be installed above finished first floor slab, unless otherwise
noted on the Drawings.
2.2 EQUAL MATERIALS CONSIDERATION
A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical,
or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Locations for various kinds of pipe materials shall be in accordance with the schedule following:
1. Plastic DWV pipe and fittings:
a. Sanitary drainage piping unless designated otherwise.
b. Aboveground vent and drainage piping.
2. Type L hard drawn copper with brass solder fittings:
a. Aboveground domestic water piping within the building 4" and smaller in size.
b. Drainage pipe where shown on the drawings.
3.. Type K hard drawn copper with brass solder fittings:
a. Condensate piping from refrigerant cooling coil to floor drain, or waste line.
4. Standard weight black steel pipe, Schedule 40, with screwed malleable fittings:
a. Aboveground gas piping within building.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COPPER WATER PIPING
A. Pipe and tubing shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the Contractor
and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken the
structural portions of the building. Piping aboveground shall be run parallel with the lines of the
building unless otherwise shown or noted on the drawings. Branches from service lines may be
taken off top of main, bottom of main, or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be
required by structural or installation conditions. Service pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a
sufficient distance from other work and not less than 1/2" betweenfmished covering on the different
services. No water piping shall be buried in floors unless specifically indicated on the drawings or
approved. Changes in sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. The use of long screws and
bushing will not be permitted. Where contractor connects copper to galvanized steel piping or hot
water heaters, furnish and install insulating couplings.
B. Drains indicated on the drawings in connection with the water distribution system shall be 1/2" brass
plugs. Additional drains shall be installed at low points on the hot-water and coId-water piping, and
all piping shall grade down to the drains.
C. Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction or tubing. Horizontal runs of
tubing over 50' in length shall be anchored to the wall or to the supporting construction about
midway on the run to force expansion, evenly divided, toward the ends.
t
PIPING 15060-2�.
-' D. Air chambers shall be provided on both hot and cold supplies near each faucet or control valve. as
applicable, and where not definitely shown on the drawings shall consist of a 12" length of tubing
of the same diameter as the branch supply, fitted with a cap.
E. Tubing shall be cut square, and burrs shall be removed. Both inside of fittings and outside of tubing
shall be well cleaned with steel wool before sweating. Care shall be taken to prevent annealing of
Fittings and tubing when making connections. All joints shall be made with fittings. Joints for
aboveground soldered fittings shall be made with a non -corrosive paste flux and solid string silver
solder, and all underground.joints shall be nhade with silfos only. Cored solder will not be pennitted.
Threaded swing joints shall be provided on all branch connections to mains and risers to provide for
expansion and contraction of tubing. 95-5 solder shall be used to make joints extending to fixture
only.
3.2 SANITARY PIPING
A. Horizontal soil and waste pipes shall be given a grade of 1/4" per foot where possible, but in no case
less than 1/8" per foot. All main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be extended full size to and
above the roof lines as vents, except where otherwise specifically indicated. Where practicable, two
or more vent pipes shall be connected together and extended as one pipe through the roof. Vent
pipes in roof spaces shall be run as close a possible to the under side of the roof, with horizontal
piping pitched down to stacks without forming traps in pipes, using fittings as required. Vertical
vent pipes may be connected into one (1) main vent riser above vented fixtures. Where circuit vent
or wet vent from any fixture is connected to a vent line serving other fixtures, the connection shall
be at least three feet (T) above the floor on which the fixtures are located to prevent the use of any
vent line as a waste. Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two (2) or more fixtures
shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted. Branch connections
to exterior downspouts shall terminate three inches (3 ") above finished grade. The cast-iron
hub -and -spigot or no hub pipe inside of buildings shall be extended six inches (6") above ground
where the lowest floor is self-supporting.. This Contractor shall connect waste line from building to
manhole as shown on the drawings.
B. Changes in pipe size on waste, soil, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings of recessed
reducers. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 45 degrees wyes, half wyes,
long -sweep bends unless otherwise directed, except that sanitary tees may be used on vertical stacks,
and short 114 bends of elbows may be used in soil and waste lines where the change in direction of
flow is from the horizontal to the vertical, and on the discharge from water closets.
C. Joints shall be made as recommended by the pipe manufacturer,
3.3 GAS PIPING
A. Gas piping shall be installed parallel with the building and water piping. In finished rooms, piping
shall be run concealed in a vented space. Gas piping shall be run under floor slabs, only as
specif►call}' noted, and then shall be in Orangeburg or PVC airtight vented sleeves with metal fitting
in an approved manner.
B. Joints for steel pipe shall be made with graphite and oil or Huh approved graphite compound applied
to die nnale thread only. After cutting and before threading, all pipe shall be reamed uul shall have
burrs removed. Threads shall be full cut, and not more than three (3) threads on the pipe shall
remain exposed. Caulking of threaded.joints to slop or prevent leaks will not be permitted. Joints
for polyeUhylenepipe shall be made with lheatfusion couplings as reconuuended by the manufacturer.
PIPING 15060-3
C. Make final connection to all items of equipment, as shown and required, using unions surd shut-off
valves in each location.
3.4 DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER AND GAS VALVES AND FITTINGS
A. Valves and fittings for all domestic cold water and hot water services shall be as follows:
Valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be ball valves. Valves 3" and larger shall be butterfly
valves instead.
Gas service stops shall be Crane No. 1228.
Swing check valves 3" and smaller shall be Crane No. 137. Swing checks larger than 3"
shall be Crane No. 14493.
Lift check valves 3" and smaller shall be Crane No. 366E.
Butterfly valves shall be Centerline Series LT or Crane #23 designed for 200 psi differential
pressure bubble tight shut off up to 12" size and 150 psi above 12" size. Valves through
6" shall have a locking lever handle and above 6" shall have a gear operator with a memory
stop. Valves shall be furnished with tapped full lug iron bodies, type 316 s.s. discs, type
304 s.s. stems, EPT or EPDM seats and O'rings.
3.5 PIPE HANGERS AND FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Pipe hangers and fixture supports shall be furnished and set, and the Contractor shall be responsible
for their proper and permanent locations.
B. Horizontal runs of copper tubing shall be supported by approved steel plastic coated hangers spaced
not more than 8' o.c. Horizontal runs of drainage and vent pipes shall be supported by adjustable
expansion pipe hangers having bolted hinged loops and turnbuckles, or an approved equal. Hangers
on drainage and vent pipe shall be spaced not more than 10' o. c. Hanger and collars shall be of size
proportionate to the weight of the pipe supported.
C. Fixtures and equipment shall be supported and fastened in a satisfactory manner. Where secured to
concrete or brickwork walls, they shall be fastened with brass expansion bolts. Expansion bolts shall
be 1/4" brass bolts with 20 threads to the inch and of sufficient length to extend at least 3" into solid
concrete or brickwork, fitted with loose tubing or sleeves or proper length to bring expansion sleeves
in the solid concrete or brick wall. Where secured to tile walls or partitions, they shall be fastened
with 1/4" brass toggle or through bolts. Where through bolts are used, they shall be provided with
plates or washers at back, set so that heads, nuts, and washers will be concealed by plaster. Bolts
and nuts sliall be hexagon, and exposed bolts, nuts, and screw heads shall be provided with
chromium plated brass washers.
D. Copper pipe hangers shall be similar to Grinnell No. 260 with plastic coating for non -insulated water
piping and Grinnell No. 300 for insulated water piping. Drainage and vent pipe hangers shall be
similar to Grinnell No. 590.
E. All hot water supply and returnpiping shall be supported by approved steel hangers, spaced not more
than 8' on centers, equipped with roller pipe supports equal to Fee md Mason, Figure No. 272,
END OF SECTION
PIPING 15060-4
SECTION 15250
INSULATION
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This contract includes furnishing and installing all insulation specified herein.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordancewith Section 01300,
B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be fumislned as part of this project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND DUCT INSULATION
A. All insulation required under the Plumbing contract and Heating and Air Conditioning Contract shall
be equal to and as manufactured by the Knauf Fiber Glass or Johns -Manville, and shall be applied
in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations.
B. Insulation:
1. Water Piping Within Building Lines - Shall be insulated with 1" thick fiber glass pipe
insulation with a factory applied vapor barrier jacket.
2. Overhead Heating and Air Conditioning Sheet Metal Supply and Return Ducts - Shall be
insulated with 3/4 lb. density 2" thick duct wrap with aluminum foil Kraft vapor barrier,
and shall be secured to ductwork with an approved adhesive and be sealed and stapled in
place.
3. Pipe Fittings - Insulate pipe fittings with Manville Zestons according to manufacturer's
recommendation.
4. Contractor at his option may use interior duct liner in lieu of exterior insulation. Duct liner
shall be 1.5 lb., l" thick with neoprene spray one side. All transverse joints shall be
protected against air erosion by properly sealing all edges and securing with sheet metal
clips. Duct liner shall be secured with mastic, 100% coverage and clips 18" on center.
C. Where insulation is to be applied inside of ducts, exterior insulation will not be required.
D. Where insulation occurs inside of ducts, allowance shall be made in sheet metal ductwork to
acconnntodate a total thickness of two inches.
E. Condensate Lines - Shall be insulated with l " thick fiber glass pipe insulation with a factory applied
all senice_jacket with self sealing lap.
INSULATION
15250-1
2.2 EQUAL MATERIALS CONSIDERATION
A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical,
or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings.
2.3 SMOKE AND FLAME SPREAD
A. All duct and pipe insulation shall have a flame spread no greater than 25 and a smoke developed
rating no greater than 50.
B. Canvas jacket shall have a flame spread rating not in excess of 50.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSULATION
A. All insulation shall be applied to clean surfaces and in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
INSULATION
SECTION 15400
H .
PLUMBING
PART GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This contract will include the furnishings and installation of all labor and material necessary to
complete all plumbing and gas fittings as shown on the drawings and as herein specified as follows:
I. Water supply and service.
2. System of sanitary drainage, venting and connection to all fixtures as shown on the
j - drawings.
3. Gas supply system.
4. Furnishing and installation of all fixtures as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
w A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittals required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION
is
A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical,
or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings.
TM 2.2 FIXTURES
A. Furnish and install all fixtures and products in accordance with fixture schedule as shown on the
drawings and as listed in Fixture Schedule or the approved equal of other manufacturer. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the quantity of all fixtures, drains, valves, etc., as shown, as
herein specified or as required to make his installation complete. Lavatory and sink ]lot and cold
water supplies shall be provided with chromium plated wall stops and chromium plated supplies.
Immediately upon award of the contract, this Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval,
a brochure giving a complete description of all fixtures, equipment and fittings which lie proposes
to use. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on the drawings. All plumbing fixtures, floor drains, etc.,
shall be equipped with tamperproof screws.
B. Contractor shall connect all owner furnished equipment and furnish all traps and shutoff valves.
li
_, PLUMBING 15400-1
1_
2.3 TRAPS
A. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections at the drainage system shall be equipped
with a trap. Traps installed on hub -and -spigot pipe shall be extra -heavy cast-iron. Traps installed
on threaded pipe shall be recess drainage pattern. All basement floor drains shall be equipped with
a deep seal trap. On -fit "P" traps at each floor drain in shop areas that feed into sandtrap.
2.4 CLEANOUTS
A. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe, except that cleanout plugs larger than 4" will not be
required. Cleanouts and access covers at finished walls and exteriorwalls shall be Wade Co. 8570-R
N.B. cover and at finished floors shall be Wade Co. 8550-5 with Wade No 8300-S #2, N.B. cover,
or the approved equal. Omit access covers for ceanouts in other locations. All wall covers shall
be cadmium plated, and all floor ceanouts shall be polished nickel bronze flush with finish floor.
Cleanouts exterior to the building shall be Wade Co. 7100-X with 9" x 9" access cover set flush with
finish grade in 16" x 16" concrete pad, or as detailed on the drawings.
2.5 ACCESS DOORS
A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings, a Model Z-1376, Zurn stainless steel access door,
size as noted on the drawings, or specified elsewhere. Install gate valves behind doors as shown.
Doors shall be provided with hexed locks, all keyed alike.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Cross Connections and Interconnections: No plumbing fixtures, device or piping shall be installed
which will provide a cross connection or interconnection between a distributing supply for drinking
or domestic purposes and a polluted supply such as a drainage system of a soil or waste into the
water supply system.
B. The Contractor shall provide all necessary material and labor to connect to the Plumbing System all
fixtures and equipment shown on the drawings havingplumbing connections and which are furnished
and installed by others or are specified in other sections of these specifications.
C. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work
and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, valves, and accessories as
may be required to meet such conditions. Where pipes extend through concrete members, this
Contractor shall core all such members and slabs, unless sleeves have been provided. Chipping
concrete will not be allowed, and if any coring of the concrete members is necessary, this contractor
shall call it to the Architect's attention before doing same.
D. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall
be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury. At the
completion of the work the fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned.
3.2 STERILIZATION
A. The entire cold water piping system shall be thoroughly sterilized with a solution containing not less
than fifty (50) parts per million (ppm) of available chlorine or sodium hypochlorite solution and shall
be introduced into the system in a manner approved by the Architect. The sterilizing solution shall
PLUMBING 15400-2
be allowed to remain in the system for a period of 24 hours, during which time all valves and faucets
shall be opened and closed several times. All residual of 4 ppm sliall be produced in all parts of the
system at the end of the 24 hour period. After sterilizing, the solution sliall be fluslied from the
N system with cic�ui water until die residual of chlorine content is not greater than .02 ppm unless
otherwise noted.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING 15400-3
SECTION 15650
AIR CONDITIONING
PARTI GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Contractor shall furnish and install where shown on the drawings, complete Summer -Winter, indoor
and outdoor mounted air conditioning systems as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project.
1.4 REBATES AND INCENTIVES
A. Any and all rebates or incentives offered by utility companies or equipment manufacturers shall go
directly to the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. All units shall have capacities and efficiency ratings as scheduled.
2.2 SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings a Trane combination electricheat pump blower and
DX coil assembly. Unit shall be furnished with filter, evaporator, blower motor and electric heater
of size and capacity as shown on the drawings.
B. Unit shall be complete package unit with all necessary controls, relays, contractors, etc., required for
safety and proper operation. Electric heating section shall be of size and capacity as shown on the
drawings.
C. Unit shall have adjustable speed direct drive blower, filter rack and throwaway filters. Furnish 100%
spare filters. Unit shall set on V thick cork.
D. Refrigeration system shall be a pad mounted air cooled condenser heat pump unit of size and
capacity as shown on the drawings. Unit shall be voltage and phase as shown on the drawings.
Mount unit on roof on concrete slab as indicated on the drawings. Runners shall spa►i across a
minimum of 2 roof joists. Compressor shall be equipped with a heater.
E. Unit shall be tested and rated in accordance -with ARI Standard 210-64. Provide outdoor thermostats
AIR CONDITIONING 15650-1
as required for proper and safe operation.
2.3 PACKAGE TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONERS
A. This Contractor shall furnish and install Friedrich Room Air Conditioning Units, or equal, as shown
and scheduled on the drawings.
B. Each unit shall have electric resistance heat, electronic temperature limiting, and an internal
condensate removal system.
2.4 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
A. Temperature controls shall be the sole responsibility of the manufacturer of the mechanical
equipment and will be furnished and installed by this Contractor. All wiring shall be by the
Electrical Contractor.
B. Basic Unit Control System
1. Units shall be furnished with a heating -cooling thermostat with locking covers and sub -base
switches as shown on the drawings.
2. Each unit shall be equipped with a positive fan start device on a call for heat.
3. The condensing units shall be furnished with time off cycle devices to prevent short cycling
of the compressors. They shall also have high- low pressure cutouts, 3 leg overload
protection and internal thermostats in the compressor to limit winding and discharge
temperature to safe limits.
4. Refrigerant control shall be by thermostatic expansion valves.
5. In addition to the above, contactors, relays and safety, devices necessary for a complete
operational system shall be furnished.
2.5 WARRANTIES
A. All heating and air conditioning equipment shall have one year warranty on all parts and labor, and
five years on compressors.
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 ADJUSTMENT
A. Upon completion of work the Contractor shall balance the system so that the quantity and proper
velocity of air is delivered at each outlet uniformly as indicated on the drawings to within ten percent
(10%). Necessary adjustment shall be made to the system to produce these quantities of air, and to
eliminate any obiectional drafts or noise which might exist.
B. When balancing has been completed, the Contractor shall provide the Architect with all necessary
data, readings, and velocities at each outlet to substantiate that the systems are balanced and
providing the necessary quantities of air as shown on the drawings.
C. If the Architect deems it necessary, the Contractor shall rebalance air units and correct conditions
to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner.
END OF SECTION
AIR CONDITIONING 15650-2
SECTION 15804
VENTILATING
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications shall include the furnishing of all labor and
materials as required for the installation of a complete ventilating system and its related work.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. Furnish and install an exhaust system all as shown on the drawings.
B. Provide exhaust ducts, properly flashed and waterproofed as shown.
C. All inline fans shall be Cook, Greenheck, Acme, or approved equal, of size and capacity as shown
on the drawings. Fan housing shall have a baked powder painted finish. All units shall be equipped
with a backdraft damper, and all exhaust ducts shall extend to the outside, properly flashed and
waterproofed.
D. All roof -mounted exhaust fans shall be aluminum construction as manufactured by Greenlneck, Cook,
Acme, or approved equal. Fans shall be complete with bird screens, disconnect switches, roof curbs,
and backdraft dampers. Roof curbs shall be fabricated to accommodate the roof pitch as shown on
the architectural drawings.
E. Fan shaft bearings, for belt drive fans, shall be heavy duty regreaseable ball type in cast iron
housings.
2.2 KITCHEN HOOD
A. This Contractor shall furnish and install a cooking equipment hood of quality and size as indicated
on the attached drawing. The hood shall be of full caption type and shall replace approximately 90%
of the exhausted air with fresh outside air through registers with opposed blade balancing dampers.
The make-up air shall be supplied into the kitchen through down discharge registers in a manner as
not to interfere with the cooking operations below the hood. The hood shall be constructed of 18
gauge, type 304 stainless steel, welded, ground and polished to the original fuiish of the metal.
VENTILATING
15804-1
Hoods shall have enclosure panels to extend from the hood to the ceiling with the same finish as the
hood.
B. Hood lights shall be U.L. approved, vaporproof, fluorescent, prewired to a switch, flush -mounted on
the face of the hood.
C. The hood construction shall conform with NFPA Standard No. 96 and bear the National Sanitation
Foundation seal of approval.
D. The exhaust fan shall be of the belt -driven vertical discharge type. Tlie lnousiing shall be constructed
of heavy gauge aluminum. The fan wheel and cone shall be aluminum and of the high-performance,
centrifugal blower type, statically and dynamically balanced. The exhaust fan shall be constricted
so as to include a built-in grease drain. Motor and drives shall be isolated from the exhaust
airstream and shall be located hi a chamber cooled by air brought in through a tube from a location
free of discharge contaminates. The entire drive assembly and wheel as a unit shall be serviceable
and removable through the support structure without dismantling the fan housing. The wheel shaft
shall be mounted in heavy duty regreaseable ball bearings in cast iron housings and shall be coated
with a petroleum base corrosion inhibitor. Drives shall be sized for 165%) of driven horsepower.
Motor pulleys shall be of the adjustable type for final system balancing made of cast iron and be
keyed to motor and wheel shafts. The entire drive assembly shall be mounted on rubber vibration
isolators. The exhaust fan assembly shall also include a rigid birdscreen mounted within the
discharge perimeter and a thermal barrier insulating the wheel compartment from the drive
compartment. The fan shall be AMCA approved for sound and air performance and also shall be
U.L. listed.
E. The entire fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration isolators to prevent noise
transmission. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy duty, ball bearing type, carefully
matched to the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. The fan shaft
shall be ground and polished steel mounted in heavy duty, sealed ball bearings. Bearings shall be
selected for a minimum average life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating
speeds. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined, cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the
wheel and motor shafts. Motor sheaves shall be adjustable for final system balancing. Drives shall
be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower.
F. Fan shall be of statically and dynamically balanced to ensure smooth, vibration free operation.
G. The fan controls shall be mounted on the face of the hood. Fan switch shall have a pilot light and
fans shall be interlocked. The temperature control system shall be used for building exhaust air
replacement by maintaining a constant discharge temperature of supply air. The burner is modulated
to compensate for outdoor temperature changes by an electronic discharge temperature element
mounted in the discharge air stream. The heater/blower operation is controlled by a manual
"Summer-off/Winter" selector switch and exhaust fan interlock.
2.3 HOOD FIRE PROTECTION
A. This Contractor shall furnish and install for the kitchen hood a liquid chemical system, providing
complete fire protection of duct, plenum and surface equipment. Installation to be in compliance
with manufacturer's U.L. listing as Ansul System number R-102. All piping run in hood to be
concealed in a chase. All piping extending up through chases, ducts or plenums shall be fitted with
sleeves, forming grease -tight joint. Provide chase openings for extending piping to surface nozzles.
Chase to be fitted with removable panel for making field ,joints and final connections. Exposed
piping of surface protection nozzles to be Schedule 40 stainless steel pipe with chromeplated elbows.
VENTILATING 15804-2
B. System shall be activated by fusible links connected to automan release. Fit autonnan release with
electric micro switch and wire from switch to a reset relay mounted on side of autonnan release.
Provide fuel supply shut off with electric fuel shut off devices to all cooking appliances and wiring.
At time of installation, an authorized dealer of the liquid chemical system is to complete and certify
the system. The fire protection system shall be connected to the building fire alarm system, where
applicable, to activate an alarm when the system is energized.
PART 3 E)MCUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The esliaust systems shall be installed complete with all ductwork, fans and controls as shown on
the drawings.
B. All roof mounted units shall be mounted on roof curbs and secured by sheetmetal screws.
C. E-xhaust fans shall be controlled by wall mounted switches, interlocked with light switches, or
controlled by temperature sensing devices, all as scheduled on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
VENTILATING 15804-3
SECTION 15940
DUCTWORK
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes die furnishings of all material and
labor as required for the installation of a complete duct system, as shown on the drawings and as
herein specified.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LOW VELOCITY - LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
A. All ductwork shall be of the sizes indicated on the drawings, shall be straight and smooth on the
inside with neatly finished airtight joints. The ducts shall be installed as to be completely free of
vibration. Metal duct slip joints shall be made with an inside radius of not less than the width of
the duct, except that Factory Fabricated Air Turns shall be used where a sharper turn must be made
or where otherwise indicated on the drawings. All takeoffs to registers shall be made with Factory
Fabricated Deflectrols, or approved equal, and all major branches where noted on the plans shall
have sputters with an accessible operating handle and locking device, Young Model No. 917 right
angle gear and No. 1 ceiling regulator, or approved equal.
B. All ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized iron sheets fabricated and installed in accordance
with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for Low Velocity Systems.
C. Air turns shall be as manufactured by Barber -Colman, or approved equal. No job -built turning vanes
will be used on this job. Where insulation is applied inside of ducts, turning vanes shall be installed
inside of insulation.
D. After all ducts are installed, all dirt and debris shall be removed from inside of ducts.
E. Ductwork for round ducts shall conforni to the latest edition ASHRAE guide.
F. All duct construction seam corners and comiections shall be sealed with white "Permagutn Slugs"
as manufactured by Virginia Chemicals, Inc.
G. All dimensions indicated shall be sheet metal dimensions. Allowance shall be made for internal
insulation as it occurs, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
DUCTWORK 15840-1
2.2 ACCESS DOORS 1�
A. Access doors in ductwork shall be 2" smaller in height than duct dimensions and 12" wide and 1
located in accessible locations on both sides of all fire and smoke dampers. Doors in vertical
position shall be equal to Ventlok insulated type, complete with all lunges, hardware and air seal.
Doors in horizontal position shall be job built complete with sash lock, two (2) per side, and rubber
air seal, all as manufactured by Ventlok, or approved equal. IF
2.3 ZONE VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Volume control dampers shall be furnished and installed where shown on the drawings for all air
unit zone ducts with locking operator installed on bottom side of ducts.
B. Dampers shall be the opposed blade type with comer bracing for stiffening as manufactured by
Young Regulator Co., Model No. 817, or approved equal, of size shown on the drawings.
2.4 FIBER DUCTWORK
A. Fiber ductwork will not be used on this job anywhere.
2.5 LOW PRESSURE FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Furnish and install flexible connections of 30 ounce woven glass fabric from discharge and return
openings of equipment to ductwork. The flexible connections shall be of a type that is airtight, equal
to Ventfabrics "Ventglas", and shall be installed in such a manner that the air flow is not restricted
nor the connection leaks air. At least 1" slack shall be allowed in connection to insure that no
vibration is transmitted from fans to ductwork.
B. Fabric connections shall be UL approved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All duct systems shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and shall provide a complete and
working system.
B. Hangers for ductwork shall be galvanized steel straps and/or electro-plated zinc or hot -dipped
galvanized after threading, threaded rods, minimum of 3/8" diameter.
C. Hangers shall be spaced a maximum of 8'-0" on center.
D. When threaded hanger rods are used, bearing plate shall be on channel and/or angle, hot -dipped
galvanized after cutting, and drilling of hanger rod holes.
E. Hanger rods shall be secured to channels and/or angle by galvanized washer, nut, and locket nut.
Hanger rods shall be suspended from super -structure.
DUCTWORK 15840-2
3.2 CLEANING
A. After installation is complete, all equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Filters shall be cleaned
and/or replaced with new. Damaged paint shall be sanded and touclied-up. All damaged insulation
shall be replaced.
END OF SECTION
DUCTWORK 15940-3
SECTION 15970
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A, The work covered by this section of the specification includes the furnishing of all labor and
materials as required for the installation of a complete air diffusing system as shown on the
drawings, and as hereinafter specified. All side wall grilles, supply and returns, shall comply with
NFPA Standard No. 90A.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2A CEILING SUPPLY DIFFUSERS
A. Ceiling supply diffusers shall be as shown on the drawings. All diffusers shall be equipped with
deflectrols and opposed blade volume controls operated from the face of the diffusers.
B. Ceiling diffusers shall be of the removable core type for 1, 2, 3 or 4-way deflection where shown
on the drawings.
2.2 CEILING RETURN AIR GRILLES
A. Ceiling return air grilles shall be all as shown on the drawings.
2.3 CEILING EXHAUST GRILLES
A. Ceiling exhaust grilles shall be all as shown on the drawings.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Side wall supply registers, side wall returns and side wall exhaust grilles shall be clear anodized.
Ceiling supply diffusers shall be baked off-white enamel. Ceiling return air grilles shall be baked
off -while enannel. Ceiling exhaust grilles shall be baked off-white enannel. Door grilles shall be
electroplated brushed bronze. Ceiling transfer grilles shall be baked off-white enamel.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. All supply registers, diffusers, return air and exhaust air grilles shall be equipped with tamperproof
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS 15970-1
hex socket screws, Yum-27 hex head screws, or No. 8 Phillips Type "A" ovallicad screws.
B. This Contractor shall turn over to the Owner a supply of twelve (12) volume control damper
-
operators, twelve (12) hex socket screw wrenches, and twenty-four (24) vertical blade adjustment
wrenches at completion of the job.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All grilles shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers reconmiendations.
END OF SECTION
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS 15870-2 I
May 14. 2007
CONSULTANTS' PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY
The specifications sections to be authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following:
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16051 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
16073 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16140 WIRING DEVICES
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16442 PANELBOARDS
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING
16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16526 SPORTS LIGHTING
By: Michael T. Strahan, P.E.
BSA Consulting Engineers, PLLC
License No. 84881
X
41,
-, 0. MICHAEL T. STRAHAN.• �
�0 84881 �Ar
•lcENS ,
all(
9 2007 Chapman Hervey Architects, Im.
Uruulhoriud Duplication ptohibital DIVISION 16 TABLE OF CONTENTS
3
3
4
5
3
3
5
4
3
4
5
6
7
6
Novemhcr 2h.2006
SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I . Electrical equipment coordination and installation.
2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.
3. Sleeve seals.
4. Common electrical installation requirements.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test Equipment Suitability and Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS, "Suitability of Test Equipment"
and "Test Instrument Calibration."
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
I . To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are
indicated.
2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other
installations.
3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions
and of the working and access space of other equipment.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast -in -place concrete, masonry
walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or
otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and
Frames."
D. Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so equipment and systems
that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful interoperability.
02006 Chapman Harvey Ardmws, Inc.
Unawhori=ea Duplication prmrihitea BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-1
November N, 2006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B. Cast -Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in
Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems."
2.2 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve
and raceway or cable.
I. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include
type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
2. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion -resistant coating of length required to
secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall -
mounting items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and
install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these
requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both
electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future
disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
E. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate
concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire -rated floor and wall assemblies.
B. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in
Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems."
C 2006 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc.
Unauthorized Duplication prohibited BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-2
November 28, 2006
C. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core -drilled holes or formed openings
are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
D. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies unless
openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.
E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless
sleeve seal is to be installed.
H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint
compound for gypsum board assemblies.
1. Interior Penetrations of Non -Fire -Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and
raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
J. Fire -Rated -Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with
firestop materials. Comply with Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems."
K. Roof -Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot -type
flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
L. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
Select si3e-.:e size to allow for i-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
M. Underground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow
for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.3 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original
fire -resistance rating of assembly. Frrestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in
Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems."
END OF SECTION 16050
V 2006 Chapman liamey Architects, Inc.
Unauthorized Uuplicanoo probibdcd BASIC ELECTIUCAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-3
November 28, 2WG
SECTION 16051 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves for raceways and cables.
2. Sleeve seals.
3. Grout.
4. Common electrical installation requirements.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B. Cast -Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.
1. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16
inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or
more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
2.2 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve
and raceway or cable.
I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
C. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
i
di 2006 Chapman 11—cy Mchileem Inc.
Unauthorized Duplication prohibited COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 16051-1
Noecrabcr 28, 2M,
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to 6t surface of cable or conduit. Include
type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion -resistant coating of length required to
secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each scaling element.
2.3 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout,
noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute
working time.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall -
mounting items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: if mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and
install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these
requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both
electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future
disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate
concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire -rated floor and wall assemblies.
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core -drilled holes or formed openings
are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies unless
openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.
E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless
indicated otherwise.
C 2006 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc.
Unauthorized Duplication prohibited COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 16051-2
November 28, 2UU6
H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry
F I . Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces
smooth; protect grout while curing.
1. Interior Penetrations of Non -Fire -Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and
raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with
requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
J. Fire -Rated -Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with
firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop
Systems."
K. Roof -Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot -type
flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
L. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
M. Underground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for I -inch
annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.3 SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material
and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in
annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause
sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to
restore original fire -resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements
are specified in Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems."
END OF SECTION 16051
C%200f Chapman Harvey Archiwas, Inc.
Ummaborized Duplication prohibited
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
16051-3
Nmcmbc, 28, 2006
SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality -control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency. acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable
Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; I-5/8 inches
wide and 1/I6 inch thick.
7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned -copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper
ferrules; I-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors
and other items connected.
4? 2006 Chapman Hamy Amhilecis, Inc.
Unauthorized Duplication prohibited GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-1
No-mbe, 26, 2006
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure -type, with at least
two bolts.
I . Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic -welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials
being joined and installation conditions.
2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet in diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install barecopper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Bury at
least 24 inches below grade.
C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green -colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders
with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating
bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.
D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required
by NFPA 70:
I. Feeders and branch circuits.
2. Lighting circuits.
3. Receptacle circuits.
4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
6. Flexible raceway runs.
7. Armored and metal -clad cable runs.
8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in
the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.
B. Metal and Concrete Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a
separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with
branch -circuit conductors.
4 2006 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc.
Unauthorized Duplication prohibited GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-2
N—mber 28.2006
I
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or
required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain,
impact, or damage.
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops arc 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise
indicated.
I. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise
indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one -rod length from each
other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the
service grounding electrode conductor.
C. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in
Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures," and shall be at least 12 inches deep, with
cover.
1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated. Install at the
ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or
floor.
D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except
where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any
adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration
is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic -welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect -type connection is
required, rise a bolted clamp.
E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to
building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp
connector or by bolting a lug -type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the
flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street
side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided -type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.
Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.
F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated
fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Installbonding jumper to bond across flexible duct
connections to achieve continuity.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
C, 2006 Chapman Harvey Arehoccis, Inc.
Unaothoracd Uuplicanon prohibhcd GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-3
November 28, 20ob
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized,
test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground -resistance level is
specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells.
a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and
without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and
without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall -of -potential method according to IEEE 81.
B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
I . Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s).
5. ohms.
C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly
and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 16060
i
02006 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc.
Unauthorized Duplication prohibited GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-4
i
t
Novcmbcr 28, 200b
SECTION 16073 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis
by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and
its contents.
C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment
and connected systems and components.
D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or
imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Equipment supports.
C. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS Dl.1/DLIM, "Structural Welding Code -
Steel."
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C: 2006 Chapin.,, Hurvcp AIC1111COS. Inc.
Unaudwrind Duplication prohibn d HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
16073-1
Novcmhcr 28, 2006 --
i
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA4, factory -fabricated components for field
assembly.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
C. ERICO Intemational Corporation.
d. GS Metals Corp.
C. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
g. Wesanco, Inc.
2. Metallic Coatings: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied
according to MFMA-4.
4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.
S. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types
and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body
and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non -armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits.
Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual
conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and
bars; black and galvanized.
F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports
to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete,
steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1) Hilti Inc.
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
4) Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit,
O 2006 Chapman Harvey Archilects, Inc. I_
Unaudtorimd Duplication prohibited HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16073-2
I Nmcmbcr 2t, 2006
l
2. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type, zine-coated steel, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported
loads and building materials in which used.
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc,
3) Hilti Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5) MKT Fastening, LLC,
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable -iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18;
complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached
structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural -steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of
supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and
plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA I and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment
and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT,
IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slottedsupport system,
sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load
limits.
I . Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two -bolt conduit clamps.
D. Spring -steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for I- 1/2-inch and
smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for
fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
4', 20% Choprnau MIcy ArchiluB. Inc_
UnnuOarind Uuplicaiaa prohibmd HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16073-3
N—cmbcr 29, 2006
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA I and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC; may be
supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be
adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design
load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface -Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical
items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise
indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder -actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers
and nuts may be used in existing standard -weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use
for anchorage to lightweight -aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts.
7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and
other devices on slotted -channel racks attached to substrate.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site -fabricated
metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to
support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/DLIM.
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than
supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive -strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement
requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
f 2006 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc.
Unauthorized Duplication prohibited HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16073-4
Novcnthcr 26, 20U6
2 Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after
erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1
requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces.
I . Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting
of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -repair
paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 16073
C 2006 ChopHarvey Archtt .[,, Inc.
Unaothoricca Duplication prohihncd HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16073-5
No—niv, U. 2006
SECTION 16075 -ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART] -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I . Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.
2. Warning labels and signs.
3. Equipment identification labels.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A]3.1.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract
Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual,
and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout
Project.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL -CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Marker Tape: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine
printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
2.2 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self -Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure -sensitive adhesive labels, configured for
display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Baked -Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors,
legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10
inches.
C 200h Chapman Harvey Arcimccls, Inc.
Unaulboriud Duplication prohibhul ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16075-1
November 28. 2006
D. Metal -Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather -resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose -acetate butyrate
signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized -steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.
1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.
E. Fasteners for Signs: Self -tapping, stainless -steel screws or stainless -steel machine screws with nuts and flat
and lock washers.
F. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
i. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT
HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or
equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and
ultraviolet -resistant seal for label.
B. Self -Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a
dark -gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor and Cable Identification: Use marker tape to identify field -installed
alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data wiring connections.
I. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and cable pull
points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for
factory -installed connections.
B. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with
29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with black letters on an
orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
I. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including,
but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated,
apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished
spaces.
C. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent
with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect
switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets,
{
C, 2006 Chapman Harvey Arelthecu, Inc.
unam6od-d Duphea8on prohibited ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075-2 �_
Nowmhcr 2n, 2ctl16
and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and
alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
I. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high
label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label, drilled for screw
attachment.
C. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of' labels and legend to those appropriate for viewing
from the floor.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
b. Transformers.
C. Motor -control centers.
d. Disconnect switches.
e. Enclosed circuit breakers.
f. Push-button stations.
g. Contactors.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after compleing finish work.
D. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods
recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Color -Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for
ungrounded service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors.
1. Color shall be factory applied.
2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
C. Phase C: Blue.
3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Brown.
b. Phase B: Orange.
C. Phase C: Yellow.
END OF SECTION 16075
a
C 2006 Chapman Horvcy Archuccls, Inc.
Unautlmnzcd Duphcahwl prohi6dcd ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16075-3
N—mbcr U. 2006
SECTION 16145 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:
1. Time switches.
2. Outdoor photoelectric switches.
3. Lighting contactors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality -control test reports.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TIME SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Intermatic, Inc.
2. Lightolier Controls; a Genlyte Company.
3. Square D; Schneider Electric.
4. TORK.
5. Touch -Plate, Inc.
6. Watt Stopper (The).
B. Electronic Time Switches: Electronic, solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display;
complying with UL 917.
1. Contact Configuration: SPST.
2. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac.
3. Program: 8 on -off set points on a 24-hour schedule.
4. Program: 2 on -off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each day of
the week.
5. Programs: 4 channels; each channel shall be individually programmable with 8 on -off set points
on a 24-hour schedule.
8', 2006 Chapman Harvcy Archimns, Inc,
Unauthoracd Duplication ptobibhcd LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
16145-1
November 28.2006
6. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on -off function of a
program on selected channels.
7. Astronomic Time: All channels.
8. Battery Backup: For schedules and time clock.
2.2 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co.
2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Products.
3. GE Industrial Systems; Total Lighting Control.
4. Square D; Schneider Electric.
5. TORK.
6. Touch -Plate, Inc.
7. Watt Stopper (The).
B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination type with nonfused disconnect,
complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
1. Current Rating for Switehiitg. Listing -,or rating consistent with type of load served, including
tungsten filament, inductive, and high -inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic
distortion of normal load current).
2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of
installation.
3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.
4. Provide with control- and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA type
specified for the enclosure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION
A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do
not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
B. When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in
adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than
normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION
A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure -borne
vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory -installed vibration isolators.
3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size
shall be I/2 inch.
G 2006 Chapman Harvey Amhiteets. Inc.
Unauthorized Duplication prohibited LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145-2
I
N-vobet U. 21H)b
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power -limited and nonpower-limited
conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull,
and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification."
1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.
B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
I. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust
and test for compliance with requirements:
2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.
B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.
END OF SECTION 16145
€%2006 Chapman Hmey Ardwccts. Inc.
Unaulhnnnd Duplication prohibited LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
16145-3
Nrmcmbcr 2h. 2006
SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality -control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, ann Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.
C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal -clad cable, Type MC with ground wire.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.
5. Tyco Electronics Corp.
€ 2006 Chopmon Harvey Archireeb. Inc.
Unourhonzed Uuplicouon prohibited CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16120-1
November 28, 2006
B. Description: Factory -fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class
for application and service indicated.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or A►can Stabiloy aluminum for feeders
No. 4 AWG and larger. Note: Aluminum feeders must be submitted to engineer for approval. Solid for
No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING
METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on -Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in
raceway.
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on -Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN,
single conductors in raceway.
H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless -steel, wire -
mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
1. Class I Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
J. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not
deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling
tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips, that will not
damage cables or raceway.
t
b 2006 Chapman Homey Arehimels, Inc.
Unauthorized Duplication prohibited CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120-2 i...
Nomnlb 2h. 2006
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow
surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."
F. Identify and color -code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification."
G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
H. Make splices and taps that arc compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better
mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.
I. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor- at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance
Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and
larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.
a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice
I 1 months after date of Substantial Completion.
b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
C. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and
that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action
taken, and observations after remedial action.
C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
l . Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 16120
C, 2006 Chapmeu H.—y Ardmt. ls, Inc.
Unwhmud Uuphcarimi pmhihned
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16120-3
Numober 2E, 2006
SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B. See Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures" for exterior ductbanks and manholes,
and underground hndholes, boxes, and utility construction.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover enclosures, and
cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. IMC: ANSI C80.6.
C. EMT: ANSI C80.3.
D. FMC: Zinc -coated steel.
E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
F. Fittings for Conduit (including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1;
listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886.
2. Fittings for EMT: Steel, compression type.
C 2006 Chapman Harvey Archilcus. hic.
Unaudwind unphemimn pmhihhed RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16130-1
Numni,cr 26, 2006
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. ENT: NEMA TC 13.
B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.
C. LFNC: UL 1660.
D. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.
2.3 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2. Hoffman,
3. Square D; Schneider Electric.
B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down
straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
B. Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
C. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
D. Cast -Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB I, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
E. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous -hinge cover with flush latch, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
F. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized -steel box with removable interior panel and removable front,
finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
6 2006 Chapman Harvey Archifccts, Inc...
unawhoraca Duplication prohibhca RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-2
November MUM.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: IMC.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric
Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:
I. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes raceways in time
following locations:
a. Loading dock.
b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet -handling units.
C. Mechanical rooms.
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric
Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT.
8. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in
damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA I for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except
where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install
horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."
E. Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
V 2006 Chapman Harvey Atchnecrs. Inc.
unnmhorimd ouphea6011 probibil d RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-3
Naactnher 28,2006
F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
[-I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where
at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.
3. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or 1MC before rising above
the floor.
Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect
conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than
200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
K. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install as follows:
l . 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet.
2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.
3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless
Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations
at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.
L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed
sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover
plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the
following points:
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.
Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
M. Expansion -Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where
environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight -run length that exceeds 25
feet.
Install expansion joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity
of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.
C. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F
temperature change.
d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.
Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length
of straight run per deg F of temperature change.
Install each expansion joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according
to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.
®2006 Chupman Harvry Architects, btn.
Unnuthoracd Duplication prohibited RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-4 ;---
Novcmbcr 28, 2006
N. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of' flexible conduit for recessed and
semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for
transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
O. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and
install box flush with surface of wall.
P. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
Q. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct -Buried Conduit:
I. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom
as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of
conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as
temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide
maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished
grade,.make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal
compaction as specified in Division.' Section "Earthwork."
4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances
through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub -up ducts throughout the
length of the elbow.
5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at
building entrances through the floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling
with 3 inches of concrete.
b. For stub -ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit
horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install
insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct -buried conduits,
placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original
fire -resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in
Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems."
END OF SECTION 16130
1, 2M Chopm a Hervey Archdale, Inc.
Uoamhorind Duplication prohibited RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16130-5
November 28, 2006
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I . Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFC1, and associated device plates.
2. Snap switches and wall -box dimmers.
3. Communications outlets.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.
C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label
warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers'
names are used in other Part 2 articles:
I . Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R,
and UL 495.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
C,20060Oapman Harvey Archimcb, Inc.
Umudwrzcd Duplication prohibocd WIRING DEVICES 16140-1
November 28. AtIG
a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).
b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).
2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Straight blade, feed -through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6,
UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; GF20.
b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.
2.4 SNAP SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way).
b. Hubbell; CS 1221 (single pole), CS 1222 (two pole), CS 1223 (three way), CS 1224 (four
way).
C. Key -Operated, Single -Pole, Double -Throw, Momentary Contact, Center -Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A;
for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory -supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 1995L.
b. Hubbell; HBL1557L.
2.5 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
I. ' Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- thick, satin -finished stainless steel.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring -loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled
for use in "wet locations."
B. Wet -Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather -resistant, die-
cast aluminum with lockable cover.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.
c
02006Chapman Hervey Archilects. Inc.
Unauthorized Duplication prohibited WIRING DEVICES 16140-2 -
November 28, 2006
I. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White, unless otherwise indicated or
required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
I . Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials
over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against
outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint,
and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the
joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until ,just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring
or nicking of solid wire ar cutting strands from -stranded wire.
3. T ue length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300,
without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
C. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that
they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible
moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding -head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor
tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3l4 of the way around terminal screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.
7, When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused temninal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device
mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal -to -metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
:1
C. 2006 Cbapmao Harvey Ardim.1s, Inc.
UnaWbanaca Dupbca0aa prohibdca WIRING DEVICES 16140-3
November 28, 2005
Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles
to the right.
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra -deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes
when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Dimmers:
I. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.
2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.
3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers'
device listing conditions in the written instructions.
H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with
grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adiacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or
engraved machine printing with black -filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or
tags inside outlet boxes.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or
illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 443.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker,
poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct
circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as specified
above.
END OF SECTION 16140
020%Chapman Narvcv Amhitems, Inc. I
unauthonzed Duplication prohibited WIRING DEVICES 16140-4 III
Nnvcmbcr 26, 2006
SECTION 16145 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:
I. Time switches.
2. Outdoor photoelectric switches.
3. Lighting contactors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality -control test reports.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 TIME SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Intermatic, Inc.
2. Lightolier Controls; a Genlyte Company,
3. Square D; Schneider Electric.
4. TORK.
5. Touch -Plate, Inc.
6. Watt Stopper (The).
B. Electronic Time Switches: Electronic, solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display;
complying with UL 917.
1. Contact Configuration: SPST.
2. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac.
3. Program: 8 on -off set points on a 24-hour schedule.
4. Program: 2 on -off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each day of
the week.
5. Programs: 4 channels; each channel shall be individually programmable with 8 on -off set points
on a 24-hour schedule.
C2 W6 Chapman Harvey Atchitcas, Inc.
Unaulhmrmd Dupbcauon pmhibned LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
16145-1
November 29, 2006
6. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on -off function of a
program on selected channels.
7. Astronomic Time: All channels.
8. Battery Backup: For schedules and time clock.
2.2 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
I . ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co.
2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Products.
3. GE Industrial Systems; Total Lighting Control.
4. Square D; Schneider Electric.
5. TORK.
6. Touch-Platc, Inc.
7. Watt Stopper (The).
B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination type with nonfused disconnect,
complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including
tungsten filament, inductive, and high -inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic
distortion of normal load current).
2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of
installation.
3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.
4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA type
specified for the enclosure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION
A. lnstall and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do
not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
B. When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in
adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than
normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION
A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure -borne
vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory -installed vibration isolators.
3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size
shall be 1/2 inch.
�.
Q 2006 Chapman Homy Architects, Inc.
Unauthorized Duplication prohibited LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145-2
NovcmAcr 2K. M16
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power -limited and nonpower-limited
conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull,
and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets, and equipment enclosures.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification."
1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.
B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
I. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust
and test for compliance with requirements.
2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.
B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.
END OF SECTION 16145
t'• 2006 Chapman Harvey Arehneeu, Is-
UnaulhonzcdUupliwom,prnhihocd LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
16145-3
Novcmbcr 29, 2006
SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l . Nonfusible switches.
2. Enclosures.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated.
Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features,
performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
I . Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective
devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
6. Include time -current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their
installation requirements.
E. Field quality -control reports.
I . Test procedures used.
A; 2006 Cimpmm, Hnmep Archnwc , Inc
-.3 Wiamhnraeauup0caomnpwhibnea ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410-1
November 28. 2006
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
F. Manufacturer's field service report.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division I Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
I. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit
breakers.
2. Time -current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective
device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices,
components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches
and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions
unless otherwise indicated:
1, Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.6 COORDINATION
I
i
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served 1
and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment
access doors and panels. t
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
C) 2006 Chopman Horvcy Arehircm, Inc.
unamhori-dUnphomiooprohibilcd ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410-2 �....
Nnvonbo 2b, 2006
l . Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer K Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated,
lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
C. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for
copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
2.2 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB I, NEMA KS I, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply
with environmental conditions at installed location.
I . Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaceslo-receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install individual wall -mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary
blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
D. Install fuses in fusible devices.
E. Comply with NECA I.
�--� f'. ZODb Chapmm� Narvcy Archimns, bu,
Utmullmrind Duplication prubibhed
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16410-3
�s
Nmembcr 28, 2006
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
I. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated -plastic nameplate.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance
Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a, Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after
Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker.
Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
C. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration
record for device.
4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and
circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken, and observations after remedial action.
END OF SECTION 16410
® 2006 Choptnon Harvey Architects, Inc.
Unauthoriud Duplication prohibited ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16410-4
NDVcinbcr 2k,2006
SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS
PART] -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch -circuit. panelboards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings.
2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective
devices and auxiliary components.
7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
8. Include time -current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device
included in panelboards.
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices,
accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems,"
D. Field quality -control reports.
E. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.
F. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
C,2 W6 Chapman Harvey Arclurcm, Inc.
l
UaamhonzeJ Duphcauon prabibacd
PANELBOARDS
16442-1
November 28, 2006
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface -mounted cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R,
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface -mounted fronts, match box
dimensions; for flush -mounted fronts, overlap box.
3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim
cover.
4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.
C. Incoming Mains Location: Bottom.
D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.
3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type.
4. Feed -Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at
opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at
same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one or more
main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required
for future installation of devices.
H. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series -connected system with integral or remote
upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable
upstream and branch devices, and listed and labeled for series -connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL.
0 2006 Chapman Harvey Atehiteets, Inc.
unauthorized Duplication prohibited PANELBOARDS 16442-2
N— mbcr U. 2006
1. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current
available at terminals.
2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C. Doors: Secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
D. Mains: Circuit breaker.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt -on
circuit breakers.
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt -on
circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive -locking device requires mechanical
release for removal.
G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH -CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch -circuit type.
C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
l . Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4200(,Chapman Nnrvq• Archilccis. Im.
i
Ulmulimriccd Dupbcauon probibilcA PANELBOARDS 16442-3
Novcmbct 28. 2006
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
5.
B. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
I. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads, and
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -
breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Molded -Case Circuit -Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.
C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high -intensity discharge (HID)
lighting circuits.
2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard.
Include relay and meter test plugs suitable -for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with
fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
E. Instal! overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
l . Set field -adjustable, circuit -breaker trip ranges.
F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
H. Comply with NECA 1.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs
complying with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification,"
02006 Clutpman Hervey Architects, Inc. j
Unauthorized Duplication prohibited PANELBOARDS 16442-4 1
Nowinbcr 26, 2006
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room designations.
Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten
directories are not acceptable.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for
identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate
complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
I. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and
control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance
Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Con-ect malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and
that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and
observations after remedial action.
END OF SECTION 16442
V 2006 Cbapion H.—y Arc mem, Inc.
L.. v
U-011'a rccd Uupliwuou probibded
PANELBOARDS
16442-5
--4
Nnvcn,bcr 26,2W6
SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
2. Emergency lighting units.
3. Exit signs.
4. Lighting fixture supports.
5. Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures.
B. See Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall -box dimmers for incandescent lamps.
C. See Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time
switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on
features, accessories, finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights,
methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer -controlled fixtures, signed by
product manufacturer.
D. Field quality -control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified in the `Lighting Fixture Schedule".
t.
t
C 2006 Chopomn 11mcY Archncc". Inc.
Unaulhoracd Duplication prohibited INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511-1
November 26, 2006
2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.
C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5
and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.
E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and
sagging.
G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating
conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames,
lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in
operating position.
H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
I. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and
other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is indicated.
b. UV stabilized.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Air -Handling Fluorescent Fixtures: For use with plenum ceiling for air return and heat extraction and for
attaching an air -diffuser -boot assembly specified in Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and
Grilles."
1. Air Supply Units: Slots in one or both side trims join with air -diffuser -boot assemblies.
2. Heat Removal Units: Air path leads through lamp cavity.
3. Combination Heat Removal and Air Supply Unit: Heat is removed through lamp cavity at both
ends of the fixture door with air supply same as for air supply units.
4. Dampers: Operable from outside fixture for control of return -air volume.
5. Static Fixture: Air supply slots are blanked off, and fixture appearance matches active units.
2.3 BALLASTS
A. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11; instant -start type, unless
otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for
full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated.
® 2006 Cbapntnn Ha y Ambitem, Inc. t..
Un2uOmnmd ouplimon preblboea INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511-2
Novcmbcr 2h, 20tn,
Sound Rating: A.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
BF: 0.85 or higher.
Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
B. Electromagnetic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high -
power factor, Class P, and having automatic -reset thermal protection.
Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
C. Ballasts for Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Electromagnetic
type designed for use with indicated lamp types.
D. Ballasts for Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic programmed rapid -start type, complying with ANSI
C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output
unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:
I I .
Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit.
2.
Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
3.
Sound Rating: A.
4.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
5.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
6.
Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
7.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
I 8.
BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated.
J 9.
Power Factor: 0.99 or higher.
10.
Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on
-
electromagnetic and radio -frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
11.
Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum.
E. Intemal-Type Emergency Fluorescent Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery -inverter unit, factory
mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.
1.
Emergency Connection: Operate I fluorescent lamps) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens
each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery -inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.
2.
Night -Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously.
3.
Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering
ceiling space.
a. Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and
demonstrates unit operability.
b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;
bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant -current type with sealed power transfer relay.
F. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal -Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the
following features, unless otherwise indicated:
Ballast Circuit: Constant -wattage autotransformer or regulating high -power -factor type.
Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single -lamp ballasts.
E;
5,20060hapmmn Harvey Architects, Inc.
Umutborind Duplication prohibited INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511-3
Novemlxr 28, 2006
Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.
Open -circuit operation that will not reduce average life.
Low -Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy -encapsulated models designed to minimize
audible fixture noise.
G. Electronic Ballast for Metal -Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:
I. Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit.
2. Sound Rating: A.
3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 15 percent.
4. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less.
6. Power Factor: .90 or higher.
7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio -frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
8. Protection: Class P thermal cutout.
2.4 EXIT SIGNS
A. Internally Lighted Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size,
comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, 2 for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp life.
2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
2.5 EMERGFNCY LIGHTING UNIT :.
A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.
1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, lead -acid type.
2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to 80
percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage
approaches deep -discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from
battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.
4. Test Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and
demonstrates unit operability.
5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright
glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
2.6 LAMPS
A. Low -Mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test;
shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1.
B. T8 Rapid -Start low -mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Rated 32 W maximum, nominal length 48 inches, 2800
initial lumens (minimum), CRl 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000
hours, unless otherwise indicated.
C. T8 Rapid -Start low -mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches,
1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of
20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
0 2006 Chopmon Harvey Archucets, Inc.
Unauthoracd Duplication prohibited INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511-4
Nwa v kr 26, 2(*6
D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K,
average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated.
I . 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).
2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).
3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).
5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).
6. 55 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).
E. Metal -Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.
F. Pulse -Start, Metal -Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.
G. Ceramic, Pulse -Start, Metal -Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K.
2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints" for channel- and angle -
iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single -Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as
fixture.
C. Twin -Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture.
Finish same as fixture.
D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc -coated steel, 12 gage.
E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12
gage.
F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium -plated, threaded steel rod.
G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded
attachment, cord, and locking -type plug.
2.8 RETROFIT KITS FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Comply with UL 1598 listing requirements.
1. Reflector Kit: UL 1598, Type I. Suitable for two- to four -lamp, surface -mounted or recessed
lighting fixtures by improving reflectivity of fixture surfaces.
2. Ballast and Lamp Change Kit: UL 1598, Type 11. Suitable for changing existing ballast, lamps,
and sockets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture.
C. 2006 Chapman 11—cy Archimm, Inc.
Ummwhnrind D.FAmmiOU prnhibnod INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511-5
Nuvcmhcr 28,2006
B. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports.
C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem -Mounted, Single -Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin -stem hangers.
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for
each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
D. Air -Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.
E. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.
F. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer
from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.
B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting
results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.
END OF SECTION 16511
® 2006 Chapman HaNcy Architccts. Inc.
unauthorized Duphceoun prohibited INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511-6
I
Nmcmbcr 2h. 2006
SECTION 16521 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts.
2. Poles and accessories.
B. See Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces
of buildings.
1.2 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION
A. Dead Ludo. Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports and supporting structure,
applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.
B. Ice Load: Load of 3 Ibf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4,
C. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-
4.
1. Wind speed for calculating wind load for poles exceeding 50 feet in height is 110 mph.
2. Wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet or less in height is 110 mph.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit
designation. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include anchor -bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
5,2006 Chapman Howey Archneclt, Inc.
Unaofficn cd Nphwliau prohibited
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16521-1
November 28, iate
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In Exterior Lighting Device Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists,
the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an
NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.
C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp comers and edges.
D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion -resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support
to prevent warping and sagging.
E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light -tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use.
Provide filterfbreather for enclosed luminaires.
F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating
conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames,
lenses, diffusers, and other components :from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in
operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect
ballast when door opens.
G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.
H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV
radiation.
1. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to
indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.
J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging -resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses
and refractors in luminaire doors.
L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory -assembled and -tested luminairc
before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.
M. Factory-Applierl Finish for Steel Luminaires: Color as selected by Architect. Comply with NAAMM's
"Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
tC, 2006 Chapman Harvcv Architccls, Inc.
Unauthorized Duplication prohibilcd EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521-2
N"vcmlx'r 24.2U01.
N. Factory -Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Color shall be dark bronze. Comply with NAAMM's
"Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
l designating finishes.
2.3 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS
I A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.
{ B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory set to turn
light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15-second minimum time delay. Relay shall have
! directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources from causing false turnoff.
1. Relay with locking -type receptacle shall comply with NEMA C136.10.
2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on -off set points.
2.4 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS
A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open -circuit operation without reduction average
life. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ballast Circuit: Constant -wattage autotransformer or regulating high -power -factor type.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F.
3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.
4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current ratings as
recommended by ballast manufacturer.
2.5 HID LAMPS
A. Metal -Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.
B. Pulse -Start, Metal -Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.
C. Ceramic, Pulse -Start, Metal -Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K.
2.6 POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4.
1. Wind -Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure,
permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in Part I "Structural
Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article, with a gust factor of 1.3.
2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and
brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection
strength analysis.
B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use
stainless -steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion -resistant items compatible with support
components.
t=:-q 6` 2006 Chapman Ha—Y Arclululs. h¢.
U"ainhuraca ouph000n prohilmcd EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521-3
Numnlicr 28, 2006
1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.
2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication,
unless stainless -steel items are indicated.
3. Anchor -Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.
D. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole -base flange. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
E. Power -Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural steel
complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M; and
with top -plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and strength required to support pole,
luminaire, and accessories.
F. Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, according to AASHTO LTS-4.
2.7 STEEL POLES
A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig; 1-piece
construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall.
1. Shape: Square, tapered.
2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway support.
B. Steel Mast Arms: Single -arm type, continuously welded to pole attachment plate. Material and finish
same as pole.
C. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, cantilever, without underbrace.
1. Adapter fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with galvanized -steel bolts.
2. Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.
3. Match pole material and finish.
D. Pole -Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and securely
fastened to pole top.
E. Steps: Fixed steel, with nonslip treads, positioned for 15-inch vertical spacing, alternating on opposite
sides of pole; first step at elevation 10 feet above finished grade.
F. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in
Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of
type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.
G. Cable Support Grip: Wire -mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable and rated
for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor.
H. Prime -Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime -coat finish ready for field painting.
1. Galvanized Finish: After fabrication, hot -dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M.
J. Factory -Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Color shall be as selected by
Architect.
02006 Chapman Harvey Architects, ha.
unoutharizcd Duplication prohibited EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521-4 1
Nomnkr 26. 2006
2.8 ALUMINUM POLES
A. Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063-T6 with access
handhole in pole wall.
B. Pole -Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and securely
fastened to pole top.
C. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in
Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of
type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.
D. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, with pole and adapter fittings of cast aluminum. Adapter fitting
welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with stainless -steel bolts.
1. Tapered oval cross section, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.
2. Finish: Same as pole.
E. Prime -Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime -coat finish ready for field painting.
F. Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMA.Vs "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products"`ior recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Color shall be dark bronze.
2.9 POLE ACCESSORIES
A. Duplex Receptacle: 120 V, 20 A in a weatherproof assembly complying with Division 16 Section
"Wiring Devices" for ground -fault circuit -interrupter type.
1. Recessed, 12 inches above finished grade.
2. Nonmetallic polycarbonate plastic or reinforced fiberglass cover, that when mounted results in
NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure.
3. With cord opening.
4. With lockable hasp and latch that complies with OSHA lockout and tag -out requirements.
B. Minimum 1800-W transformer, protected by replaceable fuses, mounted behind access cover.
C. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and nuts.
Finish same as pole.
D. Transformer Type Base: Same material and color as pole. Coordinate dimensions to suit pole's base
flange and accept ballast(s).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
A. Install lamps in each luminaire.
B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.
1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application
and approved by manufacturer.
' 4, 2006 Chapman Harvey Ardumas. Inc.
--' Unaurhmmf Unphcarion prohi6ncd
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16521-5
November 26, 2006
C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.
3.2 POLE INSTALLATION
A. Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting
provisions on the pole.
B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and
underground features, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:
I. Fire Hydrants and Stone Drainage Piping: 60 inches.
2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet.
3. Trees: 15 feet.
C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt templates furnished by pole
manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Division 3
Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
D. Foundation -Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level
recommended by pole manufacturer.
1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and
approved by manufacturer.
2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly
packed to fill space.
3. Install base covers, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to drain
condensation from interior of pole.
E. Embedded Poles with Tamped Earth Backfill: Set poles to depth below finished grade indicated on
Drawings, but not less than one -sixth of pole height.
1. Dig holes large enough to permit use of tampers in the full depth of hole.
2. Backfill in 6-inch layers and thoroughly tamp each layer so compaction of backfill is equal to or
greater than that of undisturbed earth.
F. Embedded Poles with Concrete Backfill: Set poles in augered holes to depth below finished grade
indicated on Drawings, but not less than one -sixth of pole height.
1. Make holes 6 inches in diameter larger than pole diameter,
2. Fill augered hole around pole with air -entrained concrete having a minimum compressive strength
of 3000 psi at 28 days, and finish in a dome above finished grade.
3. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through concrete dome. Arrange
to drain condensation from interior of pole.
4. Cure concrete a minimum of 72 hours before performing work on pole.
G. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete Paved Areas: Install poles with minimum of 6-inch- wide,
unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of adjacent concrete slab. Fill unpaved
ring with pea gravel to a level 1 inch below top of concrete slab.
H. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).
C 2006 Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc.
Unaudiorimd Duplication prohibited EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521-6
November U.2006
3.3 CORROSION PREVENTION
A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal,
protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.
B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes." In concrete foundations, wrap
conduit with I1.010-inch- thick, pipe -wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding system.
B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and
Bonding."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole.
2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector.
3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.
END OF SECTION 16521
V 2006 Chapman Homy Ardutccts, Inc.
U—itharnzed Uupheotimt probibhcd
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16521-7
W—mim, 26, 2tK)6
SECTION 16526 - SPORTS LIGHTING
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes lighting for the following outdoor sports venues, specified primarily by
illumination performance:
I . Little League Baseball Fields.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for multipole lighting relays and contactors.
I.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CV: Coefficient of variation; a statistical measure of the weighted average of all relevant illumination
values for the playing area, expressed as the ratio of the standard deviation for all illuminance values to
the mean illuminance value.
B. Delegated -Design Submittals: Documents, including drawings, calculations, and material and product
specifications prepared as a responsibility of Contractor to obtain acceptance by Engineer prior to
bidding.
C. Horizontal Illuminance: Measurement in foot-candles, on a horizontal surface 36 inches above ground,
unless otherwise indicated.
D. LLD: Lamp lumen depreciation.
E. LLF: Light loss factor.
F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.
G. Target Illuminance: Average maintained illuminance level, calculated by multiplying initial illuminance
by LLF.
H. UG: Uniformity gradient; the rate of change of illuminance on the playing field, expressed as a ratio
between the ilhuninances of adjacent measuring points on a uniforni grid.
1. Vertical Illuminance: Measurement in fool -candles, in four directions on a vertical surface, at an
elevation coinciding with plane height of horizontal measurements.
AV� 2W6 Chapman Harvey ArWWecrs. luc.
Duanlh.mcd Duphcown prWib.wd
SPORTS LIGHTING
16526-1
Navcntbcr 28, 2006
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS (REQUIRED MINIMUM STANDARDS)
A. Design and installation must comply with 2006 Little League Baseball Lighting Standards and Safety
Audit.
B. Illumination Quantity
1. There shall be a maintained average quantity of 50 horizontal footcandles on the infield,
maintained average quantity of 30 footcandles in the outfield. Design calculations to arrive at
maintained light levels shall include a LLF of .7 and must include adjustments for actual tilt
factor.
2. There shall also be additional calculations for the illumination of the warm-up areas between the
fields. There shall be a maintained average of 20 footcandles with a maximum max to min ratio of
3:1.
C. Illumination Quality
1. The quality of the lighting shall be determined on a basis of uniformity and smoothness.
a. Uniformity of the lighting shall be such that on the infield, the maximum to minimum
footcandle measurement shall not be greater than 2:1. For the outfield measurement, the
maximum to minimum footcandle measurement shall not be greater than 2.5:1.
b, Over the entire area of the infield and outfield the change in the quantity of horizontal
footcandles should not occur at a rate greater than 10% per 10 ft., except for the outside
perimeter readings which may change at a greater rate.
C. CV uniformity ratios for each lighted area equal to or less than those listed in IESNA RP-6
for the indicated class of play.
d. UG levels within each lighted area and between adjacent lighted areas equal to or less than
those listed in IESNA RP-6 for the indicated speed of sport.
D. Illumination Calculations: Computer -analyzed point by point method.
1. Grid Pattern Dimensions: 20 ft, x 20 ft.
2. Initial Lumens per Lamp: 155,000 lumens
3. LLF:.7
4. Luminaire Mounting Height: 60 ft above finished grade.
E. Aiming Angles:
1. Light fixtures which are set back from the foul lines between home plate to third base and between
home plate and first base shall be mounted at a height above the playing surface such that a line
from the lighting fixture to the point on the field where it's maximum intensity is aimed is a line
that is at least 25 degrees below horizontal.
2. Light fixtures positioned beyond the outfield fence or along the foul line beyond third base and
first base shall be mounted at a height with a minimum aiming angle of 25 degrees below
horizontal for fixtures aimed toward the infield and 21 degrees for fixtures aimed across the
outfield.
0 2006 Chapman Hawcy Arclntcctat, ha.
Unautlwriud Duplication prohibited SPORTS LIGHTING 16526-2
No-mL., 2h. 2006
r � 1
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting product; include the following:
I. Lamp life, output, and energy -efficiency data. Energy data shall comply with IESNA LM-47.
2. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with lamps, ballasts,
and accessories.
a. Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation
under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient
Lighting Products.
B. Delegated -Design Submittals: The following documents, signed and sealed by a qualified lighting
manufacturer shall be submitted to the engineer 5 days prior to bid date:
I . Design calculations for the following:
a. Target illuminance.
b. Point calculations of horizontal and vertical illuminance, CV, and UG at minimum grid
size and area.
C. Aiming diagrams showing aiming alignment and NEMA Distribution for each fixture.
d. Total connected and estimated peak -demand electrical load, in kilowatts, of lighting
system.
C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that support structures, including brackets,
arms, appurtenances, bases, anchorages, and foundations, comply with requirements.
D. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
E. Field quality -control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sports lighting system components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
installation of units required for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 100 miles of Project site, a
service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.
I . Manufacturer's responsibilities include fabricating sports lighting.
C. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are
accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting
Products.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
f (', 2006 Chapman Harvey A¢inmcis. Im.
u,mmlmrind Dupimmmn p.lsibimd SPORTS LIGHTING 16526-3
t,
i'
November 28, 2006
1.7 WARRANTY 1
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of luminaires, lamps, and luminaire alignment products and to correct misalignment that
occurs subsequent to successful acceptance tests. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail
damage, vandalism, abuse, and unauthorized repairs and alterations from special warranty coverage.
1. Luminaire Warranty: Luminaire and luminaire assembly (excluding fuses and lamps) shall be free
from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 25 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
2. Lamp Warranty:
a. Replace lamps and fuses that fail within 24 months from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Alignment Warranty: Accuracy of alignment of luminaires shall remain within specified
illuminance uniformity ratios for a period of five years from date of successful completion of
acceptance tests.
a. Realign luminaires that become misaligned during the warranty period.
b. Replace alignment products that fail within the warranty period.
C. Verify successful realignment of luminaires by retesting as specified in Part 3 "Field
Quality Control" Article.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMINAIRES, LAMPS, AND BALLASTS
A. Luminaires: Day-Brite Pro -Max 2 with horizontal lamp mounting or an approved equal from one of the
following manufacturer's: Universal Sports Lighting, Musco or General Electric.
1. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under
operating conditions, and arranged to permit relamping without using tools. Arrange doors,
frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent their accidental falling during relamping and
when secured in operating position. Door shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lens.
2. Exposed Hardware: Stainless -steel latches, fasteners, and hinges.
3. Spill -Light Control Devices: Internal louvers and external baffles furnished by manufacturer and
designed for secure attachment to specific luminaire.
B. Ballast Mounting: Grouped in cabinets, remote on pole that supports associated luminaries.
C. Lamp: The approved lamp for Little League is a 1500 watt metal halide. Lamps must have an ANSI code.
- M48PC-1500/13U. Phillips, Sylvania and General Electric are the only approved manufacturers.
2.2 SUPPORT STRUCTURES
A. Support -Structure Wind -Load Strength: Poles and other support structures, brackets, arms,
appurtenances, bases, anchorages, and foundations shall comply with AASHTO LTS-4 and shall be
certified by manufacturers to withstand steady winds up to 100 mph with a gust factor of 1.3 without
permanent deflection or whipping.
B. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances:
A 2006 Chapman Homey Architects, file.
Unauthorized Duplication prohibited SPORTS LIGHTING 16526-4
Nnvembn 25, 2006
1. Corrosion resistant, compatible with support components, and shall not cause galvanic action at
contact points.
a. Steel Components: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, complying with
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
b. Mounting Hardware Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized, complying with
1 ASTM A 153/A 153M.
C. Poles: Direct Buried Concrete Poles
2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION
A. Wiring Method for Feeders, Subfeeders, Branch Circuits, and Control Wiring: Underground nonmetallic
raceway; No. 10 AWG minimum conductor size for power wiring.
B. Sports Lighting Electrical Panels: NEMA 250, Type with hinged doors fitted with padlock hasps. Panels
for each pole are to mounted on the pole of the luminaries it serve and have a main circuit breaker to
serve as a disconnect for that pole. Mount panels with the bottom at a minimum of 8'-0" a.f.g.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Use web fabric slings (not chain or cable) to raise and set structural members.
B. Install poles and other structural units level, plumb, and square.
C. Except for embedded structural members, grout void between pole base and foundation. Use
nonshrinking or expanding concrete grout firmly packed in entire void space. Use a short piece of 1/2-
inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of
pole. Nonshrink grout is specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."
D. Install lamps in each luminaire and fasten luminaire to structural supports.
I. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application
and approved by manufacturer.
E. Baffles and Louvers for Spill -Light Correction: Install on luminaires with fasteners provided by
manufacturer. Install and adjust to correct out -of -limit spill -light and glare measurements.
F. Install ballast housings in cabinets mounted on support structure at least 10 feet above finished grade.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field duality -control tests, inspections, and analysis according to IESNA RP-6 and
IESNA LM-5, where applicable, and prepare test reports:
1. After installing sports lighting system and after electrical circuits have been energized, perform
proof -of -performance field measurements and analysis for compliance with requirements.
S; 2006 Chapman Ilarvcp Arclrbccrs, Inc.
Unonlhonzed Duplication probibhcd SPORTS LIGHTING 16526-5
Nonmhcr 2H,2006
2. Playing and Other Designated Areas: Make field measurements at intersections of grids,
dimensioned and located as specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and as
described below.
a. Baseball. Take readings at 36" above finished grade. Measure at least 25 points of the
infield and 87 points of the outfield. Extend the grid 15 feel outside the foul lines,
extending to outfield boundary or fence.
Make field measurements at established test points in areas of concern for spill light and glare.
Perform analysis to demonstrate correlation of field measurements with specified illumination
quality and quantity values and corresponding computer -generated values that were submitted
with engineered design documents, and submit a report of the analysis. For computer -generated
values, use manufacturer's lamp lumens that are adjusted to lamp age at time of field testing.
B. Correction of Illumination Deficiencies for Playing Areas: Make corrections to illumination quality or
quantity measured in field quality -control tests that vary from specified illumination criteria by plus or
minus 10 percent or more; add or replace luminaires, or change mounting height, revise aiming, or install
louvers, shields, or baffles. If luminaires are added or mounting height is changed, revise aiming and
recalculate and modify or replace support structures, if indicated. Retest as specified above after repairs,
adjustments, or replacements are made. Report results in writing.
C. Correction of Excessive Illumination in Spill -Light -Critical Areas: If measurements indicate that
specified limits for spill light are exceeded, make corrections to illumination quantity measured in field
quality -control tests that reduce levels to within specified maximum values. Replace luminaires, or
change mounting heights, revise aiming, or install louvers, shields, or baffles. If mounting height is
changed, revise aiming and recalculate and modify or replace support structures, if indicated. Retest as
specified above after repairs, adjust?cents, or replacements are made. Report results in writing.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain sports lighting. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 16526
V 2000 Chaptnan Harvey Architects, Me.
Unauthorized Duplication prohibited SPORTS LIGHTING 16526-6
. ... ...... .
F-7-7 L . . . ...........